HomeMy WebLinkAboutCONTRACT DOCUMENTS AZCOM
_ Dry Run Creek Interceptor
City of Waterloo, Iowa
City Contract No. 877
AECOM #60330823
Prepared For:
City of Waterloo
715 Mulberry Street
Waterloo, Iowa 50703
Prepared By:
AECOM
501 Sycamore Street, Suite 222
P.O. Box 1497
Waterloo, Iowa 50704-1497
September 2015
Dry Run Creek Interceptor
City of Waterloo, Iowa
City Contract No. 877
_. Prepared For:
City of Waterloo, Iowa
Prepared By:
AECOM
September 2015
' I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or
&fl�ESS1pN 't.,, under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed
Professional Engineer under the laws of the state of Iowa.
z.
HILLSMAN
12985
' ROSS A. HILLS AN, ME Date
1 License No. 12985
' OW A
'`Jff'ttttitt fill 111tttt'itt`\
My license renewal date is December 31, 2015.
Pages or sheets covered by this seal:
DRY RUN CREEK INTECEPTOR
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING AND NOTICE TO BIDDERS............................... NPH 1-4
2. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS............................................................................... IB 1-10
3. FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL ............................................................................. FB 1-5
4. SALES TAX EXEMPTION INFORMATION FORM ................................................. STE 1
5. FORM OF BID BOND ............................................................................................. BB 1
6. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS ............................................................................. NCA 1-2
7. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE .......................................................................... EO 1-2
8. TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS .......................................................................................... TVI 1
9. RESIDENT BIDDER AND NON-RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION................ RB 1-3
10. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM....................................................................... 1-9
11. POTENTIAL ITEMS OF WORK FOR MBENVBE PARTICIPATION ....................... M 1
SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM. .......................................... M 2
LETTER FORM FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES................................ M 3
MBENVBE SCOPE LETTER....................................................................... M 4
MBE AND/OR WBE PREBID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM............. M 5-6
12. WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESSES
ENTERPRISE CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE
CONTRACTOR'S GUIDE ........................................................................................ 1-4
13. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS .................................................... SBQ 1-2
_ 14. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS ........................................................................ GSP 1-3
15. SPECIAL PROVISIONS........................................................................................... SP 1
The Iowa Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge
Construction, Series of 2012, plus the applicable General Supplemental Specifications and the
2015 Iowa Statewide Urban Specifications, also known as SUDAS, shall apply to construction
work on this project. Any technicals not covered by SUDAS are listed below:
Section 01110 Summary of Work.......................................................01110-1 to 01110-3
Section 01295 Schedule of Values.....................................................01295-1 to 01295-2
Section 01340 Submittals...................................................................01340-1 to 01340-9
Section 01455 Testing Laboratory Services.......................................01455-1 to 01455-2
Section 01455A Testing........................................................................01455A-1 to 01455A-2
_ Section 01500 Temporary Construction Facilities and Utilities..........01500-1 to 01500-3
Section 01570 Protection of Environment..........................................01570-1 to 01570-3
Section 01600 Material and Equipment..............................................01600-1 to 01600-8
Section 01785 Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data...................01785-1 to 01785-14
Section 01788 Project Record Documents ........................................01788-1 to 01788-2
Section 02315 Structures Excavation and Backfilling ........................02315-1 to 02315-5
Section 02532 Submersible Sewage Pumping Station......................02532-1 to 02532-14
Section 03200 Concrete Reinforcement.............................................03200-1 to 03200-2
Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete ..............................................033-0-1 to 03300-12
Section 03603 Epoxy Grout................................................................03603-1 to 03603-1
Section 03604 Nonshrink Grout ......................................................... 03604-1
Section 03605 Patching Mortar.......................................................... 03605-1
Section 04810 Unit Masonry ..............................................................04810-1 to 04810-7
Section 05500 Metal Fabrications......................................................05500-1 to 05500-6
Section 06050 Rough and Finish Carpentry ......................................06050-1 to 06050-3
Section 06178 Prefabricated Wood Trusses......................................06178-1 to 06178-3
Section 07191 Masonry Water Repellents.........................................07191-1 to 07191-3
Section 07210 Building Insulation ......................................................07210-1 to 07210-3 _
Section 07311 Asphalt Shingles.........................................................07311-1 to 07311-5
Section 07460 Exterior Siding, Cladding, Flashing, Ventilation
and Roof Drainage .....................................................07460-1 to 07460-4
Section 07920 Joint Sealants.............................................................07920-1 to 07920-4 —
Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames.............................................08110-1 to 08110-4
Section 08710 Finish Hardware .........................................................08710-1 to 08710-6
Section 09540 Special Surface Panels ..............................................09540-1 to 09540-2 _
Section 09910 Painting.......................................................................09910-1 to 09910-8
Section 13404 Adjustable Speed Drive Equipment-Adjustable
Frequency...................................................................13404-1 to 13404-10
Section 13420 Flow Meter(Magnetic)................................................13420-1 to 13420-4
Section 13440 General Provisions for Instrumentation
and Controls...............................................................13440-1 to 13440-4
Section 13442 Instrument and Control Panel Construction ...............13442-1 to 13442-5 _
Section 13451 Cellular Telephone Automatic Dialer..........................13451-1 to 13451-2
Section 13453 Panel and Field Devices.............................................13453-1 to 13453-5
Section 13459 Field Electronic Transmitter........................................13459-1 to 13459-2
Section 15060 Pipe Hangers, Supports and Anchors........................15060-1 to 15060-8 —
Section 15198 Natural Gas Systems..................................................15198-1 to 15198-6
Section 15670 Terminal Air Conditioning Units..................................15670-1 to 15670-4
Section 15815 Metal Ductwork...........................................................15815-1 to 15815-5
Section 15825 HVAC Dampers..........................................................15825-1 to 15825-3
Section 15838 Power and Gravity Ventilators....................................15838-1 to 15838-5
Section 15850 Air Outlets and Inlets..................................................15850-1 to 15850-3
Section 15915 Automatic Temperature Control Systems ..................15915-1 to 15915-7 —
Section 15940 Automatic Control Sequences....................................15940-1 to 15940-2
Section 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing...............................15950-1 to 15950-3
Section 16050 Basic Materials and Methods.....................................16050-1 to 16050-15 _
Section 16060 Grounding...................................................................16060-1 to 16060-6
Section 16070 Supporting Devices ....................................................16070-1 to 16070-3
Section 16075 Electrical Identification................................................16075-1 to 16075-4
Section 16135 Underground Ducts and Manholes.............................16135-1 to 16135-6 —
Section 16210 Electric Service........................................................... 16210-1
Section 16231 Packaged Natural Gas Engine Generator Systems...16231-1 to 16231-9
Section 16415 Transfer Switches.......................................................16415-1 to 16415-5
Section 16443 Motor Control Centers................................................16443-1 to 16443-0
Section 16445 Hoisting Equipment....................................................16445-1 to 16445-7
16. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION.......................................... GS 1-13 —
17. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION............ SGS 1
18. FORM OF CONTRACT............................................................................................ C 1-3
19. FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND........................................................................ PFB 1-2
20. FORM OF PAYMENT BOND................................................................................... PB 1-2
APPENDIX
CHANGEORDER FORM ..................................................................................................... CO-1 _
SOILS REPORTS
NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING
On Proposed Plans, Specifications, Form of Contract,
- and Estimate of Cost and the
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
For the Taking of Construction Bids
For the
Dry Run Creek Interceptor
In the City of Waterloo, Iowa
RECEIVING OF BIDS
Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City
Hall of the said City on the _of , 2015, until 1:00 p.m. for the construction of the DRY
RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR, as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the
Office of the City Clerk.
OPENING OF BIDS
All proposals received will be opened in the First Floor Conference Room at City Hall in the City of
Waterloo, Iowa, on the_day of , 2015, at 1:00 p.m. , local time, and the proposals
will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed.
PUBLIC HEARING
Notice is hereby given that the Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans,
_ specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described
improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on , 2015, said hearing to be held in the Council Chambers
in the City Hall in said City. The proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for
said improvements heretofore prepared by AECOM for the City of Waterloo are now on file in the office of
the City Clerk for public examination, and any person interested therein may file written objection thereto
with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto with the City
Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto at the meeting above set
forth.
SCOPE OF WORK
This project consists of construction of the Dry Run Creek Interceptor along the San Marnan Corridor in
Waterloo, Iowa. The project includes a new pumping station to replace the Tower Park Station, a force
main to pump the flow to the east along San Marnan, and a gravity sewer system along San Marnan
flowing east to an existing line on Hess Road.
BEGINNING AND COMPLETION DATES
The work under the proposed contract shall be commenced within ten (10) working days after receipt of
"Notice to Proceed"and all items shall be completed on or before
NOTICE OF HEARING Page NPH-1 of 4 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
METHOD OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR
The Contractor will be paid against bi-monthly estimates in cash on the basis of ninety-five percent(95%)
of the work as it is completed and materials delivered and work approved. Final payment will be made
thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the Council. Before final payment is —
made, vouchers showing that all subcontractors and workmen and all persons furnishing materials have
been fully paid for such materials and labor will be required unless the City is satisfied that material, men
and laborers have been paid.
The Contractor is hereby notified that if the City does not have cash on hand to pay monthly pay
estimates, according to Chapter 384.57 of the Code of Iowa, payment may be made by anticipatory
warrants issued bearing a rate of interest not exceeding that permitted by Chapter 74A, Code of Iowa. _
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
Plans and Specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared
by the AECOM, which plans and specifications, and also the prior proceedings of the City Council
referring to and defining said proposed improvements are hereby made a part of this notice, and the
proposed contract by reference shall be executed in compliance therewith. _
Plans and Specifications are available from AECOM upon receipt of a $25.00 refundable deposit.
Deposits will be refunded if the plans are returned in usable condition (i.e. free of highlights, ink markings,
tears, stickers, water stains and soiling) to the Engineer's Office by the end of the 14 h consecutive daxr —
after the project has been awarded. No deposits will be refunded for any plans received after the 14
consecutive day, which includes plans returned via mail service. Plan holders are responsible for
ascertaining when the project has been awarded.
This deposit policy shall also apply to the prime contractor awarded the project for all plans and
specifications obtained and distributed by the prime contractor to their subcontractors and suppliers in
determining the prime contractor's bid, if the prime contractor wishes for their deposit to be returned.
Upon award of project, the prime contractor shall be supplied with the needed number of plans and
specifications at no additional cost. _
CONTRACT AWARD
A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest total bid.
The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities in
the bids submitted that might be in the best interest of the City. _
Bids may be held by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a period not to exceed thirty(30)days from the day of
the opening of bids for the purpose of reviewing the bids and investigating the qualifications of bidders,
prior to awarding the contract.
By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal
produced with the State of Iowa and preference will be given to local domestic labor in the construction of
the improvement.
PROPOSALS SUBMITTED
The bidder shall submit bids on the items listed in the proposal. The bidder shall clearly write or type the
unit bid price and the bid item extension (Unit Price x Estimated Qty) in numerals on the blanks provided.
Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price and extension, the City of Waterloo shall _
consider the unit bid price as being the valid unit bid price.
NOTICE OF HEARING Page NPH-2 of 4 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form
of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid
Price, Total Bid Price and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the
information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime
Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spreadsheet, the
TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of
Bid or Proposal.
BID SECURITY REQUIRED
All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa
bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit
union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond, (on the form furnished by the
City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid
submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder
will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case
-- the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bonds, his bid
security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be
signed by both the Bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported
by accompanying Power of Attorney.
PERFORMANCE & PAYMENT BONDS
The successful bidder will be required to furnish a "Performance Bond" and a "Payment Bond" within ten
(10) days after forms are presented to him in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the
contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council and shall
guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, and
` shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor and protect and save harmless the City
from claims of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor.
MAINTENANCE BOND
Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall
execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same
to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which
bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work.
CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM /SUBCONTRACTING
The program proposes numerical projections regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE)
and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers in the performance of
Contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa.
A goal of at least ten percent(10%)for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are
estimated at $50,000.00 or more. A goal of at least two percent (2%) for WBE participation on all City
funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. Any project funded in part or in
total with federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The
Prime Contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The
MBE/WBE subcontractors, suppliers or vendors must provide the Prime Contractor a reasonably
competitive price for the service being rendered or the Contractor is not required to accept their bid.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to
�— completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions,
NOTICE OF HEARING Page NPH-3 of 4 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
the contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of five hundred dollars ($500.00)
per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time.
Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working
days that the contractor does, or could have worked, from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be _
counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not
chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sunday if no work is done, and legal holidays.
Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list
items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders.
When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same
shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract
extends beyond the normal construction season for such work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the
following construction season. —
This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the
required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration.
PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Before the work is commenced on this contract, a conference shall be held for the purpose of discussing the contract. The conference shall be attended by the prime contractor, subcontractors and City Officials.
RESIDENT BIDDER/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER
Attention of bidders is called to compliance with the provisions of the Resident Bidder/Non-Resident
Bidder requirements.
Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder Certification or a
Non-Resident Bidder Certification in the form(s) herein provided.
SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES
Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certification to
purchase building materials or supplies in the performance of construction contracts let by the City of
Waterloo.
Published pursuant to the provisions of Division VI of Chapter 384 of the City Code of Iowa and upon —
order to the City Council of said Waterloo, Iowa, on the day of 2015.
CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA —
BY:
Suzy Schares
City Clerk —
NOTICE OF HEARING Page NPH-4 of 4 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS
Any explanation desired by a bidder regarding the meaning or interpretation of the Notice
to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., must be requested in writing and with sufficient
time allowed for a reply to reach bidders before submission of their bids. Any
— interpretation made will be in the form of an amendment of the Notice to Bidders, Plans,
Specifications, etc., and will be furnished to all prospective bidders. Its receipt by the
bidder must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Proposal Form or by letter or
_ telegram received before the time set for opening of bids. Oral explanations or
instructions given before the award of the contract will not be binding.
2. EXAMINATION OF PROPOSED WORK
Bidders should visit the site and take such other steps as may be reasonably necessary
to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions
which can affect the work or the cost thereof. Failure to do so will not relieve bidders
from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing
the work. The owner will assume no responsibility for any understanding or
representation concerning conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the
execution of the contract, unless included in the Notice to Bidders, the Specifications or
related documents.
3. PREPARATION OF BIDS
a. Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and must be
manually signed. If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each
erasure or change must be initialed by the person signing the bid.
The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of
the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number,
Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price, and Total
Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information
listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature
of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a
computer-generated spread- sheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if
applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of Bid or
Proposal.
b. The Bid Form may provide for submission of a price or prices for one or more
items, which may be lump sum bids, alternate prices, schedule items resulting in
a bid on a unit of construction or a combination thereof, etc. When the Bid Form
explicitly requires that the bidder bid on all items, failure to do so will disqualify
the bid. When submission of a price on all items is not required, bidders should
insert the words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is
submitted.
C. Unless called for, alternate bids will not be considered.
d. Modifications of bids already submitted will be considered if received at the office
designated in the Notice to Bidders by the time set for closing of bids.
Telegraphic modifications will be considered, but should not reveal the amount of
the original or revised bid.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page I13-1 of 10 City of Waterloo
` AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
e. In preparing his bid, the bidder shall specify the price, written legibly in ink or with —
the typewriter, at which he proposes to do each item of work. The unit price shall
be stated in figures in the blank space provided (i.e., $7.14). In items where unit
price is required, the total amount of each item shall be computed at the unit —
prices bid for the quantities given on the Bid Form and stated in figures in the
blank space provided.
If the bidder chooses to submit the unit prices, total bid price, and total bid on a
computer-generated spreadsheet, all numbers shall be easily legible.
f. Any changes or alterations made in the Bid Form, or any addition thereto, may _
cause the rejection of the bid. No bid will be considered which contains a clause
in which the contractor reserves the right to accept or reject a contract awarded
him by the city Council of Waterloo. Bids in which the unit prices are obviously
unbalanced may be rejected.
g. If the bidder does not qualify as a resident bidder, the nonresident bidder shall
specify on the project proposal whether any preference to resident bidders, —
including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type
of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or
laborers from that state or foreign country is in effect in the nonresident bidder's
state or country of domicile at the time of a bid submittal.
4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
a. A bid must be sealed in a separate envelope and marked to indicate its contents
and be accompanied by the bid security in a separate envelope. If forwarded by
mail, the two envelopes shall be placed in a third and mailed to the City
Clerk/Auditor. All bids must be filed with the City Clerk/Auditor of the City of —
Waterloo at his office in the City Hall before the time specified for closing bids.
b. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept sealed.
The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has
arrived, and no bid received thereafter will be considered; except that when a bid
arrives by mail after the time fixed for opening, but before the reading of all other
bids is completed, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the City of Waterloo,
Iowa, that the non-arrival on time was due solely to delay in the mails for which
the bidder was not responsible, such bid will be received and considered.
C. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be
received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense
subject to misinterpretation, shall made the bid so modified or amended, subject
to rejection. —
5. LATE BIDS AND MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWALS
Bids and modifications or withdrawals thereof received at the office designated in the —
Notice to Bidders after the exact time set for closing of bids will not be considered.
However, a modification which is received from an otherwise successful bidder, and
which makes the terms of the bid more favorable to the City of Waterloo, will be —
considered at any time it is received and may therefore be accepted. Bids may be
withdrawn by written or telegraphic request received from bidders prior to the time set for
closing of bids.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page IB-2 of 10 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
6. PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS
Bids will be publicly opened at that time and place set for opening in -:he Notice to
Bidders. Their content will be made public for the information of bidders and others
interested who may be present either in person or by representative.
7. BID SECURITY REQUIRED
All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check
— drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a
certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the
United States, or bid bond (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of
Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which
certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will
enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds,
and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish
the required bond, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon
liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the bidder and the
surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying
Power of Attorney.
8. COLLUSIVE AGREEMENTS
a. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Non-
Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he as not
colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regarc: to any bid
submitted.
b. Each bidder submitting a bid shall have each proposed subcontractor, if any,
execute and submit to the City Contract Compliance Officer by 5:00 P.M. the
business day following the day bids on this project are due, a Non-Collusion
Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he has not colluded with
any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. Before
executing any subcontract, the successful bidder shall submit the name of any
— proposed subcontractor for approval by the City.
9. MINORITY AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE SUBCONTRACTORS
a. CITY OF WATERLOO AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PRE-BID
CONTACT INFORMATION FORM
The City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Enterprise Pre-Bid
Contact Information Form shall be submitted with the Form of Bid or Proposal.
Failure to do so shall be grounds for the bid being rejected if subcontracting is
proposed by the prime contractor.
10. MBEIWBE CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM
PURPOSE
The purpose of the Contract Compliance Program (hereinafter called Program) is
to act as an impetus for increasing the participation of minority and women
disadvantaged business enterprise (MBE/WBE) in City awarded construction
contracts.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page IB-3 of 10 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
The Program does not propose to eliminate any bonafide contractor or
subcontractor from bidding on City contracts, but it will hopefully serve as a —
needed stimulus to help local MBE/WBE's grow and eventually become
mainstream contractors and subcontractors.
This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set-aside or
quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the
contractor to use MBE/WBE subcontractors.
This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their"good-
faith efforts" in using MBE/WBE subcontractors on City contracts estimated at
less than $50,000. —
The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and
maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private
sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE —
firms.
The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo
awarded construction contracts.
DEFINITIONS
Goals:
A flexible numerically expressed objective which contractors are required to
make "good-faith efforts." The key to the requirement is to make documented _
efforts. Goals are neither set-a-sides nor a device to achieve proportional
representation or equal results. Numerical goals do not create set-a-sides for
specific groups, nor are they designed to achieve proportional representation or
equal results. Rather, the goal-setting process in affirmative action planning is
used to target and measure the effectiveness of affirmative action efforts to
eradicate and prevent discrimination.
Quota:
A flat numerical requirement that the contractor is required to meet in order to
obtain the benefit or be in compliance. The numerical goal component of
affirmative action programs is not designed to be, nor may it properly or lawfully
be interpreted as, permitting unlawful preferential treatment and quotas with
respect to persons of any race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The
regulations at 41 CFR 60-2.12(a), 60-2.15 and 60-2.30, specifically prohibit —
discrimination and the use of goals as quotas. (U.S. Department of Labor)
Set-Aside:
An arrangement in which a particular contract is reserved for competition solely —
among minority and women business enterprises.
Contractor: _
As used in this document means contractor, subcontractor, supplier, vendor, and
professional service provider.
Minority Business Enterprise (MBE)Any business, which is at least 51%, owned by one or more minorities and
whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more
such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were
listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, —
2002
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page IB-4 of 10 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
Women Business Enterprise (WBE):
-- Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more women and whose
management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such
individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on
the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002
Minority:
Any person or persons who are considered as socially and economically
-- disadvantaged because of their identity as a group member without regard to
their individual qualities. The groups include: Black American, Hispanic
American, Native Americans, Eskimos, Aleuts, and Asian-Pacific Americans. 13
C.F.R. 124-1.1(c)(3)(ii)(1983).
Lowest Responsible Bidder:
Bidder who has offered the lowest bid and who has exhibited skill relative to the
type of work bid on, judgment, financial responsibility, and evidence of working
with the Affirmative Action Employment Program and the Contract Compliance
Program.
Broker:
One buying or selling for others on commission or other fee basis without
maintaining a warehouse or other similar inventory storage facility.
Mayor's Advisory Committee.-
Mayor's Advisory Committee for Minority, Female, and Disadvantaged Business
Enterprise.
Good Faith Efforts:
The successful bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the
lowest responsible bid. The obligation of the bidder is to make good faith efforts.
The bidder can demonstrate that it has done so by the following:
1. The Prime Contractor met the project goal - No Action necessary
2. If the Prime Contractor failed to meet the goal, they must submit
documentation of good faith efforts.
CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM SUBCONTRACTING
The program proposes numerical projections or goals regarding utilization of
Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as
subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo,
Iowa.
A goal of at least 10% for MBE participation on all City funded construction
projects that are estimated at$50,000 or more and projects under$50,000 where
applicable at the Contract Compliance Officer's discretion. There is at least 2%
WBE goal on City funded projects. Any project which is funded solely or in part
with Federal funds shall follow the respective agencies—contract compliance
program and goals. Any project which is funded solely or in part with State funds
shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The
City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Program is for City awarded construction
contracts only. The prime contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the
Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBENVBE subcontracts must
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page IB-5 of 10 City of Waterloo
" AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being
rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid.
Administrative Reconsideration:
As part of this reconsideration, the bidder will have the opportunity to provide
written documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made
adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The bidder will have the
opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative
Reconsideration Committee to discuss the issue of whether they made adequate
good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a
written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the —
basis for finding that the bidder did or did not meet the goal or make adequate
good faith efforts to do so.
Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: —
* Making portions of the work available for MBE/WBE subcontracting
* Evidence of negotiating with MBE/WBE firms —
* MBE/WBE quotes obtained and non-MBE/WBE quotes used
* Reasons agreements were not reached
* Follow-up after initial solicitations
* Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies and materials (at
competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc.
* Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor
The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each
item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall
program goals.
RESPONSIBILITIES
1. City of Waterloo
A. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the
City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations.
B. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a
current directory of certified firms. Certification of MBE/WBE/DBE
contractors is through the Iowa Department of Transportation and its
Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines —
prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be
recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo.
C. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available
a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE firms.D. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate
MBE/WBE firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening
date.
E. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE Letter(s) of —
Intent to Bid and within two (2) business days forward the complete list of
MBE/WBE bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime
contractors. —
Prime Contractors
In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this program, the prime
contractor must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE Contract
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page IB-6 of 10 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
Compliance Program. Good-faith efforts include, but are not limited to, the
following:
A. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO-3) to
appropriate MBENVBE (those certified in directory prepared by City
— Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven (7) working days prior to bid
date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A
minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made
and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses
offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo
MBENVBE Certification List). If less than three (3) are offering the
services to be subcontracted, then a contact is required for any that are
_ listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a
MBENVBE contact not on the City's MBENVBE list, attach a copy of the
MBENVBE/DBE Certifications from another government agency.
B. If a prime contract bidder is unable to identify MBENVBE firms to perform
portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be
contacted for assistance immediately.
C. Prime contract bidders may solicit MBENVBE proposals by telephone or
personal interviews, but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified
Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO-2).
D. If any MBENVBE business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract
award, documentation must accompany the "MBENVBE Business
Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form CCO-4 and CCO-
4A) on why the MBENVBE was not selected. These reasons could
include:
a. Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids may be required for
verification.
b. MBENVBE did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive.
c. Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the
MBENVBE business for a subcontract.
d. Prime contractor self performs work.
e. Any other reason relied on by prime.
The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each
item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall
program goals.
/L MBE/WBE Firms
A. MBENVBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of
Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses,
or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBENVBE Contractors list
as of July 1, 2002.
B. MBENVBE firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act
as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others.
C. Each MBENVBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects
with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid (Form CCO-5) to the City
Contract Compliance Officer seven (7)working days prior to bid opening,
listing specific items which the MBENVBE firm is interested in bidding. If
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page I13-7 of 10 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract
Compliance Officer seven (7)working days prior to bid opening, goals on
subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the
bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE in which the MBE/WBE promises not
to provide subcontracting quotations to other bidders/proposers are
prohibited.
NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS
A. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent
with the requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas
of employment and subcontracting. _
B. A bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a
failure to use certified MBE/WBE firms may be grounds for finding its bid
not responsible.
C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her —
recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing.
NOTICE TO PROCEED _
Notice to proceed on any project with goals will not be issued until City Contract
Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible bidder has used good-
faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive.
CONCLUSION
This program repeals or revises all sections of previous Waterloo Contract
Compliance Programs.
11. EMPLOYMENT AND BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY
To the greatest extent feasible, suppliers, subcontractors, and low income workers
owning businesses or living in the Waterloo area must be given priority in supplying
materials, bidding for subcontract work, or applying for employment by the contractor on
this project. Opportunities for training and for employment arising in connection with this
project, shall to the greatest extent feasible be made available to lower income persons
residing in the project area. The contract area is the City of Waterloo. —
The City of Waterloo will require the contractor to document his efforts in securing lower
income workers living in the project area and in purchasing supplies from, and awarding
subcontracts to, businesses owned by persons residing in the project area.
12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
Each bidder shall, upon request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, submit on the form
furnished for that purpose (a copy of which is included in the contract documents), a
statement of bidder's qualifications, his experience record in constructing the type of _
improvements embraced, and his organization and equipment available for the work
contemplated; and, when specifically requested, a detailed financial statement. The City
of Waterloo, Iowa, shall have the right to take such steps as it deems necessary to
determine the ability of the bidder to perform his obligations under the contract, and the --
bidder shall furnish the City of Waterloo, Iowa, all such information and data for this
purpose as it may request. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation
of the available evidence or information does not satisfy the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that _
the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page IB-8 of 10 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
13. AWARD OF CONTRACT
a. Award of contract will be made to that responsive and responsible bidder whose
bid, conforming to the Specifications, is most advantageous to the City of
Waterloo; price and other factors considered. The intention is to award the
contract at any time of opening bids, but the right is reserved to postpone such
action for a reasonable time, not exceeding thirty(30) days.
b. The City Council may, when in its interest, reject any or all bids or waive any
informality in bids received.
C. The bidder shall submit bids on all the items listed in the proposal and shall state
_ the unit bid price in words in the blank spaces provided beneath the item
description. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price in words
and listed numeral unit bid price, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid
price in words as being the valid unit bid price. A computer-generated
spreadsheet as herein provided shall also be acceptable. Proposals requiring
mathematical computations to determine unit prices or totals will be rejected. A
contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest total bid as
indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS.
d. When a contract for a public improvement is to be awarded to the lowest
responsive and responsible bidder, a resident bidder shall be allowed a
preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country if that
state or foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that
state or foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the
imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential
— treatment to bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country. The
preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state
or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. In the instance
of a resident labor force preference, a nonresident bidder shall apply the same
resident labor force preference to a public improvement in this state as would be
required in the construction of a public improvement by the state or foreign
country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident.
14. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT, BONDS, AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
._ a. Subsequent to the award and within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are
presented for signature, the successful bidder shall execute and deliver to the
City of Waterloo, Iowa, an agreement in the form included in the contract
documents in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may require.
b. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these
documents, the successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph
.., "a" above, furnish a surety bond and a payment bond in a penal sum not less
than the amount of the contract as awarded, as security for the faithful
performance of the contract and terms and conditions therein contained and shall
guarantee the prompt payment of all persons, firms, or corporations to whom the
contractor may become legally indebted for labor, materials, tools, equipment, or
services of any nature including utility and transportation services, employed or
used by him in performing the work. The bonds shall protect and save harmless
the City from claims and damages of any kind caused by the operations of the
contractor and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the contract
improvements for the period stated in the Notice of Hearing from and after
completion of said improvements and their acceptance by the City. Such bonds
shall be in the same form as that included in the contract documents and shall
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page IB-9 of 10 City of Waterloo
'� AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
bear the same date as, or a date subsequent to that of the agreement. The
current Power of Attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall '
be attached to such bonds.
C. The successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, _
furnish a certificate of insurance for approval in amounts of not less than the
amounts specified in the General Specifications for Construction, Section F. No.
4 "Liability Insurance," Pages 14 to 15 of 19 Pages. The certificate of insurance
shall be furnished in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo may require. _
The City of Waterloo shall be named as an "Additional Insured." The contractor
shall similarly submit his subcontractor's certificates of insurance in the amounts
for approval before each commences work. The contractor shall carry or require _
that there be Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all his employees and
those of his subcontractors engaged in work at the site, in accordance with State
Workmen's Compensation Laws.
d. The failure of the successful bidder to execute such agreement and to supply the
required bond or bonds within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are
presented for signature, or within such extended period as the City of Waterloo, _
Iowa, may grant, based upon reasons determined sufficient by the City of
Waterloo, Iowa, may either award the contract to the next lowest bidder or re-
advertise for bids, and may charge against the bidder the difference between the
amount of the bid in the amount for which a contract for the work is subsequently
executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of
the bid guaranty. If a more favorable bid is received by re-advertising, the
defaulting bidder shall have no claim against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a
refund.
15. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE
Attention of bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the
Resident Bidder/Non-Resident Bidder requirement.
Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder
Certification or a Non-Resident Bidder Certification in the form(s) herein provided.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page IB-10 of 10 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL
DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR
CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA
Honorable Mayor and City Council
Waterloo, Iowa
Gentlemen:
1. The undersigned, being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of a
Partnership consisting of the following partners: ,
having familiarized (himself) (themselves) (itself) with the existing conditions on the project area
affecting the cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and
Addenda (if any), as prepared by AECOM, now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall,
Waterloo, Iowa, hereby proposes to furnish all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials,
machinery, tools, appurtenances, equipment, and services, including utility and transportation
services required to construct and complete this DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR, all in
accordance with the above-listed documents and for the unit prices for work in place for the following
items and quantities:
DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR
Item Estimated Unit Total
No. Description Unit Quantity Price Price
1 Mobilization LS 1.0 $ $
2 Traffic Control LS 1.0 $ $
3 Clearing and Grubbing LS 1.0 $ $
4 Existing Pump Vault, Valve Vault and LS 1.0 $ $
Equalization Tank Removal
5 Import Fill for Lift Station Site CY 254.8 $ $
6 Import Fill for Trench Removals CY 5,800.0 $ $
7 Lift Station Wet Well and Valve Vault LS 1.0 $ $
8 Electrical Equipment Building LS 1.0 $ $
9 Site Electrical LS 1.0 $ $
10 Stand-By Generator LS 1.0 $ $
11 Metering Manhole LS 1.0 $ $
12 Air Release Manhole LS 1.0 $ $
13 Retaining Wall LS 1.0 $ $
14 Removal of Rapable Rock CY 5,800.0 $ $
15 Foundation Rock TON 82.0 $ $
FORM OF BID Page FB-1 of 5 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR
Item Estimated Unit Total
No. Description Unit Quantity Price Price
16 Trench Compaction Testing LS 1.0 $ $
17 Abandon and Plug 8-Inch Sanitary Sewer LF 215.0 $ $
18 Sanitary Sewer Force Main Testing LS 1.0 $ $
19 Cleaning, Inspection and Testing of Sanitary LS 1.0 $ $
Sewer Gravity Mains
20 24-Inch Sanitary Sewer Gravity Main -Open Cut LF 5,178.7 $ $
21 24-Inch Sanitary Sewer Gravity Main - LF 754.9 $ $
Directional Drilling
22 20-Inch Sanitary Sewer Gravity Main Ductile Iron LF 92.0 $ $
-Open Cut
23 18-Inch Sanitary Sewer Gravity Main - Open Cut LF 2,399.2 $ $
24 10-Inch Sanitary Sewer Force Main - Directional LF 524.0 $ $
Drilling
i
25 10-Inch Sanitary Sewer Force Main - Open Cut LF 1,958.0 $ $
26 8-Inch Sanitary Sewer Gravity Main -Open Cut LF 43.0 $ $
27 6-Inch Sanitary Sewer Gravity Main Ductile Iron - LF 15.0 $ $
Open Cut
28 30-Inch Steel Casing, With 18-Inch Sanitary LF 235.0 $ $
Sewer Gravity Main
29 20-Inch Steel Casing, With 10-Inch Sanitary LF 196.0 $ $
Sewer Force Main
30 Force Main Fittings LBS 655.0 $ $
31 48-Inch Manhole Replacement EA 2.0 $ $
32 72-Inch Manhole Replacement EA 1.0 $ $
33 48-Inch Manhole EA 28.0 $ $
24-Inch Circular Area Intake-SW-512, With
34 SW-604, Type 3B EA 1.0 $ $ _
35 Connection to Existing Sanitary Manhole EA 4.0 $ $
36 8-Inch Drop Connection EA 1.0 $ $
37 24-Inch RCP Storm Sewer LF 20.0 $ $
38 24-Inch RCP Apron EA 1.0 $ $
39 18-Inch RCP Storm Sewer LF 20.0 $ $
40 18-Inch RCP Apron EA 2.0 $ $
41 12-Inch RCP Storm Sewer LF 32.0 $ $
42 12-Inch RCP Apron EA 1.0 $ $
FORM OF BID Page FB-2 of 5 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR
Item Estimated Unit Total
No. Description Unit Quantity Price Price
43 Drain Tile Replacement LF 80.0 $ $
44 6-Inch PCC Pavement SY 477.0 $ $
45 8-Inch PCC Pavement SY 130.0 $ $
46 8-Inch HMA Pavement SY 71.0 $ $
47 Gravel Surfacing SY 198.0 $ $
48 Crushed Stone -Class "A" SY 477.0 $ $
49 Pavement Removal SY 201.0 $ $
50 Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching for Hydraulic AC 6.1 $ $
Seedin -Type 1 Seed Mix
51 Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching for Hydraulic AC 5.7 $ $
Seeding -Type 2 Seed Mix
52 Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching for Hydraulic AC 6.1 $ $
Seeding -Type 4 Seed Mix
53 Seeding, Fertilizing and Mulching for Hydraulic AC 5.7 $ $
Seeding -Type 5 Seed Mix
54 Erosion Stone SY 240.0 $ $
55 Silt Fence LF 6,700.0 $ $
56 Temporary Rolled Erosion Control Products SY 51,860.0 $ $
(RECP)
57 SWPPP Requirements LS 1.0 $ $
58 6-Foot Chain-Link Fence LF 233.0 $ $
59 24-Foot Chain-Link Gate EA 2.0 $ $
— TOTAL BID AMOUNT $ $
2. It is understood that the quantities set forth are approximate only and subject to variation and that the
unit bid price for the work done shall govern in the actual payment to Contractor.
3. In submitting this bid, the bidder understands that the right is reserved by the City of Waterloo, Iowa,
to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or
-- delivered to the undersigned within thirty(30)days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter
before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the
prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten (10) days
after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten (10) days after
"Notice to Proceed"is issued.
4. Security in the sum of Dollars
($ ) in the form of is submitted herewith
in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.
5. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor.
FORM OF BID Page FB-3 of 5 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
6. Attached hereto is a Resident Bidder Certification ( ), or Non-Resident Bidder Certification
( ). (Mark one.)
7. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request.
8. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s), which have performed an aggregate of $10,000.00 in
work for the City in the current calendar year, are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an
EOC, within ten (10)days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable.
9. The bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda:
Addendum No. Date
10. The bidder shall list the MBE/WBE subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the _.
City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Pre-bid Contact Information Form submitted with
this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s)
to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day r..
Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of All Subcontractor(s).
The Contractor shall submit information on subcontractors on "SUBCONTRACTOR REQUEST AND
APPROVAL" Form to be provided by City prior to approval of contract.
The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer
cannot be changed except for the following reasons:
1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors.
2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontracts.
11. The bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none"
or"NA".
12. The bidder has attached all applicable forms.
FORM OF BID Page FB-4 of 5 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
13. The Owner reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce quantities prior
to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations.
(Name of Bidder) (Date)
BY: Title
Official Address: (Including Zip Code):
I.R.S. No.
FORM OF BID Page FB-5 of 5 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA
WATERLOO ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT
715 Mulberry St. Waterloo, IA 50703 (319) 291-4312 Fax(319) 291-4262
ERIC THORSON,P.E. City Engineer
g 4
Mayor INFORMATION NEEDED
ERNEST G. FOR
CLARK
IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE
COUNCIL
MEMBERS CONTRACTOR NAME:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAVID
JONES ADDRESS:
Ward I
CAROLYN
COLE
Ward 2
(Check One) PRIME: SUBCONTRACTOR:
PATRICK
MORRISSEY
Ward 3 FEDERAL ID#:
QUENTIN PROJECT NAME:
HART
Ward 4
PROJECT CONTRACT NO.:
RON
WELPER
Wards DESCRIPTION OF WORK:
TOM
—. LIND ❑ Brickwork ❑ Landscaping
At-Large
❑ Carpentry ❑ Painting
STEVEN
SCHMITT ❑ Concrete ❑ Paving
At-Large
❑ Drywall-Plaster-Insulation ❑ Plumbing
❑ Electrical ❑ Roofing-Siding-Sheet Metal
❑ Excavation/Grading ❑ Windows
❑ Flooring ❑ Wrecking-Demolition
❑ Heavy Construction ❑ Other (Please Specify)
❑ Heating-Ventilating-Air Cond. ❑
WE'RE WORKING FOR YOU!
An Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer
SALES TAX EXEMPTION Page STE-1 of 1 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we,
as Principal, and
as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF WATERLOO , Iowa, hereinafter called
"OWNER." In the penal sum
Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which
sum will and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors,
_ jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that whereas the
Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated the day of
2015, for
NOW, THEREFORE,
(a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate,
(b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form
specified and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all
persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects
perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid,
Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly
understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event,
exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated.
By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in
liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide
the bond as provided in the specifications or by law.
The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its
bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may
accept such Bid or execute such contract; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such
extension.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety, have hereunto set their hands and seals, and
such of them as are corporations, have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these pres-
ents to be signed by their proper officers this day of A.D. 2015.
(Seal)
._ Principal
By
(Title)
(Seal)
Witness Surety
By
Witness Attorney-in-fact
BID BOND Page BB-1 of 1 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER
-- State of )
)ss
County of )
being first duly sworn, deposes and says that:
1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) , of
the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid;
2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all
pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid;
3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid;
4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives,
employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired,
connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a
—' collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been
submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner,
directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any
other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or,
to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other Bidder, or to
secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement any advantage
against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the Proposed Contract; and
5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any
collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its
agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant.
(Signed)
Title
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 2015.
Title
My commission expires
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS Page NCA-1 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR
State of )
ss:
County of ) —
being first duly sworn, deposes and says that:
1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) of '--
hereinafter referred to as the
"Subcontractor;"
2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the subcontractor's proposal
submitted by the subcontractor to
contract pertaining to the project
in
(City or County and State)
3. Such subcontractor's proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal; —
4. Neither the subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives,
employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired,
connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a
collusive or sham proposal in connection with such contract or to refrain from submitting a
proposal in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by
unlawful agreement or connivance with any other bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in
said subcontractor's proposal, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the price of prices
in said subcontractor's proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or
unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in _
the proposed contract; and
5. The price or prices quoted in the subcontractor's proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted
by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the bidder or any of
its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant.
(Signed) _
Title
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 12015.
Title
My commission expires —
NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS Page NCA-2 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE
(As provided in Executive Order No. 11246)
_ All contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers of goods and services doing business with the City
and value of said business equals or exceeds ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00) annually agree as
follows:
1. The contractors, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will not discriminate
against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, sex, national
origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap, political opinions or affiliations. The
contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will develop an Affirmative Action program to
ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without
regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or
physical disability, political opinions or affiliations. Such actions shall include but not be limited to
the following:
a. Employment
b. Upgrading
c. Demotion or Transfer
d. Recruitment and Advertising
e. Layoff or Termination
_._ f. Rates of Pay or Other Forms of Compensation
g. Selection for Training Including Apprenticeship
2. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will, in all solicitations or
advertisements for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for
employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status,
age, mental or physical disabilities, political opinion or affiliations.
3. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier or his/her collective bargaining representative
will send to each labor union or representative of workers which he/she has a collective bargaining
agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said labor union or workers'
representative of the contractor's commitment under this section.
4. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will comply with all
_ published rules, regulations, directives, and order of the City of Waterloo Affirmative Action
Program Contract Compliance Provisions.
5. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will furnish and file
compliance reports within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Affirmative Action
Officer. Said forms will elicit information as to the policies, procedures, patterns, and practices of
each subcontractor as well as the contractor himself/herself and said contractor, subcontractor,
vendor and supplier will permit access to his/her employment books, records and accounts to the
City's Affirmative Action Officer, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this
contract and with rules and regulations of the City's Affirmative Action Program—Contract
Compliance Provisions relative to Resolution No. 24664.
6. In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this contract
or with any of such rules, regulations and orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or
suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts in
accordance with procedures authorized by the City Council.
7. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will include, or
incorporate by reference, the provisions of the non-discrimination clause in every contract,
EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE Page EO-1 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations or orders of the City's
Affirmative Action Program, and will provide in every subcontract, or purchase order that said '
provisions will be binding upon each contractor, subcontractor, or supplier.
8. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to non-discrimination in _
employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated
against because of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or
physical disabilities.
(Signed)
(Appropriate Official)
(Title)
(Date)
EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE Page EO-2 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS
During the performance of this contract, the contractor (for itself), its assignees, and successors in
interest(hereinafter referred to as the"contractor") agrees as follows:
1. Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to non-
discrimination in Federally assisted programs of the DOT Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations,
Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations),
which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract.
2. Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract,
_ shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability in the
selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of
equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination
prohibited by section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract
covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations.
3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurement of Materials and Equipment: In all
solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be
= performed under a subcontract, including procurement of materials or leases of equipment, each
potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's
obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to non-discrimination on the grounds
of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability.
4. Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the
Regulations or directives issued pursuant there to, and shall allow access to its books, records,
accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Contracting
Authority, the Iowa DOT, or FHWA to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations,
orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive
possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify
to the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or the FHWA as appropriate, and shall set forth what
efforts it has made to obtain the information.
5. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the
nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or the
FHWA shall impose such contract sanctions as they may determine to be appropriate, including,
but not limited to:
a. Withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor
complies, and/or
b. Cancellation, termination, or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part.
6. Incorporation of Provisions: The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through
(6) in every subcontract, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment, unless
exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such
action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Contracting Authority, the Iowa
DOT, or the FHWA may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for
non-compliance: Provided, however, that, in the event of a contractor becomes involved in, or it
threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the
contractor may request the Contracting Authority or the Iowa DOT to enter into such litigation to
protect the interests of the Contracting Authority or the Iowa DOT; and, in addition, the contractor
may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United
States.
TITLE VI Page TVI-1 of 1 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER
RESIDENT BIDDER:
In accordance with Section 73A.21 of the Iowa Code, all non-federal-aid public improvement projects,
_ which include road construction, shall be performed by a qualified resident bidder. The resident bidder
has been further defined as follows:
Resident Bidder:
A person or entity authorized to transact business in this state and having a business for
at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement for the public improvement.
If another state or foreign country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the
more stringent definition is applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country.
The contractor shall provide the City with a certification that he is a qualified resident bidder according to
the above definition. The Certification shall be submitted with the contractor's bid. A copy of the form of
"Resident Bidder Certification" is included in the Contract Documents. If it is determined that the
contractor does not meet this qualification after he begins work, a shutdown notice shall be issued and
the voiding of the contract shall begin unless the contractor becomes qualified.
NON-RESIDENT BIDDER:
The contractor shall provide the City with a certification that he is a non-resident bidder according to the
above definition. The Certification shall be submitted with the contractor's bid. A copy of the form of
"Non-Resident Bidder Certification" is included in the Contract Documents.
DJG
01/02/12
RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER CERT. Page RB-1 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION
CONTRACT NO:
PROJECT NAME:
DATE OF LETTING:
To be a qualified resident bidder, the bidder shall be a person or entity authorized to
transact business in this state and having a business for at least three years prior to the
date of the first advertisement for the public improvement. If another state or foreign
country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the more stringent definition is
applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country.
This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the contractor and his subcontractors at the
work site until this project is completed.
I hereby certify that I am a resident bidder as defined above.
COMPANY NAME
CORPORATE OFFICER
TITLE
DATE
RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER CERT. Page RB-2 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
NON-RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION
CONTRACT NO.:
PROJECT NAME:
DATE OF LETTING:
I hereby certify that I am an Iowa non-resident bidder.
COMPANY NAME:
CORPORATE OFFICER.-
TITLE:
DATE:
STATE/COUNTRY OF RESIDENCY:
Stated below are the preference(s)to resident bidders in the state/country of
(Preference to bidders, labor force, or other preferential treatment to bidders or laborers, etc.
RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER CERT. Page RB-3 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dr; Run Creek Interceptor
Revised February 2003
CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM
Check box that applies to party completing program:
( ) General Contractor
( ) Subcontractor
I. Section A to be completed by GENERAL CONTRACTORS only:
A.
Name of Company
Address of Company Zip
Telephone Number( )
Federal ID Number (if no Federal ID Number, Owner/President's Social Security Number)
Name of Equal Employment Officer
Name of Project
Project Contract Number
Estimated Construction Work Dates /
Start Finish
Section B to be completed by SUBCONTRACTORS only:
B.
Name of General or Prime Contractor
Name of Subcontractor
Subcontractor's Address Zip
Subcontractor's Telephone Number( )
Subcontractor's Federal ID Number(if no Federal ID Number Owner/President's 3ocial Security
Number)
Name of Equal Employment Officer
C. Remainder of program to be completed by party completing program, either Prime or
Subcontractor.
1. The Owners and/or Principals of your company:
Ethnic
Name Address Position Sex Ori in
2. Other Areas of Interest: _
If your company has branches or subsidiaries, or if your company is a branch or
subsidiary of a parent organization, give the following information:
Type of
Name Address Affiliation Degree
II. EMPLOYER'S POLICY (Please read carefully.)
A. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to —
nondiscrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our
company will not be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, sex, national
origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap.
B. The employment policies and practices of the undersigned are to recruit and hire
employees without discrimination, and to treat them equally with respect to compensation
and opportunities for advancement, including training, upgrading, promotion, and —
transfer. However, we realize the inequities associated with employment training,
upgrading, contracting and subcontracting for minorities and women and we will direct
our efforts to correcting any deficiencies to the maximum extent possible. The same will
be required of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers. —
C. We submit this program to assure compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended,
and other subsequent orders that may pertain to equal employment opportunity and merit _
employment policies, fully realizing that our qualification and/or merit system should be
evaluated and revised, if necessary.
D. We agree to put forth the maximum effort to achieve full employment and utilization of —
capabilities and productivity of all our citizens without regard to race, creed, color, sex,
national origin, economic status, age, and mental or physical handicap.
E. will give training —
(Name of Company)
and employment opportunities to local residents of Waterloo, Iowa, to the greatest extent
feasible. —
-2 -
III. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION
A. recognizes that the
(Name of Company)
effective application of a policy of merit employment involves more than just a policy
_ statement, and
(Name of Company)
will, therefore, re-evaluate our Affirmative Action Program to ensure that equal
employment opportunities are available on the basis of individual merit, and to actively
encourage minorities, women and local residents to seek employment with our company
on this basis.
_ B. will undertake the
(Name of Company)
following six(6)steps to improve our Affirmative Action Program:
— 1. Minority Recruitment and Employment;
2. Local Recruitment and Employment;
3. Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Recruitment and Employment;
_ 4. Handicapped Recruitment and Employment;
5. Female Recruitment and Employment; and
6. Training, Upgrading and Promotional Opportunities.
C. will take
(Name of Company)
whatever steps are necessary to ensure that our total work force has adequate minority,
female, and local representation. We will utilize the following methods in our recruitment
attem pts:
1. Local advertising media (newspapers, radio, TV);
2. Community organizations (churches, clubs, schools);
3. Public and private institutions in the area (UNI, Hawkeye Community College);
4. Job Service of Iowa; and
5. Other.
D. will seek qualified minority,
(Name of Company)
female, and local group applicants for all job categories and will make asserted efforts to
increase minority, female and group representation in occupations at the higher levels or
skill and responsibility.
E. All sources of employment used shall be aware that we are an Equal Employment
Opportunity Employer. Labor organizations representing our employees will be notified
of our Equal Employment Opportunity Policy and Affirmative Action Program.
F. Training, upgrading, promotion and transfer activities at all levels will be monitored to
ensure that full consideration has been given to qualified minority, female, and local
group employees.
G. will encourage other
(Name of Company)
— companies with whom we are associated and/or do business, to do the same and we will
assist them in their efforts.
H. has taken the following
— (Name of Company)
-3 -
Affirmative Action to ensure that minority, female, local contractors and/or suppliers were
provided opportunities to negotiate and/or bid on this project: (if none, write,,NONE") —
1.
2.
I. As a result of the above efforts, we have involved minority, female, and local contractors
and/or suppliers in the following areas of subcontracting: (if none, write"NONE")
1.
2.
J. will require approved
(Name of Company) —
Affirmative Action Programs from all nonexempt contractors who propose to work on this
project and will take whatever steps are necessary to ensure that non-minority
contractors have adequate representation of minority, female and local persons in their —
total work force.
K. In further accordance with rules and guidelines issued pursuant to Executive Order
11246 as amended, we establish the goals for our company, based on parity —
percentages supplied by the City, and we realize these goals will be reviewed on an
annual basis.
L. will keep records of
(Name of Company)
specific actions relative to recruitment, employment, training, upgrading and promotion
and will provide the City of Waterloo with any information relative to same, including
activities of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers as necessary or when requested.
M. Parity figures for companies located in Waterloo are as follows: —
Minority Parity= .08 (8%)
N. Affirmative Action —
(Name of Company)
Employment Goals: —
The definition of Affirmative Action Goals is as follows: "Goals may not be rigid and
inflexible quotas which must be met, but must be targets, reasonably attainable by means
of applying every good faith effort to make all aspects of the entire Affirmative Action —
Program work."
For the year 2015, please submit percentage targets for employing minorities and —
women. If you already have reached your target for hiring minorities and women, please
submit that percentage.
*Goals for Minorities: % —
Goals for Women: %
*Your affirmative action goals should be between 1% and 10% or more for minorities and —
1% and 5% or more for women.
-4 -
Please be advised that the goals or targets are purely your estimatio 1 of how many
women and minorities your company can reasonably expect to hire in 2015. Note, that
none of the goals are rigid or inflexible. They are targets that your company calculates as
reasonably attainable. This will help the City in its monitoring procedure:, as required by
City of Waterloo Resolution No. 1984-142(4).
-5 -
CONTRACTOR'S TOTAL WORK FORCE
(WATERLOO)
HOURLY
NAME AND ADDRESS JOB CATEGORY RACE SEX WAGE
INDICATE: DISABLED VETERAN: DV
VIETNAM ERA VETERAN: VV
HANDICAPPED: H
-6 -
We hereby certify that we are in compliance with all City and Federal Affirmative Action
Regulations and agree to accept all liability for failure to comply.
Respectfully submitted,
By:
Company Executive
Date
By:
Equal Employment
Opportunity Officer
Date
City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Officer
Approved
Disapproved Reason:
By.
Date:
DESCRIPTION OF JOB CATEGORIES
1. Officials/Manager: Occupations in which employees set broad policies, exercise overall
responsibility for execution of all policies, or direct individual departments or special phases of the
agency's operations or provide specialized consultation on a regional, district or area basis.
Includes: department heads, bureau chiefs, division chiefs, directors, deputy directors,
controllers, examiners, wardens, superintendents, unit supervisors, sheriffs, police and fire chiefs
and inspectors and kindred workers.
2. Professionals: Occupations which require specialized and theoretical knowledge which is
usually required through college training or thorough work experience and other training which
provides comparable knowledge. Includes: personnel and labor relations workers, social
workers, doctors, psychologists, registered nurses, economists, dietitians, lawyers, system
analysts, accountants, engineers, employment and vocational rehabilitation counselors, teachers
or instructors, police and fire captains and lieutenants and kindred workers.
3. Technicians: Occupations which require a combination of basic scientific or technical knowledge
and manual skill which can be obtained through specialized post-secondary school education and
through equivalent on-the-job training. Includes: computer programmers and operations,
draftsmen, surveyors, licensed practical nurses, photographs, radio operators, technical
illustrators, police and fire sergeants and kindred workers.
4. Office/Clerical: Workers are responsible for internal and external communication, recording and
retrieval of data and/or information and other paper work required in an office. Includes:
bookkeepers, messengers, office machine operators, clerk-typists, stenographers, court _
transcribers, hearing reporters, statistical clerks, dispatchers, license distributors, payroll clerks
and kindred workers.
5. Skilled Craft Workers: Workers perform jobs which require special manual skill and a thorough and comprehensive knowledge of the processes involved in the work which is acquired through
on-the-job training programs. Includes: Mechanics and repairman, electricians, heavy equipment
operators, stationary engineers, skilled machine occupations, carpenters, compositors and —
typesetters and kindred workers.
6. Sales Workers: Occupations engaging wholly and primarily in direct selling. Includes:
advertising agents and salesman, insurance agents and brokers, real estate agents and brokers, —
stock and bond salesmen, demonstrators, salesmen and sales clerks, grocery clerks and cashier
checkers, and kindred workers.
7. Operatives (semi-skilled): Workers who operate machine or processing equipment or perform
other factory-type duties of intermediate skill level which can be mastered in a few weeks and
require only limited training. Includes: apprentices (auto mechanics), plumbers, building trades,
metal working trades, bricklayers, carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics, printing trades,
etc., operatives, attendants (auto service and parking), plasterers, chauffeurs, deliverymen and
furnacemen, heaters (metal), laundry and dry cleaning operatives, milliners, mine operatives and
laborers, motormen, oilers and greasers, (except auto painters), (except construction and _
maintenance), photographic process workers, stationary fireman, truck and tractor drivers,
weavers, (textile), welders and flame cutters and kindred workers.
8. Laborers (unskilled): Workers in manual occupations which generally require no special —
training. Perform elementary duties that may be learned in few days and require the application
of little or no independent judgment. Includes: garage laborers, car washers and greasers,
gardeners (except farm) and groundskeepers, longshoremen, and stevedores, lumbermen,
craftsmen and woodchoppers, laborers performing lifing, digging, mixing, loading and pulling
operations and kindred workers.
-8 -
9. Apprentices: Persons employed in a program including work training and related instruction to
learn a trade or craft which is traditionally an apprenticeship, regardless of whether the program is
registered with a Federal or State agency.
_ 10. Trainees (on-the-iob): Production. . . persons in formal training for craftsmen when not trained
under apprentice programs--operative laborer, and service occupations.
White Collar. . . persons engaged in formal training for clerical, managerial, professional,
technical, sales, office and clerical occupations.
ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION
NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS:
The following are items from the Dry Run Creek Interceptor that have a potential for MBE/WBE
Participation. This listing, however, is not intended to be all encompassing; to preclude MBE/WBE
Contractors from bidding on any items of the Proposal as a Subcontractor or the entire Proposal as a
Prime Contractor.
BID TOTAL
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY
2 Traffic Control LS 1.0
MBE/WBE GOALS FOR THIS PROJECT
IMPORTANT: Prime Contract Bidders should be aware that ten percent (10%) MBE goal and a two
percent(2%)WBE goal is attached to this project. "Certified Return Receipt" letters are no longer needed
with the bid showing proof of contacting MBE or WBE Subcontractors, but the Pre-Bid Contact Information
Form must be filled out completely.
City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer:
Contract Compliance Officer
Community Development Board
Carnegie Annex, Suite 202
— 620 Mulberry Street
Waterloo, IA 50703
Phone: (319) 291-4429
ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE Page M-1 of 6 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM
PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD —
Contract No.:
Letting Date:
I, (subcontractor's name), hereby attest that I have been solicited for a bid on (project name) in the area
of(description of work and bid item no.).
(Prime contractor) has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must
be submitted to the company office by(date)and (time).
Subcontractor's Company Name
Date Subcontractor's Signature
Date Prime Bidder's Signature
ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE Page M-2 of 6 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR
SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES
Subcontractor Company Name
Address
RE: Contract No.:
Dear
(Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the following work in connection with the
above referenced project.
(Insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work)
(Prime Contractor's Company Name) is an Equal Opportunity Employer, and all qualified bidders will not
-. be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, or origin.
If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by
(Date)
and
(Time)
Sincerely,
(Prime Contractor's Representative)
Form CCO-3(11/28/2001)
ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE Page M-3 of 6 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
LETTER OF INTENT TO BID
(MBE/WBE LETTER)
According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program - 2002, all MBE/WBE Contractors
interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals, MUST submit a
LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to the City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven (7) days
prior to bid opening.
The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBE/WBE Contractor is
interested in bidding.
Letter should include the following:
Name of Project:
Your Company Name: —
Address:
Phone: Date:
List of Specific items to be bid:
Item No. Description:
Item No. Description:
Item No. Description: —
Item No. Description:
Item No. Description: —
(Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature)
Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: —
Contract Compliance Officer _
Community Development Board
620 Mulberry St.
Carnegie Annex, Suite 202
Waterloo, IA 50703 —
Phone: (319) 291-4429
Form CCO-5 (06-20-2002)
ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE Page 4 of 6 City of Waterloo —
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
N Y O 0 CCD W W U
U >
�0m �o
m U) m m 5a) p
U C cn
m a) () M > c C O cN)E N - UUO aw o >, oo
C a) 0 .0 w 0 00- o-
- E m0- -o me o � -C Z m
a) 0 c w c a) f°
am z � F C U7
. y
om 0o o 3 0w - U
c
M o a)co � - ? g m �
ao m @ L U) `n mO 0
c ' >� C V) y C .0
-CAL C C o O m CD
� � — O
O m �' Q''O 0 c W w LL W E U c
ao 0 0-- -0 � ° ZO co o E c m
o 0
a) mE -6 wa, w a H w v� a�
a) .0 CO E ¢ m a, m ao
o ° � a � og c 2 g m Pm
a) m O o c W U) cnQ' _ 'C CO a) 0
� M O m m 0 T N O y O o a)--
N O 0)C) y -p 0 .. .L-+ LL O 2 C
7 U
ZO a.� LO o m v'� v o z O CD c m c 'n c m
_ ui o m m a) m ai :D
m � o a) � °) yam o U cL) C- 6 c >, -cEQ0
H m Via) m ca � o O - NU
V �' > � cn oo H ao o .0 '0 m �
� � a (n c) o a) m e vim) CD � �
a) m 'c 0 CD
_ - o
— 0 t o mcl mLLJ
N vc ! m m co c
Z � c ai of a
n
` � � a
w � �o cUo m w � o c ai 0 Eo0
a m ` MU IsO .CO0 n 77 (6 � m w 0) O = -
O CD Co Q cn p c
— W wwo E6 000 � w Q- aa) m -0 m - - �
�. O mmw 0 m �_ � � Y D uj E a) w -o co .0Aso m
Z � 2 � vi � � yW Q 00 cQia) m a) cn3o '-
a) - o cm 3 d �' E
W Z w � � m2 � w � H w - E Q' Q o 0
ND � C � � m '" m H co 0 m aa) Qo > oZ
C o .
W Q c m � co
Z m o a; u>oi w � m 3 c 0 a) -C y � � m
Z a) _ U) � m a) m m a,
CD fn o ow 00 -o --a O w E m �' > c) a) w aw mU
_ Q cLn : E Z _o o - o � cn3g a �
m O m � w n o -0 a) E c°) m > c o y U
W Z c 0-2 O � M t-- m c o0 > CD � 3 � .F cn >_ a D
t U) to C m c
m m m p Z E N Q E w c0i c i w Q O c N CD L
Q m CD
U y W ) a) a 'O O N O 0 " c 0 c
W cn 3 Q m LL O c .� a) w c c) cn a)
Z 3 0 Z -0 cnWL) 7 w0 � � 2 cm cm L) C) CO
CVO O co m oa) u� oEv, m oa) c a) �
t c .0 a U m - 0-= w m U 3 0 a) W
m o � � ❑ :5 ca m o w �, � c > - 3: ) m a) cno aco
o a) -0 mia cn o °o m c CO ` o a) 3 m `0 is y a) og
m u E c`a w � cn amp m Q m o 0- m e � � mY � m c o m m
m o o . o S 0- CL
W od m 3 ao c f° m > m o Q ou 'o c- 3 cn 3y E W .� c
oy c v w c � cn - `c-a- c cmn c�i o CL Z 2 E m c E E m
a m 0 M M U) a)) -°0 0 --
m U) m .�L. O O oQ L 'U) E Q a) 7 '0 7 N
m o Of m c w � o m c in m .> _ LL o • -0 t c0 m-0 rn cn o
in 000 ° 0- a) oo (Ua.r 3 � > Q) E 3 � m — $ cCDa
d > wa m a) m E a) m .0p o �� Q 3 w mY o
�+ 3 0 C H N W U C w CO 0 > c7 y D a) C 3 V a
U v, .N W a m m a cmi m m Q .Q 0 O c = c m w
w o c � � mN :? m .� o c m m a) W O � co in � Q�0 ° o
C m m j C M 0 0 m w a) a) m (n .N O U '� 'O m 0 w C c oo W
c cn U 0 W p tmi, a) c`a ) 7 � o O w w ! C C p a>i O o
Q Z m c o a) c� `�
u7 .co U) aa)i c y L) M O U O >, N W H N V L .a H w C Q
` cow � � '� 4 � o c m a a mU o a) 0 °) m `a) a) am) >
p m e o m o m a) ma) o c o � Q .. w 0 E > o 0 z>+ C V U C 0 m 0 •C c H M
D o w wp 'a Eo m o 0 3o < cozz2 QU vi o wooer o Q Wo
c m U ai a? U E o o m o o � O m o a) a) cno aM
c c y m U c p y6 (6 V c6 m U > U c6 � U -o ai m � U V C O o
U U m 'm LL
m E E m -0 m o � a) vmi m0 o f m m a) : U Om
a) E ,- c g_ � > a) a) V w so m m p m Eo U �
E E D o LL o Q m 0E U O H e � w U 0) � w E E m a 2O
m E
a) O N C .y a) a)� .. W' L m 7 0 0 0) m o W w
n. w am7 O -o cli m 0 C6 � M cries a CO �' UUQ m LL �Q
O t5
J N M
C Q O C 0 co
N
O O 6)
O�U O
'5 C O N = N c
O-
(C6 O '�' C6 O N w N
O_ L m �' CDO CL C> U
x w a� U o -O O m U
O C N m d r c
a) p 'O N C>6 C C of
-0O N en � > .O 0 Z`
O m 0 L m � O
O i (AO 0) O ID
0 U U 0 3 ,7 0 2 = Q co .�
m :EO m 1.7 U =
C C
O U) W CD .2 2
Q - U a) :+
O m � m O
J O O 0 E O 0 O
N r ` .— 0 7
C O CCD
7 2 c
E
O j 0- 0
U O 0 Q >' 0 y m O
m N > C .9 U d1 Lb Z
L o 0 3 0 U 0
p 0 p 'm o =o ui a >-
w 3 0 r ( c m M Q
E O 30, NH
W0 °? cn > > o U mm Z
T LL a Co c o W o Lu p
� Z E c 0 :- T `° m °' � V
o ` cno � In ' O c c E m y
LU o O .O m `mm o mn
CO
° ° J c
Z � U i@ Z W cpa3 c .� EEm Em
fn0 w pZ6 owo ow W 0
LL C L U E c c 0 w O)
LLJ Z .0 O O N O U) N -O ,_^ Z 7 d U
Z � � O C 'L'' C m m 00 cn LU a .�.
cn (� W o �_ � ma m0)M a) Z � U
LQ CO .0 � � > c 0 -0 r% N Z
m r O 7 ~ 0 0 0) m w fA
`� Oc Qm3 mE E- Z m
MW Z U m W >. _O o U 0 fn i Q
W O °' � m F L .L. ao N
V � ~ O E > > O N ;O
LLf �_ m m 'm6 L C O S C L Q m 0
Cm m 0)Z> o y 0 - 0 N o LL LU m +°�
G C C L 0 0 N ,� Z m w
W D
L
LL '� -0 i fp (U, LL O
70 0Lu
ILZO U 7 5, O — O CO L) U
O O' ` O C It O W 7 W C CO
d m O J G
U CD
'0 OO E O
OE � , E mQ F.
- L >- to O 'O O_
m
0 � � W N N
a> J � Hm _
0 :5m c
U m V O N o .p W y C
m � � >, wm L W
«- J O i n 2 'O O O ED
ED�— d (04 O E C m W C1
O
N QC IL � L Z, a)E :E m m N W
lA Q C N -00 td C m +�+ m
m O M m d L W C ON
E U N 0 — O -o � 3 O J
m m Q! -0 ch c Q � m V Q
Z C: O y a, o � $ � � o
O � m U -O o N .T to 7 > Z co
U C U W N >.Z .•. m N N W N
m LU Om Qmp Co - c CO
.� C fL N 0' OL = C .� V CL
U m to a
v
coOm OCQO@ m
2 = M U
C: 0 -C 00 N �o 5 }
0- Z 3 U fn ,0 En
_
CERTIFIED
MBE / WBE CONTRACTORS
CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA
• s
CONTRACT COMPLIANCE OFFICE
Community Development Board
Carnegie Annex,Suite 202
620 Mulberry Street
Waterloo, Iowa 50703
City WEB Site: www.ci.waterlooda.us
Contract Compliance
WEB Site
for listing updates: http://www.cityofwaterlooiowa.com/contractcompliance
Contact: Rudy Jones, Community Development Director
Email: rudy.*oneskwaterloo-ia.org
Phone: (319) 291-4429
Fax: (319) 291-4431
_ MBE/WBE Certified Contractors List
Page 1 of 4
CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS -
CARTER ELECTRIC _
725 Adams Street
Waterloo, IA 50703
Phone: (319) 232-9808 —
Pager: (319) 235-4021
Contact: Derrick Carter
Specializing in:
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
CULPEPPER ELECTRIC -
1731 Cottage Grove Avenue
Waterloo, IA 50707
Phone: (319) 235-0885 --
Fax: (319) 236-8177
Contact: Martin Culpepper
Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Licensed Electrician —
Specializing in:
ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT
339 Albany Street _
Waterloo, IA 50703
Phone: (319) 961-1659
Contact: Sammy Daniels —
Specializing in:
ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK, POURED WALLS—ALL TYPES, FOOTINGS,
LIGHT DEMOLITION —
D.C. CORPORATION
426 Beech Street —
Waterloo, IA 50703
Phone: (319) 493-2542
FAX: (319) 236-0515 —
Contact: Terry Phillips
Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified _
Specializing in:
COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PAVING, DRIVEWAYS,
TRUCKING (ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION —
MBE/WBE Certified Contractors List,Revised 9-9-14
Page 2 of 4 —
GREER'S WORKS
2003 Plainview Street
Waterloo, IA 50703
Phone: (319) 233-4701
Contact: Willie Greer
Specializing in:
DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CARPENTRY, ROOFING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
OLD GREER'S WORKS
2309 Springview Street
Waterloo, IA 50707
Phone: (319) 233-2150
Contact: David L. Greer, Sr.
Specializing in:
ROOFING & GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
QUICK CONSTRUCTION
217 Bates Street
Waterloo, IA 50703
Phone: (319) 215-4166
-- Contact: Leroy Harrington
Specializing in:
ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTR UCTION
CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS
ATLAS PAINTING, INC.*
-- 911 Sycamore Street
P.O. BOX 65
Waterloo, IA 50704
Phone: (319) 232-9164
Specializing in:
MBE/WBE Certified Contractors List,Revised 9-9-14
Page 3 o f 4
COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTING
WATCO CONSTRUCTION, INC.* -
2920 Texas Street
Waterloo, IA 50702
Phone : (319) 233-7481 —
Certified: City of Waterloo WBE
Contact : Patricia J. Kimball
Specializing in: --
STORM SEWER, INLETS, DRAIN TILE, WATER MAIN, SANITARY SEWER, INTAKE
STRUCTURES
* DENOTES WOMEN B USINESS ENTERPRISE
:VIBE/WBE Certified Contractors List,Revised 9-9-14
Page 4 o f 4 _,,
-- STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
(To be submitted by the Bidder only upon the specific request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.)
All questions must be answered and the date given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement
must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder
may submit any additional information he desires.
1. Name of bidder.
2. Permanent main office address.
3. When organized.
4. If a corporation, when incorporated.
5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or
trade name?
6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the appropriate
anticipated dates of completion.)
7. General character of work performed by your company.
8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why?
9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why?
_ 10. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate
cost for each, and the month and year completed.
11. List your major equipment available for this contract.
12. Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project.
13. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers.
14. Credit available: $
15. Give bank reference:
16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that
may be required by the City of Waterloo, Iowa?
STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Page SBQ-1 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any
information requested by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in verification of the recitals comprising this
Statement of Bidder's Qualifications.
Dated at this day of 2015. _
(Name of Bidder)By: _
Title:
State of )
ss: --
County of )
being duly sworn deposes and says that he is_
Of
(Name of Organization)
and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct.
Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 2015.
Notary Public
My commission expires
STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Page SBQ-2 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS
1. SCOPE OF WORK
The work covered by this contract consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and
performing all operations, in connection with the DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR, in
accordance with these specifications.
The specifications are dated September 30, 2015. They have the general title of DRY RUN
CREEK INTERCEPTOR.
The Iowa Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge
Construction, Series of 2012, are to be used, along with the special provisions described herein,
and shall be considered as part of the contract documents.
2. CONFLICTING SPECIFICATIONS
All requirements of other specifications contained in the contract documents wl•ich conflict with
the provisions of the special provisions will be considered void.
3. DUMPING AREAS
Excess material resulting from construction operations shall be hauled to the Cl>unty Landfill or
other area secured by the contractor and approved by the City Engineer. Rubble, rubbish, trees,
brush, and other unsuitable backfill material, as designated by the City Engineer, shall be hauled
to the County Landfill. All Landfill charges are to be considered incidental to the .:ontract and are
the responsibility of the contractor.
4. CONSTRUCTION DAMAGE
The Contractor shall exercise care during construction operations to ensure the safety and
protection to existing features located near or within the limits of construction. Uamage caused
by negligence or poor workmanship, as determined by the Engineer, shall be considered the
Contractor's responsibility.
5. REMOVED MATERIALS
All materials removed as part of this Contract shall remain the property of the City unless the City
determines that the materials are not salvageable and the City does not want to retain ownership
of the materials. Materials designated in the field by the Engineer as non-salvageable shall be
hauled and disposed of by the Contractor at no cost to the City. All other materials shall be
transported to locations as directed by the Engineer. No separate measurement or payment will
be made for hauling or disposing of removed materials and it shall be considered incidental to
applicable items.
6. OVERHAUL
Overhaul will not be paid for "surplus material" obtained from any of the items of construction
under this contract. The cost of overhaul will be considered as incidental to the rems to which it
applies.
7. MAILBOXES
The Contractor shall notify the United States Postal Department of mailboxes, which interfere with
any part of the work before removing them, and the Contractor will relocate then as required by
GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS Page GSP-1 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Ran Creek Interceptor
the Postmaster. The removal and replacement of mailboxes will not be considered for direct
payment but will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies.
8. PAY ITEMS
All pay items are listed in the proposal and shall include the purchase of all materials, delivery of
these materials, and furnishing all labor, plant, and miscellaneous work needed to make the item
complete. All such cost shall be incidental to the proposed item to which it applies and shall not
be considered for separate payment.
9. BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE ITEMS
The Contractor shall, immediately upon execution and delivery of the contract, before the first
estimate for payment is made, deliver to the Engineer a detailed estimate giving a complete
breakdown of the lump sum contract prices. The submitted breakdown shall be approved by the
Engineer prior to any payment of any lump sum price item. —
10. PERMISSION TO HAUL OVER STREETS, RAILROADS, AND HIGHWAYS
The Contractor will be required to secure, from the proper authorities, permission or permit which —
may be required to haul over streets, highways, railroads or private property, and any hauling
operations of the Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of such permits, permission, and
to all applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances governing hauling and movement of equipment over streets, railroads, highways, and private property. Any costs or inconvenience caused by
obtaining any necessary permits or permission shall be considered completely covered by the
price bid for the items in the proposal. —
11. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING
The Engineer shall approve Contractor's work schedule prior to starting. All revisions shall also be approved. The Engineer may change the schedule to accommodate changing construction
conditions.
The Contractor shall coordinate the work under this contract with contractors performing work
under other contracts, which may be performed concurrently.
The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Police, Fire, Street, and Engineering —
Departments of the closing and opening of streets.
The Contractor shall commence work within ten (10)days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed" _
and diligently execute the work of the contract to completion.
12. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE
Before any work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the Engineer to hold a pre-
construction conference for the purpose of discussing the contract.
13. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES —
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the location of gas lines, water lines, electric,
telephone, and cable television cables or wires from the various utility companies and the City —
electrician before starting any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to
any underground utilities. The Contractor shall expose those utilities indicated on the plans so
that elevations may be determined before beginning construction. This work shall be considered
incidental to other items of work. —
GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS Page GSP-2 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
If the Contractor believes that additional costs have been incurred due to a utility being improperly
located, the resolution of the additional costs incurred shall be made between thE� contractor and
the respective utility company.
14. TRAFFIC SIGNS AND STREET SIGNS
The Contractor shall contact the City of Waterloo Traffic Operations Department to have any
street sign that will be affected by construction removed and replaced when the work has been
completed.
15. TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION (INCIDENTAL)
The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension
of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades,
signs, or other adequate protection, as required by Contract Documents or as may be ordered by
the Engineer, to ensure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work.
All barricading necessary for completion of this project shall be considered incidental to
contract bid items.
16. GRADES, LINES, LEVELS, AND SURVEYS
The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels, and dimensions as shown c'i the drawings,
and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the same to the Engineer belt,re commencing
work.
17. SAFETY OF WORKERS AND PUBLIC
The Contractor shall, at all times, take necessary precautions to protect the life ,end health of all
persons employed on this project and the public. He shall provide necessary satety devices and
- safeguards in accordance with latest and best accident prevention practices. All such protection
shall be furnished to employees without cost.
No direct measurement of payment shall be made for this protection but shal be considered
incidental to other items of work. The public shall be kept outside of any work are.i.
18. WORKING ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing forty-eight (48) hours in advance if work on
Saturday is planned. By noon the Friday before the planned Saturday work, the (contractor shall
confirm the Saturday work schedule with the project inspector.
Work on Sunday requires prior approval of the Engineer in accordance wit,i the Waterloo
Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2.)16 due to City
holidays:
Friday, January 1, 2016 New Year's Day
Monday, May 23, 2016 Memorial Day
Monday, July 4, 2016 Independence Day
Monday, September 5, 2016 Labor Day
GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS Page GSP-3 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Ri,n Creek Interceptor
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The Iowa Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction,
Series of 2012, plus the applicable General Supplemental Specifications and the 2015 Iowa Statewide
_ Urban Specifications, also known as SUDAS, shall apply to construction work on this project. Any
technicals not covered by SUDAS are listed in the Table of Contents and are made a part of the
specification booklet on the following pages.
*** END OF SPECIAL PROVISIONS
SPECIAL PROVISIONS City Contract No.877 Page SP-1 of 1
AECOM 60334228 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
SECTION 01110
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. This project consists of construction of the Dry Run Creek Interceptor along the San Marnan
Corridor in Waterloo, Iowa. The project includes a new pumping station to replace the Tower Park
Station, a force main to pump the flow to the east along San Marnan, and a gravity sewer system
along San Marnan flowing east to an existing line on Hess Road.
B. Measurement and Payment:
1. Work specified in this section is considered incidental and payment shall be included as part
of appropriate lump sum or unit prices included in Bid Form.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Standard Specifications: Iowa Statewide Urban Design and Specifications(SUDAS)—2015 edition
and Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction (Iowa), Series 2012.
1.03 FORM OF SPECIFICATIONS
A. These Specifications are written in imperative and abbreviated form. Imperative language of
Specification sections is directed at CONTRACTOR, unless specifically noted otherwise.
Incomplete sentences in Specifications shall be completed by inserting "shall," "CONTRACTOR
shall,""shall be,"and similar mandatory phrases by inference in same manner as they are applied
to notes on Drawings. Words"shall be"shall be supplied by inference where colon(:)is used within
_ sentences or phrases. Except as worded to contrary, fulfill (perform) indicated requirements
whether stated imperatively or otherwise.
B. Items of Work are specified by section. Specifications or requirements of one or more sections
may apply or be referenced in other sections.
C. Provide Work described and comply with requirements stated in each Specification section and
Drawings unless specifically assigned to other Contractors or OWNER.
1.04 CONTRACTS
A. Perform Work under unit price Contract(s)with OWNER.
1.05 WORK BY OTHERS
A. Utility Services:
1. Electric Utility will furnish and install electric power services to point of termination and
provide meters at locations as shown on Drawings and these Specifications.
2. Refer to referenced Specification sections for cost, if any, to be included in Bid.
1.06 MILESTONES (WORK SEQUENCE)
A. Construct Work in stages to accommodate use of site during construction period; coordinate
Construction Progress Schedule and operations with OWNER.
B. Construct Work in stages to provide for public convenience.
01110-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1. Do not close off public use of facilities until completion of one stage of construction provides
alternative usage.
2. Stages of construction are those indicated on Drawings.
C. Due to potential health hazards and requirements of State of Iowa, Department of Natural
Resources, and U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, existing wastewater lift station facilities
shall be maintained in operation during construction of new lift station facility. Degree of treatment
during construction to be equal to or exceed efficiency of facility before construction started. It is
forbidden to release wastewater into the environment.
1.07 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
A. Limit use of premises for Work and storage to allow for following:
1. OWNER occupancy.
2. Public use.
B. Conduct operations to ensure least inconvenience to general public. Coordinate use of premises
with OWNER.
C. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products under this Contract.
D. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or Work areas needed for operations at no additional
cost to OWNER.
E. Confine operations to areas within Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond
areas in which Work is indicated.
F. Keep driveways, roads,and entrances serving premises clear and available to OWNER and public —
at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to
minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on Site.
1.08 EASEMENTS, LICENSES, AND PERMITS
A. Easements, construction licenses, and permits obtained for Work shown on Drawings.
1. Comply with provisions of easements, licenses, and permits.
2. Obtain additional construction easements necessary to complete Work.
3. Easements are shown on Drawings.
4. Perform construction within existing rights-of-way.
5. Obtain written authorization from affected property owners or maintaining authorities if
construction is outside these areas.
6. Comply with requirements of OWNERS or maintaining authorities.
7. Obtain written approval of restoration from easement grantors shown on Drawings.
B. Construction in Highways:
1. Construction within rights-of-way is governed by applicable permits and appropriate sections
of Contract Documents.
C. Notify property owners of restoration completion by certified mail (return receipt requested, with m
copy to OWNER) similar to following.
'The undersigned Contractor has completed restoration of construction site on which you have
granted easement or license for installation of certain utilities and improvements. If site restoration
is not completed to your satisfaction, please contact City of Waterloo, Iowa, in writing, and
01110-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
arrangements will be made immediately to view site and restore site in conformance with our
Contract obligations.
If City of Waterloo does not hear from you in writing within 5 days from above date,site restoration
of your property will be deemed completed and acceptable to you."
(Signature)
(Name of CONTRACTOR)
(Address of CONTRACTOR)
1. Complete Work necessary to satisfy terms of Contract.
2. Failure of property owner to notify OWNER within 5 days, in accordance with above example,
does not relieve CONTRACTOR of any obligations under Contract.
3. OWNER will:
a. Examine site upon receipt of notice of deficiency.
b. Have right to have remaining Work done by contract or force account and deduct cost
thereof from monies due CONTRACTOR should CONTRACTOR refuse to complete
restoration work.
c. Waive requirement for obtaining statement if satisfied restoration is completed in
accordance with Contract Documents.
1.09 STAKING
A. Proposed Work will be staked once, by ENGINEER, at no expense to CONTRACTOR. Should
CONTRACTOR request restaking,this Work will be done as ENGINEER'S schedule permits and at
expense of CONTRACTOR. Notify ENGINEER at least 3 days prior to start of open-cut work or
7 days prior to start of jacked or augered work and when making periodic requests for line and
grade stakes.
_ 1. ENGINEER will provide one line of survey stakes for utility work and prepare separate cut
sheets where multiple pipes are located in common trench.
2. CONTRACTOR shall maintain survey stakes.
PART PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
* '* END OF SECTION "
01110-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 01295
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Submit Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of Work as required by General
Conditions.
B. Upon request of ENGINEER, support values with data substantiating their correctness.
" 1.02 FORM AND CONTENT OF SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Type schedule on 8-1/2 in. x 11 in.white paper;CONTRACTOR'S standard forms and automated
printout will be considered for approval by ENGINEER upon CONTRACTOR'S request. Identify
schedule with the following:
1. Project title and location.
2. ENGINEER and ENGINEER'S Project number.
3. Name and address of CONTRACTOR.
4. Contract designation.
5. Date of submission.
B. Identify installed value of component parts of Work in sufficient detail to serve as basis for
computing values for progress payments during construction.
C. Use general table of contents of this Project Manual to establish format for listing component items
in schedule.
1. Identify each line item with number and title of respective Specification division and section.
2. If Project consists of multiple structures, break down schedule by structure.
D. Provide separate listing for General Requirements (Division 1) items, such as bonds, insurance
premiums, mobilization,field supervision and layout, construction facilities and temporary controls,
contingency allowance, construction schedule, O&M data, record drawings, and submittals.
E. For each Specification division, list subvalues of major materials, equipment or operations under
division.
F. For various portions of work:
1. Each item shall include directly proportional amount of CONTRACTOR'S overhead and
profit.
2. For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down
value into the following:
a. Cost of materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid.
b. Total installed value including CONTRACTOR'S overhead and profit.
G. Sum of values listed in schedule shall equal total Contract sum.
01295-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION '—
(Not Used)
*** END OF SECTION
01295-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 01340
SUBMITTALS
PART GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section specifies procedural requirements for Work-related (non-administrative) submittals
_ including Shop Drawings, substitutions, product data, samples, test data, operations and
maintenance data, and other miscellaneous Work-related submittals.
1. Submittals for certification of equipment installation, instructional, and post-startup services
'— are specified in Section 01600.
2. Submittals for record drawings are specified in Section 01788.
B. Administrative Submittals: Procedures concerning items such as listing of manufacturers,
Suppliers, Subcontractors, Construction Progress Schedule, schedule of Shop Drawing
submissions, bonds, payment applications, insurance certificates, and schedule of values are
specified elsewhere.
C. Work-Related Submittals:
1. Substitutes and "Or Equal" Items:
a. Includes material or equipment which CONTRACTOR requests ENGINEER to accept,
after Effective Date of the Agreement. Whenever an item of material or equipment is
specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary
item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to
establish the type,function,appearance,and quality required. Unless the specification or
description contains or is followed by words reading that no like,equivalent,or"or equal"
item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or
equipment of other Suppliers, may be submitted to Engineer for review under the
circumstances described below.
2. Shop Drawings:
a. Includes technical data and drawings specially prepared for this Project, including
fabrication and installation drawings, diagrams, data sheets, schedules, templates,
patterns, reports, instructions, design mix formulas, measurements, and similar
information not in standard printed form.
b. Standard catalog type information prepared without specific reference to Project is not
considered as Shop Drawing.
3. Product Data:
a. Includes standard catalog type printed information on manufactured materials,
equipment and systems that has not been specially prepared for this Project, including
manufacturer's product specifications, catalog cuts, standard wiring diagrams, printed
performance curves, mill reports, and standard color charts.
4. Samples:
a. Includes fabricated and manufactured physical examples of materials, products, and
units of work, includes complete units, partial cuts of manufactured or fabricated work,
swatches showing color, texture, and pattern, and units of work to be used for
independent inspection and testing.
-- 01340-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Mock-ups are special forms of samples too large or otherwise inconvenient for handling
in manner specified for transmittal of sample submittals.
5. Test Results:
a. Includes source and field quality inspection and test reports,actual performance curves,
and certifications of results prepared specifically for equipment, material, and systems
provided for this Project.
b. Standard catalog charts or standard test results are considered Product Data. —
6. Operations and Maintenance Data:
a. Includes information and directions for operating and maintaining equipment provided
and installed for this Project. Maybe standard for equipment or prepared specifically for
this Project.
7. Miscellaneous Submittals: —
a. Work-related submittals that do not fit in previous categories, includes schedules, _
photographs, guarantees, warranties, certifications, maintenance agreements,
workmanship bonds, survey data and reports, physical work records,copies of industry
standards, field measurement data, extra materials, keys, and similar information,
devices, and materials applicable to Work. —
1.02 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Scheduling:
1. CONTRACTOR is not required to submit preliminary or final schedule of Submittals.
B. Coordination: —
1. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of Work. Coordinate
each submittal with other submittals and related activities such as substitution requests,
testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar activities requiring sequential activity.
2. Coordinate submission of different units of interrelated Work so one submittal not be delayed
by ENGINEER'S need to review related submittal. ENGINEER may withhold action on
submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are provided.
3. Prepare and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of scheduled performance of
related Work and other applicable activities.
4. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have: —
a. reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and
Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; _
b. determined and verified all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified
performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers,
and similar information with respect thereto;
c. determined and verified the suitability of all materials offered with respect to the indicated
application,fabrication, shipping, handling,storage,assembly,and installation pertaining
to the performance of the Work; and
d. determined and verified all information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, _
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety
precautions and programs incident thereto.
01340-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Submittal Preparation:
-- 1. Stamp and sign each submittal certifying to review of submittal, verification of material, and
equipment, field measurement, field construction criteria, and coordination of information
within submittal with Contract Documents.
2. Transmittal Form: Identify following:
a. Date of submittal and dates of previous submittals.
b. Project title and number.
-•— c. Submittal number.
d. Contract identification.
e. Names of:
1) CONTRACTOR.
2) Supplier.
3) Manufacturer.
f. If submittal is for substitute item of material or equipment, identify as "substitute" on
transmittal and include "Contractor's Application for Consideration of Substitute" with
submittal.
-" g. Identification of equipment and material with equipment identification numbers, motor
numbers, and Specification section number.
h. Variations from Contract Documents.
D. Resubmittal Preparation:
1. Comply with requirements described in Submittal Preparation above, and in addition:
a. Identify on transmittal form submittal is resubmission.
b. Make corrections or changes in submittals required by ENGINEER'S notations on
returned submittal.
� c. Respond to ENGINEER'S notations:
1) On transmittal or separate page attached to CONTRACTOR'S resubmission
transmittal, answer or acknowledge in writing notations or questions indicated by
ENGINEER on ENGINEER'S transmittal form returning reviewed submission to
CONTRACTOR.
_ 2) Identify each response by question or notation number established by ENGINEER.
3) If CONTRACTOR does not respond to each notation or question, resubmission
will be returned without action by ENGINEER until CONTRACTOR provides
written response to ENGINEER'S notations or questions.
d. CONTRACTOR-initiated revisions or variations.
1) On transmittal form, identify variations or revisions from previously reviewed
"— submittal, other than those called for by ENGINEER.
2) ENGINEER'S responsibility for variations or revisions is established in the Actions
On Submittals paragraph of this section.
1.03 SPECIFIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Specific submittal requirements for individual units of Work are specified in applicable
Specification section. Except as otherwise indicated in Specification sections, comply with
_ requirements specified below for each indicated type of submittal.
"" 01340-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. If ENGINEER has responded to Written Clarification/Interpretation/Request submitted by
CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR shall include ENGINEER'S response with applicable
submittal.
B. Requests for Substitute Items:
1. Collect data for items to be submitted for review as substitute items into one submittal for
each item of material or equipment.
2. Include completed "Contractor's Application for Consideration of Substitution" form as
required by Supplementary Conditions.
3. Submit with other scheduled submittals for material or equipment allowing time for
ENGINEER to evaluate additional information required to be submitted.
4. If CONTRACTOR requests to substitute for material or equipment specified,but not identified
in Specification as requiring submittals, CONTRACTOR shall indicate substitution submittal
in Submittal Schedule.
5. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer to
determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that
named and an acceptable substitute therefore. Requests for review of proposed substitute
items of material or equipment will not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than
Contractor.
6. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed substitute item
of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application:
a. shall certify that the proposed substitute item will:
1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general
design,
2) be similar in substance to that specified, and
3) a suited to the same use as that specified;
b will state:
1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice
Contractor's achievement of Substantial Completion on time,
2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any
of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with
Owner for other work on the Project)to adapt the design to the proposed substitute
item, and
3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the
Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty;
c will identify:
1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified, and
2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and
d. shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or
indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and claims of
other contractors affected by any resulting change.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit newly prepared information,with graphic information at accurate scale and name of
preparer indicated (firm name). Show dimensions and note which are based on field
measurement, identify materials and equipment included in Work, and revisions on
resubmittals. Indicate compliance with standards and notation of coordination requirements
with other Work. Encircle, bubble or otherwise indicate selections of products or materials
01340-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
and/or variations from Contract Documents or previous submittals. Highlighting may be used
in addition to circling or bubbling of appropriate materials or variations from Contract
— Documents or previous submittals to direct the attention of the reviewer, but may not be
utilized exclusively due to the difficulty in continuity of selections through copying and/or
scanning of the submittal. Other acceptable means of selection of materials, products or
variations from Contract Documents or previous submittals include striking out selections not
— included as part of the submittal, providing an arrow pointing directly to the selection or other
means that remain after copying and/or scanning.
2. Provide 8 in. by 3 in. blank space for CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER stamps.
D. Product Data:
1. Preparation:
a. Collect required data into single submittal for each unit of Work or system. Where
product data includes information on several similar materials or equipment, some of
_ which are not required for use on Project or not included in submittal, mark copies to
show which items are not applicable to Project.
b. Where product data must be specially prepared for equipment, materials or systems,
because standard printed data is not suitable for use,submit data as Shop Drawing and
not as product data.
2. Submittals:
_ a. Submit 6 copies.
b. Submittal is final when ENGINEER returns submittal marked"No Exception Taken", or
"Make Corrections Noted".
3. Distribution:
_ a. Maintain one set of product data (for each submittal) at Project site, available for
reference by ENGINEER and others.
E. Samples:
1. Preparation:
a. Provide samples physically identical with proposed materials or equipment to be
incorporated into Work. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in
material or product represented by sample, submit multiple units (not less than 3)
showing approximate limits of variations.
b. Provide full set of option samples where selection by ENGINEER is required.
C. Include information with each sample to show generic description, source or product
name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards.
d. Submit samples for ENGINEER'S visual review of general generic kind, color, pattern,
texture, and for final check of coordination of these characteristics with other related
elements of Work.
e. Mock-ups and similar samples specified in Specification sections are recognized as
special type of samples. Comply with samples submittal requirements to greatest
extent possible.
2. Submittals:
a. At CONTRACTOR'S option, and depending upon nature of anticipated response from
ENGINEER, initial submittal of samples may be preliminary or final submittal.
b. Preliminary submittal, of single set of samples, required where Specification's indicate
ENGINEER'S selection of color, pattern, texture or similar characteristics from
01340-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
manufacturer's range of standard choices is necessary. Preliminary submittals will be
reviewed and returned with ENGINEER'S "Action" noted.
c. Final Submittals: Submit 3 sets of samples in final submittal, 1 set will be returned.
3. Distribution:
a. Maintain returned set of samples at Project site, in suitable condition and available for
quality control comparisons throughout course of performing Work.
F. Test Results:
1. Preparation:
a. Identify each test by Specification section and type of test.
2. Submittals: _.
a. Submit 3 copies.
b. Submittal is to confirm that results of tests verify materials, products, and systems _
comply with Contract Documents and are not for approval.
3. Distribution:
a. Unless otherwise required in Specifications, test results shall be submitted to
ENGINEER'S field office or if ENGINEER has no field office to ENGINEER'S office.
G. Miscellaneous:
1. Guarantees, Warranties, Maintenance Agreements, and Workmanship Bonds:
a. Refer to Specification sections for requirements. Submittal is considered final when
submittal returned by ENGINEER,marked"No Exceptions Taken"or"Make Corrections
Noted".
b. In addition to copies desired for CONTRACTOR'S use, furnish 2 executed copies.
Provide 2 additional copies where required for maintenance data.
2. Certifications:
a. Refer to Specification sections for requirement on submittal of certifications. Submit
6 copies. Certifications are submitted for review of conformance with specified
requirements and information. —
3. Closeout Submittals:
a. Refer to Specification sections and Section 01788 for requirements on submittal of
closeout information, materials, tools, and similar items.
1) Materials and Tools: Spare parts, extra and overrun stock, maintenance �—
tools and devices, keys, and similar physical units to be submitted.
2) Operating and maintenance data.
H. Operating and Maintenance(O&M) Data: —
1. Organize operations and maintenance information into suitable sets of manageable size,and
bind into individual binders properly identified and indexed (thumb-tabbed). Include
emergency instructions, safety precautions, spare parts listing, copies of warranties, wiring
01340-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
diagrams, recommended "turn-around" cycles, inspection procedures, Shop Drawings,
Product Data, and similar applicable information.
a. Manufacturer's printed instructions regarding safety precautions for both(a)protection
of personnel operating equipment and systems and (b) prevention of damage to
equipment and systems.
_ b. Shop Drawings and other submittals included in O&M data shall be corrected to include,
in same format and style as original submittal, review comments.
c. Data may be submitted on CD Rom if approved by ENGINEER.
2. Binders: Commercial quality D-Ring binder with durable and cleanable plastic covers.
Paperboard and laminated paperboard covers are not acceptable.
a. Do not fill binders to more than 75% of capacity.
b. When multiple binders are used for an item of equipment,organize contents into related
groupings. Each binder cover shall bear identification of specific contents.
3. Cover Label: Label each binder cover and spine with typed or printed title "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and following:
— a. Project title.
b. Name(s) of applicable building(s) or structure(s) as shown on Drawings in which
equipment located.
_ c. Name of equipment as set forth in Contract Documents.
d. Specification section number for equipment as set forth in Contract Documents.
4. Submit after equipment requiring O&M data has been returned "No Exceptions Taken" or
— "Make Corrections Noted".
5. Submit 6 copies of each manual.
I. General Distribution:
1. Unless required elsewhere, provide distribution of submittals to Subcontractors, suppliers,
governing authorities, and others as necessary for proper performance of Work.
— 2. Provide copies of submittals bearing ENGINEER'S action stamp to:
a. Job site file.
b. Record documents file.
1.04 ACTION ON SUBMITTALS
_ A. ENGINEER'S Action:
1. General:
— a. Except for submittals for record and similar purposes, where action and return on
submittals is required or requested, ENGINEER will review each submittal, mark with
appropriate action, and return. Where submittal must be held for coordination,
_ ENGINEER will so advise CONTRACTOR without delay.
b. ENGINEER will stamp each submittal with uniform, self-explanatory action stamp,
appropriately marked with submittal action.
c. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance with
'— the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to Engineer. Engineer's review and approval will
be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or
incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents
._ and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning
whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.
•— 01340-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
d. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method,
technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called
for by the Contract Documents)or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto.
The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the
assembly in which the item functions.
e. Engineer's review and approval shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any
variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has
complied with the requirements of requestfor substitution items and Engineer has given
written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated
in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample. Engineer's review and approval shall
not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of
submittal procedure coordination.
2. Notification of Insufficient Information:
a. If information submitted is not sufficient to complete review of submittal, ENGINEERwill
send transmittal to CONTRACTOR notifying CONTRACTOR that additional information
is required. _
b. Submittal will be placed in an "On Hold" status and not returned until CONTRACTOR
provides additional information.
3. Unsolicited Submittals: ENGINEER will return unsolicited submittals to CONTRACTOR
without reviewing.
4. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is
functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will
be required, it may be considered by Engineer as an "or equal" item, in which case review —
and approval of the proposed item may, in Engineer's sole discretion, be accomplished
without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute
items. A proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an _
item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that:
1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance,
strength, and design characteristics;
2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results
imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole;and
3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service.
b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: —
1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract Times; and
2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the
Contract Documents.
B. Action Stamp:
1. Marking: No Exceptions Taken.
a. Final Unrestricted Release: When submittals are marked as "No Exceptions Taken", _
Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with Contract Documents.
Acceptance of Work depends on that compliance.
01340-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Marking: Make Corrections Noted.
— a. Final-But-Restricted Release: When submittals are marked as "Make Corrections
Noted Exceptions", Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with
ENGINEER'S notations or corrections on submittal and with Contract Documents.
Acceptance of Work depends on that compliance. Resubmittal not required.
3. Marking: Rejected; See Remarks.
a. Submittal Not Accepted: When submittals are marked as"Rejected;See Remarks",do
not proceed with Work covered by submittal. Work covered by submittal does not
comply with Contract Documents.
b. Prepare new submittal for different material or equipment supplier or different product
line or material of same supplier complying with Contract Documents.
4. Marking: Revise and Resubmit.
a. Returned for Resubmittal: When submittals are marked as"Revise and Resubmit,"do
not proceed with Work covered by submittal. Do not permit Work covered by submittals
to be used at Project site or elsewhere where Work is in progress.
r b. Revise submittal or prepare new submittal in accordance with ENGINEER'S notations in
accordance with resubmittal requirements of this section. Resubmit without delay.
Repeat if required to obtain different action marking.
PART PRODUCTS
— (Not Used)
_ PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
*** END OF SECTION
01340-9 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 01455
TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Employ and pay for services of testing laboratory approved by OWNER to p-rform specified
services and testing as described in Specifications.
1. Employment of laboratory shall, in no way, relieve CONTRACTOR';; obligations to
perform Work of Contract.
B. Related Requirements in Other Parts of Contract Documents:
-- 1. Inspections and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulat ons, orders or
approvals of public authorities, Conditions of Contract.
1.02 QUALIFICATION OF LABORATORY
A. Meet basic requirements of ASTM E329.
B. Authorized to operate in state in which Project is located.
C. Testing Equipment:
1. Calibrated at reasonable intervals by devices of accuracy traceable to eitl er:
a. National Bureau of Standards.
b. Accepted values of natural physical constants.
1.03 LABORATORY DUTIES
A. Cooperate with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR; provide qualified personnel to perform Work
after due Notice to Proceed.
_ B. Perform specified inspections, secure samples, and test materials.
1. Comply with specified standards.
2. Ascertain compliance of materials with Contract Documents.
C. Promptly notify ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR of observed irregularities or deficiencies of
Work, equipment or material.
D. Promptly submit written report of each test and inspection; one copy each to ENGINEER,
OWNER, material supplier and CONTRACTOR, and one copy to record docu rent file. Each
report shall include following:
1. Date issued.
2. Project title and number.
3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number.
4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
5. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
6. Record of temperature and weather conditions if test performed in field.
7. Date of test.
01455-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
8. Identification of product and Specification section.
9. Location of sample or test in Project.
10. Type of inspection or test.
11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents.
12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by ENGINEER.
E. Perform additional tests as required by ENGINEER or CONTRACTOR.
1.04 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY
A. Laboratory is not authorized to:
1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
2. Approve or accept any portion of Work.
3. Perform duties of CONTRACTOR.
1.05 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Cooperate with laboratory personnel and provide access to Work.
B. Provide to laboratory preliminary design mix proposed to be used for concrete and other
material mixes which require control by testing laboratory.
C. Furnish copies of product test reports.
D. Furnish incidental labor and facilities.
1. Provide access to Work to be tested.
2. Obtain and handle samples at Project site or at source of product to be tested.
3. Facilitate inspections and tests.
4. Store and cure test samples.
E. Notify laboratory and ENGINEER sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for laboratory
assignment of personnel and scheduling of tests.
1. When tests or inspections cannot be performed after such notice, reimburse OWNER for
laboratory personnel and travel expenses incurred due to CONTRACTOR'S negligence.
F. Make arrangements with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required for
CONTRACTOR'S convenience.
G. Employ and pay for services of testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling
and testing required when initial tests indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents.
PART PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
** * END OF SECTION * **
01455-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 01455A
TESTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Measurement and Payment:
1. Testing and furnishing of samples required to be provided by CONTRACTOR will not be paid
for separately but shall be considered incidental to unit price of item to which it applies unless
called for specifically to be paid separately in the Bid Items.
B. CONTRACTOR shall employ services of independent testing laboratory approved by OWNER to
perform testing as described in the SUDAS specifications and the following sections:
1. Section 02315: Structural Excavation and Backfill.
C. CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with ENGINEER to facilitate execution of assurance testing
— deemed necessary by ENGINEER.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Production Testing:
1. Materials produced off-site and incorporated into Work shall comply with the Contract
Documents.
a. Provide certifications of compliance.
2. On-site testing to confirm that material or equipment comply with Contract Document shall be
provided by CONTRACTOR.
-- a. On-site testing to confirm that methods used by CONTRACTOR result in conformance
with Contract Documents shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. ENGINEER will not
perform production testing, but CONTRACTOR shall inform ENGINEER of production
testing schedule so ENGINEER, at ENGINEER'S option, may observe testing.
b. CONTRACTOR is responsible that materials and completed construction comply with
Contract Documents.
B. Assurance Testing:
1. Testing performed on-site by ENGINEER or an independent testing laboratory to determine if
CONTRACTOR'S work or materials comply with Contract Documents.
2. Materials used for assurance testing shall be furnished by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR
shall provide labor and equipment needed to provide access to areas for assurance testing.
This includes, but is not limited to, excavation of backfill to various depths for testing.
_ 3. Density of subgrades, trench backfill and crushed stone bases/surfaces.
a. CONTRACTOR shall employ an independent testing laboratory to gather, test and
report on representative earth samples and to provide results of Standard Proctor
Density test in accordance with Iowa DOT Materials Laboratory Test Method 103.
Samples tested shall be representative of earth materials used for backfilling structures
and trenches.
"' 01455A-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. CONTRACTOR shall employ an independent testing laboratory to gather representative
crushed stone base/surface materials and provide the results of Standard Proctor
Density test in accordance with Iowa DOT Materials Laboratory Test Method 103.
C. Results of assurance testing or production testing provided by CONTRACTOR shall, in no way,
relieve CONTRACTOR of obligations to comply with Contract Documents.
PART 2 MATERIALS —
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used) --
*** END OF SECTION
01455A-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 01500
TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND UTILITIES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory(NRTL).
1. Term "RTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms"listed"and"labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code(NEC),Article 100.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
C. Complywith federal,state, and local codes and regulations,and with utility company requirements.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. General:
1. Temporary lighting shall be sufficient to enable CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors to
complete Work and enable ENGINEER to observe Work as it is being performed.
Illumination shall meet or exceed state code requirements.
B. Responsibilities:
1. Provide, maintain, and remove temporary electric service facilities.
2. Facilities exposed to weather shall be weatherproof type and electrical equipment enclosure
locked to prevent access by unauthorized personnel.
3. Pay for installation of temporary services including poles,transformer charges,and metering.
4. Arrange with local electric utility for temporary electric service subject to their requirements
and approval.
5. Register temporary meter in CONTRACTOR'S name.
6. Provide and maintain lamps, wiring, switches, sockets, and similar equipment required for
temporary lighting and small power tools.
7. Pay for electrical energy consumed for construction purposes including operation of
ventilating equipment for heating of buildings, and for testing and operating of equipment
after permanent wiring has been installed, until final acceptance by ENGINEER or until
occupancy by OWNER.
8. Provide and pay for service to temporary offices.
2.02 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Arrange with local telephone company to provide telephone service throughout duration of Work.
B. Locate telephone in Project construction office for local calls.
2.03 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Water is not available at Project site. Make arrangements and pay costs to obtain suitable water.
—� 01500-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.04 WATER FOR TESTING
A. CONTRACTOR shall provide water necessary for testing prior to acceptance of Work, unless
specifically stated otherwise in Specifications for equipment, system or facility.
2.05 SANITARY FACILITIES
A. No sanitary facilities are available on site.
B. Provide temporary sanitary toilet facilities conforming to state and local health and sanitation
regulations, in sufficient number for use of ENGINEER'S, CONTRACTOR'S and Subcontractor's
employees.
C. Maintain in sanitary condition and provide supply of toilet paper.
2.06 TEMPORARY FIRE PROTECTION
A. Provide and maintain in working order, minimum of one fire extinguisher at each work location,and
such other fire protective equipment and devices as would be reasonably effective in extinguishing
fires during early stages by personnel at Project site.
2.07 TEMPORARY SITE AND OTHER ROADS
A. Construct and maintain temporary site roadways in snow free,ice free, drivable condition necessary
to carry out construction operations.
B. Maintain OWNER'S existing on-site roads and public roads used during construction free from
accumulations of dirt, mud and construction debris resulting from construction operations. Roads
shall be considered "maintained" when material has been removed by sweeper.
2.08 SECURITY
A. Security will not be provided by OWNER.
B. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for loss or injury to persons or property where Work is
involved, and shall provide security and take precautionary measures to protect CONTRACTOR'S
and OWNER'S interests.
2.09 TEMPORARY PARKING
A. There shall be no parking on Project site outside of active work area unless designated or approved
by OWNER.
B. Make arrangements and pay for parking area for employee's vehicles.
2.10 TEMPORARY FENCING
A. Provide temporary fencing sufficient to prevent trespass by CONTRACTOR'S and Subcontractor's
employees and Suppliers onto private property and by public onto construction site.
B. Materials shall be sufficiently durable to be effective for Contract Time.
2.11 FIELD OFFICES AND BUILDINGS
A. If required by CONTRACTOR, erect where designated by OWNER,and maintain in good condition,
temporary field office, tool, and storage building(s) or trailer(s)for CONTRACTOR'S use.
01500-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1. Tool storage building(s) or trailer(s) shall be of ample size to provide space for tools and
equipment.
-- 2. Building(s) or trailer (s) shall be neat and well constructed, surfaced with plywood, drop
siding, masonite, or other similar material, well painted and void of advertisements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Comply with applicable requirements specified in Divisions 15 and 16.
B. Maintain and operate systems to ensure continuous service.
C. Modify and extend systems as Work progress requires.
3.02 REMOVAL AND RESTORATION
A. Completely remove temporary materials,equipment,signs,and structures when no longer required.
B. In unfinished areas, clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of temporary
facilities, restore drainage, and evenly grade, seed or plant as necessary to provide appearance
equal to or better than original.
— C. In finished areas, restore existing or permanent facilities used for temporary services to specified or
original condition.
3.03 DAMAGE TO EXISTING PROPERTY
A. CONTRACTOR is responsible for replacing or repairing damage to existing buildings, structures,
sidewalks, roads, parking lot surfacing, and other existing assets.
B. CONTRACTOR shall have option of having OWNER contract for such Work and have cost
deducted from Contract price.
*** END OF SECTION
01500-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 01570
PROTECTION OF ENVIRONMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. CONTRACTOR, in executing Work, shall maintain Work areas on- and off-site free from
environmental pollution that would be in violation of federal, state or local regulations.
B. Payment:
1. Consider Work specified in this section incidental and include payment as part of appropriate
lump sum or unit prices specified in Bid Form.
1.02 PROTECTION OF STORM SEWERS
A. Prevent construction material, pavement, concrete, earth or other debris from entering existing
storm sewer or sewer structure.
1.03 PROTECTION OF WATERWAYS
A. Observe rules and regulations of State of Iowa and agencies of U.S. govern vent prohibiting
pollution of lakes, streams, rivers or wetlands by dumping of refuse, rubbish, Iredge material,
discharge of wastewater, or debris.
- 1. Permits obtained by OWNER are contained in Project Forms.
2. Other permits shall be obtained by CONTRACTOR at CONTRACTOR'S cost.
B. Provide holding ponds or approved method which will divert flows, including storm flows and flows
created by construction activity, to prevent excessive silting of waterways or flooding damage to
property.
C. Comply with Section 9040 of the SUDAS Specifications.
D. CONTRACTOR shall comply with Iowa Department of Natural Resources National Pollution
Discharge Elimination System, (NPDES)Storm Water permit for construction site activities. As a
minimum, CONTRACTOR is required to prepare, submit, and comply with following.
1. Notice of Intent(NO[).
2. Storm Water Pollution Plan.
1.04 DISPOSAL OF EXCESS EXCAVATED AND OTHER WASTE MATERIALS
A. Excess excavated material not required or not suitable for backfill and other waste material shall be
disposed of in accordance with local regulatory requirements.
B. Provide watertight conveyance for liquid,semi-liquid or saturated solids which tend to bleed during
transport. Liquid loss from transported materials is not permitted, whether b6ng delivered to
construction site or hauled away for disposal. Fluid materials hauled for d sposal must be
specifically acceptable at selected disposal site.
1.05 PROTECTION OF AIR QUALITY
_ A. Minimize air pollution by requiring use of properly operating combustion emission control devices on
construction vehicles and equipment and encourage shutdown of motorized equipment not in use.
B. Do not burn trash on construction site.
01570-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. If temporary heating devices are necessary for protection of Work,they shall not cause air pollution.
1.06 THAWING OF FROZEN GROUND
A. Obtain permit from appropriate local authority before building fire to thaw frozen ground, and
comply with conditions of permit.
B. Use fuel which does not create air pollution or inconvenience public.
C. ENGINEER reserves right to prohibit fires for thawing whenever deemed undesirable.
1.07 USE OF CHEMICALS
A. Chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation,whether herbicide,
pesticide,disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification,shall be approved by U.S. EPA or —
U.S. Department of Agriculture or any other applicable regulatory agency.
B. Use and disposal of chemicals and residues shall comply with manufacturer's instructions. _
1.08 NOISE CONTROL
A. Conduct operations to cause least annoyance to residents in vicinity of Work, and comply with
applicable local ordinances.
B. Equip compressors, hoists, and other apparatus with mechanical devices necessary to minimize
noise and dust. Equip compressors with silencers on intake lines.
C. Equip gasoline or oil-operated equipment with silencers or mufflers on intake and exhaust lines.
D. Line storage bins and hoppers with material that will deaden sounds.
E. Conduct operation of dumping rock and of carrying rock away in trucks so as to cause minimum of
noise and dust.
F. Route vehicles carrying rock, concrete or other material over such streets as will cause least
annoyance to public and do not operate on public streets between hours of 6:00 p.m. and _
7:00 a.m., or on Saturdays, Sundays or legal holidays unless approved by OWNER.
1.09 DUST CONTROL
A. Due to close geographic location of Project to other off-site facilities and residential homes, take
special care in providing and maintaining temporary site roadways, OWNER'S existing roads, and
public roads used during construction operations in clean, dust free condition. _
B. Comply with local environmental regulations for dust control. If CONTRACTOR'S dust control
measures are considered inadequate by ENGINEER, ENGINEER may require CONTRACTOR to
take additional dust control measures.
1.10 FUELS AND LUBRICANTS
A. Complywith local, state and federal regulations concerning transportation and storage offuels and
lubricants.
B. Fuel storage area and fuel equipment shall be approved by OWNER prior to installation. Submit
containment provisions to OWNER for approval.
C. Report spills or leaks from fueling equipment or construction equipment to OWNER and cleanup as
required.
01570-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
D. OWNER may require CONTRACTOR to remove damaged or leaking equipment from Project site.
1.11 PILE AND SHEATHING DRIVING NOISE
A. If piles are required, use only pile driver hammers with mufflers capable of significantly reducing
noise and use barriers or shielding techniques, as necessary, to comply with applicable federal,
state, and local ordinances.
PART PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
(Not Used)
END OF SECTION
�- 01570-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 01600
MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBSTITUTIONS AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
A. General:
1. When equipment or material is specified by naming 1 or more equipment manufacturers or
material suppliers and followed by words "no substitution permitted" or similar wording,
CONTRACTOR shall provide one of named manufacturers or suppliers.
B. Substitutions:
1. For material or equipment specified by naming one or more equipment manufacturers or
material suppliers and not followed bywords"or equal,"CONTRACTOR shall submit request
for substitution in accordance with Section 01340 for equipment or manufacturer not
specifically named.
-- 2. CONTRACTOR'S requests for changes in equipment and materials from those required by
Contract Documents are considered "requests for substitutions" and subject to
CONTRACTOR'S representations and review provisions of Contract Documents when one or
more of following conditions are satisfied.
a. Where required equipment or material cannot be provided within Contract Time, but not
as result of CONTRACTOR'S failure to pursue Work promptly or coordinate various
activities properly.
b. Where packaging of several items of equipment from single source will provide
maintenance and coordination advantages to OWNER.
_ c. When CONTRACTOR proposes to provide substitute equipment or material to provide
OWNER with cost savings.
C. "Or Equal": For material or equipment specified by naming one or more equipment manufacturer
-- followed by the words"or equal",CONTRACTOR shall submit in accordance with Section 01340 for
equipment or manufacturer not specifically named. ENGINEER will review submittal in accordance
with Section 01340.
D. Conditions which are not substitutions:
1. Requirements for substitutions do not apply to CONTRACTOR options on materials and
equipment provided for in Specifications.
2. Revisions to Contract Documents, where requested by OWNER or ENGINEER, are
"changes" not"substitutions."
3. CONTRACTOR'S determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders
issued by governing authorities do not constitute substitutions or basis for Change Orders,
except as provided for in Contract Documents.
_ 1.02 REUSE OF EXISTING MATERIAL
A. Except as specifically indicated or specified, do not use materials and equipment removed from
existing structure(s) in new Work.
B. For material and equipment specifically indicated or specified to be reused in Work:
_ 1. Use special care in removal, handling,storage, and reinstallation to ensure properfunction in
completed Work.
2. Arrange and pay for transportation, storage, and handling of products which require off-site
storage, restoration or renovation.
01600-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Off-site storage areas and buildings shall conform to requirements of this section.
1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Installation of equipment and materials shall comply with manufacturer's instructions. Obtain and _
distribute printed copies of such instructions to parties involved in installation, including 2 copies to
ENGINEER.
1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at Site during installation and until completion of _
Work.
B. Handle,store, install,connect, clean,condition,and adjust materials and equipment in accordance _
with manufacturer's written instructions and in conformance with Specifications.
1. If Site conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's instructions,consult
ENGINEER for further instructions. Do not proceed with Work without written instructions.
1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING
A. Arrange deliveries of materials and equipment in accordance with construction Progress Schedule;
coordinate to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at site.
1. Deliver materials and equipment in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original _
containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible.
2. Protect bright machined surfaces,such as shafts and valve faces,with heavy coat of grease
prior to shipment.
3. Upon delivery, inspect shipments to ensure compliance with Contract Documents and
approved submittals,and materials and equipment have been protected and are undamaged.
B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle materials and equipment by methods recommended by _
manufacturer to prevent soiling or damage to materials or equipment, or their packaging.
1.05 STORAGE, PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
A. OWNER assumes no responsibility for damage or loss due to storage of materials and equipment.
B. Interior Storage: _
1. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
2. Store materials and equipment subject to damage by elements in weathertight enclosures.
3. Maintain temperature and humidity within ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.C. Exterior Storage:
1. Store fabricated materials and equipment above ground, on blocking or skids, to prevent
soiling or staining. Cover materials and equipment subject to deterioration with impervious
sheet coverings. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation.
2. Store loose granular materials in well-drained area on solid surfaces to prevent mixing with
foreign matter.
3. Store materials such as pipe, reinforcing steel, structural steel, and equipment on pallets or
racks, off ground.
D. Inspection and Maintenance:
1. Arrange storage to provide easy access for inspection, maintenance, and inventory. _
2. Make periodic inspections of stored materials and equipment to ensure materials and
equipment maintained under specified conditions are free from damage or deterioration,and
coverings are in-place and in condition to provide required protection.
01600-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Perform maintenance on stored material and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions and in presence of OWNER or ENGINEER.
a. Notify ENGINEER 24 hrs before performance of maintenance.
b. Submit report of completed maintenance and condition of coverings to ENGINEER with
each Application for Payment.
C. Failure to perform maintenance,to notify ENGINEER of intent to perform maintenance
or to submit maintenance report may result in rejection of material or equipment.
E. Assume responsibility for protection of completed construction and repair and restore damage to
completed Work equal to original condition.
F. Wheeling of loads over finished floors,with or without plank protection, is not permitted in anything
except rubber-tired wheelbarrows, buggies, trucks or dollies. This applies to finished floors and
exposed concrete floors, as well as those covered with composition tile or other applied surfacing.
G. Where structural concrete is also finished surface, avoid marking or damaging surface.
1.06 SPECIAL TOOLS, SPARE PARTS AND LUBRICATING EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations,special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance. Special tools are those specially designed or
adapted for use on parts of equipment, and not customarily and routinely carried by maintenance
mechanics.
1. Tools and lubricating equipment shall be of quality compatible to equipment manufacturer
has furnished.
B. Deliver to OWNER before operating personnel have been instructed in operation, repair and
maintenance of equipment and unit is placed in operation.
C. Mark spare parts and special tools to identify associated equipment by name, equipment,and part
number. Package parts for protection against damage during shipping, handling and storage. Ship
spare parts and special tools in boxes marked to indicate contents.
1.07 LUBRICATION
A. Where lubrication is required for proper operation of equipment, incorporate necessary and proper
provisions in equipment in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. Where possible,
lubrication shall be automated and positive.
B. Where oil is used, reservoir shall be of sufficient capacity to supply unit for 24 hr period.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Material and Equipment Incorporated into Work:
1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards.
2. Comply with size, make, type, and quality specified or as approved by Submittal.
B. Manufactured and Fabricated Materials and Equipment:
1. Design,fabricate,and assemble in accordance with engineering and shop practices standard
with industry.
2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, to be
interchangeable.
01600-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Two or more items of same kind shall be identical, by same manufacturer.
4. Material and equipment shall be suitable for service conditions.
5. Equipment capabilities,sizes,and dimensions shown or specified shall be adhered to,unless
variations are specifically approved, in writing.
6. Equipment shall be adapted to best economy in power consumption and maintenance. Parts _
and components shall be proportioned for stresses occurring during continuous or
intermittent operation,and for additional stresses occurring during fabrication or installation.
7. Design so working parts are readily accessible for inspection and repair, easily duplicated,
and replaced. —�
C. Do not use material or equipment for purpose other than for which it is designed or specified.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL; INSTALLATION, INSTRUCTIONAL, AND POST STARTUP
SERVICES
A. General:
1. Provide on-site services of Supplier's representatives for equipment provided by
CONTRACTOR during construction, installation, equipment startup, and training of
OWNER'S personnel for equipment or plant operation as specifically required in Specification
section for equipment or system.
2. Include and pay costs for Supplier's services.
3. Work day is defined as 8 hr period during OWNER'S or CONTRACTOR'S typical calendar
day. Work day for purposes of this section does not include travel to or from Site.
4. Specifications include minimum mandays to provide basis for bidding. If additional time is
required to perform services CONTRACTOR shall include that time in Contract Price.
B. Installation Services:
1. Where installation services are called for in Specifications, provide competent and
experienced technical representatives of manufacturers of material or equipment and
systems to resolve assembly or installation procedures attributable to, or associated with,
equipment furnished.
2. After equipment is installed, representatives shall perform initial equipment and system _
adjustment and calibration to conform to Specifications and manufacturer's requirements and
instructions.
3. Provide"Certificate of Installation Services"stating proper adjustments have been made to
equipment or system and equipment or system is ready for startup and system
demonstration. Use form in Project Forms and furnish 2 copies to ENGINEER.
C. Instructional Services:
1. Do not start Instructional Services until Installation Services have been completed.
2. Where Instructional Services are called for in Specifications, provide competent and
experienced technical representative of Supplier to provide detailed instructions to OWNER'S
personnel for operation of equipment. Training services shall include operation and
maintenance of instrumentation and equipment in classroom and on-site. Training shall
include electrical, mechanical, and safety aspects of equipment. _
3. Submit documentation identifying name of specific representative,factory authorization,and
background of named individual(s)to conduct training. Submit information 30 days before
scheduled training period for review and approval by ENGINEER.
4. Coordinate training periods with ENGINEER and OWNER and Supplier's representatives.
a. No training shall be conducted unless instructor has been approved by ENGINEER.
b. Notify ENGINEER at least 48 hrs before training sessions are to begin so ENGINEER
can make arrangements with OWNER'S operating personnel. _
01600-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
c. Reschedule canceled training sessions 48 hrs in advance.
d. Failure of Supplier's or manufacturer's representative to appear for scheduled training,
failure to notify ENGINEER 24 hrs in advance of need to cancel scheduled training or
failure to arrive within 30 min of start of scheduled training shall result in reimbursement
to OWNER for time lost by OWNER'S personnel in waiting for arrival of manufacturer's
representative. Except in case of failure to arrive on time, time will not exceed 1 hr for
each employee scheduled to receive training. Failure to arrive on time will be
reimbursed by actual time late, up to 1 hr, after 1 hr training will be rescheduled.
e. Failure of Supplier's or manufacturer's representative to appear for scheduled training,
failure to notify ENGINEER 24 hrs in advance of need to cancel scheduled training or
failure to arrive within 30 min of start of scheduled training shall result in reimbursement
to OWNER for expenses and time incurred by ENGINEER in traveling and time spent
on-site. Minimum time billed shall be 8 hrs.
5. Similar types of equipment differing in model,size or manufacturer shall require equal service
time as stated in specific Specification section.
6. O&M data shall constitute basis of instruction.
a. Review data contents with personnel in full detail to explain aspects of operations and
maintenance.
7. Instructional Services shall be completed before start of system demonstration as required.
8. Provide "Certificate of Instructional Services", cosigned by OWNER and Supplier's
representative, verifying training has been accomplished to satisfaction of each party. Use
form in Project Forms and furnish 2 copies to ENGINEER.
END OF SECTION
01600-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
CERTIFICATE OF INSTALLATION SERVICES
(Reference Specification Section 01600)
Project
Equipment
Specification Section
Contract
I hereby certify the equipment supplier/manufacturer has inspected this equipment and that it has been
properly installed, adjusted, and calibrated. I further certify this equipment may now be operated for test
purposes and/or normal use.
MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Signature Date
Name(print)
Title _
Representing
CONTRACTOR
Signature Date
Name(print)
Title
This form shall be completed and submitted to ENGINEER prior to training of OWNER'S personnel.
01600-6 S.Lift Station Force Main-60249213.16
CERTIFICATE OF INSTRUCTIONAL SERVICES
(Reference Specification Section 01600)
Project
Equipment
Specification Section
Contract
I hereby certify that the equipment supplier/manufacturer has instructed OWNER'S personnel in the startup
operation and maintenance of this equipment as required in the Specifications.
CONTRACTOR
Signature Date
Name(print)
Title
OWNER
I hereby certify that my operating personnel received _days instruction from for startup,operation,
and maintenance of this equipment.
Signature Date
Name (print)
Title
Representing
COMMENTS:
01600-7 S.Lift Station Force Main-60249213.16
CERTIFICATE OF POST STARTUP SERVICES
(Reference Specification Section 01600)
Project
Equipment
Specification Section
Contract
I hereby certify that the equipment supplier/manufacturer has inspected this equipment, made adjustments
and calibrations, and that it is operating in conformance with the design, Specification, and manufacturer's
requirements. Notation of improper operation shall be detailed and recommendations made and attached to
this form.
MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE
Signature Date
Name (print)
Title
Representing R
CONTRACTOR
Signature Date
Name (print)
Title -.
OWNER
I hereby certify that the equipment supplier/manufacturer has inspected this equipment and made adjustments
and calibrations.
Signature Date .
Name (print)
Title
COMMENTS
This form shall be submitted to OWNER upon completion of 1-year reinspection as required by the
Specifications.
01600-8 S.Lift Station Force Main-60249213.16
SECTION 01785
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) DATA
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Compile data and related information in manuals appropriate for OWNER'S operation and
maintenance (O&M) of each item of equipment identified in other Specification sections.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preparation of data shall be performed by personnel:
1. Trained and experienced in O&M of described equipment.
2. Familiar with requirements of this section.
3. Skilled as technical writer to extent required to communicate essential data.
4. Skilled as drafter competent to prepare required drawings.
1.03 FORM OF MANUALS
A. Components:
1. Size: 8-1/2 in. by 11 in., or 11 in. by 17 in. folded, with standard 3-hole punching.
2. Paper: 20-lb minimum, white, for typed pages.
3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. Handwritten data is not acceptable.
4. Drawings:
a. Bind in with text.
b. Fold larger drawings and place in clear plastic pockets punched for inserting into binder.
Place identification on outside of each pocket.
B. Cover Label: Label each binder cover and spine with typed or printed title "OPERATION AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS" and following:
1. Project title.
_ 2. Name(s)of applicable building(s)or structure(s)as shown on Drawings in which equipment
located.
3. Name of equipment as set forth in Contract Documents.
4. Specification section number for equipment as set forth in Contract Documents.
C. Binders:
1. Commercial quality D-Ring binder with durable and cleanable plastic covers. Paperboard
and laminated paperboard covers are not acceptable.
2. Do not fill binders to more than 75% of capacity.
3. When multiple binders are used for an item of equipment, organize contents into related
_ groupings. Each binder cover shall bear identification of specific contents.
1.03 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE
A. Submit 6 copies of complete O&M data, bound in binders bearing identification label, for review
within 30 days after time CONTRACTOR receives approved Shop Drawings and other submittals
for equipment from ENGINEER.
'-" 01785-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. ENGINEER'S review and acceptance of O&M data will be only for conformance with requirements
of this section, for form of submittal and organization of data and completeness of information -
provided, but not for technical content or coordination between individual suppliers of equipment or
system(s).
C. CONTRACTOR shall review O&M submittal and complete Form 1, Contractor Submittal Form,
attached to this section indicating requirements of this section have been met before submitting to
ENGINEER. ENGINEER will reject submittals without completed Form 1.
D. ENGINEER will be sole judge of completeness of data.
1.04 PAYMENTS _
A. Progress payment for equipment delivered,stored or installed under these Contract Documents will
not be made until O&M data is approved by ENGINEER.
B. Progress payments for control systems packaged with equipment will not be made until O&M data
incorporated into equipment and control system manual is approved by ENGINEER.
PART2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL CONTENTS OF DATA
A. Each manual shall contain equipment data pertaining to not more than one Specification section
number indicated in Contract Documents.
B. Title Sheet: First page in data listing following:
1. Title: "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS."
2. Title of Project: As shown on Contract Documents.
3. Name(s) of applicable building(s) or structure(s) in which equipment is located.
4. Name of equipment as described in Contract Documents.
5. Specification section number for equipment.
6. CONTRACTOR'S name, address, and telephone number.
7. Subcontractor's name, address, and telephone number if equipment is provided by
Subcontractor.
8. CONTRACTOR'S or Subcontractor's purchase order number, manufacturer's shop order
number or other such numbers required for parts and service ordering.
9. Manufacturer's name, address, and telephone number.
10. Name, address, and telephone number for local source of supply for parts and service.
C. Equipment List: Immediately following title sheet containing following:
1. Completed Form 1, Contractor's Submittal Form.
D. Table of Contents: Immediately following equipment list. Arrange in logical, systematic order and
shall include as minimum each tabbed divider. Each page shall be numbered.
E. Tabbed Dividers: Insert tabbed section dividers between each major section
1. Provide title of section on each tab.
01785-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Provide table of contents for each tabbed section, arranged in systematic order.
F. Equipment Data Sheets: Provide catalog sheets showing configuration, manufacturer's
specifications, models, options, and styles of equipment and major components being provided.
Product data sheets will show project specific information with inapplicable information deleted by
crossing out or removal. Include in tabbed section(s).
G. Text:
1. Include only those sheets applicable to Project.
2. Each sheet shall:
a. Identify specific equipment or part installed.
b. Identify text applicable to equipment or part installed.
c. Do not include inapplicable information.
H. Drawings:
1. Supplement text with drawings to clearly illustrate following:
a. Equipment and components.
b. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems.
c. Control and flow diagrams.
2. Actual drawings of equipment from manufacturer. "Typical" drawings are not acceptable,
unless they accurately illustrate actual installation.
I. Specially written information, as required to supplement text for particular installation.
1. Provide explanation of interrelationships of equipment and components, and effects one
component has on another or entire system.
2. Provide overall instructions and procedures for equipment tying in instructions and
procedures for separate components into unified instructional package.
3. Provide glossary of special terms used by manufacturer.
4. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures.
5. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure.
J. Copy of each warranty, bond or service contract issued.
1. Provide information sheet for OWNER'S personnel to explain following.
a. Proper procedures in event of failure or malfunction to prevent voiding warranty.
b. Instances affecting validity of warranties or bonds.
3.02 SPECIFIC DATA FOR EACH EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
A. For each item of equipment and system include:
1. Completed Equipment Data Form typewritten on copy of Form 2 to Section 01785.
2. Description of equipment and component parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions.
b. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests as applicable.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
d. Complete nameplate data.
_ e. P&ID numbers for equipment as indicated on Drawings.
01785-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Operating Procedures:
a. Startup, break-in, and normal operating instructions.
b. Regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions.
c. Summer and winter operating instructions, as applicable. —
d. Special operating instructions.
4. Maintenance Procedures:
a. Routine maintenance operations.
b. Guide to troubleshooting.
c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions.
d. Alignment, adjusting, and checking instructions.
5. Servicing and Lubrication Schedule:
a. List of lubricants required and quantity to be applied.
b. Schedule of lubrication.
c. Schedule for other routine maintenance.
6. Manufacturer's printed instructions regarding safety precautions for both (a) protection of
personnel operating equipment and systems and(b) prevention of damage to equipment and
systems. —
7. Description of sequence of operation of controls.
8. Manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for
maintenance.
a. Predicted life of parts subject to wear.
b. Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts and quantities of same.
9. Approved control diagrams such as ladder diagrams, instrumentation loop diagrams, and —
electrical schematics as appropriate.
10. Bill of material.
11. Other data as required under applicable Specification sections. —
B. Each electric and electronic system,as applicable to equipment such as switchgear, motor control
centers, panel boards, switchboards, starters, breakers, and relays shall include: —
1. Description of System and Component Parts:
a. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. —
b. Performance curves, engineering data, rating tables, and tests as applicable.
c. Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.
d. Complete nameplate data. —
e. P&ID numbers for equipment as set forth on Drawings.
2. Circuit Directories of Panel Boards:
a. Electrical service.
b. Controls.
c. Communications.
3. Complete instrumentation loop diagrams with tabulated listing of components in each control
circuit or loop.
4. Operating Procedures: —
a. Routine and normal operating instructions.
01785-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Sequences required.
c. Special operating instructions.
5. Maintenance Procedures:
_ a. Routine maintenance operations.
b. Guide to troubleshooting.
c. Disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions.
d. Adjustment and checking instructions.
6. Manufacturer's printed instructions regarding safety precautions for both (a) protection of
personnel operating equipment and systems and(b) prevention of damage to equipment and
systems.
7. List of original manufacturer's spare parts and recommended quantities maintained in
storage.
8. Other data as required under pertinent sections of Specifications.
C. Prepare and include additional data when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction
of OWNER'S personnel or as requested by OWNER.
'— 01785-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
FORM 1 TO SECTION 01785 Page 1 of 5
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL FORM
TO: DATE:
(Engineer) SPECIFICATION
(Address) SECTION TITLE:
(City, State, Zip) SECTION NO.:
(Attn:) MANUFACTURER/
VENDOR:
FROM: NO. OF COPIES
(Contractor) SUBMITTED TO
(Address) ENGINEER:
(City, State, Zip) SIGNATURE OF
CONTRACTOR:
GENTLEMEN:
We have checked the O&M manual submittal dated , 20_, and have found it to be in
accordance with the requirements of Specification Section 01785 as noted below.
FORMAT
Size: 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17
Paper: 20-lb minimum
Text: Printed data/neatly typed
Drawings:Standard size bound in text; in text-size labeled envelopes
Tabbed Section Dividers
Cover Label: Title
Project name
Building/structure ID
Equipment name
Specification section
Binders: Plastic Cover
01785-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
FORM 1 TO SECTION 01785 Page 2 of 5
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL FORM
Provide Not Page
d Applicable No.
GENERAL CONTENTS
Onespecification only
Title Page
-Title
- Project title
- Building/structure ID
- Equipment name
- Specification section number
- Contractor ID
-Subcontractor ID
- Purchase order data
- Manufacturer ID
- Service/parts supplier ID
L_ Product List
Table of Contents
Tabbed Sections
- Pertinent data sheets
-Annotated as needed
Text
- Pertinent to project
-Annotated
Drawings
- Illustrate product and compone its
- Control and flow diagrams
01785-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
FORM 1 TO SECTION 01785 Page 3 of 5
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL FORM
Provide Not Page
d Applicable No.
GENERAL CONTENTS
Special Information
- Interrelationships of equipment and components
- Instructions and procedures provided
- Instructions organized in consistent format
- Instructions in logical sequence
- Glossary
Warranty, Bond, Service Contract
SPECIFIC CONTENTS EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS ONLY)
Description of Unit and Components
- Equipment functions
- Normal operating characteristics
- Limiting conditions
- Performance curves
- Engineering data
-Test data
- Replaceable parts list with numbers
- Nameplate data
- P&ID numbers
O.perating Procedures
-Startup
- Routine/normal operation
- Regulation and control
-Stopping and shutdown
- Emergency
01785-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
FORM 1 TO SECTION 01785 Page 4 of 5
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL FORM
Provide Not I Page
_ d Applicable No.
SPECIFIC CONTENTS EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS ONLY)
Operating Procedures continued
-Seasonal operation
-Special instructions
Maintenance Procedures
- Routine/normal instructions
-Troubleshooting uide
- Disassembly/reassembly/repair
Servicingand Lubrication
- List of lubricants
- Lubrication schedule
- Maintenance schedule
Safety Precautions/Features
Sequence of Operation of Controls
Assembly Drawings
Parts List and Illustrations
- Predicted life
-Spare parts list
Control Diagram s/Schematics
_ Bill of Materials
Completed Equipment Data Form per Specification
Other Data as Required
—' 01785-9 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
FORM 1 TO SECTION 01785 Page 5 of 5
CONTRACTOR SUBMITTAL FORM
Provide Not Page r
d Applicable I No.
SPECIFIC CONTENTS EQUIPMENT/SYSTEMS ONLY)
Description
- Equipment functions
- Normal operating characteristics
- Performance curves
- Engineering data -
-Test data
- Replaceable parts list with numbers
- Nameplate data
- P&ID numbers
Panel Board Directories
- Electrical
-Controls
- Communications
Instrumentation Loops
- Diagrams
- Components list each circuit/loop
Maintenance Procedures
- Routine/normal instructions
-Troubleshooting guide
- Disassembly/reassembly
-Adjusting and checking
Safety Precautions/Features
Spare Parts List
Additional Data
01785-10 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
FORM 2 TO SECTION 01785 Page 1 of 4
EQUIPMENT DATA FORM
PROJECT NAME
CONTRACT NO.
CONTRACTOR
EQUIPMENT NO. ASSET NO.*
DESCRIPTION MAINT. NO.*
LOCATION
MANUFACTURER
PURCHASED FROM
VENDOR ORDER NO. PURCHASE $
DATE OF PURCHASE
LOCAL SUPPLIER
ADDRESS
PHONE NO.
MODEL NO.
NO. OF UNITS SERIAL NOS.
*By Owner
01785-11 Dry Run Creek Ir,erceptor-60330823
FORM 2 TO SECTION 01785 Page 2 of 4
EQUIPMENT DATA FORM
NAMEPLATE DATA
ELECTRIC MOTOR PUMP/HVAC UNIT
MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER
TYPE [ ] AC [ ] DC TYPE
HORSEPOWER SIZE
RPM CAPACITY
VOLTAGE PRESSURE
AMPERAGE ROTATION
PHASE IMPELLER SIZE
FRAME IMPELLER MATERIAL
DRIVE/REDUCER OTHER(I&C)
MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER
[ ] GEAR TYPE
[ ] V-BELT
[ ] CHAIN
TYPE [ ] VARIDRIVE SIZE
SERVICE FACTOR CAPACITY
RATIO RANGE
01785-12 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
FORM 2 TO SECTION 01785 Page 3 of 4
EQUIPMENT DATA FORM
MAINTENANCE SUMMARY
EQUIPMENT NO. ASSET NO.*
DESCRIPTION MAINT. NO.*
MAINTENANCE OPERATION: FREQUENCY:
List briefly each Maintenance Operation required and refer to specific List required f•equency of
- information in Manufacturers Manual, if applicable. Refer by symbol each mainten ince operation.
to "Lubricant List' for Lubrication Operation.
*By Owner
01785-13 Dry Run Creek Ir terceptor-60330823
FORM 2 TO SECTION 01785 Page 4 of 4
EQUIPMENT DATA FORM
LUBRICANT/RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
EQUIPMENT NO. ASSET NO.*
DESCRIPTION MAINT. NO.*
LUBRICANT LIST
REFERENCE LUBRICANT TYPE RECOMMENDED LUBRICANT
SYMBOL MILITARY STANDARD AND MANUFACTURER
List symbols in List general lubricant type. List specific lubricant name, viscosity, and
"Maintenance manufacturer.
Operation" (Page
3 .
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST
PART NO. ** DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY UNIT COST
ADDITIONAL DATA AND REMARKS
* By Owner
** Identify parts provided by this contract with two asterisks.
Note: Attach additional sheets if necessary; identify each sheet at top with equipment number and
description.
*** END OF SECTION
01785-14 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 01788
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Maintain at site one record copy of:
1. Drawings.
2. Project Manual.
3. Addenda.
4. Change orders and other modifications to Contract.
5. ENGINEER'S Field Orders,Work Change Directives,Written Amendments,or clarifications.
6. Returned Shop Drawings and other submittals.
7. Field test records.
8. Associated permits.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. At Substantial Completion:
1. Deliver 1 marked up set of Drawings to ENGINEER for use in preparation of record drawings.
B. Submit with transmittal letter containing following:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. CONTRACTOR'S name and address.
4. Title of record document.
5. Signature of CONTRACTOR or authorized representative.
— PART PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
A. Store record documents and samples on-site apart from documents used for construction.
1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
2. Provide secure storage space for storage of samples.
B. Maintain record documents in clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do not use record
documents for construction purposes.
C. Make record documents and samples available for inspection by ENGINEER or OWNER.
D. Failure to properly maintain record documents may be reason to delay portion of progress
payments until records comply with Contract Documents.
01788-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.02 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. General:
1. Maintain 1 complete set of Drawings and Project Manual, including Addenda, legibly —
annotated to show changes made during construction.
2. Label each document"PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large printed letters.
3. Record information concurrently with construction progress:
a. Do not conceal Work until information is recorded.
b. Record changes made by Field Order, Change Order or Work Directive Change and
identify document number.
4. Give particular attention to concealed equipment and materials that would be difficult to
measure and record at later date.
B. Drawings:
1. Graphically depict changes by modifying or adding to plans, details, sections, elevations, or _
schedules.
2. Make changes on each sheet affected by changes.
3. Dimensions:
a. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.
b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances,referenced
to permanent surface improvements.
4. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to
visible and accessible features of structure.
5. Details not on original Drawings.
6. Location and identification of exposed interior piping,including those shown schematically on
Drawings.
7. Size of equipment and location including connections.
8. Electrical and Instrumentation:
a. Horizontal and vertical locations and size of underground cable,conduit, and duct runs
dimensioned from established building lines.
b. Plan location and size of interior concealed and exposed feeders.
c. Size and location of access panels.
d. Variations from original Drawings.
C. Specifications:
1. Mark Specification sections to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in
comparison with text of Specifications and modifications.
2. Include variations in products delivered to site and from manufacturer's installation
instructions and recommendations.
3. Give particular attention to substitutions and selection of options and similar information.
4. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.
*** END OF SECTION
01788-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 02315
STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITIONS
A. Influence Zone Under Foundations, Pavements,or Sidewalks:Area below foundation or pavement
and sidewalk base bounded by 1 horizontal to 2 vertical slope extending outward from 1 ft beyond
outer edges of foundation, pavement or sidewalk.
B. Influence Zone Under Piping or Electrical Ducts: Area below limits bounded by line 6 in. below pipe
or duct and by 1 horizontal to 2 vertical slope extending outward from that line 1 ft beyond outer
edge of pipe or duct.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Results:
1. Compaction testing results.
2. Additional soil testing as required herein.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Test results to verify fill materials meet specifications.
C. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing:
1. Testing shall be provided by CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 01455 and this
-- section.
2. Degree of Compaction: ASTM D1557, (Modified Proctor).
3. Moisture Content: Within 3% of optimum when placed and compacted, unless otherwise
approved by ENGINEER.
B. Sheeting, Shoring, and Bracing:
1. Sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be designed by Professional Engineer registered in the
state of Iowa.
2. Sheeting, shoring,and bracing shall conform to safety requirements of federal,state,or local
public agency having jurisdiction over such matters. Most stringent of these requirements
shall apply.
1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not block or obstruct roads, with excavated materials, except as authorized by OWNER. Trim
banks to minimize inconvenience to public travel or tenants occupying adjoining property.
02315-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 STRUCTURAL FILL
A. Well-graded or poorlygraded gravels and gravel-sand mixtures,well graded or poorlygraded sands _
and gravelly sands or other approved granular material, of 2 in. maximum size, free from organic
and deleterious materials. Classified as GW, GP,SW, or SP in Unified Soil Classification System.
B. Plasticity Index: ASTM D4318,6 or less. Plasticity Index shall be performed on fraction of material
that passes the No. 40 sieve.
C. Maximum Fines: ASTM D422, 10% passing No. 200 sieve. _
D. Uniformity Coefficient: 5 or greater.
2.02 EARTH FILL
A. Subsoil or sand, free of wood, peat, cinders, organic and deleterious matter or other rubbish.
2.03 FREE-DRAINING FILL
A. ASTM C33, Size No. 67.
B. Washed crushed stone, maximum fines: ASTM D422, 1% passing No. 200 sieve.
2.04 SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING
A. Type, design, detail, and installation of shoring, sheeting, and bracing shall be determined by and
sole responsibility of CONTRACTOR.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:
1. One sieve analysis, plasticity index,and uniformity coefficient for each source of structural fill.
2. One sieve analysis for each source of free-draining fill.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Notify corporations, companies, individuals or authorities owning above or below ground conduits,
wires, pipes or other utilities running to property or encountered during excavating operations. —
B. Cap or remove and relocate services in accordance with instructions by owners of said services.
C. Protect, support, and maintain conduits, wires, pipes or other utilities that are to remain in —
accordance with requirements of owners of said services.
3.02 EXAMINATION —
A. Proof-roll and examine surfaces to receive fill and subgrades within influence zone to determine
existence of soft areas, areas loosened by frost action or softened by flooding, groundwater or
weather or existence of unsuitable materials.
02315-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Where sensitive soils encountered, requirement for proof-rolling shall be waived, and
CONTRACTOR shall perform alternate field testing to determine existence of soft areas.
C. Method of alternative testing shall be approved by ENGINEER.
3.03 SHEETING, SHORING, AND BRACING
A. Whenever necessary to prevent caving during excavation and to protect adjacent structures,
property, workers, and public; excavations shall be sheeted, shored, and braced.
B. When sheeting, shoring, and bracing is required, drive/install to prevent soil from entering
excavation below or through sheeting.
C. Keep sheeting in-place until structure is placed, tested, and backfilled.
D. Remove sheeting, shoring,and bracing in manner not damaging structure or permitting voids within
_ backfill.
E. Fill settled areas remaining after sheeting has been pulled with sand or other approved material.
-' 3.04 FILL USAGE
A. Structural: Within influence zone of footings, foundation slabs and floor slabs. Against structures
_ within limits shown on Drawings. Minimum 6 in. layer under floor slabs where subbase material is
not granular in nature. Within influence zone of pavements and sidewalks or under piping and
electrical ducts. Bedding and cover material shall conform to requirements of Section 02316.
-- B. Free-Draining: Where noted.
C. Earth: Other areas not previously specified.
3.05 DEWATERING
A. CONTRACTOR is responsible for choosing method of groundwater control.
B. If CONTRACTOR chooses to use deep wells or well points,wells and well points shall be designed,
installed, and operated to prevent removal of in-situ materials.
C. Keep construction site free-draining.
D. Keep excavations free from water.
E. Maintain groundwater minimum of 12 in. below excavations.
F. Remove soil disturbed by pressure or flow of groundwater and replace with free-draining material.
G. Maintain dewatering systems to prevent uplifting of and damage to structures.
_ H. Protect adjacent utilities, structures, and properties from damage resulting from dewatering
operations.
I. Drill, maintain, and abandon dewatering wells in accordance with federal, state, and local
-- ordinances.
02315-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Fill settled areas where excavations or trenches were backfilled and holes made by demolition,tree
removal, and site preparation work.
B. Remove and replace or recompact natural soils or compacted fill softened by frost, flooding,
groundwater or weather.
C. Remove frozen soils within influence zone and replace with structural fill.
3.07 EXCAVATION
A. Excavate to elevations and dimensions necessary to complete construction. Method of excavation
shall be consistent with soil types encountered and result in undisturbed foundation subgrade.
Loosened soils shall be recompacted or removed and replaced with fill material meeting these
Specifications.
B. Do not excavate for other structures until scheduled for construction.
C. Protect excavated areas from freezing. m.
3.08 PLACING FILL
A. Notify ENGINEER before placing fill material.
B. Do not use frozen material or place fill on frozen subgrade.
C. Place filter fabric where shown on Drawings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
D. Fill excavations below bottom of foundation or footing elevations within influence zone with concrete
or structural fill.
E. Do not backfill until new concrete is properly cured and required tests accepted.
F. Do not operate power-operated earth moving or backfill equipment closer to foundation walls or
other structures than distance equal to 1/2 height of backfill above top of footing.
G. Place fill simultaneously on both sides of free-standing structures.
H. Begin compaction of each layer at structure wall to minimize lateral forces against structure due to
wedging action of soil.
I. Lift Thickness and Compaction: Place and compact fill materials in maximum lift thickness and to
minimum densities listed.
Location Loose Lift Modified
Thickness in. Proctor
Footing, Foundation Slab, or Floor Slab Influence Zones 8 95
Sidewalk, Paving, Piping, or Electrical Duct Influence Zones 12 90
Lawn and Landscaped Areas 12 80
J. Stop backfill at specified or indicated grade to allow for placing of topsoil when required.
K. Compact backfill in lawns and landscaped areas adjacent to structures to minimum density noted
herein, but not more than 90% of maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D1557.
02315-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:
_ 1. One field density test for each 25 cu yds of structural fill, minimum one each lift.
2. One field density test for each 500 cu yds of earth fill.
3. Method of Testing: Determine in-place density of fill at maximum intervals specified herein in
accordance with ASTM D1556, D2167, D2922 or D2937.
3.10 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Excess Material: Conform to Section 02310.
*"* END OF SECTION
02315-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 02532
SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPING STATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Submersible pumps, valves, and piping.
2. Pre-cast concrete manhole wet well and valve vault.
3. Control system and panel to interface with MCC containing VFDs.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
— A. Provide motor designed for continuous duty and non-overloading throughout design curve.
B. Performance Criteria:
1. Provide pump and motor with characteristics as listed in Schedule 1 of Section 02532.
C. Design Criteria:
1. Design pump to automatically connect to discharge piping when lowered into place on
discharge connection.
2. Pump shall be easily removable for inspection or service, requiring no bolts, nuts, or other
-- fastenings to be removed for this purpose and no need for personnel to enter pump well.
3. Fit pump with galvanized chain of adequate strength and length to permit raising pump for
inspection and removal.
4. Pump, with appurtenances and cable, shall be capable of continuous submergence under
water without loss of watertight integrity of depth of 65 ft.
5. Precast concrete manhole structure shall be designed to resist buoyancy forces with a factor
of safety of 1.10. Groundwater shall be assumed to be at-grade.
6. Structure top slab shall be designed to support a live load of 300 psf.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Test Results:
1. Submit written report stating pump tests complete and performance data with each pump at
-- time of shipment.
B. Miscellaneous:
—` 1. Warranty.
C. Operating and Maintenance(O&M) Data:
r D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
E. Shop Drawings:
1. Technical data for wet well, valve vault and cover indicating materials of construction.
2. Drawings of wet well, valve vault and cover.
3. Product data, catalog cuts and drawing of access cover.
02532-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. Certification that manholes have been designed in accordance with the requirements
specified in Paragraph 1.02.A. Certification shall be stamped by Professional engineer
registered in the State of Iowa.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory(NRTL).
1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code (NEC), Article
100.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall complywith National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA)70.
C. Contractor shall be responsible to verify access hatch size with pumping equipment manufacturer
and deliver hatches to supplier of precast wet well and valve vault.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Pump:
1. Warrant pump against defects in workmanship and materials for 5 yr period under normal
use, operation, and service. '
2. Replace mechanical seal, impeller, pump housing, wear ring, and ball bearings which
become defective through normal use and wear on progressive schedule of cost for 5 yrs.
B. Access Hatch:
1. Warrant access hatch against defects in material or workmanship for 5 years.
C. Warranty shall be in published form.
PART PRODUCTS a
2.01 PUMP
A. Manufacturers:
1. Flygt. _
2. Hydromatic Pumps
3. Or equal.
B. General: --
1. Construct major parts, such as stator casing, oil casing, sliding bracket,volute,and impeller
of gray iron.
2. Protect cast surfaces coming into contact with wastewater by 6 mil epoxy polyamide coating.
3. Use stainless steel exposed bolts and nuts.
4. Provide replaceable wear ring.
C. Provide pump with mechanical rotating shaft seal system running in oil reservoir having separate,
constantly hydro-dynamically lubricated lapped seal faces.
02532-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1. Lower seal unit between pump and oil chamber shall contain 1 stationary and 1 positively
driven rotating tungsten-carbide ring.
2. Upper seal unit between oil sump and motor housing shall contain one stationary
tungsten-carbide ring and one positively driven rotating carbon ring.
3. Each interface shall be held in contact by its own spring system supplemented by external
liquid pressures.
4. Seals shall not require maintenance or adjustment, but shall be easily inspected and
replaceable.
D. Machine and fit with nitrille O-rings where watertight sealing required. Machine and fill so sealing
accomplished by automatic compression in 2 planes and O-ring contact made on 4 surfaces,
without requirement of specific torque limits to affect this. Rectangle cross-sectioned gaskets
requiring specific torque limits to achieve compression shall not be considered adequate,or equal.
E. Tolerances of parts shall allow replacement of any part without additional machining to ensure
sealing. Do not use secondary sealing compounds, greases or other devices.
F. Bracket:
1. Provide sliding guide bracket as integral part of pumping unit.
2. Provide pump casing with machined connecting flange to connect with cast iron discharge
connection, bolted to floor of manhole and designed to receive pump connecting flange
without need of any bolts or nuts.
3. Construct slide bracket and matching base flange of materials assuring non-sizing for
corrosive environment.
G. Fit pump with galvanized chain of adequate strength and length to permit raising pump for
inspection and removal.
2.02 PUMP MOTOR
A. Manufacturers standard UL listed or labeled definite purpose motor.
B. House pump motor in oil or air-filled watertight casing.
C. Cable:
1. Design entry water seal to preclude specific torque requirements to ensure watertight and
submersible seal. Do not use epoxies, silicones or other secondary sealing systems.
2. Separate cable entry junction box and motor by stator lead sealing gland or terminal board
which isolates motor interior from foreign materials gaining access through pump top.
3. Provide cable suitable for submersible pump applications and indicated by code or legend
permanently embossed on cable.
4. Size cable to conform to NEC and pump motor requirements.
5. Fit pump cable end with shrink fit rubber boot.
6. Provide continuous from motor to junction box without splices.
D. Provide integral thermal sensors to monitor stator temperatures on unit with water jacket. Provide
1 for each phase in motor. Integral thermal sensors are not required on unit without water jacket.
E. Provide seal failure sensors for each pump.
2.03 PLUG VALVE
A. Manufacturers:
1. DeZurik.
2. Homestead.
'— 02532-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Or equal.
B. Non-lubricated,eccentric type of semi-steel construction with resilient faced plugs,suitable for use
with wastewater.
C. Mechanical Joint and Push-on Ends: AWWA C111/A21.11.
D. Port Areas: Minimum 80% of full pipe area.
E. Bodies: ASTM A126, Class B cast iron in accordance with AWWA C507, Section 5.1 and
AWWA C504, Section 5.4.
F. Exposed Nuts, Bolts, Springs, and Washers: Zinc-plated or nickel content.
G. Furnish valves with corrosion-resistant seats in accordance with AWWA C507, Section 7,
Paragraph 7.2 and AWWA C504, Section 8.3.
H. Furnish with replaceable sleeve type bearings in upper and lower journals.
1. Bearings: In accordance with AWWA C507, Section 8, Paragraphs 8.1, 8.3, and 8.5 and
AWWA C504, Section 9.
2. Valve Shaft Seals: In accordance with AWWA C507, Section 10 and AWWA C504,
Section 10.
I. Plug valve pressure ratings as established by hydrostatic tests as specified by ASME B16.1.
1. 175 psi for valves through 12 in.
2. Capable of providing drip-tight shutoff up to full valve rating with pressure in either direction.
J. Direction of rotation to open shall be to left (counterclockwise). Cast on valve body or operator _
word "OPEN" and arrow indicating direction to open.
K. Plug Valves with Valve Boxes: Provide plug valves with valve boxes and covers as shown on
Drawings.
1. 3-piece assembly.
2. 5-1/4 in. diameter. _
3. Box and cover shall be cast iron and in accordance with ASTM A48/A48M, Class B.
4. Provide with extended stem. Stopping 12 in. below valve box cover. Furnish 4 ft long tee
wrench for operating valves.
2.04 SWING CHECK VALVE
A. Manufactures:
1. G. A. Industries, Inc., Figure 250-D
2. Or equal.
B. Valve Body:
1. Heavy cast iron body with non-corrosive cushion chamber and non-corrosive shaft for _
attachment of weight and lever.
C. Cushion Chamber:
1. Attached externally to side of valve body.
2. Construct with piston operating in chamber effectively permitting valve to be operated without
hammering action.
02532-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Air cushion.
4. Arrange cushion chamber so closing speed adjustable to meet service requirements.
D. Disc and Seat Ring Assembly:
1. Cast iron disc suspended from non-corrosive shaft passing through stuffing box and
connects to cushion chamber on outside of valve.
2. Renewable bronze seat ring held in valve body by threaded joint.
3. Assembly shall prevent return of fluid through valve when inlet pressure decreases below
-- delivery pressure without hammer or shock.
2.05 BALL CHECK VALVES
A. General:
1. Do not impede flow of materials such as solids, stringy material, grit or rags suspended in
sewage.
2. Balls shall roll clear of waterway providing full flow equal to diameter of connection pipe.
3. Prevent return of wastewater through valve when inlet pressure decreases below delivery
pressure.
4. Each valve shall be tight-seating and operate without slam or shock.
B. Materials:
1. Valve Body: Cast iron with flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16.1
2. Ball: Hollow steel with rubber exterior resistant to grease, petroleum products, animal and
vegetable fats, acids and alkalides, tearing, and abrasion with specific gravity greater than
1 and be removable without removing body from line.
3. Provide 1 replacement ball with each ball check valve.
C. Head loss through valve shall not be greater than 1.15 ft at velocity of 7 ft/sec.
D. Rate for maximum working pressure of 150 psig.
-- 2.06 AIR RELEASE VALVE
A. Comply with Section 02530.
2.07 PIPING
A. Pump Discharge Line: Class 52, ductile iron pipe. Flanged joints interior, re-stained mechanical
joints exterior.
2.08 ALUMINUM ACCESS HATCH
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bilco Type J or JD.
2. Halliday Series W15 or W25.
3. Or equal.
B. Prefabricated Drainage Channel Type.
1. Material: Aluminum.
2. Frame: 1/4 in. thick extruded aluminum with strap anchors around exterior perimeter.
3. Provide 1-1/2 in. drainage coupling.
02532-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Doors:
1. Door Leaves: 1/4 in. diamond pattern plate with reinforcing on underside to withstand live
load of 300 Ibs/sq ft with maximum deflection of 1/150 of span.
2. Equip doors with cast steel hinges bolted to underside and pivot on tension bars that counter —.
balance door for easy operation.
3. Doors shall open to 900 and lock in position.
4. Equip doors with hold-open arm with positive locking device with conveniently positioned
release handle for easy and controlled closing.
5. Provide snap-lock mounted on bottom of leaf with removable topside handle and socket
recessed in cover.
6. Hardware shall be cadmium plated. _.
D. Factory Finish: Mill finish on aluminum surfaces with coal tar epoxy coating applied to surfaces in
contact with concrete.
E. Dimensions:
1. Wet Well Access Hatch: Confirmed by pump manufacturer, for installing and removing _
pumps and trash basket vertically without obstructions.
2. Valve Vault Access Hatch: Confirmed by pump manufacturer, for installing and removing
valves with clearance.
2.09 WET WELL/VALVE VAULT
A. Construct wet well, valve vault, and lid of reinforced concrete per SUDAS 6010:
1. Concrete Strength: Minimum 5,000 psi at 28 days.
2. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A82/A82M, ASTM A496/496M, or ASTM A615/A615M GR. 60.
3. Minimum Concrete Cover for Reinforcing Steel: 1 in.
4. Lap Reinforcement at Splices: Minimum of 2 cross wires for wire mesh.
5. Minimum Concrete Thickness: 6 in.for walls and 8 in.for floors and ceilings.
6. Joints shall have bell and spigot connections in conformance with ASTM C478.
B. Cast each piece of station shall from 1 piece mold. Do not use connecting form ties, which may
result in corrosion or leakage points.
C. Base and round manhole to rectangular box transition shall be single pour section.
D. Provide valve chamber as integral part of lift station but isolate from wet well.
E. Cast separate access lids for wet well and valve vault into cover.
F. Cast two 2 in. conduits into cover for pump and control wiring. _
G. Cast 4 in. painted steel vent pipe with bird screen shall into wet well side of lift station.
H. Supply necessary bitumastic joint sealant. '—
I. Provide watertight flexible joints, on inlet and discharge lines.
1. Design joints to absorb vibration and accept normal setting.
2. Construct rubber gasket element of poly-isoprene or natural rubber to requirements of ASTM
C923.
J. Label valve vault as confined space. Valve boxes shall be pre-cast into station cover to allow
remote access to plug valves.
02532-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
K. Joint precast sections of sanitary sewer manholes with rubber gaskets or preformed flexible plastic
gaskets.
1. Flexible Plastic Gaskets:
a. Manufacturers: Ram-Nek, manufactured by K. T. Snyder Company, Inc.; Kent Seal,
manufactured by Hamilton-Kent, Inc., or equal.
b. Comply with physical requirements for Type B gaskets in AASHTO M198.
2. Rubber Gaskets: ASTM C443.
2.10 CONTROLS
A. Description:
1. Triplex panel.
2. PLC with touch screen interface.
3. SCADA upgrade capable (system functions and trending accessible via remote
communications).
4. Built and labeled by UL 508 panel manufacturer.
5. Interface to MCC containing VFDs and generator automatic transfer switch.
6. 120vac input power.
7. Wires individually numbered with unique number at both ends.
8. Flow monitoring capabilities.
B. Design Data:
-- 1. Incoming service: 120 VAC, 60 hertz, 1 Ph, 2 wire.
C. Sequence of Operation:
1. Primary System:
a. Control logic handled by PLC.
b. Submersible sensor primary level device.
c. Controller shall simultaneously display and allow adjustment of 6 adjustable level set
points in both bar graph and numerical values with 0.01 ft resolution.
d. System shall not allow setpoint selections which can cause pump station malfunction
(i.e. Lead start above High Level, Lead Stop below Low Level, and Lead start below
Lead Stop).
e. Low Level alarm function as redundant Stop Pumps
f. Pump alternation operator-selectable for either automatic or manual. In automatic
mode, alternation shall occur at pumps off or on adjustable time basis, operator
selectable.
g. Control system shall automatically place failed or disabled pump in lag position.
h. Failure of PLC or level sensor shall enable secondary system.
i. Two of three pumps selectable as alternate based upon less run time pump starting first
with third pump off, except in case of failure of one of the active pumps, then the third
pump takes the place of the failed pump which is prevented from running until reset.
2. Secondary System:
-- a. Control logic by relays external to PLC.
b. Four(4)float switches act as level sensing devices.
c. Float switches isolated by intrinsically safe relays.
d. High Level float switch cause pumps to stagger on.
e. Low Level float switch shuts pumps off.
02532-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
f. Secondary system shall be capable of controlling pumps when PLC is completely
disabled.
D. Enclosure:
1. 14 ga type 304 Stainless steel NEMA 12.
2. 12 ga steel, formed, removable interior sub-panel.
3. Door shall have stainless steel piano type door hinge,stainless steel 3-point latching system
and stainless steel padlock provision.
4. Hold open device on door.
5. Operating devices mounted on door.
6. 18 in. stainless steel legs or length as required for installation. _
7. No evidence of holes, weld marks or burn marks.
E. Equipment and Devices:
1. Submersible Sensor:
a. Constructed with 316 stainless steel body. _
b. 2-1/2 in.Viton face convoluted diaphragm clamped between 2 rings to create water tight
pressure seal.
c. Silicon oil fill liquid behind diaphragm shall transmit sensed pressure to solid state
isolated piezo-resistive pressure transducer which shall convert sensed pressure to
corresponding electric value.
d. Submersible cable shall be 20 ga direct burial Polyethylene jacketed.
e. Provide pre-calibrate to specific gravity of wastewater to 0 - 15 psi (0-34.7 ft)and with
60 ft of cable.
f. Include stainless steel mounting assembly to permit removal from well for periodic
checking and cleaning.
g. Protect with intrinsically safe barrier.
2. Float Switches:
a. Construct of Teflon coated, 316 stainless steel housing encapsulated in epoxy.
b. Provide 40 ft of cable.
c. Mount with stainless steel hardware on 3/16 in. stainless steel cable having 8 lb vinyl
coated mushroom anchor for ballast. _
d. Protect with intrinsically safe relays.
3. Motor Circuit Protection:
a. Provided by Motor Control Center.
4. Motor Controllers: See Section 16443.
5. Rear Panel Devices:
a. Transformer for 24 VAC voltages.
b. Two (2)single toggle-operated thermal magnetic breakers for controls; 1 for pumps,
alarms, and control power and 1 for other panel devices.
c. Lightning arrestor complying with ANSI C62.2-1981. _
d. Intrinsically safe barriers/relays for level sensor and floats.
e. Status-indicating relays for Over-Temp each pump,Seal Fail each pump, Power Monitor
Overload Tripped each pump, High Level and Low Level floats.
02532-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
6. Front Door Devices:
a. Heavy Duty oil-tight, NEMA 4X rated Hand-Off-Auto selector switches. HOA switches
override automatic mode control.
b. Heavy duty oil-tight, NEMA 4X rated transformer-type indicator lights using LED-cluster
type lamps.
c. Indicator lights for Pump 1, 2 and 3, Standby Float Enable.
d. Pump 1, Pump 2 and Pump 3 lights flash when pump is called, steady on when pump
run is verified.
e. Ground fault protected 115 Volt convenience receptacles.
f. Operator interface to PLC operations.
g. Push button to silence alarm.
7. PLC Software and Screen Devices
a. Pump ETM'S with 00000.00 hrs indication.
b. Pump lockout selectors.
c. Demand charge avoidance feature which prevents starting of lag pump after power is
restored as long as lead pump outflow exceeds station inflow.
d. Positive run verification feature which activates alarm if pump is called and fails to reach
operator-set minimum operating amps and station flow rate after operator-set time
delay.
e. Excessive restart feature activates alarm when pump exceeds operator-set maximum
starts per hour and places pump in lag position.
f. Level sensor broken wire alarm enables secondary(Standby Float) system.
g. Seal moisture alarm indication for each pump.
h. Over-temp alarm indication for each pump.
i. Overload tripped alarm indication for each pump.
j. Control power failed alarm indication with time failed and time restored display.
k. Power monitor trip alarm indication.
I. Alarm memory feature retains annunciation of alarms until reset or acknowledged by
operator.
m. User-adjustable time delay on lag pump start.
8. System Controller:
a. Manufacturers:
1) Allen Bradley model CompactLogix.
2) Or Owner and Engineer approved equal.
b. Operational to 0° F, with storage to-400 F.
c. SCADA upgrade capability via RS-232 port using standard communications protocols.
d. Future capability for control via remote access.
9. Flow Monitoring: See Section 13420
a. Provide equipment needed for flow measurement.
b. Flow measurement by extrapolation of inflow from previous pump-off period alone is not
acceptable.
F. Operator Interface:
1. General:
a. Graphic touch screen device minimum 7 in. diagonal in size with 640 x 480 pixel
resolution.
— 02532-9 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Data operational characteristics accessed visually and manipulated through use of
diagrams, graphs, and English text. _
c. Change of operational characteristics accomplished through touch screen.
d. User numerical values adjustable via touch screen using increment up and down
arrows. _
2. Access Screens Selections:
a. Menu: Activates screen that enables operator to bring up list of available screens.
Access in no more than 2 steps.
b. Main: Activates screen that enables operator to view general station statistics.Type of
information available includes; pump status (called/run/off/problem/lockout) (each
pump), pump run time (each pump), Level bar graph and digital indicator (00.00 ft),
station inflow(GPM) bar graph and digital, station outflow(GPM)bar graph and digital,
and alarm indication.
c. Level Set-up: Activates screen that enables operator to view information on wet well
level. Type of information available shall include; actual wet well level, high/low level
alarms, level control set point, maximum and minimum level set points, all pump stop
level. Setpoints displayed and adjustable simultaneously by individual bar graphs as _
well as digital displays(00.00 ft). Screen shall notify operator that Lead Stop is also Low
Level reset.
d. Pump run at minimum speed time set point at minimum level before pump shuts off.
e. Pump Information: Activates screen that enables operator to view pump information.
Type of information available shall display of actual wet well level, pump amps indicator,
station outflow indicator indicating"Percent Share of All-Pumps Run Time Last 24 Hrs".
Information and controls for each pump individually shall be simultaneously accessible. ,
Operator shall be able to toggle between active 2 pumps and be able to force on or lock
out respective pump.
f. Pump Alarms: Activates screen that enables operator to view pump alarms. Status of
up to 8 alarm conditions for each pump simultaneously displayed and able to be
acknowledged and reset via touch-screen. Available alarms shall include (for each
pump) VFD Fail, Overload Tripped, Seal Moisture Detection, Over-temp, Excessive
Restarts, and Run Verify. Display shall provide dynamically activated alarm status text
and graphical highlighting to describe status of alarm condition,acknowledgment level,
and appropriate operator actions by plain text messages.
g. Trends: Activates screen that enables operator to view selected data maintained by unit
for last 24 hrs in 1 hr increments on multiple (selectable) bar graphs. Simultaneous ._
display of multiple graphs is required to enable comparison of multiple events and
trends. Available data shall include Pump 1 Starts, Pump 2 Starts, Pump 1 Amps,
Pump 2 Amps, Station Inflow, and user defined Auxiliary Input(4-20 mA).
h. General Alarms: Activates screen that enables operator to view station alarms. Status
of up to 9 alarm conditions shall simultaneously be displayed and able to be
acknowledged and reset via touch-screen. Available alarms shall include High Level,
Low Level, Power Monitor,Standby Float Enable,2 pump Run and Level Sensor Broken _
Wire. Display shall provide dynamically activated alarm status text and graphical
highlighting to describe status of alarm condition, acknowledgment level, and
recommended actions by plain text messages. This screen shall also indicate time of
Power Fail and time of Power Restored automatically. �—
i. Hourly Data: Activates screen that enables operator to view in close detail selected data
maintained by unit for last 24 hrs in 1 hr increments on bar graph. This screen shall give
both graphic and numeric value for particular hour of selected event and must
simultaneously highlight hourly data value, corresponding time of day, and 24 hr trend
graph with graphical indicator highlighting trend data-point corresponding to displayed
time of day. Operator must be able to scan time-of-day on same screen to step
through all hourly values. Available data shall include Pump 1 Starts, Pump 2 Starts,
Pump 1 Amps, Pump 2 Amps, Station Outflow, and user defined Auxiliary Input
(4-20 mA). Bar graphs shall use"best fit' procedure to show best possible detail.
02532-10 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
j. Run Verification: Activates screen that enables operator to view and set parameters
used to verify"positive run"condition. This screen shall, by operator selection, indicate
data for each individual pump: Pump Status(Off/Called/Run/Problem/Lock Out),Pump
Actual Amps, Minimum Amps, Seconds Delay Before Run Fail and Actual Wet Well
Level. Operator adjustable parameters shall include Seconds Delay Before Run Fail
and Minimum Amps and/or Station Flow Rate For Run Verification.
k. Alarm Log: Activates screen that enables operator to view historical station alarms.This
screen shall be full-text alarm log capable of displaying at least 50 most recent alarms
with date and time alarm activated, time acknowledged, time cleared, and plain text
description of corresponding alarms. Operator shall have scrolling and paging functions
available.
I. Pump Alternation: Activates screen that enables operator to view and set parameters
used in pump alternation. Operator shall have capability to select AUTO/1-2/2-1
alternation modes. Screen shall indicate when pump is placed in lag mode due to
alarm or problem. If AUTO is chosen operator shall have ability to select alternation at
pump stop or every x hours; where x is adjustable between 1-24 hrs. Operator shall
also have ability to automatically place pump in lag position if it exceeds more than
y starts per hr, where y is adjustable between 1-20 starts.
m. System Test: Activates screen which enables operator to test level-activated pump and
alarm controls via simulating wet well level. Level setpoints shall be simultaneously
displayed on screen.Visual indication of action shall be provided as level reaches each
setpoint. This screen shall display, simultaneously, actual and simulated levels, pump
indicators,comprehensive alarm indicator, pump amps,and station outflow(digital and
bar graph).
G. Existing Radio System
— 1. Provide following alarms:
a. High wetwell level signal.
b. Low wetwell level signal.
C. High-high wetwell level signal.
d. Low-low wetwell level signal
e. Common alarm signal.
f. Loss of power alarm signal.
2.11 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing:
1. Pump manufacturer shall perform following inspections and tests on each pump before
shipment from factory.
a. Check impeller, motor rating, and electrical connections for compliance to
_ Specifications.
b. Motor and cable insulation test for moisture content or insulation defects.
c. Prior to submergence, run pump dry to establish correct rotation and mechanical
integrity.
d. Run pump for 30 min submerged, minimum of 6 ft under water.
e. After operational test(paragraph d), repeat insulation test(paragraph b).
f. Conduct certified performance test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals.
02532-11 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Provide flanged joints in interior of pump station.
C. Discharge Piping:
1. Where discharge piping passes through wall of structure, provide hole of sufficient size to
allow passage of joint flange but not larger than necessary.
2. After discharge piping is in final position and securely supported, seal watertight annular
space with expanding grout. '
3.02 PUMP STATION
A. Mount upper guide holder above pump:
1. Lower guide holder shall be integral with discharge connection. Guide bars shall be
Schedule 40 stainless steel, 2 in. diameter(minimum).
2. Attach slide assembly with yoke to each pump and slide freely between guide rails.
3. Arrange so minimum force of 3 times pump discharge pressure exerted between stationary
base elbow and pump discharge to provide positive seal without bolting or fastening.
4. Provide lever action for each breakaway when raising pump.
5. Protect surface by coating resistant to wastewater.
6. Exposed bolts and nuts of stainless steel.
7. Provide automatic connection between pump flange and discharge elbow flange without
tilting, rotating or other action.
B. Install 4 in. stainless steel pipe vent with stainless steel insect screen opening located adjacent to
equipment pedestal.
C. Floats and transducer shall be supported with stainless steel cable with 10 Ibs anchor weight
supported from wet well access cover frame from stainless steel eyebolt.
D. Precast reinforced concrete risers and tops shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to
conform to any specification requirements. In addition,individual sections of risers and tops may be
rejected because of any of the following reasons:
1. Fractures or cracks passing through shell,exceptfor single end crack not exceeding depth of
joint. _
2. Defects indicating imperfect proportioning, mixing and molding.
3. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture.
4. Damaged ends where such damage would prevent making satisfactory joint.
5. Infiltration into structure exceeding 0.0758 gal/vert ft/hr.
6. Internal dia. of section varying more than 1%from nominal dia.
7. Any continuous crack having surface width of 0.01 in.or more and extending for length of 12
in. or more, regardless of position. _
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services: �—
1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at
job site or classroom designated by OWNER for mandays indicated,travel time excluded,for
assistance during construction, startup, and training of OWNER'S personnel for operation.
Include minimum of:
a. 1 manday for Installation Services.
b. 1 manday for Instructional Services.
c. 1 manday for Post Startup Services.
02532-12 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Factory representative shall be on-site to witness station installation and provide on-site
technical assistance in accordance with Section 01600.
B. Control System Testing:
_ 1. Reports: Notify ENGINEER in writing indicating defective materials and workmanship and
unsatisfactory test results. Include records of repairs and adjustments made.
2. On completing installation of system, perform following tests.
a. Test insulation resistance of conducting parts of motor control components; and of
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. For devices containing solid-state
components, use test equipment and methods recommended by manufacturer.
b. Make continuity tests of circuits.
c. Review updating of final system configuration and parameters where they supplement
or differ from those indicated in original Contract Documents.
d. Review manufacturer's written instructions for installation and testing of motor control
— devices.
3. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Include following inspections and related work.
a. Motor Control Device Ratings and Settings: Verify ratings and settings as installed are
appropriate for final loads and final system arrangement and parameters. Recommend
final protective device ratings and settings where differences found. Use accepted
_ revised ratings or settings to make final system adjustments.
b. Inspect for defects and physical damage and nameplate compliance with Drawings.
C. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable
devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
d. Check tightness of electrical connections of devices with calibrated torque wrench. Use
manufacturer's recommended torque values.
e. Clean devices using manufacturer's approved methods and materials.
f. Verify proper fuse types and ratings in fusible devices.
4. Electrical Tests: Perform following in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
a. Insulation resistance test of motor control devices conducting parts to extent permitted
by manufacturer's written instructions. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms not
acceptable.
_ b. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable trip devices.
c. Test auxiliary protective features such as loss of phase, phase unbalance, and under
voltage to verify operation.
d. Check for improper voltages at terminals in controllers having external control wiring
when controller disconnect opened. Voltage over or under 10% unacceptable.
5. Correct deficiencies and retest motor control devices. Verify by system tests that specified
requirements are met.
C. Retesting:
— 1. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and completely retest equipment.
2. Verify by system test that total system meets specification requirements.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Perform short-circuit analysis and coordination study. Set field-adjustable pick-up and
time-sensitivity ranges accordingly.
02532-13 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.05 CLEANING
A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt,and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to
match original finish. Clean devices internally, using methods and materials recommended by _
manufacturer.
SCHEDULE 1 TO SECTION 02532
Pump Characteristics —
Manufacturer Flygt
Model Number NP 3127
Number of Units 3
Impeller Type Non-Clog
Materials Being Pumped Raw Wastewater
Minimum Solids Size (in.) 3
Rated Speed (maximum rpm) 1,750 Constant
Discharge Size (in.) 4
Rated Total Dynamic Head (ft) 54
Rated Capacity(gpm) 600
Minimum Pump Efficiency 70% —
Electric Motor Characteristics
Horsepower 10
Nominal Speed (rpm) 1,750
Service Factor 1.10
General Type Squirrel Cage
Enclosure Type Submersible
NEMA Design B
Insulation Class F —
Voltage 230/460
Phase/Cycle (hertz) 3/60
Minimum Efficiency at Full Load 84%
*** END OF SECTION
02532-14 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 03200
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Conform to ACI SP-66 showing bending diagrams; assembly diagrams; location diagrams;
splicing and laps of bars, shapes, and dimensions; and details for bar reinforcing, stirrup
spacing, accessories, and openings.
2. Coordinate bar splicing and placement with CONTRACTOR'S concrete placing schedule and
joint locations.
3. Submit with construction joint submittals required in Section 03300.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.02 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store reinforcing steel on supports above ground; cover and keep clean.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel Reinforcing Bars:
1. Deformed bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60.
B. Reinforcing Supports:
— 1. Shall have all plastic or stainless steel supports.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate to schedules and details on Drawings and in accordance with ACI 318
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PLACEMENT
A. Placement of reinforcing steel shall be approved by ENGINEER before covered with concrete.
B. Correct displacement of reinforcement prior to and during concrete pouring operations. Maintain
-- clear cover as noted on Drawings. Tolerances shall be in accordance with ACI 117 and ACI 318,
unless noted otherwise.
C. Support reinforcing steel in accordance with CRSI"Placing Reinforcing Bars"with rr aximum spacing
of4ft0in.
D. Tie reinforcing steel at intersections in accordance with CRSI "Placing Reinforcin j Bars."
1. Maximum Tie Spacing for Footings and Walls: Every third intersection or ft 0 in.
2. Maximum Spacing for Slabs and Other Work: Every fourth intersection or 3 ft 0 in.
03200-1 Dry Run Creek It terceptor-60330823
3. Tie each dowel in-place.
E. Locate reinforcing to avoid interference with items drilled in later, such as concrete anchors.
F. Reinforcement shall be continuous through construction joints. _.
G. Reinforcement may be spliced at construction joints provided that entire lap is placed within only
1 concrete pour.
H. Use concrete brick for supporting bottom mat reinforcing on grade. Use bolsters or chairs
supported on concrete brick or tied to bottom mat for supporting upper reinforcing mat on grade.
Use bolsters or chairs for supporting reinforcing on mud slabs and forming.
I. Dowel bar splicer systems may be substituted for dowels at CONTRACTOR'S option when
approved by ENGINEER.
J. Do not field bend bars, including bars partially embedded in concrete unless indicated.
K. Do not place bars having kinks and bends other than shown on approved Shop Drawings.
L. Welding reinforcement is prohibited.
M. Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mill scale, dirt, grease, oil, form release agent,
dried concrete or any material reducing bond with concrete.
*** END OF SECTION
03200-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 03300
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Tolerances:
1. Conform to requirements of ACI 117.
2. Pitch floor to floor drains minimum of 1/8 in./ft or as shown on Drawings. Minimum thickness
of slabs and depth of beams shall be as dimensioned on Drawings. Pitch bottom of slab or
beam to match top slope of slab or beam to maintain thickness or depth noted. As an
alternate, bottom of slab or beam may be poured level provided that minimum thickness or
depth is maintained.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Construction Joints: Sequence of placing concrete and location and details of joints,
openings,and embedded items not shown on Drawings. Coordinate sequence of placement
and joint location with reinforcement Shop Drawings. Submit with reinforcement submittals
required in Section 03200.
2. Verification of Mix Design:
a. Proposed mix design for each class of concrete to be used as specified using
designations indicated. Provide dry weight of cement, saturated surface dry weight of
coarse and fine aggregates, brand name and quantity of admixtures when applicable,fly
ash when applicable,gallons of water required for 1 cu yd of concrete, and chloride ion
content.
b. Submit with admixture product data and miscellaneous submittals required herein.
C. Mix design shall be approved by ENGINEER before concrete is delivered to site.
B. Product Data:
1. Curing Compound and Sealers Proposed rate of coverage and manufacturer's literature
indicating conformance with these Specifications.
2. Concrete Admixtures:
a. Manufacturer's literature.
b. Submit with mix design.
3. High Range Water Reducers:
a. Name of product and manufacturer's literature.
b. Intended use area.
_ C. Submit with mix design.
C. Test Results:
1. Concrete test results.
2. With each load of concrete delivered, provide duplicate delivery tickets, one for
CONTRACTOR and one for ENGINEER, with following information.
a. Date and serial number of ticket.
03300-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Name of ready mixed concrete plant, operator, and job location.
C. Type of cement, admixtures, if any, and brand name. '
d. Cement content, in bags/cu yd of concrete, and mix design.
e. Truck number, time loaded, and name of dispatcher.
f. Amount of concrete in load, cu yds, delivered. _
g. Maximum size aggregate.
h. Gallons of water added at job, if any, and slump of concrete after water was added.
i. Temperature of concrete at delivery.
j. Time unloaded.
D. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. NRMCA certification or certificate stating plant and equipment complies with NRMCA
requirements specified herein.
2. Statement by ready mix supplier giving source and material certificates of cement and fine
and coarse aggregates, including sieve analysis, that will be used in manufacture of each
class of concrete. Make no changes in sources of materials.
3. Fly Ash: Source and test reports showing fly ash in compliance with these Specifications.
Reports shall be for actual fly ash to be used in Work. —
4. Method of pumping concrete.
5. Submit with mix design.
E. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Plant Certification: Plant or concrete supplier shall comply with requirements of National Ready
Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA)certification plan as regards material storage and handling,
batching equipment, central mixer, truck mixers with counters, agitators, nonagitating units, and
ticketing system. _
B. Concrete Testing: Testing shall be provided by CONTRACTOR in accordance with Section 01455
and this section.
1. Conduct tests on sample material in accordance with applicable ASTM methods listed below.
a. Slump: ASTM C143. _
b. Air-Entrainment: ASTM C231.
C. Compressive Strength Test: ASTM C31 (making and cylinders curing)and ASTM C39
(testing).
1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Hot Weather:
1. Comply with ACI 305R.
2. Concrete temperature shall not exceed 90°F.
3. At air temperatures of 80OF or above, keep concrete as cool as possible during placement
and curing.
4. When concrete temperatures exceed 80°F,water reducing,set retarding admixtures shall be
used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Cold Weather:
1. Comply with ACI 306R.
2. Temperature of reinforcement,forms, fillers, and other materials in contact with concrete at
time of placement shall not be less than 35°F. Preheat if temperature below 35°F.
03300-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Maintain air and forms in contact with concrete sections having minimum dimensionless than
12 in. at temperature above 50OF for at least first 3 days and at temperature above 320F for
remainder of specified curing period.
4. Maintain air and forms in contact with concrete in more massive sections at temperature
above 40OF for at least first 3 days and at temperature above 320F for remainder of specified
curing period.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement:
1. ASTM C150.
2. Type I or II except tricalcium aluminate(CA content of Type I shall not exceed 12%.
3. When aggregates determined to be deleteriously reactive, as defined by Appendix XI of
ASTM C33, alkali content of cement defined by Table 1A of ASTM C150 shall not exceed
0.60%.
B. Fly Ash:
1. ASTM C618, Class C or F including requirements of Table 1A.
2. Supplemental Requirements:
a. Loss on Ignition (maximum): 3%.
b. Water Requirement(maximum): 100% (as percent of control).
C. Fineness (maximum retained on No. 325 sieve): 25%.
d. R-factor, CaO M-5: 3.2 maximum.
Fe2O3 M
C. Aggregates:
1. ASTM C33, modified as follows.
a. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand.
b. Coarse Aggregate: Crushed gravel, crushed stone or gravel, Size 467 (1-1/2 in.
maximum), Size 67 (3/4 in. maximum), Size 8 (3/8 in. maximum).
2. Potential reactivity of aggregates shall be determined in accordance with Appendix XI of
ASTM C33.
D. Admixtures for Concrete:
1. Air-Entraining: ASTM C260.
2. Chemical Admixtures: ASTM C494, non-corrosive and chloride free.
3. Chemical Admixtures for Flowing Concrete: ASTM C1017.
a. Type 1, Water reducing, high range.
b. Type 2, Water reducing and retarding, high range.
E. Water: Potable.
F. Premolded Joint Filler:
1. ASTM D1751.
2. ASTM D1752, Type I, 11 or III.
03300-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Closed cell polyethylene.
G. Floor Sealer:
1. Manufacturers: _
a. Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn.
b. Cure and Seal by Symons.
C. Dress and Seal 18 by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
d. Tuf-Seal J-35 by Dayton Superior.
e. Achro Kure AK-2 or Achro Seal AS-1 by TK Products.
H. Membrane Forming Curing Compound:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Cure and Seal J-20 by Dayton Superior.
b. Kure-N-Seal by Sonneborn Building Products, Inc.
C. Floor Treet by Forrer Chemical Company.
d. Euco Floor Coat by Euclid Chemical Company.
e. Cure and Seal by Symons.
f. Dress and Seal 18 by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
g. Achro Kure AK-2 or Achro Seal AS-1 by TK Products.
2. ASTM C309, and compatible with scheduled finishes and coatings.
I. Finishing Grout:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Thoroseal with Acryl 60 by Thoro.
b. Concrete Finisher with AKKRO-7T by Tamms Industries Company.
C. Tri-Mix with TK-225 Liquid Bonding Agent by TK Products.
J. Cement Grout: Mixture of cement and fine sand in proportions used in concrete being finished.
K. Epoxy Bonding Compound: _
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sikadur Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation.
b. Epoxtite 2362 by A.C. Horn.
C. Euco Epoxy 452 MV or 620 by Euclid Chemical Company.
d. Fresh Concrete Binder R649 by Rescon.
e. Resi-Bond J-58 by Dayton Superior.
f. Epobond by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
g. TK-310 Concrete Bonding Agent by TK Products.
2. Use when joining new to existing concrete.
3. Conforming to ASTM C881.
L. Non-Epoxy Bonding Compound:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Weld-Crete, by Larsen Products Corporation.
03300-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Acryl 60 by Thoro.
C. Acrylset by Master Builders.
d. Everbond by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
e. TK-225 Liquid Bonding Agent by TK Products.
2. Use when joining new to existing concrete where bonding compound c< nnot be placed
immediately prior to pouring of new concrete.
3. Conforming to ASTM C1059 Type ll.
M. Evaporation Retardant:
1. Manufacturers:
a. E-CON by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.
b. Confilm by Master Builders.
C. Eucobar by Euclid Chemical Company.
d. Tri-Film by TK Products.
e. Sika Film by Sika Corporation.
2.02 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Concrete Mix: Measure and combine cements, aggregates, water, and admixtures in accordance
with ASTM C94 and ACI 211.1.
1. Cement: When used in exposed concrete shall be one brand from one source. Do not mix
different cements in same element or portion of Work.
2. Air-Entrainment: Air-entrain all concrete except interior concrete floor noted slab on grade.
3. Chemical Admixtures: Use is optional to aid concrete properties and allow for efficient
placement. Manner of use and amount shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written
recommendations and as approved by ENGINEER. Do not use admixtures which increase
early shrinkage or negatively affect finishing.
4. Fly Ash: Use is optional unless otherwise noted. Combine fly ash with cement at rate of
1.5 Ibs fly ash/lb reduction in cement. Amount of fly ash shall not be less than 15% nor more
than 25%of weight of cement plus fly ash. When fly ash is used, minimum amount of cement
given in table for Class of Concrete may be proportionately reduced.
5. Use no admixture other than specified, unless approved by ENGINEER.
B. Class of Concrete:
1. Furnish in accordance with table. Cement contents listed are minimum val.Jes and shall be
increased as required to attain other specified characteristics.
2. Air contents listed are for concrete requiring air-entrainment as specified f-erein. Contents
listed shall be maintained after addition of admixtures.
3. Slumps listed are maximum, except when high range water reducer is used. Maximum slump
when high range water reducer is used, 10 in.
4. Chloride ion content shall not exceed values listed in ACI 318, Table 4.3.1.
Minimum
Compressive Coarse Cement Air Water/Cement
Strength Aggregate Factor Content L=�_
Ratio
Class (psi) (Size No.) (bags/cu yd) (%) (maximum)
Al 4,000 467 5.5 5-1/2+1 3 +1 0.45
A2 4,000 67 6.0 6±1 3 +1 0.45
C 4,000 467 6.0 6+1-1/2 3 +1 0.45
F 2,000 67 2.25 --- --- ---
03300-5 Dry Run Creek Ir;erceptor-60330823
C. Concrete Usage:
1. Class A: Locations, except where Class C and F specified.
2. Class C: Exterior unreinforced concrete pavement and curbs. _
3. Class F: Mud slabs and backfill below and around structures where noted.
4. Do not use coarse aggregate Size 467 in sections less than 12 in.thick,where clear cover of
reinforcement is less than 11/2 in., or where clear spacing between reinforcing bars is less
than 3 in. —
2.03 MIXING AND DELIVERY
A. Use ready mixed concrete.
B. Deliver and complete discharge within 1-1/2 hrs of commencing of mixing or before 300 revolutions
of drum or blades, whichever comes first. Includes revolutions required by transit mix trucks.
Limitations may be waived by ENGINEER if concrete slump, after 1-1/2 hrs or 300 revolution limit
reached, that concrete can be placed without addition of water. In hot weather, time or number of
revolutions criteria may be reduced by ENGINEER.
C. Do not add water on-site unless slump and water-cement ratio, after addition of water, are below
maximum allowed. If water added, mix concrete at site additional 30 revolutions of drum.
D. Deliver concrete to site having temperature not less than 50OF nor greater than 90°F.
E. If high range water-reducing admixture added on-site, mix concrete at site additional 85 revolutions
of drum after addition of high range water-reducing admixture.
PART 3 EXECUTION _
3.01 FORMS
A. Formwork design, detailing, and installation shall be CONTRACTOR'S responsibility and shall
conform to requirements of ACI 347R.
B. Materials and Construction: Type of forms used is CONTRACTOR'S option, except as otherwise _
indicated below or on Drawings. Plywood and other wood surfaces shall have smooth, level
surfaces treated with form oil or sealer to produce clean release of concrete from forms.
1. Where walls remain exposed use plywood, prefabricated metal or wood forms. Do not use
boards.
2. Use bolts, rods or other approved devices for form ties. Plastic cone snap ties are approved
as form ties. Ties for liquid holding structures or dry structures below grade shall have
integral waterstop. Do not use wire ties on exposed concrete.
3. Ties shall be removed minimum of 1 in. from formed surface. Removal of ties shall leave
holes clean cut and without appreciable spalling at face of concrete. Provide plastic cone or
other approved device. --
4. Provide 3/4 in. chamfer on external corners of exposed concrete walls, beams, columns,
equipment bases and exposed edges of construction joints. Do not chamfer columns flush
with concrete block walls.
5. Provide openings at base of vertical forms as access for cleaning and inspection of forms and
reinforcing prior to depositing concrete.
C. Treat or Wet Contact Forms: Coat plywood and wood moldings with non-staining form release
agent. Apply release agent before reinforcement is placed.
03300-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
D. Repairing and Cleaning: Clean, patch, and repair form material before reusing.
E. Workmanship:
1. Formwork shall prevent leakage of mortar, shall not deflect under weight of concrete and
workman, and shall withstand fluid pressures of concrete.
2. Removal of wall ties shall leave holes clean cut and without appreciable spalling at face of
concrete.
— 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. Subgrade and bedding shall be compacted and free of frost. If placement allowed at temperatures
below freezing, provide temporary heat and protection to remove frost. Do not place concrete on
frozen material.
B. Provide mud slabs where necessary, and when required by ENGINEER to obtain dry and stable
working platform for placement of slabs on grade. Mud slabs shall be 2 in. thick minimum.
C. Soak subgrade evening before placement and sprinkle ahead of placement of concrete.
D. Remove standing water, ice, mud, and foreign matter before concrete deposited.
3.03 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Notify ENGINEER 24 hrs in advance of placing operation.
B. Place concrete, except as modified herein, in accordance with ACI 304R, Chapter V.
C. Concrete will not be allowed to drop freely where reinforcing will cause segregation of mix.
1. Superplasticized Concrete: 10 ft maximum drop.
2. Other Concrete: 5 ft maximum drop.
D. If pumping is used, do not use aluminum piping for delivery system.
E. When placing of concrete is temporarily halted or delayed, provide construction joints as shown on
Drawings and as specified.
F. Place in lifts not exceeding 24 in. and compact with internal mechanical vibrator equipment.
1. Insert vibrator so area visibly affected by vibrator overlaps adjacent just-vibrated area by few
inches.
2. Slabs: Insert vibrators for full depth of slab.
3. Walls: Insert vibrators along each face(i.e.,just behind reinforcing)and allow vibrator to sink
into previous lifts as deep as will easily penetrate.
4. Do not spread concrete with vibrators.
G. If in process of pouring wall, pour is stopped unexpectedly, leave surface of joint level but rough.
Roughened surface shall have amplitude of 1/4 in. minimum. Before depositing new concrete
against hardened concrete, retighten forms.
H. When heat or wind conditions will result in evaporation of 0.2 Ib/sf/hr or more, use evaporation
retardant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to minimize plastic shrinkage
cracking.
-- 03300-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.04 JOINTS
A. Unless otherwise noted,construction joints shown are optional. Joints not shown on Drawings shall
be approved by ENGINEER. Locate to miss splices in reinforcement.
B. Before concrete placed, construction joints shall be cleaned and laitance removed and surface
wetted. Remove standing water.
C. Locate vertical construction joints in walls minimum of one-half wall height from corners or other '—
intersecting walls or at midpoint between corners or intersecting walls. Locate horizontal joints in
walls within middle third of wall height.
D. Construction joints shall have keys or roughened surfaces. Where roughened surface used,surface
shall have amplitude of 1/4 in. minimum.
E. Install premolded joint filler where noted in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Joint —
filler shall be compatible with sealant and suitable for intended purpose.
F. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions before applying
sealant.
3.05 EMBEDDED ITEMS
A. Cast pipe and other embedded items into concrete as placement progresses. Do not provide
blockouts.
B. Following restrictions shall be adhered to, except for slabs on grade, unless otherwise noted.
1. Duct, conduit, pipe, and fittings, when placed within slab and walls, shall not be larger than
1/3 thickness of slab or wall nor placed closer than 3 outside dia clear from each other. _
2. Reinforcing steel shall be in-place before embedded items placed and reinforcing cut or
removed shall be replaced with additional reinforcing as indicated on Drawings or approved by
ENGINEER.
C. Do not place ducts, conduits, and pipes in slabs on grade. Place minimum 4 in. under bottom of
slab.
D. Set items such as bolts, anchors, piping, and frames in concrete as shown on Drawings.
E. Set miscellaneous items according to templates and setting diagrams.
F. Place items constructed of dissimilar metals to avoid physical contact with reinforcing. Secure item
and reinforcing to ensure they will not shift and come into contact during pouring. Contact between
reinforcing and other metal, other than bare, coated or plated carbon steel not permitted, unless _
approved by ENGINEER.
G. Support wall pipes from formwork to prevent contact with reinforcing.
3.06 REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS
A. General:
1. Prior to starting repair work, except as specified otherwise, obtain ENGINEER'S approval of
proposed repair techniques and mixes.
2. Develop patching techniques and mixes on portion of as-cast surface selected by ENGINEER
for this purpose. Dress surface of patches remaining exposed to view to match color and
texture of adjacent surfaces.
03300-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Tie Holes:
1. Fill tie holes, except where sealant is indicated, with patching mortar as specified in
Section 03605.
C. Defective Areas:
1. Remove honeycombing, stone pockets, spalls, and other defective concrete down to sound
concrete. If chipping required, make edges perpendicular to surface. Do not feather edges.
2. Fill defective area with patching mortar as specified in Section 03605.
3.07 FINISHING SLABS AND FLATWORK
A. Slab Finishes:
Description Concrete Finish
Sealer Applied Floors and Slabs 2 Trowelin s
Exterior Exposed Slabs Float and Broom Finish
Exterior Walks Float and Broom Finish
B. After placement, screed concrete with straightedges, power strike-offs or vibrating screeds.
C. After screeding, bull float or darby surface to eliminate ridges and to fill in voids left by screeding.
D. Float:
1. Use magnesium or aluminum hand floats or power floats with slip on float shoes after
concrete has stiffened to point where 1/4 in. maximum indentation can be imparted by normal
foot pressure. Do not use combination blades for floating.
2. Float finish shall result in uniform smooth granular texture.
3. After floating,check slab tolerances with 10-ft straightedge. Fill low spots with fresh concrete.
4. Do not sprinkle with dry cement or add water.
E. Trowel:
1. Use steel trowels after floating.
2. Initial Troweling: Power or hand with trowel blade kept flat against concrete surface to
prevent washboard or chatter effect.
3. Second Troweling: By hand if 2 trowelings scheduled.
4. Successively trowel with trowels progressively smaller and tipped more to increase
compaction of concrete surface.
5. Allow time between trowelings for concrete to become harder.
F. Broom Finish: Use fine, soft-bristled broom and broom at right angles to direction of traffic to give
nonskid finish. Texture shall be approved by ENGINEER.
G. Floor Sealer:
1. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
_ 2. Apply first coat after final troweling, surface water glaze has dissipated, and when surface is
hard enough to sustain foot traffic on same day as pour.
3. When floor has been water cured, apply first coat after curing has been completed. Apply
within one day of floor being dry enough for application.
4. Apply second coat after Work is complete and building ready for occupancy.
03300-9 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
H. For special coatings or finishes, see Room Finish Schedule on Drawings.
3.08 FINISHING FORMED CONCRETE
A. Ordinary Finish: Finish resulting directly from formwork for surfaces which will be hidden from view
by earth, submergence in water or wastewater or subsequent construction.
1. Patch honeycombing, stone pockets,form ties,spalls,and other irregularities as specified in
this section and cure.
2. Where joint marks or fins on submerged surfaces exceed 1/4 in., grind smooth.
B. Smooth Finish: Interior concrete surfaces permanently exposed to view and concrete surfaces
scheduled to be painted.
1. After removal of forms, patch or point up defects as specified and cure.
2. Grind joint marks and fins smooth with adjacent surface. Remove oil stains and rinse
surface.
3. After grinding and cleaning, dampen concrete and paint entire surface with Cement Grout.
Work Cement Grout into surface with cork or other suitable float. When grout has set to _
where it will not be pulled out of holes or depressions, brush off surface with dry burlap or
carpet.
4. Prepare surfaces to be painted in accordance with paint manufacturer's requirements.
C. Rubbed Finish: Exterior cast-in-place concrete surfaces permanently exposed to view extending to
6 in. below finish grade.
1. After removal of forms, patch or point up defects as specified and cure.
2. Remove joint marks, fins, and stains as described for smooth finish.
3. Apply heavy coat of Finishing Grout. After first coat has set, apply second coat. When
second coat has set, float to uniform texture.
4. Follow manufacturer's written instructions for finishing concrete.
5. Finish color shall be gray.
3.09 PROTECTION AND CURING
A. Protect concrete from frost and keep moist for minimum curing period of 7 days after placing in
accordance with ACI 308.
B. Formed Surfaces:
1. Wet cure by spraying surfaces during curing period as frequently as drying conditions may --
require to keep concrete surfaces moist.
2. Ceilings, walls, columns, and beam sides may be cured by leaving forms in-place. For
vertical surfaces, apply water to run down on inside of forms, if necessary, to keep concrete
wet.
3. After forms are removed,wet cure for remainder of curing period or apply curing compound.
4. Do not use curing compound where epoxy,urethane, mortar bed,grout,additional concrete or
other coatings or adhesives will be applied.
C. Concrete Flatwork:
1. Start curing activities as soon as free water has disappeared from surface of concrete after
placing and finishing.
2. Cure flatwork using liquid curing compound or wet cure.
3. Do not use curing compound where epoxy,urethane,mortar bed,grout,additional concrete or
other coatings or adhesives will be applied.
03300-10 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
D. Curing Compound:
1. Apply curing compound at uniform rate sufficient to comply with requirements for water
retention as specified and as measured in accordance with ASTM C156.
2. Cover areas subjected to direct sunlight during curing period with ambient temperature
expected to exceed 80°F with white pigmented compound, others may be covered with
fugitive dye compound.
E. Protect from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and
— excessive vibration.
F. Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage caused by construction equipment, materials or
methods, and rain or running water.
G. Do not load self-supporting structures to overstress concrete.
-- 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMING AND SHORING
A. Do not remove forming or shoring until member supported has acquired sufficient strength to safely
support own weight and any imposed loads. Forming shall remain in place for at least minimal time
recommended by ACI 347R. In addition, forming for horizontal members such as elevated slabs
and beams shall remain in place minimum of 7 days. In no case shall forming for horizontal
members be removed before concrete has reached at least 70% of its specified design strength.
B. Reshore areas as required to carry additional imposed loads.
C. Repair damage to structure caused by early removal of forming and shoring at no additional cost to
OWNER.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Obtain samples of concrete in accordance with ASTM C172. Transport cylinders to place on-site
where they can be stored under conditions affecting concrete they represent without being disturbed
for first 24 hrs.
B. Make slump tests daily and when requested by ENGINEER, in accordance with ASTM C143. Make
slump tests from same batch from which strength tests are made.
C. When air-entrained concrete used, make air content tests daily and when requested by ENGINEER
in accordance with ASTM C231.
D. If measured slump or air content falls outside limits specified, make check test immediately on
another portion of same sample. In event of second failure, concrete shall be considered to have
failed to meet requirements of Specifications and will be rejected.
E. Strength test for each class of concrete consists of 4 cured standard cylinders made from composite
samples secured from single load of concrete in accordance with ASTM C172. Make compressive
strength tests on 1 cylinder at 7 days and 2 cylinders at 28 days. Test results at 28 days shall be
average strength of 2 specimens as determined in accordance with ASTM C39, except if
1 specimen in test shows manifest evidence of improper sampling, molding or testing, it will be
disregarded. Test remaining cylinder if needed.
F. Make strength test for each following condition for each class of concrete.
1. Each day's pour.
2. Each change of source.
3. Each 100 cu yds of concrete poured.
03300-11 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. When temperatures are below or expected to fall below 45" F within 48 hrs after concrete _
placed, make 2 additional cylinders and cure in field under conditions approximating
conditions affecting concrete they represent. Test one at 7 days, other at 28 days.
G. Strength level of individual class of concrete considered satisfactory if following requirements met.
1. Average of all sets of 3 consecutive strength tests equal or exceed specified 28 day
compressive strength.
2. No individual strength test falls below specified 28 day compressive strength by more than
500 psi.
H. If analysis of strength tests indicates above requirements are not being met, make immediate
adjustments to mix. Also, if likelihood of low strength concrete is confirmed, make additional tests
as required by ENGINEER to determine strength of concrete in-place in portion of structure
identified with deficient cylinders. If tests and analysis verify Work in-place is not in conformance
with Specifications, ENGINEER will determine whether or not Work in-place is adequate for
intended use in location. If Work is determined inadequate, CONTRACTOR shall follow such
remedial or replacement measures which ENGINEER may require. CONTRACTOR shall bear
costs in connection with testing, engineering analyses, remedial work, and replacement required _
under terms of this paragraph.
*** END OF SECTION "
03300-12 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 03603
EPDXY GROUT
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Material for grouting reinforcing bars into existing concrete, and other uses where noted.
B. Alternatives:
1. CONTRACTOR may use premixed adhesive anchor material as specified in Section 05500
when approved by ENGINEER, rather than using field mixed grout as specified herein.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's literature.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Epoxy:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sikadur Hi-Mod or Sikadur Hi-Mod gel, by Sika Corporation.
b. Five Star Epoxy Grout, by Five Star Products, Inc.
B. Sand: Hard, durable, oven dry.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces of oil, grease, and other foreign matter. Chip away unsound concrete.
3.02 MIXING
A. Mix components of epoxy compound as directed by manufacturer's instructions immediately before
combining liquid with sand.
B. After binder thoroughly mixed, add sand as recommended by manufacturer.
3.03 PLACING
A. Place in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions following requirements regarding
temperature and pot life.
03603-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Provide suitable materials where necessary to retain grout until hardened.
3.04 CURING
A. Cure as recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION **"
03603-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 03604
NONSHRINK GROUT
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's literature.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Fluid Grout 100, Five Star Products, Inc.
2. Masterflow 713 Grout. Master Builders.
3. Euco NS Grout, Euclid Chemical Company.
4. Crystex, L&M Construction Materials, Inc.
5. Sika Grout 212 by Sika Corporation.
B. Grout:
1. Cement base, nonmetallic, nongas forming, nonshrink, preblended and ready-to-use requiring only
addition of water at Project site.
2. Comply with ASTM C1107 and CRD C621, Grade B.
3. Of moderate fluidity with minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days and shall not bleed.
— C. Water:
1. Clean and free from injurious chemicals and deleterious materials.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Clean grout contact surfaces of oil, grease, scale, and other foreign matter. Chip away unsound concrete
leaving surface level but rough.
B. Underside of base plates of machinery, rails, and bolts shall be free of grease, oil, dirt or coatings.
3.02 MIXING AND PLACING
A. Mix and place in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Provide sealing materials where necessary to retain grout until hardened.
C. Work grout from one side to other. Avoid trapping air under base plates.
D. Remove plastic anchor bolt sleeve tops where used,and fill with grout at same time base plates are grouted.
3.03 CURING
A. Cure with curing compound or as recommended by grout manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
03604-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 03605
PATCHING MORTAR
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Polymer modified, cementitious, fast setting, mortar for repair of concrete surfaces.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's literature.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
PART2 PRODUCTS
— 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Sikatop, by Sika Corporation.
2. Duratop, by L&M Construction Chemicals.
_ B. Polymer modified cementitious system consisting of 2 components.
1. Component A: Liquid polymer emulsion of acrylic copolymer base and additives.
2. Component B: Blend of selected Portland cements, specially graded aggregates, organic
accelerator, and admixtures for controlling setting time, water reducers for workability, and
corrosion inhibitor.
3. System shall not contain chlorides, nitrates, added gypsum, added lime or high alumina
— cements. System shall be noncombustible, before or after cure.
4. Color: Concrete gray.
5. Minimum Compressive Strength: 5,000 psi.
6. Bond Strength: 100% concrete substrate failure (pull off method), minimum 400 psi.
7. System shall not produce vapor barrier, shall be thermally compatible with concrete, and
freeze-thaw resistant.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surface in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations and Section 03300.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Apply and cure patching mortar in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
*"* END OF SECTION
03605-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 04810
UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 GENERAL
— 1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Statement giving source and material certificates, and proportions by weight of cement,fine
and coarse aggregates, and admixtures for mortar and grout.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's literature for decorative masonry unit.
2. Manufacturer's literature for wall reinforcing, anchors, and glass block reinforcing.
C. Samples:
1. Decorative masonry unit.
D. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Material certification for concrete masonry units and glass block. Test data shall not be more
than 1 yr old.
E. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sample Panel:
1. 4 ft long by 4 ft high for each type of decorative masonry unit.
-- 2. Sample panel shall include following.
a. Selected color range.
b. Selected range of texture.
C. Bonding.
d. Mortar color.
e. Tooled joints.
f. Quality of workmanship.
g. Typical reinforcement and ties.
3. Do not start Work until ENGINEER has accepted sample panel.
4. Use panel as standard of comparison for masonry work built of same material. Failure of
masonry work to meet or exceed quality of workmanship depicted by sample panel shall be
cause for rejection.
5. Do not destroy or move panel until Work is completed and accepted by OWNER.
6. When approved by ENGINEER sample panel may be incorporated into finished work.
B. Construct masonry to meet requirements of local building code, and ACI 530 and 530.1.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store masonry units above ground on level platforms which allow air circulation under stacked units.
B. Cover and protect against wetting prior to use.
04810-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Handle units on pallets or flat bed barrows.
D. Do not permit free discharge from conveyor units or transporting in mortar trays.
E. Deliver cementitious materials in manufacturer's standard packages.
1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Cold Weather Protection:
1. When ambient temperature falls below 40°F or when temperature of masonry units is below
40°F:
a. Temperature of masonry units shall not be less than 32'F when laid in masonry.
Remove visible ice on masonry units before unit is laid in masonry.
b. Heat mortar sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40°F and
120°F at time of mixing. Maintain mortar above freezing until used in masonry.
C. Use heat sources where ambient temperatures are between 20°F and 25°F, on both _
sides of masonry under construction and install wind breaks when wind velocity is in
excess of 15 mph.
d. Where ambient temperatures are below 20°F, provide enclosure for masonry under
construction and use heat sources to maintain temperatures above 32°F within
enclosure.
e. Where mean daily temperatures are between 32°F and 40°F, protect completed
masonry from rain or snow by covering with weather resistive membrane for 24 hrs after
construction.
f. Where mean daily temperatures are between 25°F and 32°F, completely cover
completed masonry with weather-resistive membrane for 24 hrs after construction.
g. Where mean daily temperatures are between 20°F and 25°F, completely cover -.
completed masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hrs after
construction.
h. Where mean daily temperatures are below 20°F, maintain masonry temperature above
32°F for 24 hrs after construction by enclosure with supplementary heat,electric heating
blankets, infrared heat lamps, or other acceptable methods.
B. Hot Weather Protection:
1. When ambient air temperature exceeds 100°F,or 90°F with wind velocity greater than 8 mph:
a. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 ft ahead of masonry.
b. Set masonry units within 1 min of spreading mortar.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MORTAR AND GROUT
A. Materials:
1. Aggregates: _
a. Mortar: ASTM C144, acceptable in color, 10% passing No. 100 sieve.
b. Grout: ASTM C404.
2. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
3. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91, Type S.
4. Lime: Hydrated lime, ASTM C207, Type S.
04810-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
5. Water Repellent Mortar Admixture:
a. Dry-Block by W.R. Grace &Co.
6. Water: Potable.
7. Use no antifreeze compounds.
8. Coloring Pigments: Provide coloring pigments of iron oxide, manganese dio:,ide or chromium
oxide along with either grey or white cement as required to achieve color of mortar selected
by ENGINEER.
B. Proportions:
1. Mortar: ASTM C270, property specification: Type S (1,800 psi).
2. Masonry Grout: ASTM C476 (2,500 psi minimum).
3. Measure materials by volume. Use within 1 hr.
4. Use water repellent mortar admixture for CMU exposed to earth or weath«'r in accordance
with manufacturer's written instructions.
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU)
A. Hollow Lightweight Concrete Block: ASTM C90.
B. Hollow Standard Weight Concrete Block: ASTM C90.
C. Solid Block: ASTM C90. standard weight. Concrete filled hollow standard weight concrete blocks
may be substituted.
D. Water Repellent Concrete Block: Hollow, standard weight, concrete block witr water repellent
mortar admixture added to concrete mix.
_ E. Decorative Concrete Masonry Units (Full Face Split):
1. Hollow standard weight water repellent concrete block.
2. Split simulated stone face approved by ENGINEER.
3. Nominal 8 in. by 16 in. face size, width as shown on Drawings.
4. Color shall be selected by ENGINEER from manufacturer's complete line of available colors.
5. Mortar color shall be selected by ENGINEER.
— 6. Provide application of exterior masonry sealer upon completion of block wi.,rk.
F. Provide uniform gradation of color for exposed unpainted block.
G. Provide decorative concrete masonry lintels,corners with decorative faces,etc.,as equired in areas
with decorative concrete masonry units. Joints at outside corner are not accepta:)le.
2.03 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORS
A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Truss, Ladur, Ladur Tri-Rod, CRT, or Dur-O-Tab by Dur-O-Wall, Inc.
b. Ladder Type or Truss Type by Heckmann Building Products, Inc.
C. Ladder-Mesh, Truss-Mesh, Cavity Ladder-Tri-Mesh, Ladder-Box-Mfish with drip, or
Truss-Box-Mesh by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc.
2. Two parallel, longitudinal, 9 ga, galvanized, rods weld-connected to ) ga galvanized
cross-rods, spaced at 16 in.oc, conforming to ASTM A82 for single wythe construction or for
cavity wall construction when cavity ties are used. Three parallel, longitudinal, 9 ga,
04810-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
galvanized, rods weld-connected to 9 ga galvanized cross-rods, spaced at 16 in., oc,
conforming to ASTM A82 for cavity wall and multi-wythe construction. —
3. Provide special manufactured corner and wall intersection pieces.
4. Electronically weld cross-ties.
5. Zinc Coated. —
a. Interior Walls: ASTM A641 Class I.
b. Exterior Walls: ASTM A153 Class B2.
B. Reinforcing Bars: In accordance with Section 03200.
2.04 WEEPHOLE MATERIAL —
A. Vertical Cell Vent: 3/8 in. W x 2-1/2 in. H x 3-3/8 in. L; gray polypropylene, multi-cell construction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL —
A. Lay masonry true to dimensions, plumb, square, in bond,and properly anchored with courses level
and joints uniform.
B. Provide full mortar beds for solid and hollow units to be filled with mortar or grout. Other hollow
masonry units shall have face-shell mortar beds.
C. Tool joints on exposed walls concave, 1/8 in. maximum depth unless otherwise noted. Wipe joints
with burlap or brush with soft brush to remove mortar projecting beyond face of block after joints are
tooled. Cut mortar flush with surface of concealed block.
D. Provide reinforced concrete masonry lintels over doors,windows, and other openings where noted
and wherever steel lintels not provided. Form lintels by using lintel or bond beam units. Place
reinforcing steel and fill with masonry grout. Texture of lintels shall match wall texture. Lintels shall
have minimum 8 in. bearing on masonry beyond edges of opening except as noted on Drawings. —
Openings less than 4 ft in width not having lintels scheduled shall have 8 in.high reinforced masonry
lintels or double steel angle lintels. Reinforce masonry lintels with two No. 5 bars. Steel lintels shall
conform to Section 05500. Fill cores under lintels with masonry grout. —
E. Provide control joints. Conform to details shown.
F. Unless otherwise shown, provide continuous bond beam around top of buildings at roof bearing
elevation. Reinforce with two No. 5 bars.
3.02 TOLERANCES —
A. Dimension of Elements:
1. In Cross-Section or Elevation: -1/4 in. to +1/2 in.
2. Mortar Joint Thickness: +1/8 in.
B. Elements:
1. Variation from Level:
a. Bed joints: +1/4 in. in 10 ft, +1/2 in. maximum. —
b. Top surface of walls: ±1/4 in. in 10 ft, +1/2 in. maximum.
2. Variation from Plumb: ±1/4 in. in 10 ft, +3/8 in. in 20 ft,±1/2 in. maximum. —
04810-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. True to a Line: +1/4 in. in 10 ft, ±3/8 in. in 20 ft, ±1/2 in. maximum.
4. Alignment of Columns and Walls (bottom versus top): ±1/2 in.
C. Location of Elements:
1. Indicated on Drawings: +1/2 in. in 20 ft, ±3/4 in. maximum.
2. Indicated in Elevation: ±1/4 in. in story height, ±3/4 in. maximum.
3.03 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS
A. Use lightweight or standard weight concrete block for interior partitions.
B. Use water repellent concrete block where exposed to weather or earth.
C. Exposed inside face of concrete block surfaces shall form finished wall surfaces. Painted walls or
special coatings on wall are considered exposed walls.
D. Provide special blocks for corners, control joints, jambs, sills, lintels, and bond beams.
E. Provide bull nose edges where shown and at all interior exposed vertical corners, including door and
window openings.
F. Fill cores of hollow units with mortar or grout where bolts, anchors or similar items occur within
hollow units.
G. Flashing:
1. Clean surface of masonry smooth and free from projections which might puncture or
otherwise damage flashing material.
2. Place through-wall flashing on bed of mortar.
3. Cover flashing with mortar.
H. Provide weepholes by omission of 1 in. of mortar head joints or provide tubes or sash cord at base
of flashings, steel lintels, and base of walls. Space not over 2 ft 8 in. with minimum of 1 weephole
-- between openings. Keep weepholes and area above flashing free of mortar droppings.
I. Bond Patterns:
1. Decorative CMU: running bond.
2. Other CMU: running bond.
3.04 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORS
A. Provide masonry anchors,ties, reinforcement, and inserts of type noted on Drawings and specified
herein.
B. Bond intersection of exterior walls and interior load bearing walls by use of horizontal joint
reinforcement, extend into wall at least 30 in. Conform to details shown.
C. Bond intersection of interior nonload bearing walls by use of horizontal joint reinforcement, extend
into wall at least 16 in.
'— D. Reinforce concrete block walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcement. Lap reinforcing
minimum of 6 in. and stagger splices 32 in. or more. Space reinforcement not over 16 in. oc.
E. Provide additional bonding ties spaced not more than 8 in. apart around perimeter of and within
12 in. of openings.
04810-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
F. Provide vertical reinforcement in fully-grouted cores where noted.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Install steel lintels that bear on masonry. Build into masonry rough frames,bucks,and metal frames _
for openings in walls and partitions. Fill cores under lintels with masonry grout.
B. Build in items such as anchors, anchor bolts, inserts, sleeves, brackets, bearing plates, furnished
under this or other sections.
C. Build in items of mechanical, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, and electrical work including
anchors and anchor bolts. Point-up joints between masonry,cabinets,outlet boxes,and metal work. _
D. Set units plumb, square, true, and level before building into masonry.
E. Avoid loosening or disturbing temporary bracing holding frames. Set masonry tightly against inside
of frames and slush full voids with mortar. Build anchors into joints and fill masonry cores adjacent
to frame with grout.
3.07 GROUTING
A. Conform to requirements of ACI 530.1.
B. Spaces to be grouted shall be free of mortar dropping, debris, loose aggregates, and material
deleterious to masonry grout.
C. Reinforcement and ties shall be in place prior to grouting.
D. Cleanouts: When grout pour exceeds 5 ft in height,cleanouts shall be provided in bottom course of
masonry.
1. Cleanouts shall be provided adjacent to each vertical bar.
2. Size of cleanout openings shall be of sufficient size to permit removal of debris. Minimum
opening dimension shall be 3 in. _
3. After cleaning, close cleanouts with closures to match adjacent wall surface and brace to
resist grout pressure.
E. Place grout in lifts not exceeding 5 ft.
F. Consolidate grout at time of placement.
1. Consolidate grout pours 12 in. or less in height by mechanical vibration or by puddling.
2. Consolidate pours exceeding 12 in. in height by mechanical vibration and reconsolidate by
mechanical vibration after initial water loss and settlement has occurred. _
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect masonry from damage.
B. Cover freshly laid masonry and walls not being worked on to prevent rapid drying and to exclude rain
and snow. _
C. Cover items susceptible to damage with wood nosings or boxing. Use no lumber or materials
susceptible to staining or defacing masonry.
D. Brace walls until roof or floor system in-place. Bond beam grout at roof elevation shall be a
minimum of 7 days old prior to removal of bracing.
04810-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
E. Do not apply superimposed loads until completed masonry reaches design strength.
1. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loading for at least 12 hrs after completing masonry.
2. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 3 days after completing masonry.
3.09 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut and patch to accommodate Work of other sections. Patch around items sucl- as outlet boxes,
piping, and steel work.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean and point concrete block surfaces. Clean as units are set, daily, and upon c ompletion. Acid
shall not be used.
B. Remove surplus mortar and leave surface of masonry clean and finished. Remove arge particles of
mortar before cleaning walls. Remove sharp burrs on exposed block mortar join s.
* * * END OF SECTION * * *
04810-7 Dry Run Creek Ir erceptor-60330823
SECTION 05500
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Miscellaneous metal fabrications.
2. Concrete anchors.
3. Wedge inserts.
'— 4. Steel lintels.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate materials, sizes, connections, anchors, and painting.
2. One reproducible and one print.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's catalog sheets on premanufactured items.
C. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
_ A. Tag miscellaneous iron,steel and aluminum including anchor bolts,concrete anchors,sleeves,and
bases or otherwise mark for ease of identification at Project site.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Conform to following.
1. Structural Steel Shapes:
a. W Shapes: ASTM A992, 50 ksi.
b. S, C and MC Shapes: ASTM A36.
C. L Shapes: ASTM A36.
— d. Pipe Shapes: ASTM A53, Grade B, 35 ksi.
e. Plates and Bars: ASTM A36.
2. Stainless Steel:
a. Exterior and Submerged Uses: AISI, Type 316.
b. Interior and Architectural Uses: AISI, Type 304.
C. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts: AISI, Type 302, 303 or 304.
3. Aluminum Structural Shapes and Plates: Alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6; conform to referenced
specifications and ASTM sections found in AA current construction manual series.
4. Connection Bolts for Steel Members: ASTM A325.
05500-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
5. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, 1/2 in. minimum dia; nonsubmerged -galvanized;submerged-
stainless steel.
6. Anchor Rods: ASTM F1554 [36 ksi].
7. Connection Bolts for Wood Members: ASTM A307, galvanized.
8. Connection Bolts for Aluminum: Stainless steel. _
9. Cast Iron: ASTM A48, Class 35B.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Connections and Workmanship:
1. Fabricate details and connection assemblies in accordance with Drawings and Specifications,
with projecting corners clipped and filler pieces welded flush.
2. Weld shop connections and bolt or weld field connections, unless otherwise noted or
specified.
3. Provide clips, lugs, brackets, straps, plates, bolts, nuts, washers, and similar items, as --
required for fabrication and erection.
4. Use connections of type and design required by forces to be resisted and to provide secure
fastening.
a. AISC standard 2-angle web connections or single plate framing connections capable of
supporting minimum of 50%total uniform load capacity of members joined as tabulated
in uniform load constants of AISC M016. _
b. Connections shall consist of minimum of two 3/4 in. dia bolts or welds developing
minimum of 10,000 lbs.
C. Make bearing type bolted connections with minimum 3/4 in. dia bolts with threads
included in shear plane, unless detailed otherwise.
5. Welding:
a. Grind exposed edges of welds to 1/8 in. minimum radius. Grind burrs,jagged edges,
and surface defects smooth.
b. Prepare welds and adjacent areas so there is:
1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on weld bead.
2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to weld or other area to be painted or coated.
3) No sharp peaks or ridges along weld bead. _
C. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with adjacent surface of weld bead.
6. Bolting:
a. Draw up bolts or nuts tight in accordance with AISC specifications. Use bolts of lengths
required so bolts do not project more than 1/4 in. beyond face of nut. Do not use
washers unless specified. Provide hexagonal head bolts with hexagonal nuts.
b. Provide holes required for connection of adjacent or adjoining Work wherever noted on
Drawings. Locate holes for bolting equipment to supports to tolerance of+1/16 in. of
dimensions indicated. _
B. Fit Work together in fabrication shop and deliver complete or in parts, ready to be set in-place or
assembled in field.
C. Galvanizing:
1. Galvanize after fabrication. _
2. Galvanize by hot-dip process conforming with ASTM A123 and AHDGA specifications.
05500-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. Galvanize in plant having facilities to produce quality coatings and capacity for volume of
Work.
4. Ship and handle in manner to avoid damage to zinc coating.
D. Painting or Coating and Finishes:
1. Do not paint or coat ferrous metal surfaces embedded in concrete.
2. Review and comply with Section 09910. Where other finish is not specified, clean ferrous
metal after fabrication to remove oil, mill scale, rust, and foreign matter in accordance with
SSPC SP 6. Apply 1 coat of shop primer yielding 1.5 mil dry thickness.
3. Steel lintels and surfaces not accessible after assembly or erection shall be given 2 shop
coats using different colors of paint to coating, 3.0 mil total dry thickness.
4. Coat aluminum in contact with concrete in accordance with AA 30. Under no circumstances
shall aluminum contact dissimilar metal.
E. Castings shall be of uniform quality,free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage distortion,
smooth, and well cleaned by shot bastings.
2.03 CONCRETE ANCHORS
A. Wedge Anchors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Power-Stud Anchor by Powers Fasteners.
b. Thrubolt Wedge Anchor by ITW Ramset/Red Head.
C. Kwik-Bolt by Hilti Corporation.
d. Liebig Wedge Anchor by Liebig.
e. Strong-Bolt by Simpson Strong-Tie.
2. Usage: In concrete.
a. Zinc-or chromate-plated carbon steel may be used where totally embedded, in interior
locations with controlled humidity and other protected locations.
b. Stainless steel shall be used in other locations such as outside, in tanks or when
attaching aluminum or galvanized steel.
C. Do not use wedge anchors when submerged or subjected to dynamic loads.
B. Expansion Anchors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Liebig Anchor by Liebig.
b. HSL Expansion Anchor by Hilti.
C. Power Bolt by Powers Fasteners.
2. Usage: In concrete.
a. Zinc-or chromate-plated carbon steel may be used where totally embedded, in interior
locations with controlled humidity, and other protected locations.
b. Stainless steel shall be used in other locations such as outside, in tanks, or when
attaching aluminum or galvanized steel.
—' C. Do not use expansion anchors when submerged or subjected to dynamic loads.
05500-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Drop-In Anchors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. HDI Drop-In Anchor by Hilti Corporation. _
b. Multi-Set II Drop-In Anchor by ITW Ramset/Red Head.
C. Steel Drop-In by Powers Fasteners.
d. Drop-In by Simpson Strong-Tie.
2. Zinc-or chromate-plated carbon steel.
3. Usage: In concrete.
a. Interior locations with controlled humidity and other protected locations.
b. Do not use drop-in anchors in corrosive or humid areas such as wet wells, liquid
containing tanks, exterior applications.
D. Sleeve Anchors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sleeve Anchor by Hilti Corporation
b. Dynabolt Sleeve by ITW Ramset/Red Head.
C. Lok/Bolt by Powers Fasteners.
d. Sleeve-All by Simpson Strong-Tie.
2. Usage: In masonry. _
a. Zinc-or chromate-plated carbon steel in interior locations and other protected locations.
b. Stainless steel in other locations.
E. Undercut Anchors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Liebig Ultraplus by Liebig.
b. Maxi-Bolt by Drillco Devices Ltd.
2. Usage: In concrete, overhead applications, and for dynamic loads.
a. Zinc-or chromate-plated carbon steel may be used where totally embedded, in interior
locations with controlled humidity, and other protected locations.
b. Stainless steel shall be used in other locations such as outside, in tanks, or when
attaching aluminum or galvanized steel.
C. Do not use undercut anchors when submerged. _
F. Adhesive Anchors:
1. Manufacturers:
a. PE 1000+ by Power Fasteners.
b. EPCON Injection System by ITW Ramset/Red Head.
C. Sure-Anchor Epoxy(J50) by Dayton Superior.
d. Epoxy-Tie by Simpson Strong-Tie.
e. Five Star Epoxy IRS Anchor Gel by Five Star Products, Inc.
f. Set XP by Simpson Strong-Tie.
g. Acrylic-Tie by Simpson Strong-Tie.
h. Or equal.
05500-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Epoxy adhesive with Type 316 stainless steel stud or anchor rod assembly, nuts, and
-- washers.
3. Usage:
a. In concrete, submerged. Do not use in overhead applications or in contact with potable
water.
2.04 WEDGE INSERTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Gateway Building Products.
2. Richmond Screw Anchor Company.
3. Or equal.
B. Malleable iron casting, 3/4 in. minimum size with minimum combined working load capacity of
1,300 Ibs in shear and 1,000 Ibs in tension.
C. Stainless steel bolts and hardware.
2.05 STEEL LINTELS
_ A. Provide steel lintels over doors, louvers, grille openings, wall recesses, duct openings, and other
openings in masonry walls as noted and wherever reinforced concrete or masonry lintels not
provided.
B. Fabricate lintels from structural shapes as detailed, selected for straightness of section.
C. Unless otherwise shown, lintels shall have minimum bearing of 8 in. at each side of opening.
D. Fabricate lintels of multiple sections by welding, grind exposed welds smooth.
E. Openings less than 4 ft wide without lintel scheduled shall have reinforced masonry lintels or double
-- steel angle lintels. Total width of horizontal legs shall be 1 in. less than wall thickness. Weld angles
together.
F. Masonry Lintels: Comply with Section 04810.
2.06 STRAP ANCHORS AND STUD ANCHORS
A. Provide anchors for frames, curbs, sills, and other metal fabrications anchored into concrete or
masonry. Fabricate anchors from strap iron, bent to shape,or of weldable studs,welded to backs of
members. Where size and spacing not noted, provide 1 in. by 1/4 in. strap anchors or 3/4 in. dia
studs for concrete and 1-1/2 in. by 1/8 in. strap anchors for masonry. Space masonry anchors to fit
jointing of adjacent masonry work at 4 ft 0 in. oc. Space concrete anchors at 3 ft 0 in. oc.
B. Where anchors and plates or clips are to be built in for attachment of later Work, provide bolts in
plates or clips, welded to back, with threaded ends extended as required.
C. For attaching Work to masonry or concrete where anchors or inserts cannot be built in, provide
concrete anchors or machine bolts and screws.
` 05500-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
A. Fabricate miscellaneous steel framing, supports, and items not forming part of structural steel
framework or not indicated to be furnished under structural steel work. Use structural steel plates,
shapes, bars, and tubing of sizes and arrangement indicated.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Layout and install connectors such as concrete anchors and anchor bolts to secure metal _
fabrications to structure.
B. Concrete Anchors:
1. Drill holes in concrete and masonry work with rotary driven twist drills only. Fill voids in
masonry with grout.
2. Do not install until concrete has reached specified minimum strength (fc). _
3. Do not install closer than 6-bolt dia to edge of concrete or masonry,or closer than 12-bolt dia
to another anchor unless detailed on Drawings.
4. Minimum embedment shall be 8-bolt dia.
5. Locate to clear reinforcing bars in concrete.
6. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Erect to lines and levels, plumb and true, and in correct relation to adjoining Work. Secure parts
using concealed connections when practicable.
D. Plumb and true vertical members to tolerance of +1/8 in. in 10 ft. Level horizontal members to
tolerance of+1/8 in. in 10 ft. _
E. Provide items such as bolts, shims, blocks, nuts, washers, and wedging pieces to complete
installation.
F. Drill field holes for bolts. Do not burn holes.
G. New holes or enlargement of unfair holes by use of cutting torch is cause for rejection of entire _
member.
H. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of metal fabrications.
I. Field welds shall be approved by ENGINEER before prime painting. Clean slag from welds prior to
inspection.
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Field repair of damaged galvanized coatings.
1. Repair galvanized surfaces damaged during shipping or erection/construction operations.
2. Repair surfaces using zinc-rich paint.
3. Prepare surfaces and apply in accordance with ASTM A780, Annex A2. _
*** END OF SECTION
05500-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 06050
ROUGH AND FINISH CARPENTRY
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Rough lumber.
2. Plywood.
3. Exterior and running trim.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
— A. Lumber Standards: Manufacture lumber to comply with PS 20 and applicable grading rules of
inspection agencies certified by ALSC Board of Review.
B. Grade Stamps:
1. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with grade stamp of inspection agency
evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,grade,
species, and moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
2. Omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill certificate material
inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it cannot be marked on concealed
surface.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Keep materials undercover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or
wet surfaces. Stack lumber and provide air circulation within and around stacks and under
temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar material.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Nominal sizes indicated except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes required by
PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use. Provide dressed lumber,S4S, unless otherwise
indicated.
2.02 ROUGH LUMBER
A. Provide wood for support or attachment of other Work including, bucks, nailers, blocking, grounds,
stripping, and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated,worked into shapes shown,and
as follows.
1. Moisture Content: 19% maximum for lumber items.
2. Grade: Standard grade light framing size lumber of any species of board size lumber as
required. No. 3 common or standard grade boards in accordance with WCLIB or WWPA or
` No. 3 boards in accordance with SPIB.
06050-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.03 PLYWOOD
A. General:
1. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 for plywood panels and for products not
manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA E445.
2. Trademark: Factory-mark each construction panel with APA trademark evidencing
compliance with grade requirements.
B. Plywood Backing Panels:
1. For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide plywood panels with trade
designation, APA C-D plugged interior with exterior glue in thickness indicated, or if not
otherwise indicted, not less than 1/2 in.
C. Roof and Gable Sheathing:
1. Plywood panels with trade designation, APA span rating 40/20, exterior exposure, 3/4 in.
nominal thickness.
2.04 FINISH MATERIALS
A. General:
1. Moisture Content of Softwood Lumber: Provide seasoned kiln-dried, lumber having moisture
content from time of manufacture until time of installation not greater than values required by
applicable grading rules of respective grading and inspecting agency for species and product
indicated.
2. Moisture Content of Hardwood Lumber: Provide kiln-dried lumber having moisture content
from time of manufacture until installation,within ranges required in referenced woodworking
standard.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Fasteners and Anchorages:
1. Provide size,type, material, and finish indicated and recommended by applicable standards,
complying with applicable FS standards for nails, staples, screws, bolts, nuts, washers, and
anchoring devices.
2. Where carpentrywork is in ground contact or area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners
and anchorages with hot-dip zinc coating (ASTM A153).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION, ROUGH CARPENTRY
A. Discard units of material with defects impairing quality of Work and units too small to use in
fabricating work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Set to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted.
C. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as shown and required by
recognized standards.
1. Use common wire nails, except as otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish Work.
Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed
06050-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.
3.02 WOOD NAILERS AND BLOCKING
A. Provide wherever shown and required for screeding or attachment of other Work. Form to shapes
shown and cut as required for true line and level of Work to be attached. Coordinate location with
other Work involved.
-- B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work.
Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
3.03 PLYWOOD
A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA E30D, for types of
construction panels and applications indicated.
B. Fastening Methods:
1. Plywood Backing Panels: Bolt to supports.
3.04 ADJUSTMENT, CLEANING, FINISHING, AND PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect and maintain conditions necessary to ensure Work will be without damage or
deterioration at time of acceptance.
*** END OF SECTION
06050-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 06178
PREFABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design loads as shown on Drawings.
2. Superimposed Uniform Live Load: 10 psf on bottom chord.
3. Superimposed Dead Load: Consisting of shingles, plywood sheathing,insulation,and ceiling
materials.
4. Design for snow load accumulation in accordance with ASCE 7, Section 7,
5. Design for wind uplift load in accordance with ASCE 7.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Note species, sizes, and stress grades of lumber to be used as members.
2. Show pitch, span, and camber configuration, of trusses.
3. Indicate connector type, thickness, size, location, and design value.
4. Illustrate bearing details.
5. Framing plan indicating design loads, truss type, spacing, and bridging.
6. Stamped by Professional Engineer registered in State of Iowa.
B. Miscellaneous Submittals:
1. Design Analysis:
a. Stress diagram indicating design load on each truss member or printout of computer
design.
b. Design loads.
C. Allowable stress increase.
d. Deflection limits.
e. Reactions.
2. Pressure Treated Wood: Certification by treating plant stating conformance with required
standard.
3. Preservative-treated Wood: Certification by treating plant for waterborne preservative
moisture content reduced to 19% maximum after treatment.
C. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grading Rules and Wood Species: PS 20.
B. Grade Marks: Identify lumber by official grade mark containing symbol of grading agency, mill
number or name, grade of lumber, species or species grouping or combination designation, rules
under which graded, and condition of seasoning at time of manufacture.
C. Qualifications of Fabricator: Minimum 3 yrs experience in manufacturing comparable wood trusses.
06178-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle prefabricated trusses carefully and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Stockpile or store trusses to avoid bending, twisting or overturning, and protect from elements.
C. Protect trusses from other construction operations.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Lumber:
1. Dimensions: Indicated dimensions are nominal. Actual dimensions shall conform to PS 20.
2. Moisture Content: Not greater than 19% at time of fabrication.
3. Surfaced 4 sides (S4S).
4. Douglass Fir or Southern Pine species, No. 2 grade or better.
5. Conform to published stress ratings of NFPA design specification for wood construction.
B. Metal Connector Plates: Galvanized sheet steel, ASTM A446, Grade A, Coating Class G60 with
holes, plugs, teeth or prongs uniformly spaced and formed.
C. Hardware(Galvanized):
1. Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A307.
2. Lag Screws and Bolts: FS FF-B-561 C.
3. Nails: FS FF-N-105B.
D. Split Rings: Tongue-and-groove joint, hot rolled carbon steel, ASTM A36.
E. Shear Plates: Malleable iron, Grade 35018, ASTM A47.
F. Gussets: Carbon steel plate, ASTM A36.
G. Uplift Anchors:
1. Galvanized ETA/TSS Embedded Truss Anchors, by Simpson Strongs-Tie.
2. Galvanized Seismic and Hurricane Anchors by Simpson Strongs-Tie.
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Cut truss members to accurate length, angle, and size to ensure tight joints for finished trusses.
B. Assemble truss members in design configuration by securing tightly in jigs or with clamps.
C. Include design camber when positioning members.
D. Connect truss members using metal connector plates.
E. Allowable Tolerance:
1. Connector Locations:
a. Toothed connectors: +1/4 in. from location shown on Shop Drawings.
b. Split ring and shear plate connectors: Centers +1/16 in.from location shown on Shop
Drawings.
06178-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Length of Members:
a. Up to 20 ft: +1/16 in.
b. Over 20 ft: ±1/16 in./20 ft of specified length.
3. Square End Cuts: Square within 1/16 in./ft of depth and width.
4. Openings Between Members of Assembled Trusses:
a. Tension members: 1/16 in., maximum.
b. Compression members: 1/32 in., maximum.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Verify surfaces to receive trusses are free of irregularities and debris.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions corrected.
3.02 ERECTION
A. Keep out-of-plane bending of trusses to minimum.
B. Install temporary horizontal and cross-bracing to hold trusses plumb and in safe condition until
permanent bracing installed.
C. Fasten to supporting structure with Uplift Anchors.
D. Install permanent bracing and related components prior to application of loads to trusses.
E. Tighten loose connectors.
F. Restrict construction loads to prevent overstressing of truss members.
G. Do not cut or remove truss members.
**" END OF SECTION
06178-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 07191
MASONRY WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Masonry water repellent.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's product data including technical literature on materials and performance
characteristics.
2. Manufacturer's recommended instructions for application of stain and clear water repellents.
B. Miscellaneous:
1. Applicator's list of projects using waterproofing system submitted.
2. Submit certification stating water repellent material to be applied in compliance with federal,
state and local environmental Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) regulations.
C. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Firm with no less than 10 yrs experience in manufacturing products specified.
B. Applicator's Qualifications: Firm with no less than 3 yrs experience in application of products
specified. Persons applying products shall be trained and approved by manufacturer for application
of manufacturers products. Applicator shall provide equipment that is proper for intended use and
that has been well maintained.
_ C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable rules of pollution-control regulatory agency
having jurisdiction in Project locale regarding VOC's and use of hydrocarbon solvents.
D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain stain and water repellent products from single manufacturer.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Material Delivery: Deliver materials to job site in original sealed containers, clearly marked with
manufacturer's name, brand name, type of material, and color or color formula. Verify product
matches that of original sample applied on mock-up wall.
B. Storage and Protection: Store materials inside, if possible, away from sparks and open flame.
Store in secure area to avoid tampering and contamination. Water based materials must be kept
from freezing. Store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
07191-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application under any to following
conditions, except with written instructions of manufacturer:
1. Ambient temperature is less than 40°F(5°C)or below 95°F(35°C)unless otherwise specified
by manufacturer.
2. Masonry surfaces and mortar have cured for less than 28 days.
3. Substrate is frozen or surface temperature is less than 407 (5°C).
4. Rain or temperatures below 40°F (5°C) are predicted within 48 hrs.
5. Application is earlier than 5 days after surface became wet.
6. Windy condition exists that may cause water repellent or stain to be blown onto vegetation or
surfaces not intended to be coated.
1.06 WARRANTY
A. Guarantee against defective materials and workmanship for 5 yrs from Substantial Completion.
B. Submit completed manufacturer's written "Request for Warranty Form" to manufacturer 10 days
prior to application.
C. After completion of specified material, submit manufacturer's written"5 Year Warranty Application"
to manufacturer for processing. Upon receiving validated warranty, submit copy to OWNER. _.
1.07 SCHEDULING
A. Notify ARCHITECT not less that 48 hrs before each application of stain and water repellent is
applied.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 WATER REPELLENTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Prime-A-Pell 200, Chemprobe Technologies, Inc (1-800-760-6776).
B. Solvent based siloxane penetrating water repellent, no fillers, sterates, or paraffins. Products shall
have a range of 3-7% solids.
C. Compatible with joint sealers and water repellent admixture in CMU.
D. Exterior breathable water repellent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Verify joint sealants have been installed.
B. Test for moisture content, according to repellent manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
surface is sufficiently dry.
07191-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Surface Preparation: Surface shall be free of cracks, dirt, oils, paint or other contaminants which
may affect appearance or performance of water repellent material.
B. Protection: Follow manufacturer's recommendations for protection of adjacent materials and
surrounding areas.
— 3.03 APPLICATION
A. Apply water repellent in accordance manufacturer's with written instructions.
B. Water Repellent:
1. Apply using low pressure application equipment designed for water repellent application.
2. Apply material as supplied by manufacturer. Do not dilute or thin.
3. Apply treatment evenly until surface is totally saturated. Coverage rates and number of coats
as recommended by manufacturer for specific surface.
-� 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Follow manufacturer's recommended field quality control procedures.
B. After water repellent has cured for 24 hrs at low humidity and temperature between 70°F to 90°F or
48 hrs. at high humidity and low temperature between 50°F to 69°F,test surfaces with water spray.
Recoat areas that indicate water absorption.
3.05 CLEANING
A. At completion of Work, remove protective coverings, excess material, debris, and waste from Site.
Clean and repair damage caused by applications. Comply with manufacturer's written cleaning
instructions.
B. Dispose of water repellent containers according to state and local environmental regulations.
*** END OF SECTION
"— 07191-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 07210
BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill).
2. Concealed building insulation.
3. Foamed-in-place insulation.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit for each type of insulation product specified.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation from single source.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with fire-test-
response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method
indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84.
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119.
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling,
and other sources. Store inside and in dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
concealment.
2. Protect against ignition.
3. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to Project site before installation time.
4. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each
area of construction.
— 07210-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's
standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation (Foundation and Cavity Insulation):
1. Manufacturers: _
a. DiversiFoam Products.
b. Dow Chemical Co.
C. Owens-Corning Co.
d. Tenneco Building Products.
2. ASTM C578, of type and density indicated below: _
a. Type IV, 1.60 Ib/cu ft. (26 kg/cu m), unless otherwise indicated.
3. Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 5 and 145, respectively per inch
thickness.
4. Thermal Resistance: R=5.0 per 1 inch at 75°F.
C. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation (Attic Insulation):
1. ASTM C665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
2. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.
3. Maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.
4. Combustion Characteristics: Pass ASTM E136.
2.02 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product recommended by insulation manufactured below
grade applications with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation and substrates.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which
substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting
performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that interfere with insulation attachment.
B. Close off openings in cavities receiving foam cell insulation to prevent escape of insulation. .
07210-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application
indicated.
_ B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice
and snow.
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with
placement.
_ D. Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
A. Set units in adhesive applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive
recommended by insulation manufacturer.
B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling. Apply
protection board if required. Set in adhesive according to written instructions of insulation
manufacturer.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to following
requirements:
1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill cavities formed by framing members. Where more
than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce snug fit between
ends.
2. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and
other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse
and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after
installation.
"* * END OF SECTION *'
07210-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 07311
ASPHALT SHINGLES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Asphalt shingles.
2. Felt underlayment.
3. Self-adhering sheet underlayment.
4. Ridge vents.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual"for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Samples:
1. Asphalt Shingle: Full-size asphalt shingle strip.
C. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide asphalt shingle and related roofing materials with
fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test
method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof
slopes indicated.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt
shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other
raised surfaces. Do not double-stack rolls.
1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent
damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.
B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when
roofing work is not in progress.
07311-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit asphalt shingle roofing to be performed according to manufacturer's written
instructions and warranty requirements.
1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within range of ambient and substrate
temperatures recommended by manufacturer.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or —
replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
Materials failures include manufacturing defects and failure of asphalt shingles to self-seal after
a reasonable time.
1. Material Warranty Period: 25 years from date of Substantial Completion, prorated, with
first 5 years nonprorated.
2. Workmanship Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. _
1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Asphalt Shingles: One bundle. _
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES
A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Celotex Corporation.
b. CertainTeed Corporation.
C. Elk Corporation of Dallas.
d. GAF Materials Corporation.
e. Georgia-Pacific Corporation.
f. Owens Corning.
2. ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-
granule surfaced, and self-sealing.
3. Butt Edge: Notched.
4. Strip Size: Manufacturer's standard. _
5. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration.
6. Color and Blends: As selected by ARCHITECT from manufacturer's full range.
7. Pass wind resistance test requirements of ASTM D3161.
B. Hip and Ridge Shingles:
1. Manufacturer's standard units to match asphalt shingles.
07311-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.02 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
— A. Felts: ASTM D 226 Type I, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated.
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Carlisle Coatings &Waterproofing, Div. of Carlisle Companies Inc.; Dri-Start"A."
b. Grace, W. R. &Co.; Grace Ice and Water Shield.
2. ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0- mm-) thick, self-adhering, polymer-modified,
bituminous sheet membranes. Primer as required by manufacturer.
2.03 RIDGE VENTS
A. Rigid Ridge Vent:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Air Vent Inc., a CertainTeed Company; ShingleVent II.
b. Cor-A-Vent, Inc.; V-Series.
C. GAF Materials Corporation; Cobra Rigid Vent II.
y d. Globe Building Materials, Inc.; SmartAir Ridge Vent.
e. Obdyke, Benjamin Incorporated; Xtractor Vent X18.
f. Owens Corning; VentSure Ridge Vent.
g. Trimline Building Products; Trimline Ridge Vent.
2. Manufacturer's standard rigid section high-density polypropylene or other UV-stabilized
plastic ridge vent; for use under ridge shingles.
2.04 ACCESSORIES
A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.
B. Roofing Nails: ASTM F 1667; aluminum, stainless-steel, copper, or hot-dip galvanized steel
wire shingle nails, minimum 0.120-in.- (3-mm-) dia, barbed shank, sharp-pointed, with a
— minimum 3/8-in.- (9.5-mm-) dia flat head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 in. (19 mm)
into solid wood decking or extend at least 1/8 in (3 mm) through OSB or plywood sheathing.
1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as
— flashing.
C. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized steel wire with low
profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-in. (25-mm) minimum diameter.
2.05 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
A. Vent Pipe Flashings: ASTM B 749, Type L51121, at least 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) thick. Provide lead
sleeve sized to slip over and turn down into pipe, soldered to skirt at slope of roof and extending
at least 4 in. (100 mm)from pipe onto roof.
07311-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with —
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and
blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances.
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely
anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through
asphalt shingles. —
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION '!
A. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install single layer of felt underlayment on roof deck
perpendicular to roof slope in parallel courses. Lap sides a minimum of 2 in. (50 mm) over —
underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 in. (100 mm). Stagger end laps between
succeeding courses at least 72 in. (1830 mm).
1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. —
Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 in. (75 mm) in
direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 in. (150 mm) over self-adhering
sheet underlayment. —
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on
roof deck. Comply with low-temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if
applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not
less than 3-1/2 in. (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 in. (150 mm) staggered 24 in. (600 mm)
between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.
1. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 24 in. beyond interior face of exterior wall.
2. Rakes: Extend from edges of rake 24 in. beyond interior face of exterior wall.
3. Ridges: Extend 36 in. (914 mm)] on each side without obstructing continuous ridge vent
slot. —
3.03 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Section 07620. —
1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt
Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Rake Drip Edges: Install rake drip edge flashings over underlayment and fasten to roof deck.
C. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof
sheathing.
D. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal
to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer.
07311-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.04 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION
A. Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in
ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in
NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."
B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs
removed with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.
1. Extend asphalt shingles 1/2 in. (13 mm)over fascia at eaves and rakes.
2. Install starter strip along rake edge.
_ C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck
with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform
exposure.
D. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
1. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F (10 deg C), seal asphalt
shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.
E. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's
-- written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
F. Ridge Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap
_ cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with
roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.
1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.
*** END OF SECTION
07311-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 07460
EXTERIOR SIDING, CLADDING, FLASHING, VENTILATION AND ROOF DRAI'JAGE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Aluminum Siding.
2. Soffit Vents.
_ 3. Cladding/Fascia.
4. Gutters and Downspouts.
5. Thru Wall Flashing.
6. Exposed Flashing
1.02 SUBMITTALS
_ A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. Include identificatio i of materials;
dimensions of individual components; installation instructions; and available p ofiles, textures,
and colors.
— B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened packages or bur Jles with labels
intact.
B. Store materials in dry, well-ventilated, weathertight place. Comply with manufacturer's written
instructions for storage, handling, and protection.
1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written in tructions and if
substrate is completely dry.
1.05 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive C WNER of other
rights OWNER may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shill be in addition
to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under equirements of
_. Contract Documents.
1. Warranty Period for factory-applied exterior finishes on wall panels is lifet me after date of
Substantial Completion.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 ALUMINUM SIDING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rollex Corporation.
07460-1 Dry Run Creek I terceptor-60330823
2. Alcoa Building Products, Inc.
3. Norandex Inc./Reynolds Distribution Company.
B. Formed and coated aluminum siding complying with AAMA 1402, including Paragraph 2.2.4.2.1,
"Standard Commercial Coating."
C. Horizontal Pattern: 8-in. (203-mm) exposure in plain, double 4-in. (102-mm) board style.
D. Texture: Smooth. —
E. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.024 in. (0.6 mm).
F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer and baked-on polyester finish.
G. Colors for Aluminum Siding: As selected by ARCHITECT from manufacturer's full range.
2.02 SOFFIT VENT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rollex Corp. (System 3).
2. Or equal.
B. 12-in. or 16 in. wide ribbed prefinished aluminum widths. Preformed ventilation slits and flanges
for fastening to substrate.
1. Color as selected by OWNER.
2.03 CLADDING/FASCIA
A. Manufacturers:
1. Rollex Corp.
2. Or equal. _
B. Prefinished Trim Coil .024 in. thick, 3105, H-18 Aluminum:
1. Finish: .80-1.00 mils, DFT, 2 coats waterbased acrylic.
2. Formabilitz: NCCA 11-19, no removal of finish.
3. Gloss: ASTM D533-80, 9 to 15 on 60' photovolt meter.
4. Adhesion: ASTM D3359-83, very good.
5. Humidity Resistance: ASTM D714-56 and method 6201 of FTMS 141a, no loss of gloss
cracking or peeling.
6. Salt Spray Resistance: ASTM B117-73, withstand 5% salt fog for 3,000 hrs.
7. Impact Resistance: NCCA 11-6, no visual cracking or scotch tape pick-off.
8. Exterior Exposure: ASTM D2244-79. Fade shall not exceed more than 5 color difference
units within 5 yrs.
9. Color as selected by OWNER.
2.04 GUTTERS
A. Prefinished Aluminum "K"style.
1. Size: 6 in. (18 in. girth).
2. Metal Thickness: .040 in.
3. Accessories as required by same manufacturer.
07460-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. Color as selected by OWNER.
2.05 GUTTER PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. Gutter Helmet—Southeastern Metals Mfr. Co.
B. Size as required for gutter.
C. Complete system installed by trained installer.
D. Color as selected by OWNER.
2.06 DOWNSPOUT
A. Prefinished Aluminum:
1. Size: 3-3/4 in. x 5 in. rectangular, corrugated.
2. Metal Thickness: 0.27 in.
3. Accessories as required by same manufacturer.
4. Color as selected by OWNER.
2.07 CONCEALED THROUGH-WALL SHEET METAL FLASHING
—. A. Manufacturers:
1. Cheney Flashing (Dovetail); Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
2. Cheney Flashing (Sawtooth); Cheney Flashing Company, Inc.
— 3. Keystone Three-Way Interlocking Thruwall Flashing, Keystone Flashing, Co.
B. Stainless Steel: 0.0156 in. (0.4 mm)thick; 28 gauge.
C. Fabricate through-wall metal flashings embedded in masonry as follows:
1. With ribs formed in sawtooth pattern at 3 in. (75 mm) intervals along length of flashing to
provide 3-way integral mortar bond and weep-hole drainage.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
—' A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for substrates, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting performance of siding. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper
sequencing.
07460-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.03 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.
1. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal
movement.
2. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind.
B. Install fascia, soffit, and accessories according to ASTM D4756.
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING _
A. Remove and replace damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials with
new materials complying with specified requirements.
B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in
clean condition during construction.
*** END OF SECTION
07460-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 07920
JOINT SEALANTS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces.
3. Submerged surfaces where indicated on Drawings.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's standard color charts for each joint sealant exposed to view.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall have successfully completed within last 3 yrs at least 3 joint
sealant applications similar in type and size to that of Project.
B. Single Source Responsibility of Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain sealant materials from single
manufacturer for each different product required.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver material to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing
about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life,curing
time and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
-- B. Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature
changes, contaminants, or other causes.
1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealant under following
conditions.
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint
sealant manufacturer.
2. When joint substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation or other causes.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealant when joint widths exceed
limits allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
PART2 PRODUCTS
—' 2.01 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,joint fillers, backer rods,and other related materials compatible
with one another and joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated
by testing and field experience.
a 07920-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants indicated or, if not otherwise indicated,as selected _
by ARCHITECT from manufacturer's standard colors.
1. Exterior: Match color of adjacent concrete block.
2.02 JOINT SEALANTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Tremco
2. Or Equal.
B. Exterior and Interior Joints:
1. Material:
a. Tremco Dymonic.
b. One part moisture curing, modified polyurethane sealant, FS TT-S-002306, Class A,
Type II, or ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS(non-sag), Class 25, use NT, M,A, and O.
2. Joints:
a. Control joints in concrete and masonry. —
b. Perimeters of door frames, louvers and similar opening,and where metal,wood or other
materials abut or join masonry, cast-place concrete, or each other.
2.03 SUBMERGED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Morton Thiokol Polymer Systems manufactured by PolySpec.
2. Or Equal.
B. Submerged, Non-Potable Water:
1. Primer: Thiokol water-based FEC 415.
2. Sealant:
a. Thiokol2282.
b. Multipart chemical curing, polysulfide sealant. ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS.
3. Thickener: Cabosil fiberglass powder for vertical surfaces. Coordinate with manufacturer if
required.
2.04 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General:
1. Provide sealant backings of material and type which are non-staining; compatible with joint
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Backer Rods:
1. Preformed,compressible,resilient, nonwaxing,non-extruding strips of plasticfoam of material
indicated below, and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.
2. Flexible, open cell Polyurethane foam or nongassing, closed-cell polyethylene foam. _
07920-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Bond Breaker Tape:
1. Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for
preventing bond between sealant and joint filler or other materials at back (3rd) surface of
joint.
2. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer:
1. Provide type recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of
sealant to joint substrates indicated.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces:
1. Provide nonstaining, chemical cleaner of type acceptable to manufacturer of sealant and
sealant backing materials which are not harmful to substrates and adjacent nonporous
materials.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces
adjacent to joints.
PART 3 EXECUTION
-� 3.01 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply
with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturers.
B. Joint Priming:
1. Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations.
3. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
C. Protection of Adjoining Surfaces:
1. Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that
otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contract or by cleaning methods
required to remove sealant smears.
2. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. Comply with joint sealant manufacturers'printed installation instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protectjoint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or
from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so they are without
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or
deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately and
07920-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
reseal joints with new materials to produce joint sealant installations with repaired areas _
indistinguishable from original Work.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints
occur. _
*** END OF SECTION
07920-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 08110
STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit for each type of door and frame specified, details of constri iction, materials,
dimensions, hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profile 3, and finishes.
B. Shop Drawings: Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design tyr es, conditions at
openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of door anc frame hardware
and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numberE for details and
openings as those on Drawings.
C. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with ANSI/SDI 100 and as specified.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job
storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory finished doors.
B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
refinished items are equal to new Work and are acceptable to ARCHITECT, otherwise remove and
_ replace damaged items.
C. Store doors and frames at Project site under cover. Place units on minimum 4 in. high wood
blocking. Avoid use of nonvented plastic or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber.
— If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide minimum 1/4 in.
spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, ASTM A366 and A568.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality complying with
ASTM A526, or drawing quality,ASTM A642, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525,
with A60 or G60 coating designation, mill phosphatized.
- C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 ga sheet steel. Galvanize,vhere used with
galvanized frames.
D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units.
1. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in accordance with
ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable.
2. Exposed Fasteners: Countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws al d bolts.
08110-1 Dry Run Creek In erceptor-60330823
E. Shop Applied Paint:
1. Primer: Rust inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or baking, suitable as base for
specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1.
2.02 DOORS
A. Provide doors of sizes, thicknesses, and designs indicated.
B. Exterior Doors: Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A(Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2(Seamless);
16 ga; 0.053 in. (1/3 mm)face thickness; 1-3/4 in. (44.4 mm) door thickness.
2.03 FRAMES
A. Provide steel frames for doors that comply with ANSI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and
profile. Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Exterior Frames (for Level 3 doors): 14 ga; 0.067 in. (1.6 mm)thickness.
C. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016 in.(0.4 mm)thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close
off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might
obstruct hardware operation.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 0.042 in. (1.0 mm) thick, electrolytic zinc-
coated or metallic-coated steel sheet.
1. Wall Anchors in Masonry Construction: 0.177 in. (4.5 mm)dia, steel wire complying with
ASTM A510 (ASTM A510M) may be used in place of steel sheet.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built
into exterior walls, comply with ASTM Al53/A153M, Class C or D as applicable.
2.04 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance,
and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in
manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before _.
shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site.
B. Door Construction: Fabricate doors, panels, and frames from hot dipped metallic-coated,cold-rolled
steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as integral part of door construction or by
addition of 0.053 in. (1.3 mm)thick, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even
with top and bottom edges.
C. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction that produces door complying with SDI
standards.
1. Polyurethane.
2. Polystyrene.
3. Vertical steel stiffeners.
D. Single-Acting, Door-Edge Profile: Square edge.
E. Thermal Rating Assemblies:
1. At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled, fabricate as thermal insulating
door and frame assemblies and test in accordance with ASTM C236 or ASTM C976 on fully
operable door assemblies.
08110-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Provide with U-factor of 0.41 Btu/(hr x sq ft x F) or better.
F. Hardware Preparation:
1. Prepare doors and frames to receive cylindrical and concealed hardware in accordance with
hardware schedule and templates.
2. Comply with ANSI A115 for door and frame preparation.
3. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
surface applied hardware may be done at Project site.
4. Locate hardware as indicated on approved submittals or, if not indicated, in accordance with
DHI.
G. Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face
joints.
H. Shop Painting:
1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials before
application of paint.
2. Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units, including galvanized
surfaces.
3. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide uniformly finished surface ready
to receive finish paint.
— PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
— A. Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in accordance with approved submittals,
manufacturer's instructions, and as specified.
B. Placing Frames:
1. Comply with SDI 105 unless otherwise indicated.
2. Except for frames located at existing concrete, masonry,or drywall installations, place frames
prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
3. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set.
4. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders,leaving surfaces
smooth and undamaged.
C. Frame Anchors:
1. Masonry Construction: Locate 3 wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge locations,on hinge
jamb, and at corresponding heights on strike jamb.
2. Provide 1 permanent floor anchor at each jamb.
D. Door Installation:
1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in SDI 100.
3.02 ADJUST
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames
undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
08110-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.03 CLEAN
A. Prime Coat Touch-up: After erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and
apply touch-up of compatible air drying primer.
END OF SECTION
w
08110-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 08710
FINISH HARDWARE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 DEFINITION
A. Finish Hardware: Items known commercially as finish hardware required for swing, sliding, and
folding doors, except special types of unique and nonmatching hardware specified in same
section as door and door frame.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each item of hardware. Include
information necessary to show compliance with requirements, and instructions for installation
and maintenance of operating parts and finish.
B. Miscellaneous:
1. Hardware Schedule:
a. Submit final hardware schedule in manner indicated below. Coordinate hardware
with doors, frames, and related Work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand,
function, and finish.
b. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on finish hardware indicated, organize
hardware schedule into hardware sets indicating complete designations of every
-- item required for each door or opening. Include following information:
1) Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item.
2) Name and manufacturer of each item.
3) Fastenings and other pertinent information.
4) Location of hardware set cross-referenced to indications on Drawings both on
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
5) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.
6) Mounting locations for hardware.
7) Door and frame sizes and materials.
2. Templates: Furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames, and other
Work to be factory-prepared for installation of hardware. Upon request, check Shop
Drawings of such other Work, to confirm adequate provisions made for proper location
and installation of hardware.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, closers, etc.) from
single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with
requirements.
B. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA No. 80
and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware which has been tested and listed
by UL or FM for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and
door frame labels.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver hardware until detailed schedule, keying diagram, and samples have been
approved.
08710-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Check hardware upon delivery. Note quantity and condition; report shortage, defect or damage
immediately.
C. Provide room under lock and key to store finish hardware until installation is made, and be _
responsible for loss and pilferage.
D. Mark each item of hardware as to description and location.
E. Cover and protect exposed surfaces of hardware during installation and until building is accepted
by ARCHITECT to avoid damage to finishes and functions.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SCHEDULED HARDWARE
A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type
of finish hardware indicated in this specification. Products are identified by using hardware
designation numbers of following.
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: First named manufacturer's name indicates
product used in hardware schedule for purposes of establishing minimum requirements,
unless noted otherwise in hardware schedule.
2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. General:
1. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not use manufacturer's products having manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
conjunction with required UL labels and as otherwise acceptable to ARCHITECT.
a. Manufacturer's identification permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
2. Base Metals: Provide base metal as indicated by manufacturers model number
designated in hardware group. _
3. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally
prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware prepared for
self-tapping sheet metal screws except as specifically indicated.
4. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws _
except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to
match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other Work, to match finish of such
other Work as closely as possible, including prepared for paint in surfaces to receive
painted finish.
5. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units exposed when door is closed, except to
extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not
use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face exposed in other
Work, except where not feasible to adequately reinforce Work. In such cases, provide
sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw fasteners.
2.03 HINGES, BUTTS, AND PIVOTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hager BB1191 NRP.
2. Stanley.
3. Lawrence.
08710-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. McKinney.
B. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors
and frames, provide template-produced units.
C. Screws: Furnish Phillips flat-head or machine screws for installation of units, except furnish
Phillips flat-head or wood screws for installation of units into wood. Finish screw heads to match
surface of hinges or pivots.
D. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as follows.
1. Steel Hinges: Stainless steel pins.
2. Nonferrous Hinges: Stainless steel pins.
3. Exterior Doors: Nonremovable pins.
4. Doors with Locksets and Hinges Exposed on Key Side: Nonremovable pins.
5. Interior Doors: Nonrising pins.
6. Tips: Flat button and matching plug finished to match leaves except where hospital tip
indicated.
7. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges for door
leaf for doors 90 in. or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 in. of additional
height.
2.04 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Provide standard of lock manufacturer. Meet with OWNER to finalize keying requirements and
obtain final instructions in writing.
B. Equip locks with manufacturer's standard 6-pin tumbler cylinders.
C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass/bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver.
D. Comply with OWNER'S instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise indicated,
provide individual change key for each lock not designated to be keyed alike with group of
related locks.
1. Permanently inscribe each key with number or lock identifying cylinder manufacturer key
symbol, and notation "DO NOT DUPLICATE".
_ 2. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
3. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master
system, and 5 grand master keys for each grand master system.
4. Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
5. Deliver keys to OWNER.
2.05 EXIT DEVICE
A. Manufacturers:
1. Von Duprin—88NL.
2. Or equal.
2.06 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. LCN 4110 H CUSH-N-STOP.
2. Sargent.
3. Or equal.
'' 08710-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Comply with ANSI A156.4.
C. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with manufacturer's
recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to
weather, and anticipated frequency of use. _
D. Provide nonparallel arms for overhead closers, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Where parallel arms indicated for closers, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended
for use with standard arms.
F. Provide closers for door that open greater than 1100 with de-acceleration function. _
G. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers indicated for doors required to be
accessible to physically handicapped, provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1
provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing.
H. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Provide units designed to hold door in open position
under normal usage.
2.07 PROTECTION PLATES
A. Manufacturers: _.
1. Hager 34"x2" LDW.
2. Quality Manufacturing.
3. Or equal.
B. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units. Machine
screws or self-tapping screw.
C. Fabricate protection plates (armor, kick or mop) not more than 1-1/2 in. less than door width on
stop side and not more than 1/2 in. less than door width on pull side, by height indicated.
1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 in. (U.S. 18 ga) beveled edges, with countersunk
screw holes of intervals of not over 6 in. on all four sides.
2.08 LOCK PROTECTORS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Glynn-Johnson.
2. Precesion.
3. Latch Guard LG 130.
4. Or equal.
2.09 WEATHERSTRIPPING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Reese DS 70C.
2. National Guard.
3. Or equal.
B. Provide noncorrosive fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
08710-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.10 THRESHOLDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Reese S205A.
_ 2. National Guard.
3. Or equal.
B. Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size, and profile as
-- shown or scheduled.
2.11 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Provide matching finishes for hardware units at each door or opening, to greatest extent
possible, except as otherwise indicated. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as
commercially possible where base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units
of hardware exposed at same door or opening. In general, match items to manufacturer's
standard finish for latch and lock set (or push-pull units if no latch-lock sets) for color and
texture.
B. Provide finishes matching those established by BHMA.
C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness,
and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified
for applicable units of hardware by referenced standards.
D. Designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are industry-
recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted.
E. Finish Requirements:
1. Locksets: US26D.
2. Hinges: US32D.
3. Flushbolts: US26D.
-- 4. Protection Plates: US32D.
5. Closers: US28.
6. Exit Devices: US26D.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Locate hardware as follows, unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
1. Locksets: Centerline 40 in. above finished floor.
2. Door Pulls: Centerline 42 in. above finished floor.
3. Push Plates: Centerline 45 in. above finished floor.
4. Back-to-Back Push and Pull: Centerline 40 in. above finished floor.
5. Exit Device Push Bar: Centerline 40 in. above finished floor.
6. Flush Bolts: Manufacturer's template.
7. Deadlocks: Centerline 60 in. above finished floor.
8. Closure mount to provide maximum opening permitted by building construction or
equipment, and note on schedule maximum swing per location for other trades involved in
reinforcement or installation.
9. Stops and Bumpers: Install behind each door.
10. Butts: 5 in. by 10 in. equal-equal.
11. Pulls: 45 in. to center of grip.
"` 08710-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
12. Coordinators: Manufacturer's template.
B. General:
1. Install hardware items in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations. Wherever cutting and fitting required to install hardware onto or into
surfaces which are later to be painted or finished, coordinate removal, storage, and
reinstallation or application of surface protections with finishing work specified in
Division 9. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes are completed on substrate.
2. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.
3. Drill and countersink units not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners
and anchors in accordance with industry standards.
C. Thresholds:
1. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic
sealant.
2. Secure in place with countersunk expansion bolts or to straps with machine screws. _
3. Drill holes for shields carefully to avoid cracking or otherwise damaging concrete.
4. Drill and tap straps.
5. Cut to fit profile of jamb.
D. Weatherstrip:
1. Mount on inside face of door frame jambs or stops. _
2. Where fastening devices will be exposed to view, provide units with chrome plated or
stainless steel heads for fastening metal and stain bronze or dull chrome as selected for
fastening through wood.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Instruct OWNER'S personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and hardware
finishes during final adjustment of hardware.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and door to ensure proper operation or
function of every unit. Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly as
intended for application made.
B. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation made more than one month prior to
acceptance or occupancy of space or area, return to Work during week prior to acceptance or
occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or area. _
Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors.
Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating
equipment.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
** END OF SECTION
08710-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 09540
SPECIAL SURFACE PANELS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ceiling Panels.
2. Accessories.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data on specified products describing physical and
performance characteristics.
B. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including anchorage,
accessories, finish colors, patterns and textures.
C. Miscellaneous:
1. Manufacturer's Installation Instruction: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
special attention.
2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials and suggested
schedules.
D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification
labels intact.
B. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperatures and
humidity recommended by manufacturer.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 FRP LAMINATED PANELS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Nudo Products, Inc., Fiber-Lite Panels.
B. 0.030 in. thick textured fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) factory laminated to 1/2 in. fir exterior
plywood.
C. Colors: White.
D. Provide tongue and groove edges.
09540-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.02 ACCESSORIES
A. Sealants: 100% rubberized silicone.
B. Adhesive: Manufacturers standard for application. _
C. Vinyl Moldings: Manufacturers standard for application.
D. Fasteners: Nylon rivets, stainless steel nails or screws as selected for manufacturers for application.
PART 3 EXECUTION _
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Unwrap and remove ceiling panels and stack on flat, dry surface.
B. Precondition ceiling panels for not less than 48 hrs in temperature and humidity conditions of
installation areas.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Prepare and install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Layout panels to balanced design with edge units no less than 2 ft.
C. Cut moldings as needed for proper fit. Ceiling corner molding shall run continuously around rooms.
D. Seal joints at moldings joining panels, and moldings at walls and other joints and penetrations to
provide air tight system.
E. Install ceilings level.
F. Independently support light fixtures, equipment, ductwork, and other ceiling penetrations. '
3.02 CLEANING
A. Remove dirt, dust and other foreign material from surfaces before substantial completion.
*** END OF SECTION
09540-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 09910
PAINTING
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces, except as
otherwise indicated.
_ 2. Surface preparation, priming, and coats of paint in addition to shop priming and surface
treatment specified under other sections of work.
3. Field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes,conduit,and ducts(including color coding),
hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed
— under mechanical and electrical work except as otherwise indicated.
B. Following categories of work are not included as part of field applied finish work.
1. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated,do not include painting when factory finishing
or installer finishing is specified for such items as(but not limited to)metal toilet enclosures,
prefinished partition systems, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework,
elevator entrance doors and frames, elevator equipment, and finished mechanical and
electrical equipment including light fixtures, switch gear, and distribution cabinets.
2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as
walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces,
furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct and elevator shafts.
3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum,
stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze, and similar finished materials will not require
finish painting.
4. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated,moving parts of operating units, mechanical and
electrical parts such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices,
motor, and fan shafts will not require finish painting.
C. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these Specifications.
1. Shop Priming:
a. Unless otherwise specified, shop primingof ferrous metal items included undervarious
sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, and similar items.
b. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as shop
fabricated or factory built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories included
under other sections of these Specifications.
2. Do not paint over any code-required labels such as UL and Factory Mutual or any equipment
identification, performance rating, name or nomenclature plates.
D. Mechanical and Electrical Work:
1. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to:
a. Piping, pipe hangers, pipe insulation, and supports.
b. Motor, mechanical equipment, and supports.
C. Accessory items.
09910-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Electrical items to be painted include, but not limited to:
a. Conduit and fittings.
b. Switch gear.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application
instructions for each material proposed for use.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same
manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer within '—
recommended limits.
B. Coatings shall conform to all federal, state and local regulations, including VOC rules at time of
application.
C. Coordination of Work: Review other Specifications sections in which prime paints are provided to
ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades,
furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use to ensure compatible prime
coats used.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original, new, and unopened packages and containers bearing
manufacturer's name, label, and following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
3. Manufacturer's name.
4. Contents by volume for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. VOC content.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage
of paint in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily
rags and waste daily. Take precautions to ensure workers and work areas are adequately
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application of
paints.
1.05 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply water base paints only when surface temperatures to be painted and surrounding air _
temperatures are between 50`F and 90°F, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's
printed instructions.
B. Apply solvent thinned paints only when surface temperature to be painted and surrounding air
temperatures are between 45°F and 95°F, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's
printed instructions.
09910-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain,fog,or mist;when relative humidity exceeds 85%;or to damp or wet
surfaces unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. ICI Dulux Paint Stores (ICI).
B. Pratt and Lambert(P&L).
C. Sherwin-Williams Company(S-W).
D. Pittsburgh Paints (PPG).
E. Benjamin Moore (BM).
F. M.A. Bruder&Sons (MAB).
G. Or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured
by paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as standard,
best grade product are not acceptable.
B. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.
1. Lead content in pigment, if any, limited to contain not more than 0.06% (or statutory limit)
lead, as lead metal based on total non-volatile (dry film)of paint by weight.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which painting work to be applied and notify CONTRACTOR in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to applicator.
B. Start of painting work will be construed as applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within
any particular area.
C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions otherwise
detrimental to formation of durable paint film.
3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Prepare and clean in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as specified for each
particular substrate condition.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify
ARCHITECT in writing of any anticipated problems using specified coating systems with
substrates primed by others.
2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and
similar items in-place and not to be finish painted or provide surface applied protection prior to
09910-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
surface preparation and painting operations. Remove,if necessary,for complete painting of
items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area,reinstall
removed items.
3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Remove oil and
grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so contaminants from _
cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly painted surfaces.
B. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete and concrete block to be
painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and roughening as required to
remove glaze.
1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate _
tests. If surfaces found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish
paint,correct condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture
content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
2. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with commercial solution of muriatic --
acid or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid and allow to dry
before painting.
C. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces not galvanized or shop coated of oil,grease,dirt, loose mill
scale, and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
1. Touch-up shop applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare.
2. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer.
D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent.
3.03 MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions. _
B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
C. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density and stir as required during
application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material
before using. _
3.04 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best
suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Paint, surface treatments, and finishes are as indicated in Drawings.
2. Provide finish coats compatible with prime paints used.
3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, other conditions show through final coat of paint,
until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure
surfaces including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive dry film
thickness equivalent to flat surfaces.
4. Do not proceed with painting of concrete masonry units after filler coat has been applied until
filler coat has been examined and accepted for uniformity of finish.
5. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel coat.
6. Omit first coat(primer)on metal surfaces which have been shop primed and touch-up painted
unless otherwise indicated.
B. Surfaces to be Painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as surface not
to be painted, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules. Where
items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint same as similar adjacent materials or areas.
09910-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
If color or finish is not designated, ARCHITECT will select these from standard colors or finishes
available. Paint exposed piping, conduit, and ducts to match adjacent or near surfaces,except for
color coding.
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or
_ otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent
surface deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until
paint has dried to feel firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure,
and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of
undercoat.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended
spreading rate to establish total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated,recommended by
coating manufacturer.
E. Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material required to be painted or finished, not prime coated by
others.
1. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first
coat to ensure finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
F. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide opaque, smooth surface of uniform
finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs,
sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections not acceptable.
G. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish or
repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean Up: During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans, and rags at
end of each work day from site.
3.06 PROTECTION
_ A. Protect work of other trades,whether to be painted or not,against damage by painting and finishing
work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as acceptable to
ARCHITECT.
3.07 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE - ELECTRICAL BUILDING
A. Ferrous Metal:
1. Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer.
a. Prime Coat: Rust inhibitive primer. Primer not required on items delivered shop
primed.
1) ICI: #4160 Devguard Alkyd Tank&Structural Primer.
2) P&L: Tech-Gard high performance rust inhibitive primer.
3) S-W: Kern Bond HS.
4) PPG: 7-858, industrial rust inhibitive primer.
5) Moore: IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Metal &Wood Enamel #163.
6) MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer.
b. First and Second Finish Coats: Semi-gloss alkyd enamel.
"' 09910-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1) ICI: 2516 Ultra-Hide Durus Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
2) P&L: Permalize house paint.
3) S-W: Metalastic DTM semi-gloss B55Z.
4) PPG: 7-814 series, industrial gloss oil enamel. _
5) Moore: IMC DTM Alkyd Semi-Gloss M24.
6) MAB: Four Seasons Acrylic Latex Trim Enamel.
3.08 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Semi-Gloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: 2 coats over filled surface with total dry film thickness not
less than 3.5 mils, excluding filler coat.
a. Filler Coat: Latex block filler. Apply filler coat at rate ensuring complete coverage with !
pores filled and uniform leveling of surface.
1) ICI: 3010 vinyl acrylic block filler. T
2) P&L: Pro-Hide block filler(Z8465).
3) S-W: Prep Rite Blockfiller B25W25.
4) PPG: 6-7, Speedhide latex block filler.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Block Filler#285.
6) MAB: Block Kote 3000.
b. First Coat: Enamel undercoater.
1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
2) P&L: Pro-Hide Gold alkyd primer.
3) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 alkyd semi-gloss enamel. _
4) PPG: 6-1110 Series, Speedhide alkyd semi-gloss enamel or 7-844 series
industrial semi-gloss enamel.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel #271.
6) MAB: Fresh Kote Semi-Gloss.
C. Second Coat: Odorless interior alkyd semi-gloss enamel.
1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
2) P&L: Cellutone satin lustre enamel.
3) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 alkyd semi-gloss enamel.
4) PPG: 6-1110 Series, Speedhide alkyd semi-gloss enamel or 7-844 series
industrial semi-gloss enamel.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel#271.
6) MAB: Fresh Kote Semi-gloss.
B. Ferrous Metal:
1. Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than
2.5 mils.
a. Prime Coat: Rust inhibiting primer. Prime coat not required on items delivered shop
primed.
1) ICI: 4160 Devguard Alkyd Tank&Structural Primer.
2) P&L: Tech-Gard high performance rust inhibitive metal primer.
3) S-W: Kern Bond HS.
4) PPG: 7-858, industrial rust inhibitive primer.
5) Moore: IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Metal &Wood Enamel #163.
09910-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
6) MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer.
b. First Coat: Interior alkyd semi-gloss.
1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Finish.
_ 2) P&L: Cellutone satin lustre.
3) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 alkyd semi-gloss.
4) PPG: 6-1110 Series, Speedhide alkyd semi-gloss enamel or 7-844 industrial
semi-gloss enamel.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel #271.
6) MAB: Fresh Kote Semi-Gloss.
C. Second Coat: Interior alkyd semi-gloss enamel.
1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Finish.
2) P&L: Cellutone satin lustre.
3) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 alkyd semi-gloss enamel.
4) PPG: 6-1110 Series, Speedhide alkyd semi-gloss enamel or 7-844 industrial
semi-gloss enamel.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel #271.
6) MAB: Fresh Kote Semi-Gloss.
C. Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Metal:
1. Semi-Gloss Finish: 2 coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Prime Coat: Galvanized metal primer.
1) ICI: 4160 Devguard Alkyd Tank&Structural Primer.
2) P&L: Galvanized metal primer.
3) S-W: Galvite primer.
4) PPG: 90-709 Series, Pitt-Tech one pack interior/exterior industrial primer.
5) Moore: IronClad Alkyd Low Lustre Metal &Wood Enamel#163.
6) MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime II.
b. Second Coat: Interior alkyd semi-gloss.
_ 1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Finish.
2) P&L: Cellutone enamel.
3) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 alkyd semi-gloss.
4) PPG:6110 Series,Speedhide alkyd semi-gloss enamel or7-844 industrial semi-
gloss enamel.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel#271.
6) MAB: Fresh Kote Semi-Gloss.
C. Third Coat: Odorless interior alkyd semi-gloss enamel.
1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Alkyd Semi-Gloss Finish.
2) P&L: Cellutone enamel.
3) S-W: Pro-Mar 200 Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
4) PPG: 6110 Series, Speedhide alkyd semi-gloss enamel or 7-844 industrial semi-
gloss enamel.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel #271.
6) MAB: Fresh Kote Semi-Gloss.
D. Painted Woodwork and Hardboard:
1. Semi-Gloss Enamel Finish: 3 coats.
09910-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
a. First Coat: Interior enamel undercoat.
1) ICI: 1120 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Enamel Undercoater.
2) P&L: Pro-Hide Gold alkyd primer. _
3) S-W: Prep Rite wall and wood undercoater B49W2.
4) PPG: 6-6, Speedhide alkyd enamel undercoater or 6-855 Speedhide interior
latex enamel undercoater.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel#245.
6) MAB: Fresh Kote Enamel Undercoater.
b. Second and Third Coats: Odorless interior semi-gloss enamel. _
1) ICI: 1516 Ultra-Hide Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel.
2) P&L: Cellutone satin lustre.
3) S-W: Pro Mar 200 alkyd semi-gloss. --
4) PPG: 6-1110 Series, Speedhide alkyd semi-gloss enamel or 7-844 industrial
semi-gloss enamel.
5) Moore: Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel #271.
6) MAB: Fresh Kote Semi-Gloss.
*** END OF SECTION
09910-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 13404
ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE EQUIPMENT -
-- ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. This section describes adjustable speed drive equipment included with process equipment
specified in other sections.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. Provide Run-Fail, alarm, and equipment status functions in conformance with
Section 13440.
2. Unless otherwise specified, run signals shall be derived from motor starter normally open
auxiliary contacts or inverter.
3. Electrical wiring and controls shall conform to Division 16.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Power drives from 480 vac, 3 phase, 60 hz. supply.
2. Capable of operation on electrical power system with 5% Total Harmonic Distortion (THD)
present at adjustable speed drive.
3. Output voltage shall be varied proportionally to output frequency to maintain constant V/Hz
up to nominal 60 hertz. Above 60 hertz, output voltage shall be constant.
4. Drive shall be suitable for operating standard NEMA Design B motors.
5. Drive shall consist of full wave diode bridge rectifier to convert incoming fixed
voltage/frequency to fixed DC voltage to minimize generation of electrical noise back into
line and provide displacement power factor of 0.95, over range of speeds and loads
utilized.
6. Meet quality and program requirements of ISO 9001. Completed assembly shall be listed
_ and labeled for purpose for which it is used by Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
7. Environmental:
a. Relative Humidity: 0 -95% non-condensing.
b. Altitude: 0 -3300 ft.
C. Ambient temperature: -10' to 40'C.
8. Conform to NEMA standards.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit information in 1 package in booklet form for drive and control associated with process
equipment specified in other sections.
1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Store Equipment specified in this Section at Temperature: -20°C to 65°C.
"— 13404-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials:
1. Packaging: _
a. Obtain spare parts from equipment manufacturer. Do not provide third-party
equivalent replacements.
b. Package spare parts for protection against dirt, moisture, and static discharge.
Label each package as to its contents with description and part number.
C. Size packages for convenient storage and handling. Packages should weigh no
more than 30 Ibs each and be no larger than 30 in. long by 18 in. deep by 18 in.
wide, unless individual component exceeds these dimensions.
d. Do not place spare parts for different equipment items in same package.
2. Spare Parts: _
a. PLC: Provide spare module for each type used on Project for following:
1) Processor. _
2) Power supply.
3) 1/O.
b. Provide 1 useable spare slot in each PLC 1/0 chassis.
C. Provide 20% spare 1/0 points wired to terminal blocks for each type of 1/0 for each
PLC panel. Install spares in chassis grouped with similar 1/0 types.
3. Extra materials identified in Section 13442 for equipment in this Section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GENERAL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Corporation -Cutler Hammer Division, SVX 9000 Series. _
2. Allen Bradley, Power Flex 700.
B. Equipment provided in this section shall conform to following:
1. General Provisions for Instrumentation and Control: Section 13440.
2. Instrument and Control Panel Construction: Section 13442.
3. Panel and Field Devices: Section 13453.
4. Field Electronic Transmitters: Section 13459.
5. Disconnects, Fuses and Circuit Breakers: Section 16050.
6. Motor Controllers: Section 16050.
C. For standardization and maintenance, major equipment components in this section shall be
responsibility of single drive manufacturer.
13404-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
D. Motors:
1. In addition to equipment specification sections, comply with following:
a. Vertical Units:
1) Include drip shield.
2) Include high ring base with access holes for coupling floor mounted motors.
3) Design motor and base for reed critical frequency above 120% of base speed.
b. Not exceed insulation Class B temperature rise for continuous operation at any point
in specified speed range when operating from inverter.
C. Include minimum of Class F rated insulation.
d. Include overtemperature switch in each phase when specified.
e. Include adequate thermal capacity for continuous operation under worst case
temperature conditions with motor operating at rated torque, without reduction in
_- motor insulation life of motor, under range of conditions specified.
2.02 PULSE WIDTH MODULATED (PWM)ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE -CENTRIFUGAL.
A. Inverters:
1. Input Power:
a. 460 v(+10%, -10%).
b. 3-ph, 3-wire, any phase sequence.
C. 60 Hz(±2%).
— d. Withstand without component failure, line voltage transients up to 3,000 v, in
accordance with ANSI 37.90.1.
e. Include copper wound, Class H insulation, 115°C rise, line reactor on inverter input
to prevent disturbance to power line. When harmonic trap filter is supplied, include
in harmonic trap filter panel.
f. Inverter input shall have 0.95 PF or greater throughout speed range.
g. Include MOVs on power line and input and output line chokes.
h. Line noise shall be limited to line notch depth of 20% or less. Meet voltage and
current distortion limits in accordance with IEEE 519.
B. Inverter Construction:
1. Modular construction for ease of maintenance.
2. Easily accessible from front.
3. Construct boards of fire retardant materials in accordance with NEMA Grade FR4
specifications.
C. Inverter Output Power:
1. Match to motor.
2. 3-ph, 3-wire.
3. Pulse width modulated wave form.
4. Rated Output: 460 v.
5. Frequency Range: 6 to 60°Hz, unless otherwise specified.
6. Frequency Accuracy: ±1% of setting any point in specified speed range in 24 hr period.
7. Rate full load output current in excess of sum of ac motor nameplate current of motor and
increase of motor current due to harmonics.
8. Inverter output shall not cause motor current to increase in excess of values listed in table
below:
13404-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
Motor code letter % Current Increase _
Due to Harmonics
E 2.4
F 3.0
G 3.7 —
H 4.7
9. Inverter output including harmonics shall not cause motor current to exceed motor --
nameplate full load current excluding service factor at maximum load BHP
10. Protection against opening or shorting of motor leads.
11. Ground Fault Protection.
12. Critical frequency avoidance circuit. Three set points selectable from 0 to maximum
frequency. Band width of setpoints to be adjustable from 0 -30 Hz.
13. Power transistors to be Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT's) with PIV rating of
1200 volts minimum. —
D. Motor Performance:
1. 0.5% speed regulation in manual or automatic speed control mode for motors.
2. 110% starting torque.
3. 110% overload capacity for 1 min.
E. Drive Features:
1. Include offset, slope, minimum clamp, separate acceleration, and deceleration
adjustments from 1.5 to 15 sec. —
2. Provide potentiometer for speed input for manual speed control, startup and maintenance.
3. Design circuit to accept positive or negative signal, grounded or ungrounded.
4. Efficiency of Inverter for centrifugal pump motor: —
a. 100% rated speed and load: 97.5% or better.
b. 70% rated speed and 50% load: 94% or better.
C. 50% rated speed and 25% load: 87% or better. —
d. 30% rated speed and 9% load: 83%or better.
5. Adjustable current limit circuitry adjustable to 115% of rated current. _
6. Two successive automatic restart attempts on nuisance shutdown.
7. RS232C communication capable of monitoring and setting operating and fault parameters.
8. Front of Enclosure Devices: Keypad.
F. Short Circuit and Drive Input Protection:
1. High speed current limiting fuses rated 200,000 AIC, specifically designed for solid state
applications. —
2. Instantaneous overcurrent trip shutdown set at 180%.
3. Undervoltage protection with automatic restart.
4. Input power thermal-magnetic circuit breaker with minimum 65,000 RMS symmetrical —
interrupting capacity with through-door operator and following features:
a. Label in accordance with UL Standard 489.
b. Provisions to lock in "OFF" position.C. Mechanical interlock to prevent opening cabinet door with disconnect in "ON"
position, or moving disconnect to"ON" position while unit door is open.
d. Auxiliary contact on main disconnect to isolate control when fed from external —
source.
e. Barriers and warning signs on terminals that are energized with power disconnect
"OFF".
13404-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
G. Internal Protective Features:
1. Output phase sequence to be independent of input phase sequence.
2. High or low sustained voltage shutdown.
_ 3. Phase loss protection.
4. 120 vac grounded control circuits from internal control transformer to power associated
equipment control devices powered from panel.
5. Anti-regenerative circuit to protect inverter during deceleration.
6. Electrically isolated low voltage logic.
7. Transistor overtemperature and overcurrent protection.
8. Current limit comparitor circuit to automatically phase back output current and frequency
to prevent excessive currents from damaging motor insulation.
9. Static overspeed protection.
10. DC bus fuse protection.
11. MOV(metal oxide varistor)surge protection.
H. Inverter Adjustments:
1. Maximum Speed: 50% to 100% rated.
2. Minimum Speed: 0% to 70% rated.
3. Current limit: 50%to 115%.
4. Linear Acceleration: 5 to 25 sec.
5. Linear Deceleration: 5 to 25 sec.
6. Output v/Hz trim.
7. Current limit and torque boost.
8. Maximum voltage level.
9. Electronic thermal overload.
10. Torque limit.
11. Maximum voltage.
I. Inverter Diagnostic and Shutdown Protection Features:
1. External fault such as motor overload.
2. Low line voltage.
3. High line voltage.
4. Instantaneous Current overload.
_ 5. Inverter overtemperature.
6. Overcurrent stall.
7. Overvoltage stall.
8. Ground Fault.
- 9. Blown input fuse.
10. Control Power supply failure.
J. Operator Interface:
1. Provide front of panel mounted keypad/display, capable of controlling drive and setting
drive parameters.
2. Digital display shall include following functions:
a. Frequency.
b. Control mode- manual or auto.
C. Output frequency.
d. Percent output voltage.
e. Percent output current.
3. Keypad:
13404-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
a. Digital.
b. Menu driven.C. Stored in non-volatile memory.
d. Lockout code protected.
e. Key Functions: _
1) Up/Down arrow keys.
2) Manual/Off/Auto keys.
3) Run/Stop keys.
4) Fault Clear/Reset keys.
5) Program key.
6) Read/Write keys. —
7) Quick Setup key.
2.03 DRY RUN CREEK PUMP ADJUSTABLE SPEED DRIVE SYSTEM
A. General:
1. Include adjustable frequency drive system with 3 wastewater pumps. Drive system _
includes, but not limited to, motors, inverters, motor control equipment, and pump control
panel. Inverters and accessories shall be as specified in this section and listed in
Schedule 1 to Section 13404.
2. Install 3 phase power components in NEMA 1 enclosures with open chasis inverters.
Paint with manufacturers standard exterior gray and interior white.
3. Design components to form complete control system, including necessary electrical
interlocking and interwiring between components within structure, with terminal block
provisions for connecting remote mounted devices with control system. —
4. Provide door mounted, engraved nameplates for each door mounted or remote mounted
device or unit of equipment in accordance with Section 15075.
5. Include relays, breakers, and items necessary to achieve system performance specified. —
Furnish terminal blocks for interconnection between enclosures.
6. Furnish interconnecting conductors between adjustable speed cabinets and equipment
excluding motors.
7. Terminate wiring inside enclosures.
B. Drive Enclosures:
1. Quantity 3.
2. Dimensions as shown on drawings.
3. Nema 1 enclosure with pad lockable disconnect switch.
4. Free-standing.
5. Provide pump protection (MAS module or equal)
C. Pump Control Panel: —
1. 36 in. wide.
2. Free-standing.
3. Front of Panel Mounted Devices:
Description (Range) Interface
Operator Interface Unit
Back up pump control reset pushbutton
4. Operator Interface Unit functions: —
Description (Range) Interface
Wet well level indication (0 to XX ft) -- -
13404-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
HOA switch for each pump --
Reset pushbutton --
VFD Run light for each pump Signal from vfd
VFD fault for each pump Signal from VFD
Elapsed time meter for each pump --
Low wet well water level alarm light
High wet well water level alarm light
High motor temp light for each pump
Seal fail for each pump
Speed indicator for each raw wastewater --
um
Level indicating controller
Inverter fail alarm light for each inverter --
Pump 1 Lead/Off Two position sequence --
selector switch
_ Pump 2 Lead/Lag1/Lag2/Lag3 four
position sequence selector switch
Pump 3 Lead/Lag1/Lag2/Lag3 four --
position sequence selector switch
a. Additional Panel Equipment:
1) PLC Allen Bradley Compact Logix.
2) UPS, sized for 10 minutes back up time.
3) Unpowered contacts for pump run, fail, high level and power fail alarm signals.
D. Functional Description:
1. Liquid Level Control System:
a. Provide Liquid Level Control System in logic section, designed to maintain liquid
level in common wet well between minimum and maximum level requirements using
constant level control strategy. Level may deviate from level setpoint only when
current pumping capacity is outside pumping range achievable with number of
pumps currently operating.
b. Include level system and ramp and sequence control.
1) Level system shall provide 4-20 mAdc output control signal. Maximum signal
shall represent maximum water level and minimum signal shall represent
minimum water level.
2) Provide control signals in liquid level control unit to indicate wet well liquid level
to initiate start and stop functions for 4 pumps, and to modulate speed of 3
pumps.
3) Provide signal offset capability to allow pump speed to be adjusted to allow
pump capacity to be equalized between pumps.
C. Utilize 4-20 mAdc control signal supplied by level transducer specified.
d. Provide with features and appurtenances, whether individually specified or not, to
obtain operating requirements specified.
e. Pumps shall be sequentially started with time delays upon restoration of power.
f. Pump control shall include anti-backspin timers for each pump activated on pump
stop to prevent respective pump from restarting until timer is timed out.
2. Automatic Operation:
a. Provide sequence control to logically determine from panel signals which pumps to
be operative in automatic sequence.
13404-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Liquid level control system shall automatically operate 4 pump drives to maintain wet
well level as described herein from selector switches for setting up pump sequence.
C. First (lead), second (lag 1), third (lag 2) pump position shall be from adjustable
speed inverters with any inverter arranged so it can operate in first or second or third
position.
d. Provide proportional wetwell level PID controller with operator entered wetwell level
setpoint initially set at 834.57 ft.
e. Initially set proportional band at 1 ft. above and 1 ft. below wetwell level setpoint.
f. Calibrate minimum and maximum speed for each variable speed pump in field.
g. Control pump speed to allow pumping of all flows, from minimum to maximum flows
achievable, with combination of pumps available.
h. Pumps shall not cycle at any steady flow condition.
i. Minimize pump cycling under transient flow conditions.
j. Do not allow more pumps operating than required to meet present flow condition.
3. On Rising Wetwe►I Level:
a. Start first (lead) pump at maximum speed (with adjustable controlled rate of
acceleration)when wetwell rises above proportional band.
b. If level continues to rise above proportional band start second pump at current
controller setpoint after preset adjustable time delay (with adjustable controlled rate
of acceleration).
C. If level continues to rise above proportional band start third pump at current -
controller setpoint after preset adjustable time delay (with adjustable controlled rate
of acceleration).
d. Provide speed signal for each pump operating to equally share load with adjustable
speed bias setting for each individual pump.
4. On Falling Wetwell Level:
a. As wet well level decreases, operating pump(s) shall reduce in speed until outflow
equals inflow and level drops to wetwell level setpoint.
b. If level drops with operating pump(s) running at minimum speed, stop last pump
started when wetwell level drops below proportional band, after preset adjustable
time delay.
C. If wetwell level continues to drop with operating pump(s) running at minimum speed,
stop last pump started when wetwell level drops below proportional band, after
preset adjustable time delay.
d. If wetwell level continues to drop with one pump running at minimum speed, stop
lead pump when wetwell level drops below proportional band after preset adjustable
time delay. —
5. Provide three different minimum speed settings for each pump. Four different speed
settings shall be used automatically depending on number of pumps operating.
6. On one drive failure, sequence shall be as above, except eliminate pump drive system
which has failed to start.
7. Automatic Backup Control Mode, control shall be independent of PLC:
a. When High level float is activated and HOA switches are in "Auto" start lead pump at
speed setting at preset speed.
b. If High level float is still activated after preset adjustable time delay, activate lag 1
pump at preset speed setting.
C. If High level float is still activated after preset adjustable time delay, activate lag 2
pump at speed setting.
d. When Pump off level float is activated and HOA switches are in "Auto", stop all pump
started in backup mode,
e. Back up level control reset pushbutton will return wetwell control system to constant
wetwell level automatic control.
13404-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
8. High, Pump Off and low level alarms shall be activated by float switches furnished and
installed in wetwell at elevation shown on Drawings.
9. Stop pumps on low water level alarm (828.97) in Hand or Auto, and high temp signal.
10. Provide seal fail indication, pump continues to run. Indication remains on until manually
reset.
11. Receive the following from each drive:
a. Drive running, discrete.
b. Drive fault discrete.
C. Drive in auto, discrete.
d. Pump high temp, discrete.
e. Pump seal fail, discrete.
f. Speed, 4-20 mA.
12. Transmit the following to each drive:
a. Drive required to run, discrete.
b. Speed control, 4-20 mA.
13. Provide unpowered contacts for following signals. Signals to be transmitted to OWNER
provided monitoring system:
a. Backup control active.
b. High Wet Well Level.
C. Low Wet Well Level.
d. Pump 1 Fail.
e. Pump 2 Fail.
f. Pump 3 Fail.
g. Pump 1 Seal Fail.
h. Pump 2 Seal Fail.
i. Pump 3 Seal Fail.
14. Provide following 4-20 mA signals to OWNER provided monitoring system:
a. Wet Well Level.
E. Field Devices:
Description (Range) Notes
Wet well level indication (0 to 11 ft) Submersible level
transducer
High Level float switch (for automatic Elevation: see drawings
bac up control mode
Pump off Level float switch (for automatic Elevation: see drawings
backupcontrol mode
Low Level float switch Elevation: see drawin s
2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inverter Testing:
1. Upon completion of manufacture and assembly, factory test drive at full load to
demonstrate compliance with specified features and characteristics.
2. OWNER may witness factory testing of drives.
3. Provide 2 weeks notice to OWNER prior to testing of drives.
13404-9 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. Component failure during testing will require repeating any test associated with failure of
modified components to demonstrate proper operation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved
submittals.
B. Except as shown on Drawings, retain services of drive manufacturer to provide final wiring
interconnections between sections of adjustable speed cabinets.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Provide services as specified in process package systems.
SCHEDULE 1 TO SECTION 13404
ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE EQUIPMENT
Pumps
Drive System Requirements
Pump Tag No. N/A
Motor Tag No. N/A
Reference Specification Section 02532
Number of Inverters 3
No. of Harmonic Trap Filters 0
No. of Input Line Reactors 0
No. of Inverter Bypass Contactors 0
No. of Mechanically Interlocked Reversing Contactors 0
No. of Circuit Breakers 1 per drive
No. of Motor Overloads 1 per drive
No. of Output Line Reactors 0
*** END OF SECTION
13404-10 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 13420
FLOW METER(MAGNETIC)
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Magnetic flow meters.
2. Converters.
3. Interconnecting cable.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Comply with Schedule 1 to Section 13420.
2. Ratio of flow velocity to reference voltage signals generated identical for each meter size.
Meter shall be compatible with secondary readout instrument without circuit modifications.
3. Changes in density,viscosity,temperature, pressure or conductivity within limits of flow meter
shall not affect accuracy. Maintain accuracy for field repairs performed by supplier's service
technician during warranty period.
4. Design is based on minimum average velocity of 3 ft/sec through meter. Meters requiring
greater velocities to meet specified accuracy and proper performance are not acceptable.
5. Flowmeter system accuracy shall be±0.5% of actual flow rate from 3 to 30 ft/sec and ±1%
from 1 to 3 ft/sec. Repeatability shall be±0.1%and response time programmable from 1 sec
to 100 sec.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Catalog cuts and manufacturer's specification for each meter and converter.
2. Standard wiring diagrams.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Drawing showing location of meter in pipe system.
2. Wiring diagram between meter and converter.
C. Operation and Maintenance(O&M) Data:
1. Hydraulic calibration results including printout of actual calibration data giving indicated vs.
actual flows at minimum of 1 ft/sec flow rate for each meter. List test results by serial number
of meter.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Krohne Opti 2000.
B. Endress+Hauser Promag 50.
C. ABB Water Master.
13420-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
D. Or equal.
2.02 FLOW METER PRIMARY ELEMENT
A. Low frequency, electromagnetic induction type: Produce do pulse signal directly proportional and
linear to liquid flow rate.
B. NEMA 6 housing: Watertight external and internal electrical conduit connections.
C. Power from signal converter.
D. Flow meter liner, electrode materials, and electrode type shall comply with materials listed on
Schedule 1.
E. Use stainless steel or Hastelloy C grounding rings or grounding gaskets on each end of magnetic
flow meter to provide ground path and prevent interference with flow signal on non-metallic or lined
pipe. Do not provide grounding probes.
F. Sensing head interchangeable with meter body without performing flow recalibration.
G. High impedance device of not less than 1012 ohms to minimize span shift due to electrode coating.
H. Explosion proof sensor certified by Factory Mutual Research for Class I, Division I or Division II as
specified or shown, Groups C and D when sensor is located in hazardous area.
2.03 SIGNAL CONVERTER
A. Remote mounted, microprocessor controlled.
1. Operate on 120 vac, 60 Hz power.
2. Provide pulsed do voltage to magnet coils of magnetic flow meter to establish magnetic field.
3. Convert flow signal from magnetic flow meter to analog and digital output signals, for
bidirectional flow.
B. Span shall be continuously adjustable between 1 and 33 ft/sec. Adjustment shall be by keypad.
C. Display flow rate scaled in field selectable engineering units,as shown in Schedule 1.Display shall
have 2 rows of 16 alpha numeric characters. Top row shall indicate instantaneous flow.
D. Converter interchangeable with magnetic flow meter element and require no additional flow
calibration.
E. Isolated 4-20 mAdc analog current output into 0 to 500 ohm load and 24 vdc scaled, software
adjustable pulse output.
F. Cast Aluminum NEMA 6X enclosure.
G. Noise reduction feature to stabilize flow reading.
H. Automatic empty pipe detection.
1. Suitable for-400 F to 1500 F ambient temperature.
13420-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.04 CABLE
— A. Provide sufficient length of manufacturers standard signal cable to connect meter primary element
and converter.
B. Use single conduit run between converter and meter.
2.05 TAGGING
A. Provide identification tags and markers with ENGINEER'S equipment name and tag number.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
— A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals.
B. Locate meter as recommended by manufacturer with respect to other piping components to ensure
meter will meet specified accuracy.
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Supplier's or manufacturer's technician for equipment specified herein shall be present atjob
site or classroom designated by OWNER for mandays indicated, travel time excluded, for
assistance during plant construction, plant startup, equipment calibration, and training of
OWNER'S personnel for plant operation. Include minimum of:
_ a. 1/2 manday for Installation Services.
b. 1/2 manday for Instructional Services.
2. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,
maintenance,and troubleshooting and system-related areas other than process design and
philosophy.
— B. Field calibrate under operating conditions.
i
i
i
i
13420-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
\
% 0 Cl)
w CD
) ~ §
0
o L 3
cl� t
6 d
/
E �.
CL
� § / � 22
k Fn
/ � JJ
ƒ / L6 �
� �
q � � � R
/ ¢ o 4)
. G a «
0 � § ■ k c 0 7 Z
k /L � � / � �
mLU C ± rUn ±
o � LL 1:6 / \
® 0 s O
UJ_j7 a U) k
U v § �2 p: ic
k / E = E .2
� « 0 2 o U)
a ■ ■
CL
/ w00a _ -
u m
E
_
1
§ 0 k
U ° - 02
o ■ ■
cRaz =
6 $ -
a
k■ � e � :
d 0 ■
o c �■ z >
2 0
e5E
/ .2Emw
± w wri
SECTION 13440
GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirements for package and non-package Instrumentation and Control Systems
unless otherwise specified in other sections.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Selector Switch: When used under panel component description refers to maintained contact type
switches. Loss and return of control power to circuit does not change control mode of requirements
in switch position.
B. Push-button: When used under panel component description refers to momentary contact type
—` switches which, unless specified otherwise, shall require electrical interlock. Loss of control power
shall, unless specified otherwise, result in loss of electrical interlock and stoppage of previous mode
of operations.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Provide run/fail, alarm, and equipment status functions.
2. Unless otherwise specified, "run" signals shall be derived from motor starter normally open
auxiliary contacts.
3. Unless otherwise specified, discrete input and output signals shall conform to:
a. Isolated unpowered (dry)contact closures.
b. Power contact from panel receiving signal or device receiving signal.
4. Unless otherwise specified, input and output analog signals shall conform to:
a. 4-20 mAdc.
b. For 2-wire transmitter, provide isolated type and power with 24 or 48 vdc at panel or
device receiving signal.
C. Where isolation is required to interface with particular equipment furnished, provide
necessary 1/1 converters.
5. For PLC based systems manual control devices, in panel or field, shall be independent from
—" PLC to provide maintenance and redundancy function.
6. Panels, panel devices,and field devices shall meet or exceed NEMA requirements as follows.
a. NEMA 4X: Wet locations or outdoors.
1) Instrumentation and control panels shall be 316 stainless steel
2) Instruments and device enclosures shall be 316 stainless steel, fiberglass, or
ABS plastic.
b. NEMA 7: Class 1, Division 1 or 2 areas.
C. NEMA 12: Other areas.
13440-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
7. Design Life: Design control system for min. 10 yr life at following temperatures:
a. Permit continuous operation with panel external ambient temperatures of up to+40°C
(+104°F).
b. Outdoor Panels: Permit operation with panel external ambient temperatures of down to
-29°C (-20°F).
C. Indoor Panels: Permit operation with panel external ambient temperatures of down to
+8°C (+400F).
8. When motor controller disconnecting means is off,deenergize associated equipment devices
powered from panel.
9. Electrical wiring and controls shall conform to Division 16. _
B. Identify equipment on panel or screens with indication below:
1. Green Light On: Equipment running.
2. Red Light On: Equipment failure when called to run, but not running due to power failure,
overload, breaker, disconnect, or remote switch call for equipment to stop.
a. Provide parallel "required"contact wired to panel for items such as pumps and valves.
b. Provide necessary relay logic and adjustable timers to sense discrepancy between
"required" and "running" and activate respective "Run" and "Fail" light from these
signals. Provide horn when specified.
3. Amber Light On: Indicate equipment status such as valve open or closed.
4. White Light On: Equipment off.
C. Alarm Sequence:
1. Manual Reset Sequence: Alarm condition shall illuminate corresponding visual alarm point.
Depressing push-button shall turn off light. Subsequent alarm condition shall repeat above
sequence. If alarm condition ceases, steady visual alarm shall not go out until reset
push-button depressed. Momentary alarms shall lock-in until reset. Depressing test _
push-buttons for alarm functions shall turn on visual alarm points simultaneously or use press
to test lights.
1.04 SUBMITTALS —
A. General:
1. Submit following information tabulated in booklet form for each piece of equipment or system
furnished under this section.
2. Table of Contents of Submittals: Include for each booklet when more than 1 item of
equipment is included in submittal:
a. ENGINEER'S instrument tag number.
b. Instrument manufacturer's model number.
C. Related piping, electrical, and dimension drawings.
B. Product Data:
1. Construction materials.
2. Ranges.
3. Output/Input signals.
4. Accessories.
5. Mounting location.
6. ENGINEER'S tag number on manufacturer's specifications sheets.
13440-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
7. Interconnect reference for associated field and panel instruments.
8. Component specification sheets.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Panel fabrication and dimension drawings, nameplate legends, ENGINEER'S tag numbers,
and wiring and piping schematic drawings. Project specific drawings are required for each
panel, typical are not acceptable.
2. Equipment dimension drawings.
-- 3. Equipment terminal and piping connections.
4. Loop-by-loop system electrical schematic showing terminal-to-terminal interconnections
between related panel and field instruments.
_ 5. Front of panel layout.
6. PLC 1/0 module connection diagram for PLC based systems.
7. Ladder/logic system electrical schematic showing wiring of each component,including ranges
and set points. Wiring and ladder diagram shall have reference numbers on every line for
cross referencing. Each device on ladder shall be cross-referenced with line number as to
wherever it is located.
8. Terminal to terminal interconnection drawings showing wiring for panel to panel/MCC and
panel to field equipment.
D. Miscellaneous:
1. Certificate of UL or nationally recognized testing laboratory(NRTL) inspection and approval
for each completely assembled panel prior to shipment to Project.
2. Include ENGINEER'S tag number when available on each submittal document or page
wherever specific component appears.
3. Extra materials list.
E. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:
1. Include O&M data for each panel and field device specified in Division 13 and Division 16:
a. PLC ladder logic software(electronic and printed)including tags,comments,operational
-� database values and passwords or pass codes.
b. Configured software on electronic media to install program on spare PLC processors
and programmable controller.
C. Bill of materials.
d. Instruction Manual: Includes detailed operating sequence descriptions.
e. Maintenance Manual: Instructions for maintaining equipment to include calibrating,
cleaning, and trouble shooting.
f. Front and rear panel layout drawings.
g. Name plate data.
2. Submit package:
a. Equipment provided under Section 13404.
F. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standardization:
1. Drawings and Specifications are intended to provide overall system functions. Provide
_. equipment necessary to provide complete and operable system.
2. CONTRACTOR is responsible for costs resulting from deviations from Contract Documents.
13440-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Items provided under sections referenced to this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other
Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL).
1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms "listed"and "labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall complywith National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 EQUIPMENT MARKERS
A. Furnish equipment markers with ENGINEER'S equipment name and tag number.
2.02 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform UL inspection and certification for each completely assembled panel before shipment to
Project site.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment in locations indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and approved submittals.
3.02 EQUIPMENT MARKERS
A. Fasten to equipment to be visible.
*** END OF SECTION
13440-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 13442
INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL PANEL CONSTRUCTION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Comply with Section 13440.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Wiring and wiring identification.
2. Terminal identification.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials:
1. 5 fuses or 10%, whichever is greater, for each type of fuse.
2. 30% spare unwired terminals; to be shown on panel drawings.
_ 3. 5 lamps or 10%, whichever is greater, for each type of lamp.
4. One intrinsically safe relay and intrinsically safe barrier for each type.
5. One control relay for each type.
6. One lightning and surge protection module for each type.
•— 7. Spare PLC 1/0 points wired to terminal blocks.
B. Panel Space:
1. Include 10 % contiguous usable rear of panel area for future components.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 CONTROL PANELS
A. Factory-fabricate, install instruments, plumb and wire.
B. Make external connections byway of numbered terminal blocks.
C. Separate electrical components from pneumatic components by metal barriers.
D. Conform to ISA standards.
E. Construct panels to external dimensions as specified, required,or shown. Component arrangement
and wiring shall be consistent for like panels.
F. Fabrication:
1. Minimum Metal Thickness: 14 ga.
a. Construct panels so no seams or bolt heads visible when viewed from front.
13442-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Panel cutouts for instruments and other devices, such as lights and switches, shall be
cut, punched or drilled, and smoothly finished with rounded edges.
2. Wherever practical, enclosures shall be manufacturer's standard product.
3. Size to adequately dissipate heat generated by equipment mounted in or on panel.
4. Equip panels mounted outside buildings with thermostatically controlled space heaters
capable of maintaining internal temperature of 10°C, ±2°C, with 20 mph wind at ambient _
temperature of-30°C. Heaters shall operate on 120 vac, 60 Hz power.
5. Install rear of panel devices on subpanel.
G. Doors:
1. Provide front doors except on graphic sections and where otherwise specified.
2. Full height, fully gasketed access doors.
3. Provide with 3-point padlock locking latches.
4. Provide full length, continuous, piano type stainless steel hinges and pins.
H. Service Outlets: _
1. Provide 20 amp, 120 v service outlet circuit fused at 5 amps within back-of-panel area. Fuse
separate from control power.
I. Temperature Control:
1. For NEMA 1 and 12 Applications: _
a. Provide louvers or forced ventilation as required to limit internal temperature build-up.
Internal panel temperature shall not exceed lowest or highest temperature rating of
internal components.
b. Mount stamped sheet metal louvers on top and bottom in rear of panels.
C. For panels mounted with backs directly adjacent to wall, mount louvers on sides.
d. Provide separately fused forced ventilation fans, when required, with washable or _
replaceable filters. Fan motors shall operate on 120 v, 60 Hz power.
2. For NEMA 4 and 4X Applications:
a. Provide thermostatically controlled heat exchanger and circulation fans as required to
limit internal temperature buildup within sealed enclosure. Internal panel temperature
shall not exceed lowest or highest temperature rating of internal components.
b. Heat exchanger shall be of air to air heat pipe type:
1) Manufacturer: Noren Products Inc.
2) Components located outside of control center enclosure shall be suitable for
outdoor installation.
3) Fans shall be waterproof and installed in an anodized aluminum enclosure.
C. Install heat exchanger so that NEMA rating of enclosure is not compromised.
d. For outdoor application sunshields may be used to limit internal panel temperature.
J. Fusing:
1. Maximum Fuse Size: 5 amp.
2. Group instruments after separate fusing with maximum of 10 instruments/fuse.
3. Fuse power supplies individually. '-
4. Where 5 amp capacity is exceeded by load requirements, provide additional fuses.
5. For field devices powered by panel, provide separate fuse for each output.
13442-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
K. Wiring Terminals:
1. Mount and wire panel instruments and components to terminal blocks within panel so
installation shall require only setting panel in place and making connections to field wiring and
utilities.
2. Provide separately mounted terminal blocks in panel for connection of field wiring to panel.
3. Label with respective loop number as designated on Panel Ladder Logic Drawings or Loop
Diagrams.
L. Intrinsically Safe Components:
1. Provide intrinsically safe shunt barriers and relays as necessary when field components are
located in Class I Division 1 or Division 2 hazardous class field locations.
M. Lightning and Surge Protection:
1. Provide on instrumentation and control signals whose source or destination is outside
_ building.
2. Provide on phone lines and copper data network connections located outside building.
3. Provide on 120 vac power feeds.
-r N. Wiring Identification:
1. Label panel wiring at each end of conductor with wire number as designated on Panel Ladder
Logic Drawings or Loop Diagrams.
2. Labels shall be heat shrinkable vinyl sleeve with permanent embossed letters. Emboss label
characters on single sleeve. Heat shrink sleeves on conductors at terminal ends.
3. Conductors Color Codes:
a. 120 vac power wiring, line(phase "A"): Black.
b. 120 vac power wiring, neutral/common: White.
C. 120 vac power wiring, ground: Green.
d. 120 vac control wiring, internal power source: Red.
e. 120 vac control wiring, external power source: Yellow.
f. 24 vdc control wiring, internal or external power source: Light Blue.
g. 4-20 mAdc signal wiring, positive lead: Black.
h. 4-20 mAdc signal wiring, negative lead: White or Red.
i. Data highway cable, signal leads: Manufacturer's standard.
O. Panel Drawing Data Pocket:
1. Mount inside without penetrating panel.
2. Size for holding wiring diagrams.
3. Construct from thermal plastic or metal.
4. Include wiring diagrams.
— P. Three Phase and Motor Control Panel:
1. Through door main disconnect or circuit breaker.
— 2. Control transformer with primary and secondary fuses or circuit breakers.
2.02 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FREE-STANDING PANEL CONSTRUCTION
A. Fabrication:
13442-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1. Fabricate each panel from sheet steel with 1 piece, 10 ga steel front and 12 ga steel sides,
back, and top.
2. Provide steel angle stiffeners on back of panel face to prevent panel deflection under
instrument loading or operation.
3. Provide internal structural steel framework for instrument support and panel bracing. Internal
framework shall permit lifting of panel without racking or distortion.
4. Provide removable lifting rings designed to facilitate rigging and lifting of panel during _
installation. Provide plugs to fill lifting ring holes after installation to complete and lifting rings
have been removed.
5. Where 2 or more sections of panel are mounted adjacent to one another, bolt together with
front faces parallel.
B. Doors:
1. Rear access doors shall extend no further than 24 in. beyond panel when opened to 900
position.
2. For panels with no front doors or rear access, provide 36 in. deep panel with side access
doors on each side. _
C. Lights:
1. Provide separately fused and switched 100 watt incandescent or equivalent cold start
fluorescent back-of-panel lights.
2. Provide one light for every 4 ft or less of panel width.
3. Mount inside and in top of back-of-panel area.
D. Service Outlets:
1. Space evenly along back of panel. �-
a. Panels 4 ft or less: 1 outlet.
b. Panels greater than 4 ft: 2 outlets.
C. Panels greater than 8 ft: 3 outlets.
d. Panels greater than 12 ft: 4 outlets.
E. Instrument Location:
1. Locate instruments designated for back of panel mounting to allow for maintenance and
adjustment. _
2. Front of panel instrument mounting height shall not exceed 6 ft 6 in., minimum height shall be
4 ft-0 in.
2.03 PANEL FINISH —
A. Remove mill scale, rust, grease, and oil. Fill imperfections and sand smooth.
B. Paint interior and exterior with one coat of epoxy metal primer and 2 finish coats of 2 component
type epoxy enamel.
1. Paint edges of cutouts before installation of instruments and devices.
C. Dry film thickness shall not be less than 3.0 mils.
D. Color: Manufacturer's standard gray for exterior and white for interior.
2.04 NAMEPLATES
13442-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
` A. Provide nameplates for I&C panels and each front-of-panel instrument and device with designations
as shown on Drawings and as listed in Specifications.
B. Panel Designation: Engraved with ENGINEER'S panel tag number and description with 1/2 in.high
characters.
C. Application/Function Nameplate: Locate 3/16 in. characters above or near panel mounted
instrument or device consisting of descriptive phrase using nomenclature as listed in Specifications
(when available).
D. Laminated white plastic inscribed with black characters.
E. Tag Number: Include ENGINEER'S tag number as shown on P&ID's and in Specifications on each
nameplate.
F. Provide aluminum decal with black 3/16 in.characters identifying tag number or device designation.
Locate decal on instrument or device or above instrument or device on panel.
G. Secure front-of-panel and front-of-instrument nameplate with drive screws or self-tapping fasteners.
2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test wiring and plumbing prior to shipment.
1. Test internal wiring and components to ensure panel is operational prior to shipment.
2. When panels are interwired, interconnect panels at factory and test functionality of system.
3. Simulate field component and instrument inputs at panel terminals. Test panel outputs with
suitable test instruments.
4. Pressure test internal piping system and components for leaks and repair before shipping.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install panels in locations indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions and approved submittals.
B. Paint: Touch up defects in panel finish after installation.
"** END OF SECTION "
` 13442-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 13451
CELLULAR TELEPHONE AUTOMATIC DIALER
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Comply with Section 13440.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Dialer shall interface plant control system defined alarms to cellular telephone system.
2. Upon receipt of one or more critical alarms, dialer will automatically facilitate the compilation
and transmission of alarm information and make information available via GuardDog
software.
3. Dialer shall continue calling until call completed and acknowledged.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. OmniSite Crystal Ball.
B. No substitutes.
2.02 DIALER
A. Enclosure: panel mount.
B. Input:
1. 11 universal voltage inputs.
2. 4 analog inputs.
3. 4 relay outputs.
4. 3 inputs to monitor pump activity.
5. 2 pulse input.
6. 1 rain fall input.
C. Transmit/receive using GSM.
D. Provide slip-on pump amp probes.
E. Operating Temperature: 20°F to 150°F.
F. Operating Humidity: 0% to 90% non-condensing.
G. Features:
1. Transmit alarm to alphanumeric pager, numeric pager,voice pager,standard telephone lines,
cellular phones.
2. Provide verbal alarm information.
3. Provide a means of acknowledging alarms and interrogating values.
4. Information from dialer shall be available from any web enabled device.
13451-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
H. Power: 120 (±10%)vac, 60 Hz.
I. Fixed annual wireless fee.
J. Provide antenna and cable, location to be determined by manufacturer. _
K. Provide lighting-surge protection.
L. Dimensions: 8.5 in. W. x 8.2 in. H. x 4 in. D each.
PART 3 EXECUTION _
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals.
B. Wire and test each device to be suitable for operation.
** ' END OF SECTION "
13451-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 13453
PANEL AND FIELD DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Comply with Section 13440.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PUSH-BUTTON/SELECTOR SWITCH CONTROL UNITS AND PILOT LIGHTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square D.
2. Cutler-Hammer.
3. Allen Bradley.
4. Or equal.
B. Construction:
1. Heavy duty.
2. Oil tight, watertight.
3. Base mounting.
4. Flush panel mounting.
5. Size to mount in 30.5 mm opening without adapter. Smaller units are not acceptable.
C. Pushbuttons:
1. Flush head unless specified elsewhere.
2. Contact Blocks:
a. Double break silver contacts.
b. ac Ratings: 7,200 va make, 720 va break.
C. Single pole, double throw or double pole, single throw.
d. Up to 6 tandem blocks.
3. Momentary contact unless specified elsewhere.
4. Non-illuminated.
5. Padlock attachments where required.
6. Legend plates as required for type of operation or as specified elsewhere.
D. Pilot Lights:
1. Transformer type.
2. Bayonet, 6 to 8 v bulb.
3. Colored lenses as specified elsewhere.
4. Interchangeable lenses.
5. Transformer rated for 120 v, 60 Hz.
6. Push to test.
7. Legend plates as required for type of operation or specified elsewhere.
13453-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
E. Nameplates:
1. I&C Panel: Section 13442.
2.02 MOTOR STARTER CONTROL RELAYS _
A. Manufacturers:
1. Square D.
2. Cutler-Hammer.
3. Or equal.
B. Construction:
1. Industrial type.
2. 300 v rated. _
3. ac operation.
4. Pressure wire connectors.
C. Operating Data:
1. Pickup Time: 11 ms maximum.
2. Dropout Time: 6 ms maximum.
D. Coil:
1. Molded construction.
2. 120 vac, 60 Hz.
3. Continuous rated.
4. 155 va inrush, maximum. ,
5. 22 va sealed, maximum.
6. Suppress coil transients to 300 v or less.
E. Contacts:
1. Double break.
2. Silver alloy. _
3. Convertible.
4. Color coded to indicate status.
5. Pilot duty.
6. 60 amp make, 6 amp break, (120 v inducting).
F. Track mounting capability.
G. Accessories:
1. Add-on pole attachment.
a. 4 NO and 4 NC contacts.
b. Add-on to 0 to 4-pole relay.
2. Latch attachment.
13453-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.03 GENERAL PURPOSE CONTROL RELAYS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Potter and Brumfield, KU Series.
2. Struthers Dunn.
3. Or equal.
B. Operating Data:
1. Pickup Time: 13 ms maximum.
2. Dropout Time: 10 ms maximum.
3. Operating Temperature: -45°C to 70°C.
C. ac Coil:
1. 120 or 240 vac.
2. Continuous rated.
3. 3.5 va inrush.
4. 1.2 va sealed.
"— 5. 50 to 60 Hz.
6. Minimum Dropout Voltage: 10% of coil rated voltage.
D. do Coil:
1. 24 or 120 vdc.
2. Continuous rated.
3. Minimum Coil Resistance:
a. 24 vdc: 450 ohm.
b. 100 vdc: 9,000 ohm.
E. Contacts:
1. Silver cadmium oxide.
2. Gold flashed fine silver, gold diffused for 1 amp or less resistive loads.
3. 4 Form C.
4. 120 vac.
5. 10 amp make, 15 amp break, (inductive).
F. Rated at 10 million operations.
G. Plug-in sockets.
H. Enclosed and protected by polycarbonate cover.
I. Provide relay retaining clips.
2.04 TIMERS
A. Interval/Duration Timer(Rear of Panel):
1. Manufacturers:
a. Potter and Brumfield.
b. Danaher(Eagle Signal).
C. Or equal.
13453-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Mounting: Plug-in with dust-tight cover.
3. Type: Integrated circuit.
4. Timing Range: 0.5 sec to 99 min. Field selectable.
5. Contacts: DPDT contacts rated 10 amp.
6. Power: 120 vac, 60 Hz. _
B. On-Off Delay Timer(Rear of Panel):
1. Manufacturers: '-
a. Potter and Brumfield, CN1 series.
b. Danaher(Eagle Signal), DG 100 miniflex series. _
C. Or equal.
2. Mounting: Plug-in with dust-tight cover.
3. Type: Integrated circuit. --
4. Range: 0.1 sec to 9.990 hr. Field selectable.
5. Contacts: DPDT contacts rated 10 amp.
5. Set Points: 288 per 24 hrs.
6. Power: 120 vac, 60 Hz.
2.05 FLOAT SWITCHES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Consolidated 9GEF.
2. Anchor Scientific GP.
3. Or equal.
B. Float: 316 stainless steel. _
C. Provide sufficient length of nitrile PVC jacketed cable.
D. For Class I, Divisions 1 or 2, hazardous areas, provide intrinsically safe relays in corresponding
control panel.
E. Mounting Hardware: 316 stainless steel. _
F. Switch: Non-Mercury tilt type switch with minimum rating of 10 million cycles.
2.06 TERMINAL BLOCKS FOR CONTROL WIRING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Phoenix Contact. UK-5N.
2. Allen Bradley, Bulletin 1492.
B. General: --
1. 600 v rating.
2. Marker labels on each terminal. _
3. Clip-mount on DIN rails.
4. Insulating end caps to support each terminal block assembly.
5. Touchsafe terminal block and accessories.
6. Connection: Captive screw and pressure plate. Connection shall not cause deformation of
wire.
7. Contact material and surface: Nickel or tin plated copper alloy. Do not use ferrous metals.
s
13453-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Switched Knife Disconnect(when specified):
1. Non-fused.
2. Single-pull, single throw(SPST).
3. Hinged disconnect lever.
D. Fused Indicating (when specified):
1. LED blown fuse indicating light.
2. Hinged disconnect lever.
3. Size fuse for load.
4. 15 amp capacity fuse holder.
2.07 TAGGING
A. Provide Type 316 stainless steel tag on field-mounted units and permanently affix tag to unit.
B. Engrave with process application as listed in Specifications.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC,
NECA"Standard of Installation," and recognized industry practices.
B. Control Relays:
1. Provide control relays for general purpose logic circuits.
2. Provide motor starter control relays when load exceeds rating of general purpose control
relays.
END OF SECTION "
13453-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 13459
FIELD ELECTRONIC TRANSMITTERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Field transmitters for instrumentation and control (I&C)system.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 SUBMERSIBLE LEVEL TRANSMITTER
A. Manufacturers:
1. Consolidated Electric.
2. Or equal.
B. Level transmitter consisting of variable capacitance, gauge pressure sensing assembly enclosed in
submersible Type 316 stainless steel housing with Buna N pressure sensing diaphragm, special
cable containing 1/8 in. breather tube and signal wiring, and sealed breather and transmitter
assembly.
C. Provide intrinsically safe barriers when used in hazardous areas.
D. Transducer:
1. Low movement 2-5/8 in. dia Buna N diaphragm.
2. Hydraulic oil-filled.
3. Nispan C pressure capsule.
-- 4. Pressure exerted against diaphragm flexes minutely which varies proximity between internal
ceramic diaphragm and ceramic substrate to vary capacitance of electrical field created
between 2 surfaces.
E. Cable Assembly:
1. 1/2 in. outside dia.
2. Positive sealed where entering transducer housing.
3. Contains 1/8 in. breather tube.
4. Length: Approximately 50 ft.
F. Breather and Transmitter Assembly:
1. Solid state operational amplifier.
2. 2-wire, 4-20 mAdc(power from controller).
3. Output loop resistance 0-1200 ohms.
4. Span and off-set adjustable.
5. Fused.
6. Active transient protection.
7. Repeatability: ±1/4 of 1%.
8. Hysteresis: ±15% of element range.
9. Accuracy: ±0.5% of span.
10. Power: 110 vac.
13459-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.02 TAGGING
A. Provide Type 316 stainless steel tag permanently affixed to unit(sensor and transmitter separately
mounted).
B. Engrave with process application as listed in Specifications.
C. Include ENGINEER'S tag number as listed in Specifications and on P&ID'S.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and approved submittals.
*** END OF SECTION ***
13459-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15060
PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS, AND ANCHORS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. System of pipe supports and anchors with necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, restraining and
hanger rods, washers, miscellaneous steel, and other accessories.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. Design, detail and installation of pipe support system shall be responsibility of
CONTRACTOR.
2. Pipe support system components shall withstand dead loads imposed byweight of pipes filled
with water plus insulation, plus live loads due to thermal expansion, vibration, internal test
pressures, and have minimum safety factor of 5.
3. Absence of pipe supports and details on Drawings shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of
responsibility for providing them throughout building.
4. Supply design loading criteria to steel truss manufacturer for piping supported from steel
members.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Manufacturer's data, dimensions, sizes,types, location, maximum loading,thrust anchorage
and manufacturer's instructions.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Superstrut.
B. Anvil, International Inc.
C. Carpenter-Patterson.
D. Unistrut.
E. B-line.
F. Or equal.
2.02 GENERAL
A. MSS types indicated are typical of types and quality of standard pipe supports and hangers to be
employed.
B. Provide factory fabricated piping hangers and supports, clamps, hanger rod attachments, building
attachments, saddles, shields, thrust anchorage,and other miscellaneous products of MSS SP-69
15060-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
type indicated or shop fabricated supports;comply with MSS SP-58 and manufacturer's published
product information. Where MSS type not indicated, provide proper selection for installation "
requirements and comply with MSS SP-69, MSS SP-89 and manufacturer's published product
information.
2.03 MATERIALS
A. Hangers, rods, clamps, protective shields, metal framing, support components, and hanger
accessories shall be 3 lb stainless steel unless otherwise noted. '-
2.04 HORIZONTAL PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General:
1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, hangers for 2-1/2 in.and smaller pipe shall be split-ring,
adjustable swivel,clevis or roller type, hangers for 3 in. pipe or greater shall be clevis or roller
type.
2. Hangers for use with spring supports shall be split-ring or clamp type.
3. Each hanger shall be designed to permit at least 1-1/2 in.vertical adjustment after installation. _
B. Adjustable Swivel Split-Ring Hanger: MSS Type 6.
C. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1, fabricated from steel.
D. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7, fabricated from steel.
E. Adjustable Swivel-Band Hanger: MSS Type 10.
F. Clamp: MSS Type 4.
G. Single Roll Support: MSS Type 41, including axle roller and threaded sockets.
H. Adjustable Roller Hanger: MSS Type 43, including axle roller and clevis.
I. Roll/Stand: MSS Type 44, including roller, stand, and axle.
J. Adjustable Roll/Base: MSS Type 46, including roller, adjustable base, and stand. _
K. Steel Brackets: Welded structural steel shapes complying with following.
1. Light Duty: MSS Type 31. _
2. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32.
3. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33.
L. Adjustable Saddle Support:
1. MSS Type 38, including saddle, pipe, and reducer.
2. Fabricate base support from steel pipe and include cast iron flange or welded steel plate.
M. Stanchion Saddle Support:
1. MSS Type 37, including saddle and U-bolt.
2. Fabricate base support from steel pipe and include cast iron flange or welded steel plate.
N. Strap or wire hangers not acceptable.
15060-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.05 VERTICAL PIPING CLAMPS
A. 2-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8, galvanized or plastic coated.
B. 4-Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42, include pipe spacers at inner bolt holes, galvanized or plastic
coated.
2.06 HANGER RODS AND ATTACHMENTS
A. Hanger Rods:
1. ASTM A36, threaded both ends or continuous threaded.
2. Rods shall conform to following sizes.
Pipe Size Minimum Rod Dia(in.)
Up to 2 in. 3/8
2-1/2 in and 3 in. 1/2
4 in. 5/8
_ 6 in. 3/4
8 in. to12in. 7/8
14 in. and Up 1
Trapeze Hangers As Required
B. Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.
C. Weldless Eye Nut: MSS Type 17.
D. Eye Socket: MSS Type 16.
E. Clevis: MSS Type 14.
2.07 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Individual Concrete Inserts:
1. MSS Type 18, malleable iron.
2. MSS Type 19, steel.
3. Minimum Safe Load: 1,100 lbs.
B. Continuous Concrete Inserts:
1. Superstrut.
2. Unistrut.
3. Anvil, International Inc.
4. Or equal.
C. Top Beam C-Clamp: MSS Type 19.
D. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23, steel.
E. Single-Side Clamp: MSS Type 25.
F. Top I-Beam Clamp: MSS Type 25.
G. Side Beam Clamp: MSS Type 20.
15060-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
H. Concrete Anchors:
1. Comply with Section 05500.
2. Minimum Safety Factor: 5.
2.08 SADDLES AND SHIELDS
A. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39.
B. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40.
C. Wood Insulation Saddle:
1. Elcen Metal Products Company.
2. Or equal.
2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Metal Framing Systems:
1. Superstrut, galvanized.
2. Unistrut, galvanized.
3. Anvil, International Inc. galvanized.
4. Or equal.
B. Shop-Fabricated Anchors and Supports:
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36.
2. Restraining Rods: ASTM A307.
3. Fabricate in accordance with Section 05500.
C. Concrete: Class B in accordance with Section 03300.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Proceed with installation of hangers,supports, and anchors after required building structural work is
complete and concrete support structure has reached 28 day compressive strength as specified in
Section 03300.
B. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments from building structure. Comply with
MSS SP-69. Group parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on trapeze type
hangers where possible.
C. Install supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and maximum pipe deflections allowed by
ANSI B31.1 are not exceeded.
D. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of
same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.
E. Do not support piping from other piping.
F. Prevent contact between dissimilar metals. Where concrete or metal pipe support is used, place
1/8 in. thick teflon, neoprene rubber or plastic strip under piping at point of bearing. Cut to fit entire
area of contact between pipe and support.
15060-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
G. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports which are copper
-- plated, plastic coated or by other recognized industry methods. Electrician's tape not acceptable
isolation method.
H. Apply anti-seize compound to nuts and bolts.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS
A. Support piping from structural framing, unless otherwise noted.
B. Concrete Inserts:
1. Locate inserts so total load on insert does not exceed manufacturer's recommended
maximum load. Location of inserts shall be approved by ENGINEER.
2. Where necessary to anchor supports to hardened concrete or completed masonry, use
concrete anchors.
C. Attach to structural steel with beam clamps.
3.03 THRUST ANCHORS AND GUIDES
A. Thrust Anchors:
1. For suspended piping,center thrust anchors as closely as possible between expansion joints
and between elbows and expansion joints. Anchors shall hold pipe securely and be
sufficiently rigid to force expansion and contraction movement to take place at expansion
-- joints or elbows and preclude separation of joints.
2. Provide thrust anchors as required to resist thrust due to changes in dia or direction or dead
ending of pipe lines. Anchorage shall be required wherever bending stresses exceed
allowable for pipe. Wall pipes may be used as thrust anchors.
B. Pipe guides shall be provided adjacent to sliding expansion joints in accordance with
recommendations of National Association of Expansion Joint Manufacturers.
3.04 PIPE SUPPORT
A. Spacing:
Type of Pipe Maximum Pipe Support Spacing (ft)
Steel
10 in. and over 22
8 in. 19
_ 6 in. 17
5 in. 16
4 in. 14
3-1/2 in. 13
3 in. 12
2-1/2 in. 11
2 in. 10
1-1/2 in. 9
1 in. 7
3/4 in. 6
1/2 in. 5
15060-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
Type of Pipe Maximum Pipe Support Spacing (ft)
Copper
4 in. 12
3-1/2 in. 11
3 in. 10
2-1/2 in. 9
2 in. 8
1-1/2 in. 8
1-1/4 in. 7
1 in. 5
3/4 in. 5 -
1/2 in. 5
Plastic Schedule 80 at 100°F
8 in. 9-1/2
6 in. 9
4 in. 7-1/2
3 in. 7
2 in. 6
1-1/2 in. 5-1/2
1 in. 5
3/4 in. 4-1/2
1/2 in. 4-1/2
(For plumbing application plastic piping shall be supported at maximum of 4 ft-0 in.
spacing.)
Stainless Steel
1 in. and smaller 6
1-1/2 in. through 4 in. 8
6 in. 8
8 in. and 10 in. 10
12 in. 10
14 in. 12
16 in. 12
18 in. and larger 14
Cast Iron and Ductile Iron --
1 in. and smaller 6
1-1/4 in. through 2-1/2 in. 8
3 in. and 4 in. 10
6 in. 12
8 in. 12
10 in. and 12 in. 14
14 in. 16
16 in. and 18 in. 16
20 in. 18
24 in. and larger 18
IL (For cast iron soil pipe plumbing applications, support at 5 ft-0 in. spacing.)
B. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together, space supports for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller dia pipe.
C. Provide minimum of 2 pipe supports for each pipe run.
D. Where piping connects to equipment, support by pipe support and not by equipment, unless
approved by equipment manufacturer.
15060-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
E. Unless otherwise shown or authorized by ENGINEER, place piping running parallel to walls
approximately 1-1/2 in. out from face of wall and at least 3 in. below ceiling.
F. Pedestal pipe supports shall be adjustable with stanchion, saddle, and anchoring flange.
G. Piping supports for vertical piping passing through floor sleeves shall be galvanized steel riser
clamps.
— H. Piping passing through sleeves or openings in interior wall sleeves shall be carried by supports or
hangers. Do not rest on wall.
I. Support piping in manner preventing undue strain on valve, fitting or equipment. Provide pipe
supports at changes in direction or elevation, adjacent to flexible couplings, adjacent to nonrigid
joints, and where otherwise shown. Do not install pipe supports and hangers in equipment access
areas.
J. Install supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit freedom of movement
between pipe anchors,and facilitate action of expansion joints,expansion loops,expansion bends,
and similar units.
K. Piping shall be free to move when expands or contracts, except where fixed anchors are indicated.
Where adequate hanger rod swing length cannot be provided or where pipe movement based on
expansion of 1 in./100 ft for each 100°F change in temperature exceed 1/2 in., provide approved
roller supports.
L. Support piping 6 in. and larger on trapeze hangers with rollers.
M. Stacked horizontal runs of piping along walls may be supported by metal framing system attached to
concrete insert channels.
N. Coat hangers, clamps, protective shields, metal framing support components, and hanger
accessories in accordance with Section 09961.
O. Support plumbing in accordance with COMM 82 of Wisconsin Administrative Code.
3.05 INSULATED PIPING
A. Attach clamps, including spacers(if any),to piping with clamps projecting through insulation;do not
exceed allowable pipe stresses.
B. Where low compressive strength insulation or vapor barriers are indicated on cold or chilled water
piping, install coated protective shields. For pipe 8 in. and over, install wood insulation saddles.
C. Where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated, install protection saddles on piping 2 in. and
larger.
3.06 BURIED PIPING
A. Provide unlugged bell and spigot or bell tees,Y-branches,and bends deflecting 11-1/4'or more and
plugs with reaction blocking, anchors, joint harness or other acceptable means for preventing
movement of pipe and joints caused by internal pressure.
B. Concrete Blocking:
1. Extend from fitting to solid undisturbed earth and installed so joints accessible for repair.
2. Bearing area of concrete reaction blocking shall be as shown on Drawings.
15060-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3. If adequate support against undisturbed ground cannot be obtained, install metal harness
anchorages consisting of steel rods across joint and securely anchored to pipe and fitting or
other adequate anchorage facilities to provide necessary support.
4. Should lack of solid vertical excavation face be due to improper trench excavation, cost of
furnishing and installing metal harness anchorages in excess of Contract value of concrete _
blocking replaced by such anchorages shall be borne by CONTRACTOR.
C. Provide reaction blocking,anchorages or other supports for fittings installed in fills or other unstable
ground or above grade as shown on Drawings.
* END OF SECTION "
15060-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15198
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Gas Utility Charges:
1. Consult with utility as to extent of its work, costs,fees, and permits involved for extension of
Gas Utility distribution system to point of services termination and meters. Pay such costs
and fees; obtain permits.
a. Install new natural gas service/meter along south end of Electrical Building as shown on
Drawing 02-CFG-1.
1) Total Connected Natural Gas Load: 867 CFH N.G.
2) Inlet supply pressure at meter to be determined by local utility.
3) Supply pressure downstream of meter to be 15 inches w.c.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Gas Utility: Mid American Energy Company.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for natural
gas systems materials and products.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of natural gas systems
products, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 yrs.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 yrs of successful installation experience on projects
with natural gas systems work similar to that required for Project.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. ANSI Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas piping in accordance with ANSI B31.9.
2. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with local gas
utility company.
3. Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with ICBO "Uniform Mechanical
Code".
1.05 MAINTENANCE
A. Tools:
1. Furnish 2 valve wrenches for each type of gas valve installed that require valve wrench.
15198-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer's equipment used as basis of design for Project is name indicated in Specification for
particular type of equipment or application contained in these Contract Documents. If no
manufacturer listed, basis of design is industry standard indicated.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements above, provide equipment of 1 of following
manufacturers to greatest extent possible.
1. Gas Cocks:
a. DeZurik Corporation.
b. McDonald Manufacturing Company.
C. Rockwell International, Flow Control Division.
d. Or equal.
2.02 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. General:
1. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure
ratings, and capacities indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection determined
by CONTRACTOR to comply with installation requirements.
2. Provide materials and products complying with NFPA No. 54 where applicable, base pressure
rating on natural gas piping system maximum design pressures.
3. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connection fittings of materials which
match pipe materials used in natural gas systems.
4. Where more than 1 type materials or products indicated, selection is CONTRACTOR'S _
option.
2.03 BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS
A. Provide pipes and pipe fittings complying with Section 15105 and in accordance with following.
1. Gas Service Piping: _
a. All pipe sizes: Black steel pipe; Schedule 40; wrought steel buttwelding fittings.
1) Wrapping: Machine wrap pipe using 50% overlap wrap, with polyvinyl chloride —
(PVC)tape. Hand wrap fittings using 100%overlap wrap extending 6 in. beyond
fitting onto wrapped pipe. Comply with tape manufacturer's installation
instructions.
b. Pipe sizes 1/2 in.through 12 in.: Thermoplastic gas pressure pipe, tubing, and fittings
complying with ASTM D2513.
C. Pipe sizes 2 in. through 12 in.: Reinforced epoxy resin gas pressure pipe and fittings
complying with ASTM D2517.
2. Building Distribution Piping:
a. Pipe size 2 in. and smaller: Black steel pipe; Schedule 40; malleable iron threaded
fittings.
b. Pipe size 2-1/2 in.and larger: Black steel pipe;Schedule 40;wrought steel buttwelding
fittings.
15198-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.04 BASIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Provide following piping specialties as required.
1. Pipe escutcheons.
2. Vandal proof vent caps.
3. Dielectric unions.
4. Pipe sleeves.
5. Sleeve seals.
2.05 SPECIAL VALVES
A. Gas Cocks: Provide AGA certified cocks of plug or ball valve configuration meeting following
requirements for service pressures required.
1. Building Service Entrance Valves:
a. 1/2 in. through 2 in.: Lock-wing gas stop less check.
b. 2 in. through 3 in.: Lock-wing gas stop less check.
2. Branch Main and Unit Isolation Valves: Provide 1 of following for branch main isolation and at
each unit.
a. 112 in. through 2 in.:
1) Flat-tee head gas stop with top check.
2) Square head gas stop with top check.
3) Lever handle gas stop with top check.
4) Furnace pilot gas stop with 1/8 in. pilot tap and top check.
b. 2 in. through 3 in.:
1) Flat-tee head gas stop less top check.
2) Square head gas stop less top check.
3. Construction:
a. Low pressure gas stops(less than 2 psig): ASTM B62 bronze,ANSI B1.20.1 threaded
end connections.
b. Medium pressure gas stops (less than 25 psig): ASTM B62 bronze, ANSI B1.20.1
threaded end connections.
C. High pressure gas stops (less than 100 psig): ASTM A126, Class B iron body,
ANSI B1.20.1 threaded connections.
2.06 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES
A. Regulators for Inlet Pressures of 2 psi and Less Natural Gas Service:
1. Provide single stage, corrosion-resistant gas pressure regulators with aluminum die cast
body,corrosion resistant integral parts,and threaded ends for gas pipe up to 2 in.for inlet and
outlet gas pressures, specific gravity and volume flow indicated on Drawings.
a. Provide automatic vent limiter orifice vent where allowed by ANSI standards.
B. Regulators for Inlet Pressures over 2 psi Natural Gas Service:
1. Provide two stage, corrosion resistant gas pressure regulators with aluminum die cast body,
corrosion resistant integral parts, over-pressure protection device (ANSI certified up to 65
15198-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
psi), and threaded ends for gas pipe up to 2 in., and flanged ends for gas pipe 2412 in. (and
larger) for inlet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow indicated on
Drawings.
a. Provide direct hard piped atmospheric vent to outside of building for regulators _
controlling pressures 2 psi and higher.
2.07 GAS METER
A. Provide diaphragm type, positive displacement gas meters with aluminum cases, temperature
compensated, with internal corrosion-resistant components; threaded ends for 2 in. and smaller,
flanged ends for 2-1/2 in. and larger for gas working pressures, specific gravity, and volume flow _
indicated.
2.08 BASIC IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide following identification complying with International Mechanical Code.
1. Gas Service: Underground type plastic line markers.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which natural gas system materials and products to be
installed.
B. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions corrected.
3.02 GAS SERVICE
A. Arrange with utility company to provide gas service with shutoff at terminus to termination point
indicated on Drawings.
B. Extend service pipe from utility's terminus to inside generator equipment housing, under utility's
direction and in accordance with following: _
1. Install service pipe through sleeve embedded in concrete slab.
C. Provide shutoff outside building where indicated, in adjustable gas service valve box,with cover set
flush to finished grade.
3.03 INSTALLATION OF NATURAL GAS PIPING
A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with International Mechanical Code.
B. Use sealants on metal gas piping threads chemically resistant to natural gas. Use sealants
sparingly, and apply to only male threads of metal joints.
C. Remove cutting and threading burrs before assembly of piping.
D. Do not install defective piping or fittings. Do not use pipe with threads which are chipped,stripped or
damaged.
E. Plug each gas outlet, including valves, with threaded plug or cap immediately after installation and
retain until continuing piping or equipment connections complete.
15198-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
F. Ground gas piping electrically and continuously within Project, and bond tightly to grounding
connection.
G. Install drip-legs in gas piping where indicated and required by code or regulation.
H. Install "Tee"fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped at bottom of pipe risers.
I. Use dielectric unions where dissimilar metals joined together.
-- J. Install piping with 1/64 in./ft(1/8%)downward slope in direction of flow.
K. Install piping parallel to other piping, but maintain minimum of 12 in. clearance between gas piping
and steam or hydronic piping above 200OF (930C).
L. For piping underground beneath buildings, install in welded conduit. Extend conduit inside and
terminate in accessible portion of building and seal. Extend conduit outside minimum of 4 in.from
—. building, and vent above grade.
M. For piping running through ducts or air plenums, install in welded conduit, ventilated to outside on
both ends.
N. For risers running through concrete or asphalt, install through minimum 6 in. pipe sleeve. Fill
annular space with gravel.
O. Install magnesium anodes for underground steel pipe, one 5 lb anode for up to 100 ft in length and
one 5 lb anode for each additional 100 ft.
—' P. Install magnesium anodes for each underground steel or malleable iron fitting, isolated between
2 sections of plastic pipe; one 3 lb anode for each fitting.
_ Q. Trench, backfill, and compact in accordance with Section 02316.
3.04 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
— A. Install supports and anchors in accordance with Section 15060.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
A. Gas Cocks: Provide at connection to gas train for each gas-fired equipment item and on risers and
branches where indicated.
-- B. Locate gas cocks where easily accessible and protected from possible injury.
C. Pressure Regulating Valves: Install as indicated;comply with utility requirements. Pipe atmospheric
vent to outdoors, full size of outlet. Install gas shutoff valve upstream of each pressure regulating
-- valve.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF GAS METER
A. Install gas meter in accordance with local utility company's installation instructions and comply with
requirements.
—' 1. Hang meter on wall brackets as indicated.
3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
— A. Connect gas piping to generator set, with drip-leg and shutoff gas cock. Comply with equipment
manufacturer's instructions.
-- 15198-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA No. 54 and
local utility requirements.
3.09 CLEANING, FLUSHING, INSPECTING
A. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials and prepare for
application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean water before
proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports
and accessory items.
1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ANSI B31.1.
3.10 PIPING TESTS
A. Test pressure piping in accordance with ANSI B31.1.
**' END OF SECTION
15198-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15670
TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Self-contained, vertical, exterior wall mount, through-the-wall air conditioner. Unit shall be
factory assembled, pre-charged, pre-wired, tested, and read to operate.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's technical product data including rated capacities of selected model
indicated,weights(shipping, installed,and operating),furnished specialties and accessories;
and installation and startup instructions.
2. Motors: For poly-phase motors 5 hp and larger, submit in accordance with requirements of
Section 16220. For single-phase, definite purpose, special purpose and general purpose
poly-phase motors less than 5 hp,submit NEMA design types,construction, insulation class,
NEMA frame size, horsepower, voltage and amp draw characteristics, and service factor for
each common application.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit manufacturer's assembly Drawings indicating dimensions,weight loadings, required
clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
2. Wiring Diagrams:
a. Manufacturers electrical requirements for power supply wiring to terminal units.
b. Ladder type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Differentiate between
portions of wiring factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
C. Operation and Maintenance(O&M) Data:
1. Operating instructions and, maintenance procedures including lubrication instructions,control
motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists.
D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of condensing units of types
and capacities required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 yrs.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. ARI Compliance: Provide capacity ratings for single package vertical air-conditioning units in
® accordance with ARI 390-2003.
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigerating system of condensing units in accordance with
ASHRAE 15.
3. Intertek ETL Compliance: Provide air-conditioning units approved and listed by Intertek ETL
Listed (ETL US/C).
— 15670-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handle air-conditioning units and components to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring.
Do not install damaged condensing units or components; replace with new.
B. Store air-conditioning units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt,fumes,
water, construction debris, and physical damage.
C. Rig air-conditioning units to final location under supervision of manufacturer's representative,who —
shall approve entire rigging operation.
PART2 PRODUCTS —
2.01 TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
A. Manufacturers:
1. Bard Manufacturing Company, Inc. —
2. Liebert.
2. Or equal.
B. Cabinet: Construction shall be single, enclosed, weatherproof casing constructed of 20-gauge
galvanized steel. Unit base is constructed of 16-gauge galvanized steel. Each exterior casing panel
to be bonderized and finished with baked-on exterior polyester enamel paint prior to assembly.
Provide manufacturer standard color; beige. Cooling section shall be fully insulated with 1-in. —
fiberglass. Openings shall be provided for power connections. Access openings appropriate for
outside structure to all fan motors and compressor for making repairs and for removing internal
components without removing unit from its permanent installation. Fresh air intake and outdoor coil
shall be protected from intrusions by sturdy metal grating with less than 1/4 in. openings.
C. Drain Pan: Drain pan shall be constructed of 20-gauge stainless steel.
D. Insulation: Portions of unit that come in contact with indoor air steam shall be insulated with high
density 1-in. fiberglass, foil faced insulation.
E. Mounting Brackets: Full-length side mounting brackets shall be integral part of cabinet.
F. Refrigeration System: High efficiency scroll compressor with single stage control. Compressor shall
be covered by a 5-yr parts warranty. Refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with factory installed
high and low pressure controls. Refrigeration control shall be factory installed TXV. Compressor '-
shall be mounted on isolation rails with double grommets. Insulated sound cover shall be provided
to reduce compressor noise. Crankcase heater shall be provided. Unit shall be provided with R-
410A (HFC) non-ozone depleting refrigerant. Unit shall be provided with liquid line filter/drier. —
Current sensing relay shall be used to detect high amps caused by high ambient and/or low voltage
and to shift compressor to 1 st stage operation until conditions corrected.
G. Condenser Fan Motor: Condenser fan motor shall be permanent split capacitor, outdoor motor. —
Condenser fan and motor shall be in slide out configuration for easy access.
H. Indoor Blower Motor: Indoor blower motor shall be high efficiency, constant speed type motor. —
Motor shall provide soft start,slowly ramping up to speed to provide quiet operation. Motor shall be
self-adjusting to provide proper airflow at high static pressures without user adjustment or wiring
changes by user. Motor shall be programmed for 20-second ramp up and 60-second down rate for
quiet, smooth starting and stopping. —
15670-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
I. Electrical Components: Electrical components are easily accessible for routine inspection and
maintenance through front service panels. Circuit breaker is standard on all 120-volt models.
— Circuit breaker access is through lockable access panel.
J. Control Circuit: Internal control circuit shall consist of current limiting 24 vac type 50 va transformer.
_ To prevent rapid compressor short cycling,five-minute time delay circuit shall be factory installed.
Low-pressure bypass shall be factory installed to prevent nuisance tripped during low temperature
start-up.
All units with 3-phase power shall include factory mounted phase rotation monitor. This advice shall
protect scroll compressor from reverse rotation and also protect unit from phase failure. If 3-phase
power is incorrectly connected at field power connections, phase monitor shall lock out unit and red
light will illuminate indicating incorrect phase. Also if power leg is lost, phase monitor will lockout unit
_ due to phase imbalance. Once condition is corrected, turning power off at circuit breaker or
disconnect will reset phase monitor.
— Compressor Control Module shall be factory installed with: built in delay-off timer adjustable from 30
seconds to 5 minutes,2 minute on-delay if power is interrupted, 120 second bypass for low pressure
control and soft and manual lockouts for high and low pressure control.
'— K. Electric Heat: Heat pump shall have factory installed electric resistance heater available that is
designed specifically for application in WAS Series unit heater shall include automatic limit safety
controls. See equipment schedule for capacity.
— L. Filter: Provide 1-in.fiberglass, pleated,disposable filters located within cabinet,filter shall be easily
accessible.
M. Warranty: Packaged air-conditioning units shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship
for period of 5 yrs for compressor, and for period of 5 yrs for all parts. Warranty period shall start
from date of installation as stated on warranty card; or from date of shipment if no warranty card is
returned to manufacturer.
N. Controls: Provide complete factory provided control package, complete with following:
1. High pressure control is auto reset.
2. Low pressure control is auto reset.
3. Compressor control module has adjustable 30-second to 5-minute delay-on-break timer. On
r initial power-up, or any time power delay-on-make will be 2 minutes plus 10% of delay-on-
break setting. There is no delay-on-make during routine operation of unit provides lockout
feature(with 1 retry)for high and/or low-pressure controls,and 2-minute timed bypass for low
pressure control.
— 4. Low ambient control permits cooling operation down to 0°F. Alarm relay has set of normally
open and normally closed dry contacts to provide ability to signal condition of shutdown on
either high or low pressure controls.
5. Incorporates four additional sensors: Discharge air temperature, indoor blower airflow,
compressor current,and dirty filter. These sensing devices function to input analog data such
as temperature, as well as digital data such as airflow, compressor status or filter status.
6. Digital, programmable, low-voltage thermostat to be mounted within room to maintain interior
-- room temperature of 80°F(field adjustable).
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which condensing units to be installed. Do not proceed with
Work until unsatisfactory conditions corrected.
15670-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level.
Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
B. Support:
1. Install wall-mounted units using manufacturer's standard mounting components and
hardware, securely fastened to building structure.
C. Route condensate piping as required.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,
maintenance,troubleshooting,and equipment and system-related areas. See Section 01600.
2. Startup condensing units in accordance with manufacturer's startup instructions, and in _
presence of manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with
requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
*** END OF SECTION
15670-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15815
METAL DUCTWORK
PART 1 GENERAL
_ 1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Low pressure metallic ductwork for HVAC systems.
_ B. Systems Include:
1. Heating and air conditioning supply and return air systems.
2. Fresh air supply systems.
— 3. Mechanical exhaust systems.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Low Pressure Ductwork: Ductwork subjected to velocities of 2,500 fpm or less, and operating
pressure of 2 in. wg or less, positive or negative.
-- B. High Pressure Ductwork: Ductwork subjected to velocities over 2,500 fpm, or operating pressure
over 2 in. wg, positive or negative.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's specifications for duct system materials showing dimensions, thicknesses,
weights, materials of construction, corrosion resistance characteristics, and method of
construction.
'— B. Record Drawings: At Project closeout, submit record drawings of installed ductwork, duct
accessories, and outlets and inlets in accordance with Section 01788.
C. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
-- A. Installer: Firm with at least 3 yrs successful installation experience on projects with low pressure
ductwork systems work similar to that required for Project.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" for ductwork fabrication and
installation.
a. Have available at CONTRACTOR'S field office, copy of SMACNA "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards—3rd Edition."
2. Comply with ASHRAE Handbook Standard for "Duct Construction," for fabrication and
installation of low pressure ductwork.
3. Comply with NFPA Nos. 90A and 90B.
15815-1 Dry Run Creek Irterceptor-60330823
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect shop-and factory-fabricated ductwork,accessories, and purchased products from damage
during shipping, storage, and handling. Prevent end damage and dirt and moisture from entering
ducts and fittings.
B. Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary to store outside,
store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers used as basis of design for Project is name indicated in Specification for particular
type of equipment or application contained in these Contract Documents. If no manufacturer listed,
basis of design is industry standard indicated.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Exposed Ductwork Materials:
1. Where ductwork indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials free
from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, oil canning, stains and
discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting.
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS
A. Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and,where not otherwise
indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including
proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
B. Duct Sealant: Nonhardening, nonmigrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant (type applicable for
fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for
sealing joints and seams in ductwork.
C. Duct Cement: Nonhardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement(type applicable for
fabrication/installation detail) as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for
cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.
D. Ductwork Support Materials:
1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners, anchors,
threaded rods, and angles for support of ductwork.
2. Except where space indicated as high humidity area, interior support materials of not less
than 1/4 in. dia or 3/16 in. thickness may be plain (not galvanized).
3. Provide matching stainless steel support materials for exposed stainless steel ductwork.
4. Provide aluminum support materials for aluminum ductwork except where materials
electrolytically eparated from ductwork.
15815-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.04 SHOP-FABRICATED DUCTWORK
— A. Fabricate shop or manufactured duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct
requirements as applicable to fittings.
1. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with centerline radius equal to 1.5 times
associated duct width; fabricate mitered fittings to include turning vanes in elbows where
shorter radius necessary.
2. Limit combined angular tapers to 45 for contracting tapers and 30 for expanding tapers.
B. Fabricate in 4, 8, 10 or 12 ft lengths unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs.
1. Pre-assemble Work in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly of
systems.
2. Disassemble systems to extent necessary for shipping and handling.
3. Match mark sections for re-assembly and coordinated installation.
C. Fabricate of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA"HVAC Duct Standards."
D. Install accessories during fabrication to greatest extent possible. Comply with Section 15820 for
— accessory requirements.
E. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner to internal
—, surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and adhesive,and fasten
with mechanical fasteners.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices to achieve
airtight (maximum 5% leakage for low pressure ductwork and 1% leakage for high pressure
ductwork) and noiseless (no objectional noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated
-- service. Install each run with minimum of joints.
B. Pressure Class: Construct ductwork of SMACNA pressure class indicated on Drawings, or if not
indicated, in accordance with following.
1. Duct System Pressure Classifications:
a. Constant volume supply, return, exhaust systems, and air transfer ductwork not
employing air terminal devices with fan static pressures not greater than 2 in. wg, and
velocities not greater than 2,500 fpm. Construct to minimum pressure classification
equal to or greater than rated pressure of system fan.
"— b. Variable volume supply, return and exhaust systems with velocities not greater than
2,500 fpm.
1) Downstream of Supply Air Terminal Devices: 1 in. wg class.
2) Upstream of Exhaust Air Terminal Devices: 1 in. wg class.
3) Intake Air Ductwork: 2 in. wg class.
4) Exhaust/Return Air Ductwork Downstream of Exhaust/ Return Fan: 2 in. wg
'— class.
C. Constant volume or variable volume distribution supply, return, exhaust system
ductwork between fan and air terminal devices regardless of velocity. Construct to
SMACNA standard pressure class equal to or greater than stall pressure of fan at
manufacturer's rated fan speed for indicated capacity.
"— 15815-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
d. Constant volume supply, return, exhaust system ductwork without air terminal devices
with fan static pressures exceeding 2 in. wg, or velocities exceeding 2,500 fpm.
Construct entire system to 3 in. wg pressure class or equal to or greater than highest
total pressure of air in duct system, whichever greater.
C. Provide ductwork with inside dimensions equal to sizes indicated on Drawings.
D. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8 in. misalignment tolerance and with internal
surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with ties,braces,hangers,and anchors of type holding ducts —'
true-to-shape and preventing buckling.
E. After installation, seal ductwork to seal class recommended and method prescribed in SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Standards Sealants."
F. Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork.
G. Complete fabrication at Project necessary to match shop-fabricated Work and accommodate
installation requirements.
H. Locate ductwork runs,except as otherwise indicated,vertically and horizontally,avoid diagonal runs
wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details,and notations or, if not otherwise
indicated, run ductwork in shortest route not obstructing usable space or block access for servicing
building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other --
structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2 in. where furring
shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where
possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1 in. clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in
finished and occupied spaces,conceal ductwork from view by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow
wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
except as specifically shown.
I. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling, lighting, electrical conduit,water,drain,waste,vent,other
piping systems, and similar finished Work.
J. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and electrical
equipment spaces and enclosures.
K. Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls,conceal space between construction _
opening and duct or duct-plus-insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap
opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2 in.
L. Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil frames, equipment,
controls, and other associated Work of ductwork system.
M. Support ductwork to comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards" hangers and _
supports section.
N. Install vacuum relief fittings downstream of fire dampers and smoke dampers in high pressure duct
systems.
O. Pitch outside air intake duct toward intakes to drain to outside of building. Caulk or solder duct to
form watertight joints. Blank off unused portions of louvers with 1-1/2 in. metal clad, board _
insulation.
P. Where dissimilar metal ducts meet, provide positive electrical isolation using insulating materials,
sealants, and fasteners.
Q. Install control system dampers and specialties in accordance with Section 15825.
15815-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
-- A. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris unit-by-unit as it is installed. Clean external surfaces of
foreign substances causing corrosive deterioration of metal or, where ductwork to be painted,
interfering with painting or causing paint deterioration.
B. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever damaged.
C. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time
— of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering to prevent
entrance of dust and debris until connections complete.
W 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Balancing:
-- 1. Conform to Section 15950 for air distribution balancing.
2. Seal leaks in ductwork that become apparent during balancing process.
B. Duct Sealing: Seal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards."
1. Class A Seal: Transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations, 4 in. wg
pressure class and higher.
2. Class B Seal: Transverse joints and longitudinal seams, 3 to 4 in. wg pressure class.
3. Class C Seal: Transverse joints, 2 in. wg pressure class and lower.
C. Leakage Testing:
1. After each duct system complete, test for duct leakage in accordance with provisions of
Section 15950 based upon difference of air flow through fan and sum of air flows at inlet or
_ outlets.
2. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage less than 5% of system design air flow.
END OF SECTION
15815-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15825
HVAC DAMPERS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Thermal-break insulated dampers. (TID)
B. For damper actuators and operators, refer to Section 15915.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
_ A. Submittal Information:
1. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings for each type of
damper showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, dimensional drawings, method of
fastening or support, and methods of assembly of components, materials of construction,
method of operation, actuator orientation, performance characteristics, and installation
requirements.
2. Operation and Maintenance(O&M) Data:
a. Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of damper.
-- B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
C. Information submitted by CONTRACTOR, but not designated to be submitted will be returned
without action by ENGINEER.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories of
types and sizes required,whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 3 yrs.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL 555.
2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA No. 90A pertaining to
installation of ductwork accessories.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer's equipment used as basis of design for Project is name indicated in Specifications for
particular type of equipment or application contained in these Contract Documents. If no
manufacturer listed, basis of design is industry standard indicated.
2.02 THERMAL-BREAK INSULATED DAMPERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Tamco, T. A. Morrison and Co. Inc.
15825-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Or equal.
B. Thermal-break insulated dampers: Provide damper with completely insulated blades with positive
thermal breaks. Damper frame to be insulated on all 4 sides and damper shall be constructed to fit
completely inside duct dimensions. Provide dampers constructed of materials listed below.
Leakage performance of damper shall be 4.2 cfm/sq. ft. at 4 in. w.g. or less.
1. Model Series 9000 ECT:
a. Blades: Extruded aluminum (6063T5), internally insulated and thermally broken.
Complete blade R factor shall be 2.29 or better.
b. Frame: .080 in. minimum thickness 6063T5 extruded aluminum with insulation as
required above.
C. Seals: Extruded extremely flexible silicone blade and jamb seals severe cold protection
against leakage.
d. Bearings: Dual synthetic assembly between axle and frame.
e. Linkage: Corrosion resistant components concealed in frame.
f. Operator: Mounting plate for operator and mounting hardware.
g. Blade operation: Opposable blade for modulating control, Parallel blade for 2 position
dampers.
h. Operating Temperature Range: -40°F to 212°F.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which dampers are to be installed. Do not proceed with Work
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DAMPERS
A. Install dampers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions,with applicable portions
of details of construction shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure products serve intended function.
B. Provide access doors in sizes and quantities sufficient to perform intended service and
maintenance. Install access doors where indicated and as required.
1. At each automatic damper.
2. Refer to Section 15820 for further information.
C. Coordinate with other Work, including ductwork as necessary to interface installation of ductwork
accessories properly with other Work.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Operate installed dampers and actuators to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Testfor air
leakage while system operating. Repair or replace faulty equipment as required to obtain proper
operation and leak-proof performance.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust dampers for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers,and adjust for proper action.
1. Final position manual dampers in accordance with Section 15950.
15825-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.05 CLEANING
A. Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up
paint.
** END OF SECTION *""
15825-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15838
POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Axial wall ventilators.
B. Refer to Division 16 for following; not Work of this section.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on ventilators. Include starters,
disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished or
factory-installed, by manufacturer.
C. Provide following electrical work as Work of this section,complying with requirements of Division 16.
1. Interlock control wiring ventilators and field-installed control elements, indicating devices and
unit control panels.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Schedule below identifies information required for each item of material or equipment.
Unit Type Submittal Information Item
Axial wall ventilators 1,2,3,4,5,E
— B. Submittal information:
1. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for power and gravity ventilators,
including specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories
furnished, and installation instructions. Submit fan performance curves with operating point
clearly indicated.
2. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type drawings showing unit dimensions, construction
details, assembly of component methods, and field connection details.
3. Shop Drawings, Wiring Diagrams: Manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply
wiring to terminal units.
4. Shop Drawings,Wiring Diagrams: Manufacturer's ladder type for interlock and control wiring.
Differentiate between portions of wiring factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.
5. Motors: For poly-phase motors 5 hp and larger, submit in accordance with Section 16220.
For single-phase, definite purpose,special purpose and general purpose poly-phase motors
less than 5 hp, submit NEMA design types,construction, insulation class, NEMA frame size,
horsepower, voltage and amp draw characteristics, and service factor for each common
application.
6. Operating and Maintenance(O&M) Data:
a. Maintenance instructions including lubrication instructions,filter replacement,motor and
drive replacement, and spare parts lists.
C. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
15838-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power and gravity
ventilators of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 3 yrs.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. AMCA Compliance: Provide power ventilators which have been tested and rated in
accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
2. UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators UL listed and having UL label affixed.
3. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA
standards.
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Spare Parts:
1. Furnish 1 spare set of belts for each belt drive power ventilator.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 POWER VENTILATORS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard prefabricated power ventilator units of type, size
and capacity indicated, modified as necessary to comply with requirements and required for
complete installation.
2.02 AXIAL WALL VENTILATORS
A. Manufacturer's:
1. Greenheck Fan Corporation. m
2. Cook (Loren) Company.
3. Carnes Company.
4. Or equal.
B. Type: Axial flow, propeller fan, direct- or belt-driven 1 piece galvanized steel fan panel with deep
formed venturi with welded corners for rigidity, rigid drive support frame, motor, heavy duty pillow
block bearings, and fan wheel.
C. Wheel: Die cast aluminum airfoil blade propeller with welded steel reinforcing gussets extending
three-quarters of blade length, connected to aerodynamically designed center hub. Statically and
dynamically balance wheel and drive as unit.
D. Electrical: Factory-wired, fusible type disconnect switch at motor mounting plate.
1. Nonfusible disconnect switch for internally protected motors.
E. Motors: Definite purpose, open drip-proof, permanently lubricated ball bearings, resilient mounted
construction. Provide explosion-proof motors rated for Classified Areas as noted on Drawings and
equipment schedules.
F. Wire Guard: Provide 1-in.x 1-in.wire guard at fan housing face with similar or matching material as
fan housing.
G. Dampers: Gravity-actuated or motor operated louvered dampers as scheduled.
15838-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
H. Fan Housing:Provide shop fabricated fan housing constructed with similar or matching materials as
adjoining ductwork, or as indicated on Drawings.
1. Provide angle support brackets for attaching fan housing to air plenum and control damper
assembly as noted on Drawings.
I. Coating: Coat entire fan assembly including mounted accessories with Perm atector-Gray coating.
J. Accessories:
1. Provide accessories as indicated on equipment schedule.
2.04 MOTORS
A. Except where more stringent requirements indicated in unit Specifications,or equipment schedules,
provide manufacturer's standard motor complying with following requirements.
B. Definite Purpose Motors: NEMA MG 1-18.
C. General Purpose, Poly-phase Motors 5 hp and Larger: Comply with Section 16220.
D. Single-Phase Motors: Unless otherwise indicated,for motor requirements less than 1/2 hp, provide
_ single-phase motors conforming to following.
1. Type: Continuous duty, squirrel cage, induction, fractional horsepower motors, rated in
accordance with NEMA MG1-10.33.
h a. 1/20 to 1/8 hp: Shaded pole, NEMA N or O as determined appropriate for application by
equipment manufacturer.
_ b. 1/6 to 1/3 hp: Permanent split capacitor,with internal overload protection,NEMA N or O
as determined appropriate for application by equipment manufacturer.
C. 1/3 hp and larger: 2-valve capacitor, NEMA L, M, N or O as determined appropriate for
application by equipment manufacturer.
2. Enclosure Classification: Open drip-proof machine, NEMA MG-1,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Insulation Class Rating:
a. Fractional horsepower motors: Class A.
b. Integral horsepower motors: Class B.
C. Definite purpose motors: Class A, B, F or H as determined appropriate for application
by equipment manufacturer.
E. Poly-Phase Motors:
` 1. Type: Continuous duty; squirrel cage; induction,fractional, and integral horsepower motors;
rated in accordance with NEMA MG1-10.33.
a. 1/3 to 3 hp: NEMA B or C as determined appropriate for application by equipment
manufacturer.
b. Where rated motor loads produce uncorrected motor power factors less than 0.90,
provide capacitors for power factor correction to 0.95.
2. Enclosure Classification: Open drip-proof machine, NEMA MG-1,unless otherwise indicated.
3. Insulation Class Rating: Suitable for continuous operation in 40 C environment, tested in
accordance with IEEE 112 and 114.
a. Fractional horsepower motors: Class A.
— 15838-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Integral horsepower motors: Class B.
C. High starting torque motors: Class F.
d. Definite purpose motors: Class A, B, F or H as determined appropriate for application
by equipment manufacturer.
F. Service Factor: Minimum 1.15 for NEMA A, B, and C poly-phase motors,in accordance with NEMA
MG 1-12.47 for fractional horsepower motors.
G. Bearings: Permanently lubricated ball or regreasable sleeve bearings with inner and outer shaft
seals, designed to resist thrust loading.
H. Efficiency: Provide high efficiency poly-phase motors in accordance with IEEE 112,Test Method B.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which power and gravity ventilators to be installed. Do not
proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION OF POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS
A. Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's
installation instructions and recognized industry practices to ensure ventilators serve intended
function.
B. Coordinate ventilator work with Work of roofing,walls,and ceilings necessaryfor proper interfacing.
C. Ductwork: Connect ducts to ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. —.
1. Solder bottom joints and up 2 in. of side joints of duct under roof ventilator to retain any
moisture entering ventilator.
D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to electrical installer.
1. Verify electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements of Division 16. Verify proper rotation direction of fan wheels. Do not
proceed with equipment startup until wiring installation acceptable to equipment installer.
E. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators. Adjust dampers for free
operation.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. After installation of ventilators complete,test each ventilator to demonstrate proper operation of units
at performance requirements specified. _
B. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
C. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.
15838-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.04 CLEANING
A. Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up
paint.
*** END OF SECTION
15838-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15850
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Louvers.
2. Wall registers and grilles.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical product data including rated capacities of selected model
clearly indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation and startup
instructions. Provide performance data for each size of unit provided.
B. Shop Drawings: Manufacturer's assembly type shop drawing indicating dimensions, weight
loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Operating and Maintenance (O&M) Data:
1. Submit maintenance instructions including cleaning instructions and spare parts lists for
ceiling air diffusers and wall registers and grills.
D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of
types and capacities required whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 5 yrs.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
_ 1. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70.
2. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under
requirements of ADC 1062-R4. Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating
Seal.
-- 3. NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA No. 90A.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on
outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and
prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work traffic.
Where possible,store indoors. When necessary to store outdoors,store above grade and enclose
with waterproof wrapping.
-- 15850-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer's equipment used as basis of design for Project is name indicated in schedule and
Specification section for particular type of equipment or application contained in these Contract
Documents. If no manufacturer listed, basis of design is industry standard indicated.
2.02 LOUVERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Ruskin Manufacturing Company.
2. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.
3. Or equal.
B. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown of size,
shape, capacity, and performance equal to Ruskin Model ELF6375DX. Construct of materials and
components as indicated and required for complete installation.
C. Performance: Provide weatherproof louver with free area equal to unit specified and following
performance characteristics.
1. Maximum Air Pressure Drop: 0.06 in. wg at 700 fpm through free area.
2. Minimum Moisture Entrainment Velocity: 900 fpm free area velocity.
3. Louver Depth: 6 in.
D. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent
substrate and specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and
adequate support for weatherproof installation. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for types of
substrate which will contain each type of louver.
E. Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions,ASTM B221,Alloy 6063-T52. All welded construction.
F. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2 in.sq mesh anodized aluminum wire
bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.
G. Finish: Provide louvers with baked enamel finish. Final finish will be selected by ARCHITECT.
2.03 WALL REGISTERS AND GRILLES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Titus Products, Division of Philips Industries, Inc. _.
2. Hart and Cooley, Division of Philips Industries, Inc.
3. Krueger Manufacturing Company.
4. Or equal.
B. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard wall registers and grilles where
shown of size, shape, capacity, performance, and type indicated constructed of materials and
components as indicated and required for complete installation.
C. Performance: Provide wall registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device listed in manufacturer's
current data.
D. Wall Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles compatible with adjacent wall
systems and specifically manufactured to fit into wall construction with accurate fit and adequate
15850-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
support. Refer to Drawings and Specifications for types of wall construction which will contain each
type of wall register and grille.
E. Types: Provide wall registers and grilles of type, capacity, and accessories and finishes listed on
register and grille schedule. Following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on
schedule.
1. Register and Grille Materials:
--- a. Aluminum Construction: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum frame and
adjustable blades.
2. Register and Grille Faces:
a. Horizontal 45 Fixed Blades: Horizontal blades, fixed at 45 , at manufacturer's
standard spacing.
3. Register and Grille Patterns:
a. Single Deflection: One set of blades in face.
b. Double Deflection: 2 sets of blades in face, rear set at 90 to face set.
4. Register and Grille Finishes:
a. White Enamel: Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets to be installed. Do not proceed with
Work until unsatisfactory conditions corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and recognized
industry practices to ensure products serve intended functions. Pitch ductwork toward louver and
attach to be self-draining.
B. Coordinate with other Work, including ductwork and duct accessories necessary to interface
-- installation of air outlets and inlets with other Work.
*** END OF SECTION
15850-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15915
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Control sequences are specified in Section 15940.
B. Provide following electrical work as Work of this section,complying with requirements of Division 16.
1. Control and power wiring, of all voltages, between field installed control elements, indicating
devices, and unit control panels.
C. Work by Electrical:
1. Power supply wiring for HVAC Equipment and Automatic Temperature Control Panels.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Point Chart:
1. System Description: Particular system to which following points apply.
2. Point Type:
a. Supervised Binary: Point type having 2 conditions or values and no intermediate units.
Change of state initiates alarm or advisory sequence and requires acknowledgment of
alarm condition and initiates alarm or advisory sequence. Provide software definable
advisory sequence.
b. Binary: Point type having 2 conditions or values and no intermediate values.
C. Analog: Point type having continuous range of values. Accomplish analog sensing by
RTD sensing elements located directly in medium to measured. Locate temperature
sensors within wells when measuring liquid temperatures.
d. Start/Stop: Point type changing binary state of controlled variable.
e. Adjust: Point type changing analog condition of controlled variable.
B. Analog Indication: Type of readout provided for analog points accessed by operator.
C. Binary Indication: Type of readout provided for binary points accessed by operator or alarming
condition.
D. Applications/Programs: Building automation system/direct digital control processes to be applied to
system or point identified under point type.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device furnished indicating
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes of
materials, and installation and startup instructions.
2. Motors: For poly-phase motors 5 hp and larger, submit in accordance with requirements of
Section 16220. For single-phase, definite purpose, special purpose and general purpose
poly-phase motors less than 5 hp, submit NEMA design types, construction. insulation class,
"— 15915-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
NEMA frame size, horsepower, voltage and amp draw characteristics, and service factor for
each common application.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit ladder type wiring diagram for each control device,general control system
diagrams, and connections provided by others. _
1. Represent each system with schematic flow diagram showing each active system component
in relative position and other devices present, but not necessarily affected by control system.
Show field-mounted control devices.
2. Represent panel mounted control components within designated panel section of Drawings.
Provide one-line detailed schematic of wiring and piping.
3. Provide one-line schematic for starters affected by control system showing interlocks between _
starters and control system and other interlocks not necessarily provided as part of control
system.
4. Provide unit process flow charts showing specific logic paths, measured and computed
variables and operating constants, formulae for operations on measured variables and '—
computation of output variables, and other software functions furnished to meet control
sequence and energy management functions required in Section 15940 and on point chart.
5. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.
6. Indicate required electrical wiring. Differentiate between portions of wiring factory-installed
and portions field-installed.
7. Details of faces of control panels including controls, instruments, and labeling.
8. Written description of sequence of operation.
9. Dampers: Submit leakage and flow characteristics of dampers, and size schedule for
controlled dampers.
C. Miscellaneous:
1. Maintenance agreement.
D. Operating and Maintenance(O&M) Data:
1. Submit preventive maintenance data and spare parts list for each type of control device;
detailed instructions for operations associated with man-machine interface; and operator's
reference table listing connecting input points, output points, and unguarded software
parameters. Include this data in maintenance manual.
a. Include Shop Drawings of control system, revised to reflect system in as-built condition.
2. Programmer's Manual: Submit programming data for necessary information to perform
programming function; language manual describing language used and routines, modules,
used by system; program flow charts for system energy management software and custom
software; and complete program listing and parameter listing files for programs.
E. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of direct digital control
equipment of type,architecture,and sizes similar to required equipment,and in satisfactory service.
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms specializing and experienced in direct digital control system
installations.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Provide electrical products tested, listed, and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA
standards for electrical requirements of areas in which controls are installed.
15915-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Refer to Drawings for specific area classifications impacting control system design.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Ship each piece of equipment and control device in factory cartons. Provide factory-applied plastic
end caps on each length of pipe and tube.
B. Maintain cartons and end caps through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent
equipment and pipe end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment and inside of pipe
and tube.
C. Store equipment indoors in clean, dry area until ready for installation.
1.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Within 30 days after Substantial Completion, present to OWNER for consideration, preventive
maintenance contract to cover service incidental to continued proper performance of system and
devices during guarantee period.
B. Maintenance of system components are not CONTRACTOR'S responsibility during and after
guarantee period, unless contracted for by OWNER.
C. Provide schedule of maintenance tasks necessary to keep CONTRACTOR guarantee in effect
through guarantee period.
D. Provide list of recommended preventive maintenance procedures including task frequency and tools
required to perform tasks. Provide instructions for each task in O&M data.
E. OWNER will keep records, schedules, and other reports documenting OWNER-performed
prescribed maintenance procedures during guarantee period. CONTRACTOR not liable for
_ defective systems, devices or components or repair, if OWNER-performed required preventive
maintenance procedures not performed and documented.
-- PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer's equipment used as basis of design for Project is name indicated in Specifications for
particular types of equipment or application. If no manufacturer listed, basis of design is industry
standard indicated.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Johnson Controls.
` 2. Honeywell.
3. Siemens.
4. Or equal.
2.02 GENERAL
A. Provide automatic temperature control products and supporting system components of type,
architecture, size, and capacities indicated, conforming to manufacturer's standard materials and
components as published in product information; designed and constructed as recommended by
manufacturer and required for application indicated.
-- 15915-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.03 ACTUATORS
A. Electric Operators: Size motors to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or 2-position action as specified in Section 15940.
1. Provide permanent split capacitor or shaded pole type motors with gear trains completely oil
immersed and sealed. Equip spring return motors, where indicated on Drawings or in
operational sequence, with integral spiral spring mechanism. Furnish entire spring
mechanism in housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches,
auxiliary switches or feedback potentiometer.
2. Equip motors for outdoor locations and outside air intakes with O-ring gaskets designed to
make motors completely weatherproof, and internal heaters permitting normal operation at- _
40°F (40°C).
3. Furnish multiple spring return motors for dampers larger than 25 sq ft. Size spring return
motors for running torque rating with minimum 3 to 1rated to required torque ratio.
4. Furnish modulating electric operators with control circuitry designed to accept 4-20 mA, 2 to �-
10 vdc, or pulse width modulation input control signals, appropriate to application.
2.04 INPUT DEVICES
A. Room Thermostats:
1. Provide solid state thermostats with user adjustable temperature setpoints, deadbands, and
offsets.
2. Thermostat shall include capabilities for use of local and remote temperature sensors.
3. Thermostat shall incorporate a time clock function with user defined occupied and unoccupied
periods and corresponding heating and cooling setpoints.
4. Thermostat shall include a user accessible, timed unoccupied override function.
5. Thermostat shall include a local display of space temperature, mode of operation, active
temperature setpoints, and simple alarms.
6. Thermostat shall incorporate battery backup and password protected lockable keypad.
7. Thermostat shall incorporate heat anticipation and system on/off selector.
B. Temperature Sensors: '—
1. Provide temperature sensing elements of nickel wire,electric resistance type for space,well,
or duct insertion application. _
2. Elements shall have reference resistance of 1,000 ohms/°F, with reference resistance of
1,000 ohms at 70°F, with temperature coefficient of 3 ohms/'F.
3. Resistance tolerances shall be 1.0% at 70°F.
4. Minimum ambient temperature range shall be-40°F to 216°F.
2.05 OUTPUT DEVICES
A. Relays and Contactors:
1. UL listed units rated for 100,000 cycles with resistive loads. Equip with replaceable molded
coils and replaceable silver cadmium oxide contacts. Coat core laminations with heat
resistant inorganic film to reduce core losses.
2. For line and load terminals on contactors with higher than 35 amp rating, provide 1-piece
formed and welded pressure type.
3. For 35 amp or lower rating, provide screw type contactors.
4. Equip field-mounted contactors with suitable steel enclosures.
15915-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.06 CONTROLLERS
-- A. Electronic Controllers:
1. Provide electronic controllers designed as individual components and fully protected by steel
enclosures.
2. Provide individual controllers of multiple input type with provisions for user adjustment.
3. Identify adjustments clearly on controllers including proportional band and authority.
4. Where single electronic controller required for specific application, can be built-in as integral
part of control motor, but only where provided with easily accessible control adjustment.
5. Provide 2-position or proportional electric controller power output as required by specified
sequence of operations.
i B. Step Controllers:
1. Provide step controllers for control sequencing or control of staged outputs with heavy duty
switching rated to handle loads.
2.07 PANELS
A. Local Control Panels: Provide control panels with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting for
each supply fan and miscellaneous control systems. Locate panel adjacent to systems served.
1. Fabricate panels of 14 ga furniture quality steel or 6063-T5 extruded aluminum alloy, totally
enclosed with hinged doors and keyed lock,with manufacturer's standard shop painted finish
and color. Provide UL listed and certified cabinets for use with line voltage devices.
2. Panel-Equipment: Include temperature and humidity controllers, relays. and automatic
-` switches except exclude low temperature protection thermostats,firestats,and other devices
excluded in sequence of operation. Fasten devices with adjustments accessible through front
of panels.
3. Door-Mounted Equipment: Flush-mount(on hinged door)manual switches including damper
Minimum-Off positioning switches, Summer-Winter switches, and Manual-Automatic
switches, including dial thermometers.
4. Graphics: Where specified, provide color coded graphic laminated plastic displays on doors
-- to schematically show system being controlled. Provide protective sheet of clear plastic
bonded to entire door to prevent damage to symbols.
5. Provide standard steel cabinets as required to contain temperature controllers, relays,
switches, and similar devices, except limit controllers and other devices excluded in sequence
— of operations. Provide full enclosure cabinets with painted gray finish.
B. Central (Master)Control Panels: Provide central control panels of fully enclosed steel cubical type
with locking doors or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide multi-color
graphic displays schematically showing system being controlled.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which electric control systems to be installed. Do not proceed
with Work until unsatisfactory conditions corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, roughing-in drawings,
details on Drawings, and approved submittals. Install electrical components and use electrical
_ products complying with requirements of applicable Division 16 sections of these Specifications.
Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights.
15915-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Installation of Mechanical Devices: Refer to other Division 15 sections for installation of valve
bodies, control sensor wells, and dampers. —'
3.03 EQUIPMENT AND WIRING
A. Control Wiring: Install and color code control wiring without splices between terminal points. Install
in accordance with NFPA No. 70 and applicable sections of Division 16. Install wiring incidental to
system installation.
1. Install circuits over 25 v with color coded minimum No. 12 wire in electric metallic tubing.
2. Install circuits under 25 v with color coded minimum No. 18 wire with 0.031 in. high
temperature(105°F(41°C)) plastic insulation on each conductor and plastic sheath over all.
3. Install electronic circuits with color coded minimum No. 22 wire with 0.023 in polyethylene
insulation on each conductor with plastic jacketed copper shield over all.
4. Install low voltage circuits, located in concrete slabs and masonry walls or exposed in
occupied areas, in electric conduit.
5. Do not install digital bus wiring in same conduit with line voltage wiring or other conductors
with highly inductive loads.
6. Enclose line voltage wiring in conduit (EMT). Enclose low voltage wiring in conduit (EMT)
when exposed.
B. Installation of Damper Operator Motor: Power damper motor from line voltage power or from
dedicated transformer. Do not power damper motor from MCC motor starter control transformer.
C. Installation of Relay and Starters: Where relays or motor starters are required to control single
phase motors, damper operators and other loads, mount relays or starters in temperature control
panels or dedicated electrical cabinets in accordance with UL 50 and Section 16130.
3.04 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF EQUIPMENT
A. After completion of installation, adjust thermostats, control valves, motors, and similar equipment
provided under this section.
B. Verify programming for proper control action and adjust operating setpoints to achieve optimum
system operation.
C. Include computer programming, record drawings, labor for adjusting and validating, and checkout
necessary for operational system.
D. Provide specially trained personnel for final adjustment Work.
E. Startup, test, and adjust control systems. Demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace
damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be present at
jobsite or classroom designated by OWNER for mandays indicated,travel time excluded,for
assistance during construction, startup, and training of OWNER'S personnel for equipment
operation. Include:
a. 1/2 mandayfor Instructional Services.
15915-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Operator Instruction:
1. Provide hands-on operator instruction to OWNER'S operating personnel during system
commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of DDC hardware and software
established. Provide instruction during normal working hours by CONTRACTOR'S
representative familiar with system software, hardware, and accessories.
2. At mutually agreed upon time during system commissioning,provide instruction to OWNER'S
designated personnel on operation of equipment within DDC system and describe intended
use with respect to programmed functions specified.
-- 3. Include overall operational program, equipment functions (individually and as part of total
integrated system),commands, advisories,and appropriate operator intervention required in
responding to system operation. Include in O&M data.
3.06 CLEANING
A. Clean factory finished surfaces. Repair marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up
paint.
** * END OF SECTION
15915-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15940
AUTOMATIC CONTROL SEQUENCES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Operating equipment, devices,and system components required for automatic temperature control
systems are specified in Sections 15915.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Control Sequences: Manner and method by which automatic temperature controls function.
Requirements for each type of operation are described in this section.
B. Normal Mode: Mode or position-controlled device assumes without power.
C. Automatic Mode: Mode or position-controlled device assumes when under control of automatic
system of controls.
D. Manual Mode: Mode or position-controlled device assumes when under manual control. Unless
otherwise specified, manual mode implied and affects only device for which manual mode or
position identified.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, pumps,coils,dampers,valves,and control
_ devices.
2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.
3. Indicate pneumatic piping, factory and field wiring.
4. Indicate each control panel required with internal and external piping and wiring clearly
indicated. Provide detail of panel face including controls, instruments, and labeling.
5. Include written description of sequence of operation.
B. Submit in accordance with Section 15915.
PART2 PRODUCTS
(Not Used)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 THERMALLY ACTUATED EXHAUST EQUIPMENT (SINGLE SPEED)
A. Control Sequence:
1. Units Served:
a. EF-1 interlocked with CD-1 and CD-2.
2. Normal Mode: Off.
a. Fan: Off.
15940-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
b. Exhaust Damper: Closed.
C. Outside Air Damper: Closed.
3. Automatic Mode:
a. Start fan through Hand-Off-Automatic switch located at TCP-1 and space temperature
sensor.
b. Provide fan START contact closure(s)for motor start input provided by Division 16.
C. Automatic Mode: Start and stop fan automatically based on room temperature set- w..
point. On call for cooling when space temperature sensor rises above 90°F (field
adjustable), open exhaust air and outside air dampers and send start signal to Electrical
and start fan. When space temperature drops below 90°F (field adjustable), reverse
procedure.
4. Hand Mode: On.
a. In the Hand position, open exhaust and outside air dampers and send start signal to
Electrical and start fan and operate fan continuous.
3.02 ELECTRICAL ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
A. Controls for Electrical Room wall hung air-conditioning units are provided by manufacturer. See
Section 15728.
*** END OF SECTION
15940-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 15950
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Extent of testing, adjusting, and balancing work required by this section indicated on Drawings,
schedules,and by requirements of this section. Defined to include, but not necessarily limited to,air
distribution systems, hydronic distribution systems, and associated equipment and apparatus of
mechanical work. Work consists of setting speed and volume(flow)adjusting facilities provided for
systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending
modifications to Work as required by Contract Documents.
B. Section Includes:
1. Fans.
2. Air conditioning units.
3. Intake air louvers.
C. Equipment sections describe installation and startup of equipment to be tested, adjusted, and
balanced.
D. Piping system sections describe pressure testing of piping and ductwork systems.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Tests:
1. Submit certified test reports signed by test and balance supervisor performing TAB work.
2. Include identification and types of instruments used and most recent calibration date with
submission of final test report.
3. Submit biographical data on ENGINEER directly supervising testing,adjusting,and balancing
work.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit sample test data forms complete with certifying agency logo, identifying required test
data,date, page number,system designation, system location, Project name,and balancer's
name.
C. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data:
1. Include copies of certified test reports, identification of instruments,and data on ENGINEER.
D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tester's Qualifications: Firm certified by NEBB in testing and balancing disciplines similar to those
required for Project, not installer of system to be tested, and otherwise independent of Project.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. NEBB Compliance: Comply with NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and
Balancing of Environmental Systems,as applicable to mechanical air and hydronic distribution
systems and associated equipment and apparatus.
15950-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to measurements,
instruments, and testing, adjusting, and balancing except as otherwise indicated.
1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS _
A. Do not proceed with testing, adjusting, and balancing work until system complete and operable.
Ensure no later residual work still to be completed.
B. Do not proceed until Work scheduled for testing, adjusting, and balancing clean and free from
debris, dirt, and discarded building materials.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used in original construction for patching holes
in insulation, ductwork, and housings cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test
instruments, attaching jigs, and similar purposes. _
1. At tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork
and housings. _
2.02 TEST INSTRUMENTS
A. Utilize test instruments and equipment for TAB work required of type, precision, and capacity as
recommended in following TAB standards.
1. NEBB's Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental _
Systems.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine installed Work and conditions under which testing to be done to ensure Work complete,
clean, and operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions corrected in
manner acceptable to tester.
3.02 ADJUSTMENT
A. Test,adjust,and balance environmental systems and components as indicated, in accordance with _
procedures outlined in applicable standards.
1. Adjust flows to within -0% to +10% of scheduled values, or as otherwise instructed by
ENGINEER.
B. Test, adjust, and balance system during summer season for air conditioning systems and during
winter season for heating systems, including minimum period of operation at outside conditions
within 50F(3°C)wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition,and within 10OF(6°C)
dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. When seasonal operation does not
permit measuring final temperatures,then take final temperature readings when seasonal operation
perm its.
C. Patch holes in insulation,ductwork,and housings cut or drilled for test purposes in same manner as
original construction.
15950-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
D. Mark equipment settings including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed control
levers, and similar controls and devices to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide
markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials.
_ E. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications and resubmit
test results.
1. Provide services of qualified testing and balancing technician for random checking of systems
by ENGINEER. If, during spot checking by ENGINEER, performance less than 10% of
installation falls outside of specified performance parameters, rebalance entire installation.
3.03 REPORT PREPARATION
A. Prepare report of test results including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended
by applicable standards.
B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when
system cannot be successfully balanced including, where necessary, modifications exceeding
requirements of Contract Documents for mechanical work.
* END OF SECTION *"
15950-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16050
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Raceway Systems
2. Wire, Cables and Connectors
3. Wiring Devices
4. Motor Starters
5. Motor and Circuit Disconnects
6. Fuses
7. Panelboards
8. Transformers
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Approval of equipment supplied in this section is contingent upon CONTRACTOR verification of
available fault current from electric utility.
1. Notify ENGINEER if available fault current is higher than specified equipment.
B. Product Data:
1. Submit for disconnects, motor starters, panelboards,circuit breakers,overcurrent protective
devices, and transformers.
2. Product data sheets with printed installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit for motor starters.
2. Show enclosure dimensions, nameplate nomenclature, electrical ratings, and thermal unit
schedule.
3. Wiring diagrams and schematics.
D. Operation and Maintenance(O&M) Data:
1. Maintenance data for materials and products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance
Manual.
E. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory(NRTL).
1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms 'listed" and 'labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
16050-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING _
A. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
B. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1.
C. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3 with compression-type fittings.
D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel.
E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT
A. Rigid Nonmetallic Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC)Conduit: NEMA TC 2, 80 PVC.
2.03 FITTINGS
A. Fittings for steel conduits: _
1. Steel or malleable iron, zinc galvanized or cadmium plated.
2. Do not use set screw or indentor type fittings.
3. Do not use aluminum or die cast fittings.
4. EMT and GRS Connectors and Couplings:
a. Threaded. _
b. Insulated throat.
C. Gland compression type.
d. Rain and concrete type.
5. Comply with ANSI C80.4.
6. Comply with NEMA FB 1, compatible with conduit materials.
B. Conduit bodies:
1. Malleable iron with galvanized finish.
C. Fittings for flexible metal conduit.
1. Insulated throat type.
2. Threaded.
3. Grounding type.
4. Liquidtight: 1 piece sealing "O"rings with connectors when entering boxes or enclosures.
D. Expansion Joints:
1. Conduit expansion fittings complete with copper bonding jumper, Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Type XJ.
2. Conduit expansion/deflection fittings with copper bonding jumper, Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Type XD.
E. Seals:
1. Wall entrance, OZ/Gedney Type FSK or FSC.
16050-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
F. PVC Conduit Fittings:
1. NEMA TC3; match to conduit type and material.
G. Drain Fittings:
1. Automatic Drain Breather:
a. Explosionproof.
1) Safe for Class I, Groups C and D.
b. Capable of passing minimum 25 cc water/min and minimum 0.05 cu ft air/min at
atmospheric pressure.
_ 2. Condensate Drain:
a. Conduit outlet body, Type T.
b. Threaded, galvanized plug with 3/16 in. drilled holed through plug.
H. Hazardous Areas:
1. Explosionproof.
2. Horizontal seal fittings, Cooper Crouse-Hinds Type EYS.
3. Vertical seal fittings, Cooper Crouse-Hinds Type EYD.
4. Vertical seal fittings shall have drain plug.
2.03 BOXES
A. Of indicated types, sizes and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types,
sizes, and classes appropriate for use and location. Provide items complete with covers and
accessories required for intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations.
B. Fasteners:
1. General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated
_ items.
2. Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware.
C. Outlet Boxes:
1. Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location and application.
2. Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories
suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps,cable clamps,exterior rings
and fixture studs.
3. Cast Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and
accessories suitable for each location, including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for
devices and closure plugs.
D. Pull and Junction Boxes:
1. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and shall be of size
and shape to suit application.
2. Galvanized Steel Boxes: Flat rolled, code gauge, sheet steel with welded seams. Hot-dip
galvanized after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed.
3. Stainless-Steel Boxes: Fabricate of stainless steel conforming to Type 304 of ASTM A167.
Cover shall be gasketed.
16050-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. Galvanized Cast-Iron Boxes: Molded of cast iron alloy with gasketed cover and integral
threaded conduit entrances.
5. Boxes Approved for Classified Locations: Cast metal or cast nonmetallic boxes conforming to
UL 886 listed and labeled for use in specific location classification, and with specific
hazardous material encountered. Conduit entrances shall be integral threaded type. _
2.04 WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTORS
A. Building wires and cables with insulation type, cable construction, and rating as required to meet
application and NEC requirements.
B. Manufacturers:
1. Wire and Cable:
a. Southwire.
b. Houston Wire and Cable.
C. Belden.
d. American Insulated Wire Corp.
e. Republic Wire.
f. Superior Essex.
2. Connectors: _
a. FCI-Burndy.
b. Thomas and Betts.
C. Blackburn, Thomas and Betts.
C. Copper wire only.
D. 600 v insulation(ASTM standard compounds)and color code conductors for low voltage(secondary
feeders and branch circuits)as required by NEC.
1. Type THWN Stranded: Single conductor No. 12 AWG minimum for branch circuit and feeder
conductors size No. 8 AWG and smaller.
2. Type XHHW Stranded: Single conductor for branch circuits,feeders,and service conductors
larger than No. 8 AWG. _
3. Provide grounding conductor when run with circuit conductors with same insulation as circuit
conductors.
4. Type USE Stranded: Single conductor for under-ground direct burial.
5. Type THWN Stranded: Single conductor No. 12 AWG minimum for 120 v control wiring and No. 14 AWG minimum for graphic indication, nonshielded instrumentation and other control
wiring operating at less than 120 v unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
6. PVC insulation, tinned copper (19 by 27) stranded, No. 16 AWG, twisted pair cabled with
aluminum mylar shielding, stranded,tinned, No. 18 AWG copper drain wire,and overall black
FR-PVC, 90'C, 600 volt jacket for interference sensitive instrumentation wiring.
E. Joints, Taps, and Splices:
1. Joints, Taps, and Splices in Conductors No. 10 AWG and Smaller: UL listed preinsulated
compression spring-type solderless connectors.
2. Joints, Taps, and Splices in Conductors No. 8 AWG and Larger: Solderless 2 or 4-bolt
compression type connectors of type that will not loosen under vibration or normal strains.
16050-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
F. Terminations:
1. Power Conductors: Compression crimp type lugs.
2. Control and Instrumentation Conductors: Compression crimp type fork tongue, insulated
support type lugs on terminal strips. Do not splice.
2.05 WIRING DEVICES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Hubbell Wiring Device Division.
2. Pass and Seymour/Legrand
3. Appleton Electric Company.
4. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Company.
B. Color: Ivory unless otherwise indicated or required by NEC.
C. Switches:
1. General Use Lighting Switches: 20 amp toggle, equal to Hubbell No. 1221-1 series.
D. Receptacles:
1. General use duplex receptacles: NEMA No. 5-20R, grounding type, 20 amp Hubbell
No. 5362 Specification Grade.
2. Special purpose receptacles as shown on Drawings and schedules.
E. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles (GFCI).
1. Ratings: 120 vac., 20 amp.
2. Tripping Requirement: UL Class A.
3. Construction:
a. Shallow depth.
-- b. Line and load terminal screws.
C. Noise suppression.
d. Feed through.
_ e. Standard duplex wall plates shall fit.
f. NEMA 5-20R configuration.
4. Meet requirements of UL 943 ground-fault circuit interrupters.
F. Wiring Device Plates and Covers:
1. Wall plates for wiring devices with ganging and cut-outs as indicated, provided with metal
screws for securing plates to devices, screw heads colored to match finish of plate.
2. Plates for Flush Mounted Devices:
a. Hubbell high-impact smooth nylon in Ivory color.
3. Device plates for surface mounted Type FS or FD boxes to be Type FSK galvanized steel.
4. Device plates for surface mounted,4 in. sq boxes to be 1/2 in.raised galvanized steel covers.
5. Weatherproof plates and covers for exterior devices or devices in damp locations to be
galvanized gray cast malleable with gasketed, lift cover plate.
16050-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
6. Weatherproof plates and covers suitable for wet locations while in use.
a. Hinged and gasketed cover/enclosure to maintain weather tight seal while the
equipment is plugged into it. TayMac or equal.
2.06 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Electrical.
2. Square D, Schneider Electric.
3. Allen Bradley, Rockwell Automation.
B. Enclosures:
1. NEMA 1 in electrical equipment building.
2. As otherwise indicated and as required by NEC.
C. Manual Starters:
1. Minimum short circuit withstand rating in combination with motor circuit protective device shall
be 10,000 symmetrical amps or as indicated on Drawings.
D. Manual Motor Starter Construction:
1. Quick make and break toggle action.
2. Double break silver alloy contacts.
3. 1-piece melting alloy type thermal overload units.
4. Starter inoperative unless thermal unit in position.
5. Padlock provision. _
6. Pilot light.
7. NEMA standards for size and hp rating.
2.07 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Electrical.
2. Square D, Schneider Electric.
B. Enclosed Circuit Breaker Construction:
1. Dual cover interlock.
2. External trip indication. —
3. Provisions for control circuit interlock.
4. Padlock provisions for padlock in Off position.
5. Handle attached to box, not cover.
6. Handle position indicates On, Off or Tripped.
7. Provisions for insulated or groundable neutral.
C. Permanent Trip Circuit Breakers:
1. Thermal and magnetic protection.
2. Magnetic protection only in combination with motor starters and motor circuit protectors
(MCP). _
3. Single magnetic trip adjustment.
4. Single-handle common trip, 2 and 3 poles (handle ties not acceptable).
5. Push-to-trip test button.
16050-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
6. Bolt-on type.
7. Quick make and break toggle action.
8. Handle trip indication.
9. Handle position indication, On, Off, and Tripped centered.
10. UL listed for type of wire specified.
11. UL listed short circuit rating(integrated equipment rating).
a. Up to 240 v: 22,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum.
b. Up to 480 v: 42,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum.
D. Safety Switches:
1. NEMA heavy duty Type HD.
2. Dual cover interlock.
3. Visible blades.
4. Provisions for control circuit interlock.
5. Pin type hinges.
6. Tin plated current carrying parts.
7. Quick make and break operator mechanism.
8. Handle attached to box, not cover.
9. Handle position indication, On in up position and Off in down position.
10. Padlock provisions for up to 3 padlocks in Off position and On position.
11. UL listed lugs for type and size of wire specified.
12. Spring reinforced fuse clips for Class R fuses.
13. Provisions for insulated or groundable neutral.
14. UL listed short circuit rating 200,000 RMS amp with Class R fuses.
E. Enclosures:
1. NEMA 1 in electrical equipment building.
2. NEMA 4X stainless steel with watertight hubs for outdoor and wet locations.
3. NEMA 7 in hazardous classified locations.
4. As otherwise indicated and as required by NEC.
2.08 FUSES
A. Manufacturers:
1. Cooper Bussmann.
2. Ferraz Shawmut.
3. Littelfuse.
B. 250 v Fuses:
1. Class RK 1, 1-end rejection or to fit mountings specified, 1/10 to 600 amps, 200,000 amp
interrupting rating.
a. Bussmann Low-Peak. LPN-R,dual element,time delay with short circuit protection for
motor, transformer, welder, feeder, and main service protection.
C. Spare Fuses:
1. 10%, minimum of 3, of each type and rating of installed fuses.
16050-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.09 PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Electrical. _
2. Square D, Schneider Electric.
B. Panelboard Ratings:
1. UL listed short circuit rating(integral equipment rating):
a. Up to 240 v: 22,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. _
b. Up to 480 v: 42,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum.
C. As shown on Drawings.
C. Panelboard Construction:
1. Main breaker or main lugs only, per panelboard schedule.
2. Flush or surface mounted as indicated on panelboard schedule.
3. NEMA Type 1 enclosure, unless otherwise indicated on panelboard schedule. _
4. Equipment ground bus adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors,
bonded to box.
5. Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect.
6. Molded case circuit breakers.
7. Terminals:
a. UL listed for type of wire specified.
b. Anti-turn solderless compression type.
8. Bussing: _
a. Distributed phase sequence type.
b. 225 amps,98%conductivity hard drawn copper or as shown on panelboard schedule or
Drawings.C. Copper.
d. Bussing and mounting hardware behind all usable space.
9. Gutters adequate for wire size used, 4 in. minimum.
10. Boxes:
a. Code gauge galvanized steel.
b. Without knockouts.
11. Fronts:
a. Rust inhibiting primer, baked enamel finish.
b. Dead front safety type.
C. Concealed hinges. --
d. Flush stainless steel cylinder tumbler type locks with spring loaded door pulls.
e. Circuit Directory:
1) Suitable for complete descriptions.
2) Clear plastic cover.
3) Typewritten card.
12. Special features as shown on Drawings.
13. Engraved laminated nameplate:
16050-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
a. Stock melamine plastic laminate.
b. Legend in black letters on white face and punched for mechanical fasteners.
C. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/2 in. high lettering on
1-1/2 in. high label (2 in. high where two lines are required). Text shall match
terminology and numbering of Contract Documents and Shop Drawings.
D. Panelboard Circuit Breakers:
1. Thermal and magnetic protection.
2. Single-handle common trip, 2 and 3 poles (handle ties not acceptable).
3. Bolt-on type unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
4. Quick make and break toggle action.
5. Handle trip indication.
6 Handle position indication, On, Off, and Tripped centered.
7. UL listed for type of wire specified.
8. UL listed short circuit rating (integrated equipment rating).
a. Up to 240 v: 22,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum.
b. Up to 480 v: 42,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum.
9. HACR breakers for air conditioning units.
2.10 TRANSFORMERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton Electrical.
2. Square D, Schneider Electric.
B. Materials and Equipment:
1. Dry type, air cooled.
2. Insulation:
a. Below 30 kVa: Class F or better, having 1150C rise, average maximum over 40°C
ambient temperature.
3. Copper windings.
4. Cores: High grade, non-aging,sheet silicone steel laminations having core plating insulation
on both sides of each lamination.
5. Terminal boards.
6. Taps: Two 2-1/2% taps above and below.
7. Overload Capacity: Not less that 10%for intermittent operation.
8. Size: kVa as indicated on Drawings and schedules.
9. Transformers shall be quiet type for installation in areas of low ambient noise levels.
Maximum sound levels shall not exceed NEMA standards.
10. Cabinets: Sheet steel, phosphatized having one prime coat and two finish coats of baked
enamel.
a. Indoor, ventilated unless otherwise indicated.
11. Nameplate: Metal nameplate listing manufacturer's name, serial number, type, class, kVa
voltage, frequency, and showing internal wiring diagram.
12. Comply with UL 506.
16050-9 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 RACEWAY SYSTEMS
A. Outdoors, Damp or Wet Locations: Use following wiring methods unless otherwise noted on
Drawings:
1. Exposed: Galvanized rigid steel.
2. Concealed: Galvanized rigid steel.
3. Underground Power: Schedule 80 PVC or PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
4. Underground Shielded Instrumentation Cables: Schedule 80 PVC or PVC-coated rigid steel _
conduit.
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or
electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
6. Underground Control Cables: Schedule 80 PVC or PVC-coated rigid steel conduit.
B. Indoor Dry Locations: Use following wiring methods unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or
electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): Flexible metal conduit.
2. Exposed: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
3. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing.
C. Hazardous Classified Locations: Use following wiring methods unless otherwise noted on Drawings.
1. Exposed and Concealed: Galvanized rigid steel conduit or PVC-coated steel conduit.
D. Use 3/4 in. minimum trade size conduit unless otherwise noted except conduit runs to room light
switches may be 1/2 in.
E. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Following restrictions shall be adhered to, unless otherwise noted.
1. Use galvanized rigid steel conduit.
2. Conduits,when placed within slab and walls,shall not be larger than 1/3 thickness of slab or
wall nor placed closer than 3 outside dia clear from each other.
3. Reinforcing steel shall be in-place before embedded items placed and reinforcing cut or
removed shall be replaced with additional reinforcing as indicated on Drawings or approved
by ENGINEER.
4. Do not place conduits in slabs on grade. Place minimum 4 in. under bottom of slab.
5. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
6. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
7. Install in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1 in. (25 mm) _
concrete cover
8. Run conduit larger than 1 in. trade size parallel to or at right angles to main reinforcement
and spaced on center of at least 3 times conduit trade diameter with minimum 2 in.concrete
covering. Conduits over 1 in. may not be installed in slab without approval of ENGINEER.
9. When at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
10. Conduits embedded in concrete frame shall comply with applicable provisions of ACI 318.
F. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, wireways, and fittings for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway system.
G. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure
adequate headroom, working clearance, and access.
H. Complete conduit installation prior to installing cables.
16050-10 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
I. Raceway systems shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets,junction or
pull boxes.
J. Enter and secure to boxes ensuring electrical continuity from point of service to outlets.
K. Conduit shall be run concealed except exposed surface conduit may be installed where noted on
Drawings or where concealment found to be impractical or impossible, and only with approval of
ENGINEER.
L. Provide watertight conduit system where installed in wet places, underground or where buried in
masonry or concrete.
1. Use threaded hubs when entering top of enclosures.
2. Use sealing type locknuts when entering sides or bottom of enclosures.
�- M. Conduit runs extending through areas of different temperature or atmospheric conditions or partly
indoors and partly outdoors shall be sealed,drained,and installed in manner preventing drainage of
condensed or entrapped moisture into cabinets, motors or equipment enclosures.
N. Route conduit runs above suspended acoustical ceilings not interfering with tile panel removals.
O. Cap conduits after installation to prevent entry of debris.
P. Connections to motors and equipment subject to vibration shall be maximum of 3 ft long. Locate
where least subject to physical abuse.
Q. Install conduit expansion fittings complete with bonding jumper in following locations.
1. Conduit runs crossing structural expansion joint.
2. Conduit runs attached to 2 separate structures.
3. Conduit runs where movement perpendicular to axis of conduit may be encountered.
R. Keep raceways at least 6 in. away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install
horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
S. Install separate ground conductor inside flexible conduit connections.
T. Use approved flexible connections in hazardous locations.
U. Use explosionproof fittings and seals in hazardous areas in accordance with NEC.
V. PVC Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit: Use only fittings approved for use with that material.
Patch nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit.
W. Transition under floor conduit to galvanized rigid steel conduit before rising above floor. Wrap with
plastic tape to provide 40 mil thick cover to height of 6 in. above floor.
3.02 BOXES
A. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs.
B. Support and fasten items in accordance with Section 16070.
C. Do not burn holes, use knockout punches or saw.
16050-11 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
D. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation such as mounting brackets,fixture —
studs, cable clamps,and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes compatible with outlet boxes being
used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations.
E. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes —
indicated.
F. Location of outlets and equipment shown on Drawings is approximate. Verify exact location.
G. Flush outlets shall have edges or plaster flush with finished wall or ceiling surfaces so plates can be
drawn tightly to wall or ceiling surfaces.
H. Minor modification in location of outlets and equipment is considered incidental up to distance of —
10 ft with no additional compensation, provided notification of modification is given prior to roughing
in of outlet.
I. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install outlet and device boxes and associated covers and fittings of
materials and NEMA types for each location in conformance with following requirements unless
otherwise noted on Drawings: —
1. Interior Dry Locations: Sheet steel, NEMA type 1 for flush mounting and feraloy Type FS or
FD cast boxes with threaded conduit hubs for surface mounting.
2. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Galvanized, cast metal, NEMA Type 3R.
3. Wet Locations: Stainless Steel, NEMA type 4X enclosures.
4. Hazardous (Classified) Locations: NEMA type listed and labeled for location and class of
hazard indicated. —
J. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for
each location.
K. Mounting height as follows unless otherwise shown on Drawings:
1. Switches: 48 in. above floor.
2. ac Receptacles and Telephone Outlets: 15 in. above floor or 6 in. above counters, counter —
back-splashes, and baseboard radiators in finished areas; 48 in. above floor in unfinished
areas.
3. Pushbuttons: 48 in. above floor. —
4. Motor Starters and Disconnect Switches: 60 in. above floor.
5. Thermostats: 60 in. above floor.
3.03 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA
"Standard of Installation". —
B. Run wire and cable in conduit unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
C. On branch circuits, use standard colors. —
D. Run ground wire with power circuits; conduit shall not be grounding path.
E. Provide separate conduit systems for following.
1. Line voltage control.
2. Low voltage control.
3. Shielded instrumentation.
4. Exit lights.
5. As required by NEC. —
16050-12 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
F. Where power cables and instrument/signal cables enter and pass through same handhole or
distribution box, steel barrier or steel conduit separation shall be maintained to avoid magnetic
interaction between power cables and instrumentation conductors. In manholes and handholes,
provide Type C conduit outlet body with 3/16 in. holes drilled in bottom for drainage.
G. Run instrumentation cable into control cabinets only if terminated therein.
H. Terminate control, instrumentation, and communication cables on terminal strips in separate
terminal cabinets located near conduit entrances of buildings or as shown on Drawings.
I. Color Coding: Conductors for lighting and power wiring as indicated below.
Phase 208/120 v 4801277 v
A Black Brown
B Red Orange
C Blue Yellow
Travelers Pink Purple
Neutral White White with non-green stripe
Ground Green Green
— J. Color coding for intrinsically safe systems shall be light blue.
3.04 JOINTS, TAPS, AND SPLICES
A. Where preinsulated spring connectors are used for motor and equipment connections, tape
connector to wire to prevent loosening under vibration.
B. Each tap,joint or splice in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be taped with 2 half-lap layers of
vinyl plastic electrical tape and finish wrap of color coding tape where required by code.
C. Cable splices shall be made only in handholes, wireways, distribution boxes, and junction boxes.
3.05 WIRING DEVICES
A. Do not install devices until wiring is complete.
B. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through connections, looped or
otherwise. Make circuit connections by using wire connectors and pigtails.
C. Install gasket plates for devices or system components having light emitting features such as switch
with pilot light and dome lights. Where installed on rough textured surfaces, seal with black
self-adhesive polyfoam.
D. Ground receptacles with insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to bolted outlet box
connection or as shown on Drawings.
E. Install GFCI receptacles as required by NEC.
3.06 MOTOR STARTERS
A. Examine area to receive motor starters to ensure adequate clearance for starter installation.
B. Anchor firmly to wall or structural surface.
C. Support and fasten in accordance with Section 16070.
16050-13 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.07 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS
A. Locate disconnect switches as shown on Drawings and required by NEC.
B. Provide control circuit interlock as required by NEC.
C. Overcurrent protective devices.
1. Install fuses just prior to energizing equipment.
2. Locate circuit breakers as shown on Drawings.
D. Install on equipment rack or anchor firmly to wall or structural surface.
E. Support and fasten in accordance with Section 16070.
3.08 PANELBOARDS
A. Support panel cabinets independently to structure with no weight bearing on conduits.
B. Install recessed panelboards to allow cover to be drawn tight against wall to provide neat
appearance.
C. Install panelboards so top breaker is not higher than 6 ft 0 in. above floor.
D. Adjacent panel cabinets shall be same size and mounted in horizontal alignment.
E. Install typewritten directory in each panelboard, accurately indicating rooms or equipment being
served after final circuit changes have been made to balance circuit loads.
F. Install filler plates in unused spaces.
3.09 TRANSFORMER
A. Install wall mounted transformers on prefabricated brackets designed for that purpose.
B. Install floor mounted transformers on 4 in. high concrete housekeeping pads.
C. Tighten bus connections and mechanical fasteners.
D. Adjust voltage taps for required system voltage and check grounding requirements.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Control Circuits, Branch Circuits, Feeders, Motor Circuits, and Transformers:
1. Megger check of phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation levels.
a. Do not megger check solid state equipment.
2. Continuity.
3. Short circuit.
4. Operational check.
B. Wiring Devices:
1. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal tester for correct polarity,
proper ground connection, and wiring faults. -_
16050-14 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.11 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Motor Starters and Disconnects:
_ 1. Adjust covers and operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.
2. Tighten wire and cable connections.
3. Verify overcurrent protection thermal unit size with motor nameplate to provide proper
operation and compliance with NEC.
4. Clean interior of enclosures.
5. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.
B. Circuit Breakers:
1. Adjustable settings shall be set to provide selective coordination, proper operation, and
compliance with NEC.
*" END OF SECTION
16050-15 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16060
GROUNDING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for
protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems.
2. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of
these Specifications.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates for field testing agency,signed by CONTRACTOR, certifying that agency complies with
requirements specified in "Quality Assurance"Article below.
B. Report of Field Tests and Observations: Certified by CONTRACTOR.
C. Test Results:
1. Certified field tests and observation reports indicating and interpreting test reports for
compliance with performance requirements.
-' D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with UL 467.
B. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized
-� Testing Laboratory(NRTL).
1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms 'listed"and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
—• 1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS
A. Governing Requirements: Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of
NEC requirements, more stringent requirements and greater size, rating, and quantity indications
govern.
16060-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.02 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including
stranding.
1. Material: Copper.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation.
C. Grounding-Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
D. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3.
2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8.
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS
A. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed-copper bars of rectangular cross section.
B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with
copper ferrules.
C. Bonding Straps: Soft copper, 0.05 in. (1 mm)thick and 2 in. (50 mm)wide, except as indicated.
2.04 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.
B. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty type.
C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written
instructions for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.
2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES AND TEST WELLS
A. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel.
1. Size: 3/4 in. by 120 in. (19 by 3000 mm).
B. Test Wells: Fabricate from 15 in. (400 mm)long, square-cut sections of 8 in.(200 mm)diameter, _
Schedule 80, PVC pipe or as detailed on Drawings.
16060-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART 3 EXECUTION
-- 3.01 APPLICATION
A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NEC Article 250 for types,sizes, and quantities of
equipment grounding conductors,except where specific types,larger sizes,or more conductors than
required by NEC are indicated.
1. Install equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for items below in addition to
those required by Code:
a. Feeders and branch circuits.
b. Lighting circuits.
C. Receptacle circuits.
d. Single-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.
e. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits.
f. Flexible raceway runs.
2. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with nonmetallic raceway fitting
listed for purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install separate
equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and
from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding-conductor terminal
of applicable derived system or service, except as otherwise indicated.
B. Separately Derived Systems: Where NEC requires grounding,ground according to NEC Paragraph
250-26.
C. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Ground pole to grounding electrode in addition to
separate equipment grounding conductor run with supply branch circuit.
D. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electric power system ground
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electric service
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding conductor and install
-- in conduit.
E. Piping Systems and Other Equipment: Comply with NEC Article 250 for bonding requirements.
— 3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where Drawings
or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.
B. Grounding Rods: Locate minimum of 1 rod length from each other and at least same distance from
any other grounding electrode.
1. Drive until tops are 2 in. (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, except as otherwise
indicated.
2. Interconnect with grounding-electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds,except attest wells
and as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging copper coating or
exposing steel.
C. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, except as otherwise
indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain,
impact, or damage.
D. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use bare copper wire. Bury at least 24 in. (600 mm)below
grade.
"" 16060-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
E. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, sized as indicated, in
conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by
grounding-clamp connectors. Where dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding
conductor to street side of fitting. Do not install grounding jumper across dielectric fittings. Bond
grounding-conductor conduit to conductor at each end.
F. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding
straps.
G. Test Wells: One for each driven grounding electrode system, except as otherwise indicated. Set _
top of well flush with finished grade or floor. Fill with 1 in. 25 mm)maximum-size crushed stone or
gravel.
H. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NEC Paragraph
250-81(c), using minimum of 20 ft (6 m) of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.
Where base of concrete foundation is less than 20 ft(6 m) in length, coil excess conductor within
base of concrete foundation. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel to at least 4 locations, _
and to anchor bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding
grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.
3.03 CONNECTIONS _.
A. Make connections so possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis is minimized. Select connectors,
connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be
galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact
points closer in order of galvanic series. _
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections,except those at test wells. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that
are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C. Equipment Grounding-Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger,use pressure-type grounding
lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type
connectors. _
D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: Where metallic raceways terminate at metal housings
without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding
bushing. Connect grounding bushings with bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal
in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding
bushings and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Connections at Test Wells: Use compression-type connectors on conductors and make bolted-and
clamped-type connections between conductors and grounding rods.
F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to --
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where these requirements are not available,
use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
16060-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
G. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential
pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by manufacturer of
connectors. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make visible indication that
connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
H. Moisture Protection: Where insulated grounding conductors are connected to grounding rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of
insulation and cable.
-- 3.04 UNDERGROUND DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM GROUNDING
A. Handholes:
— 1. Install driven grounding rod close to wall and set rod depth so 4 in. (100 mm) will extend
above finished floor.
2. Where necessary, install grounding rod before manhole is placed and provide No. 1/0 AWG
bare,tinned-copper conductor from grounding rod into manhole through waterproof sleeve in
manhole wall.
3. Protect grounding rods passing through concrete floor with double wrapping of
pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 in. (50 mm) above to 6 in.
(150 mm) below concrete.
4. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.
B. Grounding System:
1. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with
substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
_a A. Testing:
1. Subject completed grounding system to megger test at each location where maximum
ground-resistance level is specified,at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal,and
at ground test wells.
2. Measure ground resistance not less than 2 full days after last trace of precipitation, and
without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and
without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
3. Perform tests by 2 point method according to Section 9.03 of IEEE 81.
B. Maximum grounding to resistance values are as follows:
1. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Handhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
ENGINEER promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance and to accomplish
recommended work.
D. Report: Prepare certified test reports, of ground resistance at each test location. Include
observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures
taken to improve test results.
3.06 RESTORATION
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by work of this Section.
1. Re-establish original grades, except as otherwise indicated.
16060-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. _
3. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt,cable laying,and other activities to their
original condition.
4. Include topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching.
5. Maintain restored surfaces. —
6. Restore disturbed paving.
*** END OF SECTION
r
16060-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16070
SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Supports from building structure for electrical items by means of hangers,supports,anchors,
sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized
Testing laboratory(NRTL).
1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms 'listed"and 'labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
B. Regulatory requirements:
1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
-` PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Steel or malleable iron.
B. Aluminum where indicated.
C. Stainless steel where indicated.
2.02 COATINGS
A. Protect steel and malleable iron supports, support hardware, and fasteners with zinc coating.
-, B. Products for use outdoors.
C. Use PVC coating where indicated on Drawings.
2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps,conduit straps,threaded C-clamps with retainers,
ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps.
B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:
1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type.
2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type.
3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for intended
service.
4. Nuts, Washers, and Bolts: Stainless steel in outdoor applications.
16070-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. U-Channel Systems: Channels, with 9/16-in. dia holes, at minimum of 8 in. on center, in top
surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of same
manufacture.
2.04 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES
A. Shop-or field-fabricate supports or manufacture supports assembled from U-channel components.
B. Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with
welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. Comply with Section 05500.
C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of 1 of following:
1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint,
welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from following gage
metal for sleeve diameter noted:
a. 3 in. and smaller: 20 ga.
b. 4 in. to 6 in.: 16 ga.
C. Over 6 in.: 14 ga.
2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.
3. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe.
2.05 FIRE RESISTANT JOINT SEALERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam," Dow Corning Corp.
2. "Pensil 851," General Electric Co. _.
3. Or equal.
B. Two-part,foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in through-penetration fire-stopping
around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors.
C. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing
identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other
testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance
with NEC requirements.
B. Coordinate with structural system and with other electrical installation.
C. Raceway Supports: Comply with NEC and following requirements:
1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. -
2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by
safety factor of at least 4. Where this determination results in safety allowance of less than
200 Ibs, provide additional strength until there is minimum of 200 Ibs safety allowance in
strength of each support.
16070-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16075
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
— 1. Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations.
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70.
PART2 PRODUCTS
2.01 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS
._ A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for specified application,
selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors
prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere.
B. Conform to ANSI A13.1,Table 3,for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color
field for each raceway or cable size.
1. Color: Black legend on orange field.
2. Legend: Indicates voltage.
C. Adhesive Labels: Preprinted,flexible,self adhesive vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with clear,wear
and chemical resistant coating.
D. Pretensioned,Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted,color coded,acrylic bands sized to
suit diameter of line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned gripping action when
placed in position.
E. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 in. wide
-. (0.08 mm thick by 25 to 51 mm wide).
F. Underground Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape with
following features:
1. Size: Not less than 6 in. wide by 4 mils thick(152 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick).
2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service.
3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core.
4. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line.
G. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and
-- letters.
"" 16075-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2.02 ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for specified application,
selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors
prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere.
B. Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) minimum thick for signs up to
20 sq in. (129 sq cm), 1/8 in. (3.2 mm)thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved Legend: Black letters on white face.
2. Punched for mechanical fasteners.
C. Baked Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with
colors, legend, and size as indicated or as otherwise required for application. 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)
grommets in corners for mounting.
D. Exterior, Metal Backed, Butyrate Signs: Wear resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose acetate
butyrate signs with 0.0396 in. (1 mm), galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size
appropriate to application. 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)grommets in corners for mounting. _
E. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32
stainless steel machine screws with nuts, flat washers and lock washers.
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self extinguishing, 1 piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties with
following features:
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 in. (5 mm).
2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb(22.3 kg) minimum. _.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 185°F(4 to 85°C).
4. Color: As indicated where used for color coding.
B. Paint: Alkyd-urethane enamel. Primer as recommended by enamel manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install identification devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. —'
B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference
with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Lettering,Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names,abbreviations,colors,and or designations used
for electrical identification with corresponding designations used in Contract Documents or required
by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
D. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install
identification after completion of finish work.
E. Self Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before
applying.
16075-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
F. Identify Raceways and Exposed Cables of Certain Systems with Color Banding: Band exposed and
accessible raceways of systems listed below for identification.
1. Bands: Colored adhesive tape or combination of both. Make each color band 2 in.(51 mm)
wide,completely encircling conduit,and place adjacent bands of 2 color markings in contact,
side by side.
2. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50 ft (15 m)
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25 ft(7.6 m) in congested areas.
3. Colors: As follows:
a. Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.
b. Communications System: Green and yellow.
G. Install Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Label externally as follows:
1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure sensitive, self adhesive plastic label on cover.
2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card stock tags.
3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, water proof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent.
H. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling,for exterior underground
power, control, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker
located directly above line at 6 to 8 in.(150 to 200 mm)below finished grade. Where multiple lines
installed in common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16 in.(400 mm),
_ use single line marker.
1. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway.
-- I. Color Code Conductors: Secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout
secondary electrical system.
1. Field applied, color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory coded wire for sizes larger
than No. 10 AWG.
a. Colored, pressure sensitive plastic tape in half lapped turns for distance of 6 in.
-- (150 mm)from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last
2 turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1 in. (25 mm)wide
tape in colors as specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable identification
_ markings.
b. Colored cable ties applied in groups of 3 ties of specified color to each wire at each
terminal or splice point starting 3 in. (76 mm)from terminal and spaced 3 in. (76 mm)
apart. Apply with special tool or pliers, tighten to snug fit, and cut off excess length.
J. Power Circuit Identification: Use metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands for cables,
feeders,and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes,junction boxes, manholes,and switchboard rooms.
1. Legend: 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend
corresponding to indicated circuit designations.
2. Fasten tags with nylon cable ties; fasten bands using integral ears.
K. Apply identification to conductors as follows:
1. Conductors to Be Extended in Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers.
—' 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source,
voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color coding for voltage and phase indication of
secondary circuit.
3. Multiple Control and Communications Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor by
its system and circuit designation. Use consistent system of tags, color coding, or cable
marking tape.
"` 16075-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
L. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows:
1. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where indicated or required to ensure safe
operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. I nstall
engraved, plastic laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or
explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal
backing for outdoor items.
2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminate signs with white legend on red
background with minimum 3/8 in. (9 mm)high lettering for emergency instructions on power
transfer, load shedding, and or emergency operations.
M. Install identification as follows: _
1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of
equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes communication,
signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory
identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text with 1/2 in. (13 mm)
high lettering on 1-1/2 in. (38 mm)high label;where 2 lines of text are required, use lettering
2 in. (51 mm) high. Use black lettering on white field. Apply labels for each unit of following
categories of equipment.
a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures.
b. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
C. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.
d. Motor starters.
e. Push button stations.
f. Power transfer equipment.
g. Control devices.
h. Transformers.
2. Apply designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, push
buttons, pilot lights, motor control centers,and similar items for power distribution and control
components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components where labeling is
specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit
description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker.
** ' END OF SECTION
16075-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16135
UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Ducts.
2. Duct banks.
3. Handholes.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct: General term for electrical conduit and other raceway,either metallic or nonmetallic,specified
for use underground, embedded in earth or concrete.
B. Duct Bank: Group of 2 or more ducts in continuous run between 2 points.
C. Underfloor Conduits.
_ 1. Conduits which run underground within perimeter of building walls under building floor. This
may consist of 1 conduit, or several conduits grouped together.
D. Duct Bank Conduits
1. Conduits which run under ground outside perimeter of building walls. This may consist of
1 conduit, or several conduits grouped together.
E. Underground Conduits
1. Underground conduits are both underfloor conduits and duct bank conduits.
F. Handhole: Below-the-surface enclosure in connection with ducts into which people reach, but do not
enter, for purpose of installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or wiring.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals are not required if CONTRACTOR supplies materials or equipment of specified or
named manufacturers. If CONTRACTOR proposes substitutions to material or equipment of
specified or named manufacturers, submittals identified below are required.
1. Product data.
'! 2. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory(NRTL).
�— 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms 'listed"and 'labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
�. 16135-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall complywith National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store precast concrete units at site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage.
Arrange so identification markings are visible.
B. Lift and support precast concrete units only at designated lifting or supporting points.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordination of Work:
1. Coordinate layout and installation of manholes and handholes with final arrangement of ducts
as influenced by actual final location of other utilities in field.
2. Coordinate elevations of duct and raceway entrances into manholes and handholes with final
profiles of ducts and raceways as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground
obstructions, and buildings.
3. Establish locations and elevations to suit field conditions and assure duct runs drain to
manholes, handholes, or as shown on Drawings. -
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A. Comply with Section 16050.
2.02 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. Comply with Section 03300 for concrete and Section 03200 for reinforcing.
B. Aggregate For Duct Encasement: 3/8 in. maximum size.
C. Strength: 3,000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength.
2.03 DUCT BANK ACCESSORIES _
A. Duct Supports: Rigid PVC spacers selected to provide minimum duct spacings and concrete cover
depths indicated, while rigidly supporting ducts during concreting.
2.04 HANDHOLE HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Frames and Covers: Cast iron conforming to ANSI C2, Rule 323. Furnish with cast-in legend,
"Electric"or"Signal"as appropriate. Cover-to-frame bearing surfaces machined. _
B. Pulling Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with rebar fastening insert. 2 in. dia eye, 1 in. by 4 in. long bolt.
Working load embedded in 6-in., 4,000 psi concrete: 13,000 Ibs minimum tension. _
C. Pulling and Lifting Irons in Floor: 7/8 in. dia hot-dipped galvanized, bent steel rod, stress relieved
after forming, and fastened to reinforced rod. Exposed triangular shaped opening. Ultimate yield
strength, 40,000 Ibs shear, 60,000 Ibs tension.
16135-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Access: Install access to manhole/handhole through cast-iron frame and cover. For manholes,use
30 in.cover except as indicated. Use 30 in.cover for handholes,except use 24 in.covers for 2 ft.by
2 ft. handholes. Install brick chimney to support frame and cover and to connect cover with
manhole/handhole roof opening. Provide moisture-tight masonry joints and waterproof grouting of
cast iron frame to chimney. Set frames in paved areas and traffic ways flush with finished grade.
Set other frames 1 in. above finished grade.
D. Dampproofing: Apply dampproofing to exterior surfaces of units after concrete has cured 3 days,
minimum. Apply in accordance with requirements of Section 07115. After ducts have been
connected and grouted in, and prior to backfilling, dampproof joints and connections and touch up
abrasions and scars. Dampproof exterior of manhole/handhole chimneys after brick mortar has
cured at least 3 days.
re including
ng eyes, cable stanchions, cable ar
E.
insulators as regInstall removable uired forinstallation aand support of Iclable and conductors and as n dic t d and
.
F. Field-Installed Bolting Anchors: Do not drill deeper than 3-7/8 in.for anchor bolts installed in field.
Use minimum of 2 anchors for each cable stanchion.
-` G. Grounding: Install ground rod through floor of each man hole/hand hole with top protruding 4 in.
above floor. Seal floor opening against water penetration with waterproof nonshrink grout. Ground
exposed metal components and hardware with bare copper ground conductor. Train conductors
neatly around corners. Install on walls and roof using cable clamps secured with expansion
anchors.
3.05 INSTALLATION OF CAST-IN-PLACE HANDHOLES
A. Comply with Section 03300 and construct manholes/handholes as indicated.
B. Finish interior surfaces with smooth troweled finish.
3.06 TESTING
A. Field Quality Control:
1. Grounding: Test manhole grounding provisions to ensure electrical continuityof bonding and
grounding connections. Make ground-resistance test at each ground rod and submit report of
results. Use an instrument specifically designed for ground-resistance measurements.
2. Duct Integrity: Rod ducts with mandrell 1/4 in. smaller in diameter than internal diameter of
ducts. Where rodding indicates obstructions in ducts, remove obstructions and retest.
3. Water Tightness: Make internal inspection of manholes/handholes three months after
completion of construction for indications of water ingress. Where leakage is noted, remove
water found and seal leakage sources. Reinspect after 2 months and reseal remaining
leakage sources. Repeat process at two month intervals until leakage is corrected.
3.07 CLEANING AND RESTORATION
A. Clean Ducts: Clean full length of ducts with round bristle brush with dia 1/2 in.greater than internal
diameter of duct.
B. Clean Handholes: Clean internal surfaces of manholes including sump. Remove foreign material.
3.08 RESTORATION
A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as
otherwise indicated.
16135-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed.
C. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching,storing of dirt, cable laying,and other work to their original
condition.
D. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching.
E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated.
***END OF SECTION ***
16135-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16210
ELECTRIC SERVICE
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Electric Utility Charges:
1. Electric Utility charges for extension of distribution system to point of service termination and
meters will be paid by OWNER.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Electric Utility: Mid American Electric.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
a. NFPA No. 70-93- National Electrical Code(NEC).
PART2 PRODUCTS
—' 2.01 ELECTRIC SERVICE
A. Electric Service Characteristics:
1. As indicated on Drawings and provided by Electric Utility.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Confirmation of Electric Service:
1. Consult with Electric Utility to verify service information specified and shown on Drawings.
-- 2. Include deviations required by Electric Utilityfrom contract documents to complywith Electric
Utility standards and requirements.
B. Metering:
1. Consult with Electric Utility regarding service entrance requirements and metering equipment.
2. Install metering equipment and empty conduit for metering conductors to meet standards and
requirements of Electric Utility.
C. Application for Electric Service.
1. Obtain required forms from Electric Utility.
2. Assist OWNER in completion of forms and deliver completed forms to Electric Utility.
3. Coordinate schedule for installation of electric service with Electric Utility.
"* * END OF SECTION "
16210-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16231
PACKAGED NATURAL GAS ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Engine generator set.
2. Cooling system.
3. Fuel system.
"-' 4. Combustion air intake and engine exhaust systems.
5. Starting system.
6. Provide one(1)complete system delivered to site in Waterloo, Iowa.
7. Include transfer switch per Section 16415.
B. Generator is CONTRACTOR provided and CONTRACTOR installed.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Standby Rating: Power output rating equal to power that generator set delivers continuously under
normally varying load factors for duration of power outage with capability of 24 continuous operating
hrs.
B. Operational Bandwidth: Total variation from lowest to highest value of parameter over range of
-� conditions indicated, expressed as percentage of nominal value of parameter.
C. Power Output Rating: Gross electrical power output of generator set minus total power
requirements of electric motor-driven accessories normally constituting part of engine assembly.
D. Steady-State Voltage Modulation: Uniform cyclical variation of voltage within operational bandwidth,
expressed in Hz or cycles per second.
1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Requirements:
1. System Includes: Standby-rated,automatically started natural gas-fueled engine coupled to
ac generator unit. Engine and generator are factory-mounted and factory-aligned on
structural steel skid. Subsystems and auxiliary components and equipment areas indicated.
2. Environmental Conditions: Engine generator system withstands following environmental
conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of performance capability:
a. Ambient Temperature: +10°C to +40°C.
b. Altitude: Sea level to 1,000 ft(300 m).
c. Location: Outdoors
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Functional Description: When mode selector switch on control and monitoring panel is in
"automatic" position, remote control contacts in one or more separate automatic transfer
switches initiate starting and stopping of generator set. When mode selector switch is placed
in "On" position, generator set starts manually. "Off' position of same switch initiates
shutdown of generator set. When unit is running, specified system or equipment failures or
derangements automatically shut unit down and initiate alarms.
-" 16231-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. System Performance
a. Steady-State Voltage Operational Bandwidth: 1%of rated output voltage from no load
to full load.
b. Steady-State Voltage Modulation: Less than 0.25 Hz.
c. Transient Voltage Performance: Not more than 10% variation for 50% step-load
increase or decrease. Voltage recovers to remain within steady-state operating band
within 2 sec.
d. Steady-State Frequency Operational Bandwidth: 0.5%of rated frequency from no load
to full load.
e. Steady-State Frequency Stability: When system is operating at constant load within
rated load,there are no random speed variations outside steady-state operational band —
and no regular or cyclical hunting or surging of speed.
f. Transient Frequency Performance: Less than 3 Hz variation for 50%step-load increase
or decrease. Frequency recovers to remain within steady-state operating band within
3 sec. —
g. Output Waveform: At no load, harmonic content measured line-to-line or line-to-neutral
does not exceed 5% total and 3% for single harmonics. Telephone influence factor
determined according to NEMA MG1 does not exceed 50. _
h. Sustained Short-Circuit Current: For 3-ph bolted short circuit at system output
terminals, system will supply minimum of 300% of rated full-load current for not less
than 10 sec and then clear fault automatically,without damage to any generator system
component. —
i. Temperature Rise of Generator: Within acceptable limits for insulation systems used
according to NEMA MG 1 when operating continuously at standby rating conditions.
j. Starting Time: Maximum total time period for cold start,with ambient temperature at low
end of specified range, is 10 sec. Time period includes output voltage and frequency —
settlement within specified steady-state bands.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Include data on features, components, ratings, and performance.
2. Include dimensioned outline plan and elevation drawings of engine generator set and other
system components.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Show connections, mounting, and support provisions and access and working space
requirements.
2. Wiring Diagrams for System: Show power and control connections and distinguish between
factory-installed and field-installed wiring.
C. Test Results: —
1. Certified Summary of Prototype Unit Test Report: Submit certified copies of actual prototype
unit test report if requested by ENGINEER. —
2. Factory Project-Specific Equipment Test Reports: For units to be shipped for this Project
showing evidence of compliance with specified requirements.
3. Field Test Report.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Detailed Operating Instructions: Describe operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
16231-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Lists: Tools,test equipment,spare parts,and replacement items recommended to be stored
at site for ready access. Include part and drawing numbers, current unit prices, and source
of supply.
E. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing equipment of types and
— capacities indicated that have record of successful in-service performance.
1. Emergency Service: System manufacturer maintains service center capable of providing
_ training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs at Project site with 4 hrs maximum
response time.
B. Comply with NFPA 110 for requirements for Level 2 emergency power supply system.
C. Engine Exhaust Emissions: Comply with applicable Federal, State, and local government
requirements.
` D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain engine generator system components from single
manufacturer with responsibility for entire system. Unit shall be representative product built from
components that have proven compatibility and reliability and are coordinated to operate as unit as
_ evidenced by records of prototype testing.
E. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory(NRTL), where such listing or labeling is available.
1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms "listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100.
F. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall complywith National Fire
-- Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver engine generator set and system components to their final locations in protective wrappings,
containers, and other protection that will exclude dirt and moisture and prevent damage from
construction operations. Remove protection only after equipment is made safe from such hazards.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials:
1. Furnish extra materials matching products installed, as described below, packaged with
protective covering for storage, and identified with labels describing contents.
a. Fuses: 1 for every 10 of each type and rating, but not less than 1 of each.
b. Pilot Lights: 2 for every 6 of each type used, but not less than 2 of each.
c. Filters: 1 set each of lubricating oil, fuel, and combustion air filters.
16231-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Engine Generator Sets:
1. Generac 80KW natural gas genset 80KW site rated or equivalent.
2. Cummins comparable model.
3. Caterpillar comparable model.
2.02 ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEM
A. System is coordinated assembly of compatible components.
B. Ratings: 480/277 v, 3-ph, 4-wire 60 Hz, 80 kW minimum.
C. Safety Standard: Comply with AMT B15.1.
D. Nameplates: Equip each major system component with conspicuous nameplate of component
manufacturer. Nameplate identifies manufacturer of origin and address, and model and serial
number of item.
2.03 ENGINE GENERATOR SET
A. Power Output Rating: Nominal ratings as indicated, with capacity as evidenced by records of
prototype testing.
B. Skid: Welded steel base securely mounted with anchored mounting bolts. Adequate strength and
rigidity to maintain alignment of mounted components without dependence on concrete foundation.
Free from sharp edges and corners. Lifting attachments arranged to facilitate lifting with slings
without damaging components.
C. Vibration Isolation: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Integral vibration
isolators may be provided. When integral vibration isolators are not provided, provide 95%efficient
spring type vibration isolators as manufactured by Vibration Eliminator, Mason Company,or Equal.
Mount isolators between steel base and floor or concrete pad.
D. Rigging Diagram: Inscribed on metal plate permanently attached to skid. Diagram indicates
location and lifting capacity of each lifting attachment and location of center of gravity.
2.04 NATURAL GAS-FUELED ENGINE
A. Comply with NFPA37.
B. Fuel: Natural Gas having a heating value of approximately 1000 BTU/ft3.
C. Maximum Speeds:
1. Engine: 1,800 rpm.
D. Lubrication System: Pressurized by positive displacement pump driven from engine crankshaft.
Mount following items on engine or skid:
1. Filter and Strainer: Rated to remove 90% of particles 5 microns and smaller while passing
full flow.
2. Oil Cooler: Maintains lubricating oil at manufacturer's recommended optimum temperature.
3. Thermostatic Control Valve: Controls flow in system to maintain optimum oil temperature.
Unit is capable of full flow and is designed to be fail-safe.
16231-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. Crankcase Drain: Arranged for complete gravity drainage to easily removable container with
no disassembly and without use of pumps or siphons or special tools or appliances.
E. Engine Fuel System: Comply with NFPA 54.
1. Natural gas carburetion.
2. Fuel solenoid with UL approved flexible fuel lines.
3. Fuel regulator.
�- F. Jacket Coolant Heater: Electric immersion type,factory-installed in jacket coolant system. Unit is
rated and thermostatically controlled to maintain engine temperature of 25°C at low end of specified
ambient temperature range.
1. Voltage: 208, 277, or 480
G. Speed Governor: Mechanical type.
2.05 ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
A. Closed-loop, liquid-cooled,with radiator factory-mounted on engine generator set skid and integral
engine-driven coolant pumping.
1. Factory-piped and -rated for specified coolant.
2. Fan: Driven by multiple belts from engine shaft.
2.06 FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
A. Comply with NFPA 37 and NFPA 54.
B. Fuel Piping: Furnish flexible fuel connections with generator set. Installation is work of
Section 23 11 23
2.07 ENGINE EXHAUST SYSTEM
A. Muffler: Industrial-type,sized as recommended by engine manufacturer. Measured sound level in
20-75 Hz frequency band, according to "DEMA Test Code for Measurement of Sound from
Heavy-Duty Reciprocating Engines" at distance of 25 ft from exhaust discharge, is 87 dB or less.
B. Connections from Engine to Exhaust System: Furnish flexible section of corrugated stainless steel
pipe furnished with generator set. Comply with Section 15550.
C. Insulation for Mufflers and Exhaust Piping: Comply with Section 15060.
D. Supports for Muffler and Exhaust Piping: Vibration isolating-type specified in Section 15070.
— 2.08 STARTING SYSTEM
A. Description: 12 v or 24 v electric with negative ground and including following items:
1. Components: Size so they will not be damaged during full engine-cranking cycle with
specified maximum ambient temperature.
2. Cranking Motor: Heavy-duty unit that automatically engages and releases from engine
flywheel without binding.
3. Cranking Cycle: 60 sec.
4. Battery complies with SAE J537 and has adequate capacity within ambient temperature
range specified in Part 1 to provide specified cranking cycle series at least twice without
recharging.
16231-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
5. Battery Cable: Size as recommended by generator set manufacturer for cable length
required for connection to battery. Include required interconnecting conductors and "
connection accessories.
6. Battery Rack: Factory fabricated of metal with acid-resistant finish.
7. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory-mounted on engine with solid-state voltage-regulation _
and 35 amp minimum continuous rating.
B. Battery Charger: Current limiting, automatic equalizing and float charging-type designed for
operation from 120 v 60 Hz supply source. Unit complies with UL 508 and includes following
features:
1. Operation: Equalizing charging rate of 10 amps is initiated automatically after battery has lost
charge until an adjustable equalizing voltage is achieved at battery terminals. Unit then
automatically switches to lower float-charging mode, and continues operating in that mode
until battery is discharged again.
2. Automatic Temperature Compensation: Adjusts float and equalizes voltages for variations in —
ambient temperature from-40°C to+60°C to prevent overcharging at high temperatures and
undercharging at low temperatures.
3. Automatic Voltage Regulation: Maintains output voltage constant regardless of input voltage
variations up to +10%.
4. Ammeter and Voltmeter: Flush mounted in door. Meters indicate charging rates.
5. Safety Functions: Include sensing of abnormally low battery voltage arranged to close
contacts providing "low battery voltage" indication on control and monitoring panel. Also --
include sensing of high battery voltage and loss of ac input or do output of battery charger.
Either of these conditions closes contacts that provide "battery charger malfunction"
indication at system control and monitoring panel. _
6. Enclosure and Mounting: NEMA Class 1 wall-mounted cabinet.
2.09 CONTROL AND MONITORING
A. Configuration: Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gages are grouped on common control and monitoring panel mounted on generator set.
Mounting method isolates control panel from generator set vibration.
1. Generator Circuit Breaker: Low-voltage, insulated case-type,conforming to Section 16414.
Trip rating based on generator full load current.
B. Indicating and Protective Devices, and Controls: Include those required by NFPA 110 for Level 2
system plus following:
1. ac Voltmeter.
2. ac Ammeter.
3. ac Frequency Meter.
4. do Voltmeter(Alternator Battery Charging).
5. Engine Coolant Temperature Gage.
6. Engine-Lubricating Oil Pressure Gage.
7. Running Time Meter.
8. AmmeterNoltmeter Phase Selector Switch or Switches.
9. Generator Voltage Adjustment.
10. Frequency Adjustment.
C. Supporting Items: Include sensors, transducers, terminals, relays, and other devices, and wiring
required to support specified items. Locate sensors and other supporting items on engine,
generator, or elsewhere as indicated. Where not indicated, locate to suit manufacturer's standard.
D. Unpowered, normally open, auxiliary interlock contacts wired to terminal block.
1. Generator failure signal to remote location.
16231-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Generator run signal to remote location.
3. Two auxiliary interlocks for 120 v powered air louver control.
2.10 GENERATOR, EXCITER, AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 and specified performance requirements.
B. Drive: Generator shaft is directly connected to engine shaft. Exciter is rotated integrally with
generator rotor.
C. Electrical Insulation: Class H or Class F.
D. Stator Winding Leads: Brought out to terminal box to permit future reconnection for other voltages
if required.
E. Construction prevents mechanical, electrical, and thermal damage due to vibration,overspeed up
to 125% of rating, and heat during operation at 100% of rated capacity.
F. Excitation uses no slip rings,collector rings,or brushes,and is arranged to sustain generator output
under short circuit conditions as specified.
G. Enclosure: Dripproof.
H. Instrument Transformers: Mounted within generator enclosure.
I. Voltage Regulator: Solid-state-type, separate from exciter, providing performance as specified.
1. Adjustment on control and monitoring panel provides +5% adjustment of output voltage
operating band.
2.11 FINISHES
A. Indoor Enclosures and Components: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant
pretreatment and primer.
B. Outdoor Enclosures: Polyurethane enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and
manufacturer's compatible standard primer.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Include prototype testing and Project-specific equipment tests (equipment
manufactured specifically for this Project).
B. Prototype Testing: Performed on separate engine generator set using same engine model,
constructed of identical or equivalent components and equipped with identical or equivalent
accessories.
1. Tests: Conform to those required for Level 1 energy converters in paragraphs 3.2.1, 3.2.1.1,
and 3.2.1.2 of NFPA 110.
2. Components and Accessories: Items furnished with installed unit that are not identical to
those on tested prototype have been acceptably tested to demonstrate compatibility and
reliability.
C. Project-Specific Equipment Tests: Test engine generator set and other system components and
accessories prior to shipment. Test items individually and assembled and connected as complete
_ system at factory in manner equivalent to that required at Project site. Record and report test data.
1. Mechanical operation test.
16231-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Ground tests.
3. Control wiring tests. —
4. Operation test.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Anchor generator set and other system components on concrete bases conforming
Section 03300 and as indicated. Provide anchorage according to manufacturer's
recommendations. —
B. Field Installation of Piping and Ductwork: Comply with Division 15.
C. Maintain minimum working space around components according to manufacturer's approved --
submittals and NEC.
3.02 IDENTIFICATION !
A. Identify system components according to Section 15075 and Section 16075.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL —
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be presentat
job site or classroom designated by OWNER for minimum mandays indicated, travel time
excluded, to supervise final adjustment of system after installation is complete, system
startup, and training of OWNER'S personnel for system operation. Include minimum of:
a. 1 manday for Installation Services.
b. 1/2 manday for Instructional Services.
C. 1/2 manday for Post Startup Services.
2. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation,
maintenance,troubleshooting,and equipment and system related areas. See Section 01600.
B. Tests: Provide services of qualified testing agency to perform tests listed below according to
manufacturer's recommendations upon completion of installation of system. Use instruments
bearing records of calibration within last 12 months,traceable to NIST standards,and adequate for —
making positive observation of test results. Include following tests:
1. Battery Tests: Measure charging voltage and voltages between available battery terminals _
for full-charging and float-charging conditions. Check electrolyte level and specific gravity
under both conditions. Test for contact integrity of connectors.
2. Battery Charger Tests: Verify specified rates of charge for both equalizing and float-charging
conditions.
3. System Integrity Tests: Verify proper installation,connection,and integrity of each element of
engine generator system before and during system operation. Check for air, exhaust, and
fluid leaks. _
4. Simulation of malfunctions to verify proper operation of local and remote protective, alarm,
and monitoring devices.
5. Load Test: Use variable load bank capable of simulating kVA, kW,and power factor of load
for which unit is rated. Run unit at 25, 50, and 75%of rated capacity for 30 min each, and at --
100% for 1 hrs. Record voltage, frequency, load current, battery-charging current, power
output, oil pressure, and coolant temperature during test.
16231-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
6. Exhaust System Back-Pressure Test: Use manometer with scale exceeding 40 in.of water.
Connect to exhaust line close to engine exhaust manifold. Verify that back pressure at
full-rated load is within manufacturer's published allowable limits for engine.
7. Exhaust Emissions Test: Conform to applicable government test criteria.
C. Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified
requirements are met.
3.04 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, inspect system components. Remove paint splatters and other
spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean
components internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
** END OF SECTION "
16231-9 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16415
TRANSFER SWITCHES
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Automatic transfer switch (ATS). Provide one(1), delivered to site in Waterloo, Iowa
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Submit for each transfer switch, including dimensioned plans, sections, and elevations
showing minimum clearances; conductor entry provisions; gutter space; installed features
and devices; and materials lists.
2. Wiring diagrams, elementary or schematic, differentiating between manufacturer-installed
and field-installed wiring.
3. Single-line diagrams of transfer switch units showing connections between automatic transfer
switch, bypass/isolation switch, power source, and load, plus interlocking provisions.
B. Test Results:
1. Certified reports of field tests and observations.
C. Miscellaneous:
1. Manufacturer's certificate of compliance to referenced standards and tested short-circuit
closing and withstand ratings applicable to protective devices and current ratings used in this
Project, as indicated and as specified in this section.
D. Operation and Maintenance(O&M) Data:
1. Include features and operating sequences, automatic and manual.
2. List factory settings of relays and provide relay setting and calibration instructions.
E. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms experienced in manufacturing equipment of types and
capacities indicated and having record of successful in-service performance.
B. Emergency Service: Manufacturer maintains service center capable of providing emergency
maintenance and repairs at Project site with 8 hr maximum response time.
C. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory(NRTL).
1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms"listed"and"labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code(NEC),Article 100.
D. Regulatory Requirements:
16415-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA No. 70.
PART PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Caterpillar, Inc.
B. Cummins.
2.02 TRANSFER SWITCH PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Three(3) pole three(3)wire. 480 volt three phase, 200 ampere, 40,000 AIC minimum.
B. Solid-State Controls: Repetitive accuracy setting of+/-2% or better over an operating
temperature range of-20°C to 70°C.
C. Resistance to Damage by Voltage Transients: Components meet or exceed voltage surge
withstand capability requirements when tested according to ANSI C37.90.1. Components meet or
exceed voltage impulse withstand test of NEMA ICS 1.
D. Enclosures: NEMA 12, conforming to UL 508, except as otherwise indicated.
E. Factory Wiring: Train and bundle factory wiring and identify consistently with Shop Drawings, by
color code or by numbered or lettered wire and cable tape markers at terminations.
1. Designated terminals accommodate field wiring. "
2. Power Terminals Arrangement and Field Wiring Space: Suitable for top, side or bottom
entrance of feeder conductors as indicated.
3. Terminals: Pressure type, suitable for copper or aluminum conductors of sizes indicated. _
4. Control Wiring: Equipped with lugs suitable for connection to terminal strips.
F. Electrical Operation: Accomplish by nonfused, momentarily energized solenoid or electric
motor-operated mechanism, mechanically and electrically interlocked in both directions. Switches
using components of molded case circuit breakers or contactors not designed for continuous duty,
repetitive switching between active power sources are not acceptable.
G. Switch Action: Mechanically held in both directions for double-throw switches.
H. Switch Contacts: Use silver composition for switching load current. Provide separate arcing
contacts for units rated 225 amps and more. '—
I. Overcurrent devices are not part of switch products.
2.03 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES (ATSs)
A. Comply with Level 1 equipment in accordance with to NFPA No. 110.
2.04 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH FEATURES
A. Voltage sensing for each phase of normal source. Pick-up voltage adjustable from 85%to 100% T
nominal,and drop-out voltage adjustable from 75%to 98%pick-up value. Factory set for pick-up at
90% and drop-out at 85%.
B. Time-delay override of normal source voltage sensing delays transfer and engine start signals.
Adjustable 0 to 6 sec; factory set at 1 sec.
16415-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Voltage/Frequency Lockout Relay: Prevents premature transfer. Voltage pick-up adjustable from
85%to 100% nominal. Factory set to pick-up at 90%. Pick-up frequency adjustable from 90%to
100% nominal. Factory set to pick-up at 95%.
_ D. Retransfer Time Delay: Adjustable from 0 to 30 min and factory set at 10 min. Provides automatic
defeat of delay upon loss of voltage or sustained undervoltage of emergency source when normal
supply has been restored.
-- E. Test Switch: Simulates normal source failure.
F. Switch-Position Pilot Lights: Indicate source to which load is connected.
G. Source Available Indicating Lights: Supervise sources via transfer switch normal and emergency
source sensing circuits.
1. Normal Power Supervision: Green light with nameplate engraved"Normal Source Available."
2. Standby Power Supervision: Red light with nameplate engraved"Standby Source Available."
H. Unassigned Auxiliary Contacts: 2 normally open SPDT contacts for each switch position.
1. Rating: 10 amps at 240 vac.
I. Transfer Override Switch: Overrides automatic retransfer control so ATS remains connected to
emergency power source regardless of condition of normal source. Pilot light indicates override
status.
J. Engine Starting Contacts: 1 isolated normally closed and 1 isolated normally open. Contacts are
gold-flashed or gold-plated and rated 10 amps at 32 vdc minimum.
K. Engine Shut-Down Contacts: Time delay adjustable from 0 to 5 min; factory set at 5 min.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Enclosures: Manufacturer's standard enamel over corrosion-resistant pretreatment and primer.
2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory test components, assembled switches, and associated equipment to ensure proper
operation. Check transfer time and voltage, frequency, and time-delay settings for conformance
with specified requirements. Perform dielectric strength test conforming to NEMA ICS 1.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Floor Mounting of Transfer Switches:
1. Provide 4 in. high concrete foundation pad. Construct in accordance with Section 03300.
2. Level and anchor unit to equipment pad.
B. Wall Mounting of Transfer Switches: Mount on wall as indicated.
C. Identify components in accordance with Section 16075.
'— 16415-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.02 WIRING TO REMOTE COMPONENTS
A. Match type and number of cables and conductors to control and communications requirements of
transfer switches used. Increase raceway sizes at no additional cost to OWNER if necessary to
accommodate required wiring.
3.03 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten factory-made connections and field connections, including connectors and terminals,
screws and bolts, according to equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values.
B. When manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated,tighten connectors and terminals to _
comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A-486B.
3.04 GROUNDING
A. Make equipment grounding connections for transfer switch units as indicated and as required by
NEC.
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Supplier's or manufacturer's technician for equipment specified herein shall be present atjob
site for minimum mandays indicated, travel time excluded, for service during plant
construction, plant startup, and training of OWNER'S personnel for plant operation. Include
minimum of:
a. 1 mandays for Instructional Services.
2. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to specific system and equipment operation,
maintenance, field tests, and troubleshooting. See Section 01600.
B. Preliminary Tests: Perform electrical tests as recommended by manufacturer and as follows.
1. Measure phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels with insulation
resistance tester, including external annunciator and control circuits. Use test voltages and _
procedure recommended by manufacturer. Meet manufacturer's specified minimum
resistance.
2. Check for electrical continuity of circuits and for short circuits.
C. Field Tests: Give 7 day advance notice of tests and perform tests in presence of OWNER and
ENGINEER.
D. Coordinate tests with tests of generator plant and run them concurrently.
E. Tests: As recommended by manufacturer and as follows.
1. Contact Resistance Test: Measure resistance of power contacts for ATSs. Resolve values
in excess of 500 micro-ohms and differences between adjacent poles exceeding 50%.
2. Operational Tests: Demonstrate interlock, sequence, and operational function for each
switch at least 3 times.
a. Simulate power failures of normal source to ATSs and of emergency source with normal
source available.
b. Simulate low phase-to-ground voltage for each phase of normal source of ATS'S.
16415-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
c. Verify time-delay settings and pick-up and drop-out voltages.
F. Test Failures: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and prepare for retest. Verify equipment
meets specified requirements.
G. Reports: Maintain written record of observations and tests. Report defective materials and
workmanship, and retest corrected items. Record adjustable relay settings and measured
insulation and contact resistances and time delays. Attach label or tag to each tested component
indicating satisfactory completion of tests.
*** END OF SECTION
16415-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16443
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS
PART1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Motor control centers for use on ac circuits rated 600 V and less.
_ 1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
- 1. Include dimensions, ratings, and data on features and components.
B. Shop Drawings: For each motor-control center specified in this Section. Include dimensioned
plans, elevations, and component lists. Show ratings, including short-time and short-circuit
ratings, and horizontal and vertical bus ampacities.
1. Schedule of features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual
motor-control center units.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Interconnecting wiring diagrams pertinent to class ar d type specified
for motor control center. Schematic diagram of each type of controller ur t indicated.
C. Test Results:
1. Certified reports of field tests and observations.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data (O&M):
1. Maintenance data for MCC.
E. Miscellaneous:
-. 1. Load-Current and Overload-Relay Heater List: Compile after motors have been installed
and arrange to demonstrate that selection of heaters suits actual n otor nameplate
full-load currents.
2. Certificates for field testing agency, signed by Contractor, certifying that �.;gency complies
with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article below.
F. Submit in accordance with Section 01340.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintain, within 100 miles (160 km) of Project sit4�, service center
capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain similar motor-control devices through 1 source from single
manufacturer.
16443-1 Dry Run Creek Wterceptor-60330823
C. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL).
1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.
2. Terms"listed" and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. _
D. Regulatory Requirements:
1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National '
Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70.
2. Label to comply with NFPA 70E requirements.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver in shipping splits of lengths that can be moved past obstructions in delivery path.
B. Store so condensation will not occur on or in motor-control centers. Provide temporary heaters
as required to prevent condensation.
C. Handle motor-control centers according to NEMA ICS 2.3. Use factory-installed lifting devices.
1.05 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate features of controllers and accessory devices with pilot devices and control circuits
to which they connect.
B. Coordinate features, accessories, and functions of each motor controller with ratings and
characteristics of supply circuit, motor, required control sequence, and duty cycle of motor and
load.
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with _
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1. Spare Fuse and Incandescent Indicating Lamps: Furnish 1 spare for every 5 installed
units, but not less than 1 set of 3 of each kind.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Rockwell Automation/Allen-Bradley Co.
B. Substitutions: Any request for substitution must be made at a minimum of ten days prior to the
bid date. The request for substitution must include the information required in the submittal ,
portion of this specification. This information must include the specification response and all
necessary product information showing compliance to the specification.
2.02 MOTOR-CONTROL CENTERS
A. Wiring: NEMA ICS 3, Class I, Type B.
16443-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Enclosures: Surface-mounted cabinets as indicated. NEMA 250, Type 1 gasketed, unless
otherwise indicated to meet environmental conditions at installed location.
1. Compartments: Modular; individual doors have concealed hinges and quick-captive
screw fasteners. Interlocks on combination controller units require disconnect means in
off position before door can be opened or closed, except by consciously operating
permissive release device.
2. Interchangeability: Compartments are constructed to remove units without opening
adjacent doors, disconnecting adjacent compartments, or disturbing operation of other
units in control center. Units requiring same size compartment are interchangeable, and
compartments are constructed to permit ready rearrangement of units, such as replacing
3 single units with unit requiring 3 spaces, without cutting or welding.
_ 3. Wiring Spaces: Each vertical section of structure with horizontal and vertical wiring has
spaces for wiring to each unit compartment in each section, with supports holding wiring
in place.
C. Short-Circuit Current Rating for Each Section: Equal to or greater than indicated available fault
current in symmetrical amperes at motor-control center location.
2.03 BUSES
A. Material: Tin Plated copper.
B. Ampacity Ratings:
1. As indicated for horizontal buses.
2. 300 amp min for vertical main buses or larger as required for installed units.
C. Neutral Buses: As per drawings.
D. Equipment Ground Bus: Noninsulated, horizontal copper bus 2 by 1/4 in. (50 by 6 mm), min.
E. Horizontal Bus Arrangement: Main phase, neutral, and ground buses extended with same
capacity entire length of motor-control center, with provision for future extension at both ends
by bolt holes and captive bus splice sections.
F. Short-Circuit Withstand Rating: Same as short-circuit current rating of section.
2.04 FUNCTIONAL FEATURES
A. Description: Modular arrangement of motor controllers, control devices, overcurrent protective
devices, transformers, panelboards, instruments, indicating panels, blank panels, and other
items mounted in compartments of motor-control center as indicated.
— B. Motor-Controller Units: Combination controller units of types and with features, ratings, and
circuit assignments indicated.
1. Units with full-voltage, across-the-line, magnetic controllers up to and including Size 3 are
installed on drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect
with vertical-section buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.
2. Units have short-circuit current ratings equal to or greater than short-circuit current rating
of motor-control center section.
3. Units in motor-control centers with Type B wiring are equipped with pull-apart terminal
strips or drawout terminal boards for external control connections.
16443-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. All motor controllers shall be equipped with Rockwell/Allen Bradley Bulletin E300 starter
overload relays prewired to MCC Ethernet cabling.
a. 120 volt 10 wiring per OWNER requirements.
b. Include all components necessary for a complete stand-alone Ethernet capable MCC .�
including Ethernet connectors, plugs, trunk line, terminating resistors, scanner,
dropline with ports in each vertical wireway, and power supply fed from the MCC.
C. Overcurrent Protective Devices: Types of devices with features, ratings, and circuit
assignments indicated. Individual feeder-tap units through 225-A rating shall be installed on
drawout mountings with connectors that automatically line up and connect with vertical-section
buses while being racked into their normal, energized positions.
D. Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors: Connected to motor-control center bus.
E. Spaces and Blank Units: Compartments fully bused and equipped with guide rails or
equivalent, ready for insertion of drawout units.
F. Spare Units: Type, sizes, and ratings as indicated, and installed in compartments indicated
"spare."
2.05 DISCONNECTS
A. Main Disconnect:
1. The withstand rating of the main shall be greater than or equal to the bus bracing for the
MCC.
2. Provide lugs to accommodate the conductors as indicated on the drawings.
3. If no overcurrent protection is indicated, provide a main incoming lug compartment.
4. Main Fusible Disconnect(if specified in drawings)
a. Size fuses as shown on the drawings. Provide Class J or R fuses through
600Amps. Provide Class L fuses above 600Amps.
b. Provide a removable protective barrier to reduce the possibility of contact with
the line terminals.
C. Provide one normally open and one normally closed auxiliary contact.
d. For disconnects rated 1000A and above, provide a ground fault protection
system with adjustable pick-up, adjustable time relay, control power indicator
light, trip indicator and built-in test buttons. The ground fault protection system
shall be mounted in the same enclosure as the disconnect switch. Provide 120V
shunt trip. —
5. Main Circuit Breaker Disconnect(if specified in drawings)
a. Size the circuit breaker as shown on the drawings.
b. Provide a circuit breaker of either the thermal magnetic or solid state type.
c. Provide a removable protective barrier to reduce the possibility of contact with the —
line terminals.
d. Provide one normally open and one normally closed internal auxiliary contact.
B. Feeder Disconnects and Transformer Disconnects —
1. The disconnecting means for feeders and transformers shall be thermal magnetic circuit
breakers.
2. The interrupting capacity rating shall be greater than or equal to the bus bracing _
requirement.
3. The minimum frame size shall be 150 Amps
16443-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
4. Provide one (1) N.O. internally mounted auxiliary contact for indication of"On", "Off', and
"Tripped".
C. Motor Starter Disconnect
1. Across the line NEMA starters
a. The disconnecting means for the across the line starters shall be motor circuit
protectors.
b. The short circuit withstand rating shall be greater than or equal to the bus bracing
requirement.
C. Units shall be supplied based upon the rules/requirements set forth in the NEC,
_ NEMA and UL standards.
d. Units shall be shipped at the lowest setting per UL standards. The contractor
shall field adjust the units based upon the particular motor application.
e. The minimum frame size shall be 150A.
— f. Provide one N.O. internally mounted auxiliary contact for indication of"On" or
"Off/Tripped".
2. Solid State Controllers (Soft Starters and Variable Frequency Drives)
a. The disconnecting means for solid state controllers shall be fusible disconnect
with current limiting fuses.
b. The short circuit withstand rating shall be rated 100,000 Amperes (rms
symmetrical).
C. Provide one N.O. auxiliary contact that operates with the movement of the
external handle.
2.06 MAGNETIC MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A. Description: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing, across-the-line, unless otherwise
indicated.
B. Control Circuit: 120 V; obtained from integral control power transformer, unless otherwise
— indicated. Include control power transformer with adequate capacity to operate connected pilot,
indicating and control devices, plus 100% spare capacity.
C. Combination Controller: Factory-assembled combination controller and disconnect switch with
or without overcurrent protection as indicated.
1. Circuit-Breaker Disconnect: NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector with field-adjustable
— short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-rotor amperes.
D. Overload Relay:
1. Enhanced Protection Overload Relay: Provide overload relays with NEMA Class 10 or
better tripping characteristics for submersible equipment or where indicated. Select to
protect motor against voltage unbalance and single phasing.
— 2. Manufacturer and model: Rockwell/Allen Bradley E3PIus.
a. No substitutes.
2.07 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
A. The unit shall be provided with a fusible disconnect with current limiting fuses.
B. The unit shall be provided with a 120V control power transformer. The control power transformer
shall be provided with primary and secondary fusing.
'� 16443-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
C. Provide a 120V control interface. '
D. Provide a common mode choke on the output of the drive.
E. Provide a door mounted selector switch for Auto-Manual control. In the auto mode, the start
command shall be provided through a remote contact. In the manual mode, the start-stop control
shall be provided through the door mounted push buttons. Provide extra contact blocks on the
selector switch for monitoring of switch position. "
F. Provide door mounted pushbuttons for start-stop control. Stop pushbuttons shall always be
active. _
G. Provide door mounted transformer type pilot lights for indication of On (Green)and Off(Red).
H. Provide a door mounted Human Interface for programming, display and speed control.
I. Provide one isolated/configurable analog input and output.
J. Provide output reactor.
2.08 FEEDER OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, handle lockable.
1. Characteristics: Frame size, trip rating, number of poles, and auxiliary devices as
indicated and interrupting capacity rating to meet available fault current.
2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application, including Type HACR for heating,
air-conditioning, and refrigeration equipment.
3. Circuit Breakers, 200 A and Larger: Trip units interchangeable within frame size.
4. Circuit Breakers, 400 A and Larger: Field-adjustable, short-time and continuous-current
settings.
5. Current-Limiting Trips: Where indicated, let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1,
Class RK-5.
6. Lugs: Mechanical lugs and power-distribution connectors for number, size, and material
of conductors indicated.
7. Shunt Trip: Where indicated or required for ground fault protection trip.
2.09 ACCESSORIES
A. Factory install in controller enclosure, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Furnish following devices when indicated on Drawings.
1. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-duty
type.
2. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break push-button station with _
factory-applied hasp arranged so padlock can be used to lock push button in depressed
position with control circuit open.
16443-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
PART 3 EXECUTION
— 3.01 APPLICATIONS
A. Select features of each motor controller to coordinate with ratings and characteristics of supply
circuit and motor; required control sequence; duty cycle of motor, drive, and load; and
configuration of pilot device and control circuit affecting controller functions.
B. Select horsepower rating of controllers to suit motor controlled. Utilize NEMA sized units no
— smaller than size 1.
C. Push-Button Stations: In covers of magnetic controllers for manually started motors where
— indicated, start contact connected in parallel with sealing auxiliary contact for low-voltage
protection.
D. Hand-Off-Remote Selector Switches: Where Indicated.
E. Pilot Lights: Push to test LED type where indicated.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install motor control centers according to NEMA ICS 2.3 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Install motor control centers on concrete housekeeping bases.
3.03 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide warning signs according to
Section 26 05 53.
3.04 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between motor-control devices according to Section 16120.
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect hand-off-automatic switch and other automatic control devices according to indicated
wiring diagram or one that is manufacturer approved, where available.
1. Connect selector switches to bypass only manual and automatic control devices that
— have no safety functions when switch is in hand position.
2. Connect selector switches with motor-control circuit in both hand and automatic positions
for safety-type control devices such as low- and high-pressure cutouts, high-temperature
cutouts, and motor-overload protectors.
3.05 CONNECTIONS
A. Tighten motor-control center bus joint, electrical connector, and terminal bolts according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are
not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.
16443-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer's Field Services:
1. Supplier's or manufacturer's representative for equipment specified herein shall be _
present at jobsite or classroom designated by OWNER for minimum mandays indicated,
travel time excluded, for assistance during plant construction, plant startup, and training
of OWNER'S personnel for plant operation. Include:
a. 1 manday for Installation Services.
b. 1/2 manday for Instructional Services.
2. Supplier or manufacturer shall direct services to system and equipment operation, s
maintenance, troubleshooting, and equipment and system-related areas other than
wastewater treatment process. See Section 01600.
B. Testing:
1. Reports: Notify ENGINEER in writing indicating defective materials and workmanship ,
and unsatisfactory test results. Include record of repairs and adjustments made.
2. Perform following tests:
a. Test insulation resistance of MCC buses; components; and of connecting supply, --
feeder, and control circuits. For components with solid-state devices or other
sensitive components, perform tests in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
b. Make continuity tests of circuits.
C. Inspect MCC'S for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labels, circuit
connections, and nameplate compliance with up-to-date system drawings.
d. Perform operational test and exercise of mechanical components and other
operable devices in accordance with manufacturer's instruction manual.
e. Check MCC anchorage, external clearances, and alignment and fit of components
including internal elements.
f. Check tightness of bolted electrical connections with calibrated torque wrench.
Refer to manufacturer's instructions for proper torque values.
g. Perform visual and mechanical inspection and related work for motor control and
protective devices as specified in Section 16414 and 16420.
h. Device Ratings and Settings: Verify ratings and settings of overload relays, motor
circuit protectors, and overcurrent protective devices.
3. Make final adjustments of devices in accordance with Sections 16414 and 16420.
4. Quality Control Testing Program: Assure MCC installation meets specified requirements,
is operational within specified tolerances, and provides appropriate protection for systems
and equipment.
a. Test and inspect MCC' in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
these specifications. _
b. Schedule tests and provide notification at least 7 days in advance of test
commencement.
c. Reports: Prepare written reports of test results and observations. Report defective
materials and workmanship. Include complete records of adjustments and
corrective action taken.
d. Labeling: On satisfactory completion of tests and related effort, apply label to tested
components indicating results, person responsible, and date. _
e. Test insulation resistance of buses and portions of control wiring that disconnect
from solid-state devices through normal disconnecting features. Insulation
resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.
16443-8 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
f. Verify appropriate capacity, overcurrent protection, and operating voltage of control
power elements including control power transformers and control power wiring.
g. Check phasing of supply source to bus.
h. Test motor-control devices as specified in Section 16420.
i. Test overcurrent protective devices as specified in Section 16414.
5. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Verify by retests that specified requirements
are met.
3.08 CLEANING
A. Inspect interior and exterior of motor-control centers. Remove paint splatters and other spots,
_ dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices
internally, using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION **'
16443-9 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
SECTION 16445
HOISTING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 -GENERAL
1.01 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide and test jib crane and hoisting equipment, motors, controls and appurtenances as
indicated and specified.
— B. Coordinate jib crane mounting and installation with precast manufacturer per Section 02532.
1.02 REFERENCES
— A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
1. 9: Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. 11: Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. American Society of mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B30.16: Overhead Hoists (Underhung) Safety Standard for Cableways, Cranes,
Derricks, Hoists, Hooks, Jacks, and Slings
C. American Welding Society(AWS):
1. D1.1: Structural Welding Code Aluminum.
— D. National Electric Code(NEC).
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
1. MG1: Motors and Generators.
F. Occupational Safety and Hazard Association (OSHA):
1. 29 CFR 1910.179: Overhead and Gantry Cranes.
— 1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following shop drawings in accordance with Section 01340:
1. Data regarding hoisting equipment characteristics and performance:
2. Setting plans, with tolerances, for anchor bolts.
3. Manufacturer's literature.
— 4. Operating and maintenance instructions and parts lists.
5. List of recommended spare parts other than those specified.
6. Shop and field inspection reports.
7. Motor shop test results.
8. Recommendations for short and long-term storage.
9. Special tools.
10. Manufacturer's product data, specifications and color charts for shop painting.
_ 11. The latest ISO 9001 series certification.
12. Material Certification:
16445-1 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
a. Provide certification from the equipment manufacturer that the materials of
construction specified are recommended and designed for the service
conditions specified and indicated. If materials other than those specified are
proposed based on incompatibility with the service conditions, provide
technical data and certification that the proposed materials are recommended _
and designed for the service conditions specified and indicated including an
installation list of a minimum of five (5) installations in operation for a minimum
of five (5) years. Provide proposed materials at no additional cost to the
Owner.
b. Where materials are not specified, provide technical data and certification that
the proposed materials are recommended and designed for the service
conditions specified and indicated. _
B. A copy of the contract mechanical process, electrical and instrumentation drawings, with
addenda that are applicable to the equipment specified in this section, marked to show all
changes necessary for the equipment proposed for this specification section. If no changes are
required, mark all drawings with "No changes required" or provide a statement that no changes
are required.
1. Failure to include all drawings or a statement applicable to the equipment specified in
this section will result in submittal return without review until a complete package is
submitted.
C. A copy of this specification section with addenda and all referenced specification sections with
addenda, with each paragraph check-marked to indicate specification compliance or marked
and indexed to indicate requested deviations and clarifications from the specified requirements. _
1. If deviations and clarifications from the specifications are indicated, therefore requested
by the Contractor, provide a detailed written justification for each deviation and
clarification.
2. Failure to include a copy of the marked-up specification sections and or the detailed
justifications for any requested deviation or clarification will result in submittal return
without review until marked up specifications and justifications are submitted in a
complete package.
1.04 SPARE PARTS:
A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 01600.
B. Provide spare parts that are identical to and interchangeable with similar parts installed.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Permanently mark the capacity of the hoist and trolley on each hoist, in easy to read letters and
in a prominent position.
B. Provide only safety type hooks.
C. Provide hoists so that hook can reach the pump bail at the lowest level of the lift.
D. Do not use hoists for construction purposes of any nature.
E. Hoists shall be manufacturer's standard cataloged product and modified to provide compliance
with the drawings, specifications and the service conditions specified and indicated.
F. Welding: In accordance with American Welding Society Code D1.1.
16445-2 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
G. Provide shop tests as specified.
H. Hoisting equipment manufacturer shall provide hoists, motors, gear reducers, switches, and
controls regardless of manufacturer as a complete integrated package to ensure coordination,
compatibility and operation of the systems.
I. Services of Manufacturer's Representative as stated in Section 01600 and as specified herein.
J. Provide services of factory-trained Service Technician, specifically trained on type of equipment
specified:
1. Service Technician must be present on site for all items listed below. Person-day
_ requirements listed are exclusive of travel time, and do not relieve Contractor of the
obligation to place equipment in operation as specified.
2. Installation: Inspect grouting, location of anchor bolts; setting, leveling, alignment, field
erection; coordination of piping and electrical:
a. 0.25 person-days.
3. Functional Testing: Calibrate, check alignment and perform a functional test. Tests to
include all items specified.
a. 0.25 person-days.
4. Performance Testing: Field performance test equipment specified.
a. 0.25 person-days.
5. Vendor Training: Provide classroom and field operation and maintenance instruction
including all materials, slides, videos, handouts and preparation to lead and teach
— classroom sessions.
a. 0.25 person-days.
6. Credit to the Owner, all unused service person-days specified above, at the
manufacturer's published field service rate.
7. Any additional time required of the factory trained service technician to assist in placing
— the equipment in operation, or testing or to correct deficiencies in installation,
equipment or material shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Manufacturer of hoisting equipment shall have a minimum of five (5) operating installations with
hoists of the size specified and in the same service as specified operating for not less than five
(5)years.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with the requirements specified in Section 01600.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Hoisting equipment capacities and operating data are as indicated below.
"— 16445-3 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
2. Jib Crane - 4,000 lb capacity, 16-ft span, 12-ft height under boom, one position boom
lock, rotation motor with weathershield, control enclosure heater, bottom or top entry
current collector, 277/480-3-60 voltage.
3. Electric Chain Hoist - 4,000 lb capacity at 16 fpm, 34-ft lift with chain container,
motorized trolley at 30 fpm, weatherproof hoist and trolley with hoist heater and hoist —
cover, 3-motion pendant station with on/off.
2.02 HOIST AND TROLLEY MANUFACTURERS
A. Lodestar
B. Dresser Industries.
C. ACCO-Wright.
2.03 ELECTRIC HOISTS
A. Electric Hoists: Spur-gear driven antifriction bearings throughout, a mechanical load brake, and
a separate electrically operated motor brake. Design mechanical load brake with capability of
supporting the full load at any point when the motor is stopped. Motor brake shall be externally
adjustable, electrically operated friction disk brake that shall apply automatically when the
power is off. The brake shall hold 150 percent of the rated load and 125 percent of the rated
load at any operating speed. Design shafts of motor, drum, and drum pinion to run in grease-
lubricated ball or roller bearings. Design the mechanical-load brake and gear train and
bearings to be oil-bath lubricated.
B. Arrange hoist for parallel lug mounting from a 4-wheel geared trolley.
C. Provide hoist with right angle mounting with H-wheel trolley, motorized as specified and
indicated.
D. Hoist: Standard type.
E. Design drum with machine-cut grooves and guarded flanges and with capacity to take entire
run of cable in one layer with no overlapping.
F. Provide hoist with an upper and lower geared limit switch with automatic reset control circuit to —
prevent overtravel. Settings to be field adjustable in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.179.
G. Supply sufficient hoisting cable with hoists for two-part single reeving and to accommodate not —
only the maximum lift but two additional wraps on drum. Make cable flexible high-strength
plowsteel cable with a load safety factor of at least 5 to 1.
H. Make load block of rugged construction containing a ball-bearing sheave and a high-grade
forged-steel swivel hook with antifriction bearings.
I. Provide control equipment in an enclosed compartment which forms an integral part of hoist _
and include a transformer for a 120-volt control circuit.
2.04 TROLLEYS
A. Motor-Driven Trolleys: Four-wheel type consisting of a fully enclosed electric motor equipped
with a magnetic brake, a geared transmission completely enclosed in an oiltight housing and
suspended on flanged driving wheels with power to two wheels. Use ball or roller bearings
throughout.
16445-4 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
B. Make trolleys designed for operation on beam or rail indicated on drawings. Trolleys to be
provided by the hoist manufacturer.
2.05 JIB CRANE
A. Jib Crane Manufacturers:
1. Abell-Howe Model J-904.
2. ACCO-Wright.
3. CONTRX
B. Jib Crane: Vertical steel post of extra heavy steel pipe installed in a vertical position, with an S-
beam mounted at top of post and capable of revolving completely around it, and a trolley-type
hoist.
C. Base: Large diameter base plate with heavy steel gussets adequate to support crane with its
maximum load on hoist at extreme end of trolley beam.
D. Provide electric motor drive and controls to rotate jib crane.
2.06 SAFETY STOPS
A. Provide safety stops on all open ends of track (or where indicated) to prevent trolley from
-- running off ends or damaging building. Provide stops with capability of withstanding impact
imposed by motion of fully loaded hoist and trolley.
2.07 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
A. Supply complete integral electrical control system with the electric hoisting equipment (by hoist
manufacturer) consisting of starters, circuit breakers, overload relays, limit switches, control
transformer for a 120-volt control circuit, control relays, and controlling devices.
B. Furnish magnetic controls for motors. Design controls to permit "inching" in both forward and
reverse directions under full load, automatically regulated acceleration, and rapid brake
response.
C. Provide each hoist with limit switches of automatic-reset control circuit type to prevent
overtravel in both raising and lowering directions.
D. Compliance: Make all electrical equipment including motors, controls, resistors, brakes plus all
conduit, wiring, panels, and enclosures with applicable requirements for materials,
workmanship, construction, and installation of latest NEMA and National Electrical Code
Standards.
2.08 MOTORS:
A. Motors for Hoists and Trolley: Totally enclosed, reversible, induction motors especially adapted
to hoist service.
1. Enclosure: As indicated in the Hoist Schedule.
2. Insulation: Minimum Class "F" with Class "B" temperature rise, 40 degrees C ambient
unless otherwise indicated or specified.
3. Service Factor: 1.15.
4. Provide capacity to start and operate hoists at maximum speed rated capacity indicated
without exceeding nameplate ratings for current and power and without operating in the
service factor.
16445-5 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
5. Provide ball or roller bearings, in accordance with ABMA Standard 9 and Standard 11;
minimum L-10 life of 100,000 hours. —
6. Premium efficient motors, nominal and minimum motor efficiencies per NEMA MG1.
7. Rating: 277/480V, 3 ph, 60 Hz.
2.09 PUSHBUTTON CONTROL
A. Provide pendent pushbutton control station with sufficient pushbuttons to control all operations
of hoists, trolley and jib crane. Clearly mark each pushbutton to indicate its function. Make —
cable long enough to reach within 4 feet (1.2 meter) of operating floor or platform level with a
supporting chain. If necessary, attach an arm to hoist so that pendent cable and pushbutton
controls will hang vertically and be readily accessible from operating positions. —
B. Provide hoist with an upper limit switch of automatic reset control circuit type to prevent
overtravel.
2.10 SHOP PAINTING
A. Primer and Finish Paint: Shop apply to all exterior ferrous surfaces, high solids epoxy in —
accordance with Section 09961.
B. Surface preparation, mixing and application and safety requirements shall be in accordance
with the paint manufacturer's printed instructions and as specified. —
C. Ferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be given a shop applied coat of grease or
rust resistant coating. —
D. Provide additional shop paint coating for touch-up to all surfaces after installation and testing is
completed and equipment accepted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Install items in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and as indicated and
specified.B. Check horizontal and vertical alignment of track and rails.
C. Do not use cast fittings.
3.02 FIELD TESTING —
A. Provide as specified herein. Perform all tests with instrumentation controls and motor controls.
Perform testing in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1910.179 and as specified herein. —
B. After installation of jib crane and hoist equipment, and after inspection, operation, testing and
adjustment have been completed by manufacturer's field service technician, conduct test for
each hoist in presence of the Engineer and Owner to determine its ability to operate at rated
speeds and capacity under conditions specified and indicated. During tests, observe and
record, capacity and motor inputs. Promptly correct or replace all equipment not conforming to
the requirements of this section revealed by or noted during tests, at no additional cost to the _
Owner, and repeat tests until specified results are obtained. Contractor to provide all labor,
weights and materials for conducting tests.
16445-6 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
1. Provide a 60 minute test for each hoist.
2. Running test shall consist of moving hoist and trolley through two complete cycles. The
first cycle will be with no load. For the second cycle, the unit will be loaded with
100 percent of the specified load rating.
3. Test and simulate all limit switches, locking and safety devices.
C. Make all adjustments to place equipment in specified working order at time of above tests.
D. After three (3) unsuccessful testing attempts, remove and replace equipment at no additional
cost to the Owner with equipment that will meet all requirements specified and indicated.
3.03 FIELD TOUCH-UP PAINTING
A. After installation and testing, apply touch-up paint to all scratched, abraided and damaged shop
painted surfaces. Coating type and color shall match shop painting.
"** END OF SECTION
16445-7 Dry Run Creek Interceptor-60330823
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA
Department of Engineering
SECTION A- Definitions of Terms
SECTION B -Scope of work
SECTION C -Control of Materials and Work
- SECTION D - Procedure and Progress
SECTION E - Measurements and Payments
SECTION F - Legal Relations and Responsibility
SECTION A- DEFINITIONS OF TERMS
- 1. CITY. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, which is the Party of the F st Part of the
accompanying contract, acting through its authorized representative.
2. COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.
3. ENGINEER. The City Engineer of Waterloo, Iowa, or his authorized representative.
4. INSPECTOR. The authorized representative of the Engineer, assigner, to the detailed
inspection of the work or materials therefor and to such other duties as may be delegates; to him in these
specifications.
R 5. CONTRACTOR. The Party of the Second Part in the accompanying contract for the
improvement covered by these specifications, or his authorized representative.
6. SUBCONTRACTOR. Any person, firm, or corporation who has, with the approval of the
Council, contracted with the Contractor to execute and perform in his stead all or any part of the contract.
7. BIDDER. Any individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for a or a part of the
work provided for in these specifications.
8. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. The security designed in the Notice of Bidc.ers or Proposal
to be furnished by the bidder as a guarantee of good faith to enter into a contract and furnish an
acceptable bond for the work contemplated if it be awarded him.
9. SURETY. The corporate body bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable
performance of the contract.
10. PROPOSAL. The written Proposal, submitted by the bidder in the prescribed manner
and on the standard form, for the improvements covered by these specifications.
11. SPECIFICATIONS. The documents that set forth the manner in whim the proposed
work is to be accomplished which have been prepared by the Engineer and approved by :he City Council,
official copies of which are now on file with the City Clerk.
12. SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Clauses or memoranda not contained herein applying to the
contract of which these specifications are a part, which change or supplement these spec fications.
13. CONTRACT. The agreement entered into between the City and the Contractor, setting
forth the terms under which the work covered by the plans and specifications is to be performed. The
contract includes all conditions, definitions, and instructions set forth in the official publications relating to
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-1 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry R:n Creek Interceptor
the work, the official contract and specifications, the Proposal, official plans, and all supplemental
agreements entered into by the parties to the contract.
14. NOTICE TO BIDDERS. The notice called attention of bidders to the time and place for
receiving bids, containing a brief description of the work, and briefly setting forth the requirements and
conditions for submission of Proposals.
15. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The clauses setting forth in detail the information
relative to the proposed work and requirements for the submission of Proposals.
16. PLANS. The plans for the improvement covered by the specifications and approved by
the Council, official copies of which are on file with the City Clerk.
17. CONTRACT BOND. The bond executed by the Contractor and his surety in favor of the
City of Waterloo, Iowa, guaranteeing the complete execution of the contract in accordance with the plans
and specifications, the payment of all debts pertaining to the work, and maintenance of the work as
provided by law or by the specifications.
18. CONTRACT PERIOD. The period from the specified date for beginning the work to the
specified date of completion, both dates inclusive. The contract period may be extended by the Council,
as provided in these specifications, in which event the contract period includes the new date of
completion.
19. OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. The official publications are the formal resolutions and
notices relative to the proposed improvement that are required by law to be published in a prescribed
manner and that have actually been published in accordance with the statutes relating thereto. Attention
is directed to the fact that these official publications are by statute vested with all of the force and effect of
contract obligations.
20. A.S.T.M. Abbreviation for American Society for Testing Materials. -
21. WORK. The term "Work" of the Contractor and Subcontractor includes labor or materials
or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the contract.
22. TIME. All time limits stated in the contract documents are of the essence in the contract.
SECTION B -SCOPE OF WORK -
1. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS. The Contract documents are
complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention
of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper
execution of the work. Materials or work described in words which, so applied, have a well-known
technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standard.
2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Unless otherwise provided in the contract
documents, the engineer shall furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and
specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work.
The Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of all drawings and specifications on the work available to
the Engineer and to his representatives.
3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor
has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature, character and location of the work, the
conformance to the ground, the character, quality, and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the
character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work,
the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can, in any way, affect the work under this
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-2 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either
before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein
contained.
4. REPORTING ERRORS AND DISCREPANCIES. If the Contractor, in the course of the
work, finds any discrepancies between the plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors
of omission in plans or in the layout as given by said stakes and instructions, it shall be his duty to inform
the Engineer immediately, in writing, and the Engineer shall promptly correct the same.
— 5. ALTERATION OR CORRECTION OF PLANS. The plans are made up from surveys
that are presumably correct and represent the foreseen construction requirements. Any modification of
the plans which may be required by the exigencies of the construction or any corrections made necessary
because of errors in the original surveys, will be made by the Engineer. Should corrections or
modifications of the plans or specifications require a different quality or class of work than that upon which
the unit prices in the Proposal are based, or if the modifications or corrections are required in parts of the
work partially completed and such modifications result in an increased cost to the Contractor, the amount
-- to be paid for work resulting from such changes shall be agreed upon in writing at the time the changes
are ordered and before the work is begun by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for anticipated
profits on work not performed.
6. CHANGES IN THE WORK. The City, without invalidating the contract, may order extra
work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted
by agreement or arbitration before such changed work is undertaken. All such work shall be executed
under the conditions of the original contract, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby
shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change.
7. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES. The right is reserved without impairing
the contract, to order the performance of such work of a class not contemplated in the Proposal or to
increase or decrease the quantities as may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily
the work included in the contract. However, when the work is completed without change in the plans, and
the measured quantity of any item of work varies by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated
quantity specified in the contract, an adjustment in price may be made for such item of work by
agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, subject to the approval of the City Council. Either
party to the contract may request such an adjustment.
8. LANDS AND RIGHT OF WAY. The City shall provide the lands upon which the work
under this contract is to be done, except that the Contractor shall provide land required for the erection of
temporary construction facilities and storage of his material, together with the right of access to same.
9. CITY WATER. The Contractor shall be allowed to use City Water but before any water is
used, he shall make application to the Waterloo Water Works for a temporary water connection from a fire
hydrant or by some other connection method. Water usage will be charged at the rate for temporary
water service. The rules, regulations, and water rates are available at the Waterloo Water Works offices
at 325 Sycamore Street or their telephone number is 319-232-6280.
10. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever work being done by the City's forces or
by other Contractors is contiguous to work covered by this contract, the respective rights of the various
interests involved shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions of
the work in general harmony.
11. CLOSING STREETS TO TRAFFIC. The Engineer shall be the judge of how many
streets or parts of streets it is necessary for the Contractor to close at any time and may refuse to permit
the closing of additional streets until such of the work is finished and opened to traffic as he may direct.
12. OBSTRUCTION OF STREETS. The work is to be carried on in such manner as to
obstruct the streets, highways, and alleys as little as possible. The Contractor shall carry on the different
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-3 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
parts of the work so as to complete the whole, as nearly as practicable, at the same time. In doing the
work, the Contractor shall follow the directions of the Engineer as to the place or places where work shall
be started or be carried on and the direction in which it shall be done.
13. SHANTIES AND BUILDINGS. Shanties or other buildings shall not be erected in or
upon any street, highway, or alley without permission of the Engineer. If such permission be granted, it
may be upon any reasonable terms prescribed by the person or body granting such permission.
14. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary
conveniences, properly secluded, for the laborers on the work, and these shall be maintained in a manner
that will be inoffensive to the public.
15. CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer, remove from the
City's property and from all public and private property, at his own expense, all temporary structures,
rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operations before work can be considered completed.
The Contractor shall also renew or replace any and all fences, sidewalks, or other property damaged or
disturbed by his work.
16. OMISSION OF PARTS OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Parts of the General
Specifications deemed not to apply to some particular work may be omitted by special reference in other
parts of the contract documents.
SECTION C - CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND WORK
1. SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have supervision of the
construction provided for in this Contract and shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the m
quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, manner of performance, rate of progress
on the work, and all questions regarding the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. Materials
and construction work shall, at all times, be subject to the inspection of the Engineer or his
representatives. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of these specifications as regards
the quality of materials, workmanship, and the diligent prosecution of the work.
The Engineer and his representatives shall, at all times, have access to the work wherever it is in
preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for
inspection.
If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, law ordinances, or any public authority require
any work and/or materials to be especially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer
timely notice of readiness for inspection. If the inspection is to be made by authority other than the
Engineer, the Contractor shall notify the engineer of the date fixed for inspection. Inspections by the
Engineer will be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be
covered up without the approval or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be
uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense.
Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the work
must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract, the City
shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the
Contract, the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that the defect in the work was caused
by another Contractor, and, in that event, the City shall pay the cost.
2. AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS. Inspectors may be stationed on the m
work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being
performed; also, to report whenever it appears that materials furnished and work performed by the
Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the specifications and Contract, and to direct the attention of
the Contractor to such failure or infringement; but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from kr
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-4 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction that is satisfactory in
every particular.
In case of any dispute arising between the Inspector and the Contractor as to materials furnished
or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend
the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Inspectors are not
authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax, or release any requirements of these specifications. The
Inspector shall, in no case, act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the
management of the work by the latter.
3. STATUS OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer shall have general supervision and
direction of the work. He has authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to
insure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall also have authority to reject any work and/or
materials which do not conform to the specifications, to direct the application of forces to any portion of
the work as, in his judgment, is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, and to decide
questions which arise in the execution of the work.
4. ENGINEER'S DECISIONS. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, make
decisions on all claims of the Contractor and on all other matters relating to the execution and progress of
the work or the interpretation of the contract documents.
All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except as to the element of time and financial
consideration involved, which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, shall be subject to arbitration.
5. STAKES AND INSTRUCTIONS. The Contractor shall provide reasonable and
necessary opportunities and facilities for setting stakes and making measurements. The Contractor shall
not furnish stakes or men to set them. He shall not proceed until he has received from the Engineer such
stakes and instructions as may be necessary to the progress of the work.
The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points, and stakes, and in case of
. . willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting extra expense and shall be
responsible for any mistakes that may be caused, by their loss or disturbance.
6. SUPERINTENDENCE. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a
competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Engineer. The
Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer, unless the Superintendent
proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall
represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to
the Contractor. Important decisions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall
be so confirmed on written request in each case.
— The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work using his best skill and attention. He
shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other instructions, and shall report at
once to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission which he may discover.
7. REMOVAL OF UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Work done without lines and grade being
give, work done beyond lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein provided, or any extra or
additional work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and at the expense of the
Contractor and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered
removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense.
8. REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORK. The Contractor shall promptly
remove from the premises all materials condemned by the engineer as failing to conform to the Contract;
whether incorporated in the work or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute his
own work in accordance with the contract and without expense to the City, and shall bear the expense of
-- making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-5 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
If the Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable time, —
fixed by written notice, the City may remove them and may store the material at the expense of the
Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within a reasonable time
thereafter, the City may, upon ten (10) days'written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale
and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expense that should have
been borne by the Contractor; or, if the net proceeds of such sale are insufficient to pay the expenses of
removal, the City may deduct the balance from any amounts due the Contractor.
9. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, APPLIANCES, AND FACILITIES. Unless otherwise
stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light,
power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. —
Materials shall be of the quality specified for each particular part of the work.
Whenever, in construction of the work or in the manufacture of any article of appliance necessary
for the construction or operation of the work, it is necessary to use any material that is not fully specified —
in these specifications, it shall be of good quality and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer.
Any appliance that is necessary for the construction or operation of the work and is commonly —
recognized as a part of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor as part of the work, whether or not
it is specifically called for in the plans and specifications, and such appliance shall be of good quality and
standard make and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer.
10. MATERIAL SAMPLES. Before the contract is awarded, the bidder may be required to
furnish a statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any and all materials proposed for use
in the performance of the Contract, together with samples of the material. These samples will be —
considered as representative and typical of the material to be obtained from any particular source.
11. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall employ
competent and efficient workmen for every kind of work. Any person employed on the work who shall
refuse or neglect to obey the directions of the engineer or Inspector, or who shall be deemed incompetent
or disorderly, or who shall commit trespass upon public or private property in the vicinity of the work, shall
be dismissed when the Engineer so orders, and shall not be re-employed unless express permission be —
given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce discipline and good order among his
employees.
The methods, equipment, and appliances used on the work, and the labor employed, shall be
such as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to complete the contract within
the specified time limit.
12. HIRING CITY EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall not employ and hire any of the City's
employees without the permission of the Engineer.
13. LABOR. Local labor shall be given preferences so far as practicable. —
14. THE CITY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK. If the Contractor should
neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the City of —
Waterloo, after three (3) days' written notice to the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other remedy
he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or
thereafter due the Contractor, provided, however, that the Engineer shall approve both such action and
the amount charged to the Contractor. —
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-6 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
SECTION D - PROCEDURE AND PROGRESS
1. ORDER OF COMPLETION - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The Contractor shall
complete any portion or portions of the work in such order or time as the Engineer may require. The City
shall have the right to take possession of an use completed or partially completed portion of the work at
_ any time, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of work so taken or
used, or any part thereof. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall
be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine.
-- 2. WEATHER. During stormy or inclement weather, all work shall be suspended, except
such as can be done in an acceptable manner. Permission to work during freezing, stormy, or inclement
weather shall in no way be construed as a release of the Contractor's responsibility regarding the quality
of the finished work at such time.
3. SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS. Except for such work as may be required to
properly maintain or protect completed or partially completed construction or to maintain lights and
barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the
Engineer.
4. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME. If the Contractor be delayed in the completion of
the work by an act of neglect of the City, or its employees; or by any other Contractor employed by the
City; or by changes ordered in the work; or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delays in transportation,
unavoidable casualties, or any cause beyond the Contractor's control; or by delay authorized by the
.— Engineer pending arbitration; or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then the
time of completion shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer may decide will
compensate for such delay.
No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than thirty (30) days before claim
therefor is made in writing to the Engineer. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is
necessary.
This article does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party under provisions
in the contract documents.
5. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to suspend
the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary, due to
unsuitable weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of
the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure to the Contractor to carry out orders given or
to perform any or all provisions of the Contract.
6. NOTICES - HOW SERVED. Any notice to be given by the City to the Contractor under
this contract shall be deemed to be served if the same be delivered to the man in charge of any office
used by the Contractor or his foreman or agent at or near the work, or deposited in the post office,
postpaid, addressed to the Contractor at his last known place of business.
7. PROGRESS OF WORK. The progress of the work shall be such that, at the expiration of
one-fourth (1/4)of the contract period, one-eighth (1/8)of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of
one-half (1/2) of the contract period, three-eighths (3/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration
of three-fourths (3/4) of the contract period, the work shall be three-fourths (3/4) completed, and the
whole work shall be completed at the expiration of the contract period.
_ If, at any time the above schedule is not being maintained, the Council may give written notice to
the Contractor and his sureties that the specifications are not being complied with. Such notice shall
state what action on the part of the Contractor is required to bring the work within the requirements of the
specifications. If the Contractor fails, within ten (10) days, to proceed as directed in the said notice, then
the Council shall have authority to annul this contract without process or action at law and take over the
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-7 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
prosecution and completion of the work, as provided under the article covering City's right to terminate
contract.
8. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If the Contractor should be adjudged a
bankrupt; or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of this creditor; or if a Receiver should _.
be appointed on account of his insolvency; or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail,
except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough skilled workmen or proper
materials; or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor; or if he
should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer; or if he should _
otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then the City, upon the
certificate of the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any
other rights or remedy, and after giving the Contractor seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the —
employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and
appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such cases, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished.
If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expenses of finishing the work,
including compensation for additional managerial and administration services, such excess shall be paid
to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the —
difference to the City. The expense incurred by the City as herein provided and the damage incurred
through the Contractor's default shall be certified by the Engineer.
9. REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT. In the case of annulment of this contract before —
completion, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor, if notified to do so by the City; shall promptly
remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the City, failing which, the City
shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor.
SECTION E - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT
1. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENT. All work completed under the contract shall be
measured by the Engineer according to the United States standard measures.
2. SCOPE OF PAYMENTS. The Engineer's measurements of quantities shall be the basis —
for final payment for the work performed under this Contract. After the work is completed, the Engineer
will make measurements and computations of the number of units of each of the various items of work
completed, and the Contractor will be paid for the actual amount of work performed at the rates specified
in his Proposal. Before final settlement is made, the Council may require the Contractor to submit a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with evidence that such persons have been paid in full. Payment
shall be made in the manner set forth in official publications and Council Proceedings relative thereto.
3. PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK. Such extra work as may have been ordered by the —
Engineer and performed by the Contractor shall be compensated for as provided herein. If work is to be
done or materials are to be furnished by the Contractor which cannot properly be classified under unit
prices included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall be paid therefor the actual reasonable cost of the
labor and materials entering permanently in such work, plus fifteen percent (15%) of the cost thereof. In
computing the labor cost on such extra work, the following items shall be included:
(a) Actual payroll expenditures for labor at the current rate therefor, and cost of materials.
(b) Pay of foreman and timekeepers for actual time required on the extra work.
(c) Liability insurance, prorated, for the extra work.
Labor cost items on extra work shall be furnished in duplicate by the Contractor to the Inspector
daily. The Inspector shall check the items, and if he finds them to be correct, he shall so certify on the
statement of cost, returning one copy to the Contractor and filing one copy with the Engineer.
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-8 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
The Engineer shall determine the cost of materials entering into extra work from the materials and
-- receipted freight bills for the same.
For any special machine, power tools, or equipment, including fuel and lubricants, but not
including small hand tools, which may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be
allowed a reasonable rental thereon, to be agreed upon in writing by the Engineer before such work is
begun, and to which sum no percentage is to be added.
The item of cost shall not include repairs or replacement of equipment or overhead expenses of
any character. The fifteen percent (15%) allowed is considered to cover the use of hand tools and all
overhead expenses except liability insurance.
In no case will a claim for extra compensation be allowed unless the work upon which the claim is
based has been ordered in writing, except as provided hereinafter.
— 4. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. If the Contractor claims that any instructions, by drawings
or otherwise, involved extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof
within ten (10)days after completion of the work.
No such claim shall be valid unless so made.
5. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. If the Contractor deems that extra
-- compensation is due him for work and/or materials that he considered is not clearly covered in the items
for which he submitted unit prices in his bid and that were not ordered in writing by the Engineer as an
extra s heretofore provided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make
claim for extra compensation for work and/or material before starting construction. If such written
-' notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict
account of actual cost as defined herein, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for extra
compensation. Such notice to the engineer and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of cost as
�. aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim, which must be passed
upon by the Council. In the event that the Council finds the claim to be just, it shall be allowed and paid
for as extra work as provided herein.
—' 6. COMPLETION REPORT AND OBJECTIONS THERETO. Within ten (10) days after the
full completion of the work to be done under this contract, the Engineer shall make a written statement of
all the work done by the Contractor hereunder, stating the quantity of each item as found by him and
including a statement of all credits for extra work and all credits or debits for changes, alterations,
omissions, and defects, and shall forthwith deliver a copy of such statement to the Contractor. The
Contractor shall compare such statement with his own records and shall then, in writing, either approve
such statement or point out any claimed errors or omissions. If any of such claims are found correct, the
Engineer shall, within ten (10) days, prepare a new statement, a copy of which shall in like manner be
delivered unto the Contractor. The Engineer will not file a formal completion report with the City until the
Contractor has approved the same.
— If the figures of the Engineer and the Contractor cannot be reconciled, or there is a difference of
opinion regarding some item or items, then such difference of opinion shall be submitted to arbitration as
hereinafter provided, and the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and the Engineer shall,
within a period of five (5)days, file his completion report.
Before action by the City Council upon such completion report, the Contractor shall also file a
written statement of any claims he may have against the City, other than those shown by such completion
report, growing out of this contract or the work done hereunder. The City shall retain ten percent(10%)of
the amount due the Contractor on the completion report for a period of thirty (30) days. If no claims are
filed against the Contractor within thirty (30) days, the final ten percent (10%) shall then be paid to the
-- Contractor.
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-9 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
7. WAIVER. By the execution of this contract ,the Contractor agrees that any objections he
may have to the statement of the amount of work done hereunder included by the Engineer in this
completion report, and any claims of the Contractor against the City growing out of this contract and the
work done hereunder which are not stated in writing in the manner and within the time provided in Article
6, Section E hereof, shall be waived, and no such claim shall thereafter be asserted against the City.
SECTION F - LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
1. LAWS RELATING TO WORK. The Contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws,
ordinances, and regulations which may, in any manner, affect those engaged or employed upon the work
or the materials or equipment used in or upon the work, and shall conduct the work so as not to conflict ,
with such laws, ordinances, and regulations.
2. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. The Contractor for any part of the
improvement shall be held responsible for the care of materials and of partially completed and completed
work until final acceptance of the same by the Council. He will be required to make good at his own
expense any damage which the work may sustain from any cause prior to the filing of the engineer's
certificate of completion. He shall take all risk from floods and casualties of every description and make
no charge for delay due to such cause. He may, however, be allowed a reasonable extension of time on
account of such delays. He shall correct or make good at his own expense all damages to adjacent
property due to the acts or negligence of his employees of the prosecution of his work, and save the City
harmless therefor.
The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all damages done to water, sewer, drain,
or other underground pipes and structures, and to sidewalks and private property.
3. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
all damages sustained by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work until final acceptance
thereof, or until released by the Engineer in writing.
4. LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall carry liability insurance which shall save
the City harmless and protect the public and any person from injury sustained by the reason of the
prosecution of the work or the handling or storing of materials therefor, and said Contractor shall also
carry liability insurance which shall meet the requirements of the Iowa Worker's Compensation Law.
Before work shall be started on this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the City Clerk with
proper affidavit or Affidavits executed by representatives of duly qualified insurance companies,
evidencing that said insurance company or companies have issued liability insurance policies, effective
during the life of the contract, or for a period of a least ten (10) days following the filing of written notice of
cancellation, protecting the public and any person from injuries or damages sustained by reason of
carrying on the work involved in the Contract. The affidavit shall specifically evidence the following forms
of insurance protection:
(a) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by persons directly employed
by the Contractor.
(b) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by any Subcontractor to whom
a portion of the work may have been assigned.
(c) Public liability insurance covering all work upon the project performed by any =--
independent Contractor working under the direction of either the principal Contractor or a
Subcontractor.
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-10 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
(d) Motor vehicle bodily injury liability insurance and property damage liability insurance on
all motor vehicles employed on the work, whether owned by the Contractor or by other
persons, firms, or corporations.
(e) The minimum protection shall be as follows:
Comprehensive General Liability Insurance
General Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000.00
Products—Completed Operations
Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000.00
Each Occurrence Limit $ 2,000,000.00
Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance $ 1,000,000.00
The Contractor shall have the Owner, the City of Waterloo, Iowa, and the En qineer, AECOM,
named as "Additional Named Insureds." A certificate, or a policy if requested, shall he filed with the
Owner.
All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed with the City
Clerk shall include the name and address of the agency issuing the same. It shall also be required that
the City Clerk be notified by registered mail of the cancellation or expiration of the above insurance.
5. BARRICADES AND SIGNS. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without
further or other order, provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the
work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other
adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control
Devices for Streets and Highways" and shall provide, keep, and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as
may be required or as may be ordered by the City Engineer, to insure the safety of the public as well as
those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be approved by the City Engineer.
6. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees.
He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the City harmless
from loss on account thereof, except that the City shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular
process or the product of a particular manufacturer is specified.
7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS. Permits and licenses of a temporar✓ nature for the
prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, license, and easements
for permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the City.
8. CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Any claim for damages arising under this Contract shall be
made in writing to the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and no
later than the time of final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case :)f faulty work or
materials, and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration.
The Contractor shall be held for the payment of all just claims against him at sing out of the
prosecution of this contract, and his bond will not be released until such claims are paid fc,dismissed.
9. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sell or assigr the contract or
_ sublet any portion of the work provided for therein without the written consent of the City Council.
10. SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signature
of the contract, notify the Engineer in writing of the names of the Subcontractors propo:.-ed for the work
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-11 of 13 City of Waterloo
Al 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
and shall not employ any that the Engineer may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or
unfit.
The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omission of his
Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and
omissions of persons directly employed by him.
Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relation between any
Subcontractor and the City.
11. ARBITRATION. All questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be
submitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the dispute. _
The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration proceedings, except by
agreement with the Engineer.
The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the Engineer, in the case of an appeal
from his decision, within ten (10) days of its receipt, and in any other case, within a reasonable time after
cause thereof, and in no case later than the time of final payment, except as otherwise expressly _
stipulated in the contract. If the Engineer fails to make a decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to
arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the part appealing.
No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in any way financially interested in the
contract or in the business affairs of either the City or the Contractor.
The general procedure shall conform to the laws of the State of Iowa. Unless otherwise provided _
by such laws, the parties may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise, there shall be three--one named in
writing by each party to this contract to the other party, and the third chosen by these two arbitrators, or, if
they fail to select a third within ten (10) days, then he shall be chosen by the Comptroller of the State of
Iowa. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators with any papers or information
demanded in writing, the arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed ex parte.
If there be one arbitrator, his decision shall be binding; if three, the decision of any two shall be
binding. Such decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action, and, wherever
permitted by law, it may be filed in Court to carry it into effect.
The arbitrators, if they deem that the case demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose �-
contention is sustained such sums as they shall deem proper for the time, expense, and trouble incident
to the appeal, and, if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay, the arbitrators
shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and _
charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties.
The award of the arbitrators must be in writing, and it shall not be open to objections on account
of the form of proceeding or the award, unless otherwise provided by the laws of Iowa.
In the event of such laws providing on any matter covered by this article otherwise than as
hereinbefore specified, the method of procedure throughout and the legal effect of the award shall be _
wholly in accordance with the laws of the State of Iowa, it being intended hereby to lay down a principle of
action to be followed, leaving its local application to be adopted to the legal requirements of the place in
which the work is to be done.
12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS. The Contractor shall, at the time of
execution and delivery of this contract and before the taking effect of same, furnish and deliver to the City
written bonds of indemnity to the amount required by law in form and substance, and with surety thereon
satisfactory and acceptable to the City, to insure the faithful performance and payment by the Contractor
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-12 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
of all the covenants and agreements on the part of the Contractor contained in this contract. These
bonds shall remain in force and effect for the full amount of the Contract.
13. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the provisions of
the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted him thereby, there shall be no liability upon
_ the Engineer or his authorized assistants, either personally or as an official of the City, it being
understood that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the City.
14. JURISDICTION. Any action in Court against the Contractor or sureties on his bond
-- because of damages to property or individuals by said Contractor or his workmen, or because of the
violation of any provisions of the specifications, or on account of the failure of said Contractor to comply
fully with these provisions, shall be brought in the District Court of the State of Iowa in and for Black Hawk
County.
15. TERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY. The Contract shall be considered as completed
and the Contractor released from further obligations except as to the requirements of his bond, after the
-- work has been completed and finally accepted and final estimates have been allowed and the completion
report of the engineer has been filed and approved by the Council.
16. CITY'S LEGAL RIGHTS. The City shall not be precluded by any measurements,
estimate, or certificate made, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the work and
payment therefor, from showing the true amount and character of the work performed and materials
furnished by the Contractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue
or incorrectly made, or the work or materials do not, in fact, conform to the Contract.
The City shall not be precluded, notwithstanding any such measurements, estimate, or certificate
and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and his surety such damages
as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance
by the City or any of its representatives, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of
the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City, shall operate as a waiver on
any portion of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damages herein provided. A
waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach.
GENERAL SPECS Page GS-13 of 13 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION
1. SUBCONTRACTS
The contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the
work to require compliance by each subcontractor with the applicable provisions of the contract for
the improvements embraced in this contract.
2. REVIEW BY THE CITY OF WATERLOO
The City of Waterloo, its authorized representatives and agents, shall at all times have access to
and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel
records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining
to this contract, provided, however, that all instructions and approval with respect to the work will
be given to the contractor only by the City of Waterloo through its authorized representative or
agents.
3. INSPECTION
a. The contractor shall furnish promptly all materials reasonably necessary for any tests,
which may be required. All tests by the City of Waterloo will be performed in such manner
as not to delay the work unnecessarily and will be made in accordance with the provisions
of the Technical Specifications.
b. Inspection of materials and appurtenances to be incorporated in the improvements
embraced in this contract may be made at the place of production, manufacture or
shipment, whenever the quantity justifies it, and such inspection and acceptance, unless
otherwise stated in the Technical Specifications, shall be final, except as regards (1)
latent defects, (2) departures from specific requirements of the contract, (3) damage or
loss in transit, or (4) fraud or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. Subject to the
requirements contained in the preceding sentence, the inspection of materials as a whole
or in part will be made at the project site.
4. WARRANTY OF TITLE
No material, supplies, or equipment to be installed or furnished under this contract shall be
purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale, lease-purchase or other
agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier.
The contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment installed or
incorporated in the work and upon completion of all work, shall deliver the same together with all
improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the City of Waterloo
free from any claims, liens, or charges. Neither the contractor nor any person, firm, or corporation
furnishing any material or labor for any work covered by this contract shall have any right to a lien
upon any improvement or appurtenance thereon. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however,
shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor to recover under any bond
given by the contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to
look to funds due the contractor in the hands of the City of Waterloo. The provisions of this
paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions
shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered
into for such materials.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Page SGS-1 of 1 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
FORM OF CONTRACT
CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF
-- DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR
CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA
This contract made and entered into this day of 2015, by and
between the City of Waterloo, Iowa, a Municipal Corporation, (hereinafter referred to as City), and
Of (hereinafter
referred to as Contractor), WITNESSETH:
—' PAR. 1 Contractor agrees to build and construct the DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR and furnish
all necessary tools, equipment, materials,and labor necessary to do all the work called for in
the plans and specifications in a workmanship like manner and for the prices set forth in
Contractor's proposal, which was accepted by the City, and which is understood and agreed
to be a part of this contract.
PAR. 2 It is understood and agreed that the resolution adopted by the City Council ordering the
construction of the improvement, the Notice to Contractors as published, the Instruction to
Bidders, the Form of Proposal, the Construction and Maintenance Bonds, the Council
Proceedings relating to this matter, and the Plans and Specifications shall all be considered
as forming a part of the contract the same as though they were each set out in said contract.
PAR. 3 The Contractor agrees to furnish at its own cost and expense, all necessary materials and
labor for said work and to construct said improvements in a thorough, substantial, and
workmanlike manner, and in strict accordance with the requirements of this contract, and of
the plans and specifications made a part hereof by reference, and to the satisfaction and
approval of the City and its engineer.
PAR. 4 The Contractor agrees to perform said work and install said improvements on the terms set
out in bid or proposal to the City which has been accepted by the City and which is by
reference made a part of this contract.
— PAR. 5 The Contractor agrees to commence said work within ten (10) working days after receipt of
"Notice to Proceed" and complete it on or before unless an
extension of time is granted in writing by the Council of the City.
PAR. 6 Should the Contractor fail to complete said improvements in strict accordance with the terms
and conditions of this contract, or the plans and specifications therefor promptly by the date
herein specified, the City may pay such additional sums as it may be required to pay by
reason of the failure of said contractor and deduct any and all such sums from any amount
then due the Contractor.
PAR. 7 The Contractor agrees to comply with and obey all ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa,
relating to the obstruction of streets and alleys, keeping open passage ways for water, traffic,
and protecting any excavations in any street or alley, and maintaining proper and sufficient
barricades with lights and signals during all hours of darkness, to see that the backfilling is
-- properly done, and agrees to keep the City whole and defend any and all suits that may be
brought against the City by reason of any injuries that may be sustained by any person or
property allegedly caused by the Contractor, or his agents, while work is done pursuant to
this agreement.
PAR. 8 The Contractor agrees that in the event a law suit is brought against the City for damages
allegedly sustained by reason of any act, omission or negligence of the Contractor or its
agents, or on account of any injuries allegedly sustained by reason of any obstruction, hole,
FORM OF CONTRACT Page C-1 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
depression or barrier placed or dug by the defendant or its agents, in the doing of the work
herein contracted for, that it will defend said suit and save the City harmless therein, and in
case judgment is rendered against the City, the Contractor agrees to pay the same
promptly. The Contractor agrees to carry public liability insurance in a solvent company in a
sufficient amount to protect the City and those who use the streets of the City. _
PAR. 9 The City shall have the right to appoint one or more construction reviewers who shall review
the progress of the work in detail; also, to make any test or any material to be used in such
work. No material shall be used in any work until the same has first been approved by the '-
construction reviewer. Such construction reviewer shall have full authority to pass judgment
upon all materials and upon the manner of doing the work, and their judgment on rejecting
any materials, substance, or manner of work shall be final unless it is revoked or modified by _
the City Engineer.
PAR. 10 Any material, which has been rejected by the construction reviewer, shall be at once
removed from the line of work and shall not be again taken thereon or placed with the
material proposed to be used without the written consent of the City Engineer.
PAR. 11 The Contractor shall maintain no cause of action against the City on account of delays and
prosecution of work, but if said work is delayed by the City, the Contractor shall have such
extra time for completion of the job as was lost by reason of the delay caused by the City.
PAR. 12 The Contractor agrees to pay punctually all just claims of labor, material, men, or
subcontractors who shall perform labor or furnish materials entering into this improvement.
It is agreed that the City need not pay the Contractor until all such claims are paid by the
Contractor. It is agreed that the City shall not be liable for said labor, material, or men under
this contract.
PAR. 13 The Contractor agrees to furnish the City, simultaneously with this contract, a bond on a
form to be provided by the City in the amount provided by law as stated in the Notice to
Bidders, which shall be for the benefit of the City, and any and all persons injured by the '-
breach of any of the terms of this contract. Said bond shall be filed with the City Clerk and
shall be subject to the approval of the City Council, and is by reference made a part of this
contract. _
PAR. 14 The Contractor agrees that should it abandon work under this contract or cease the
prosecution thereof for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days without reasonable cause,
and should it fail to proceed with said work within ten (10) days after a notice to continue or
carry it on has been mailed to it at the address given herein by the City, or after such notice
has been served on it, then the City may proceed to complete said work, using any material,
tools, or machinery found along said line of work, doing the work either by contract or as it
may elect, and the Contractor and the sureties on its bond shall be liable to the City for the
costs and expenses so paid out. Said costs shall be retained by the City from any
compensation due, or to become due the Contractor, and may be recovered by the City in
an action upon Contractor's bond.
PAR. 15 In consideration of the full compliance on the part of the Contractor with all the provisions,
stipulations, and conditions hereof, or contained in the various instruments made a part of
this contract by reference, and upon completion and acceptance of said work, the City --
agrees to pay to the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Notice to Contractors, the
amount of money due the Contractor for work performed and accepted, at the unit prices set
out in the Contractor's proposal, which has been accepted by the City. _
PAR. 16 The total amount of the contract, based on the Engineer's estimates of quantities and the
Contractor's unit bid prices, and for which 100% surety bond is required, is
FORM OF CONTRACT Page C-2 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
PAR. 17 After the completion of said work, the Contractor agrees to remove all debris and cleanup
said streets, and to save the City harmless from any damage allegedly resulting from a
failure to clean up and remove the debris or put the street back in a proper condition for
travel.
PAR. 18 This contract is not divisible, but in the event of a conflict between this contract and the
various instruments incorporated by reference, this contract shall govern.
PAR. 19 Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this
— contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total
amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond,"and which bond must be
approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the
Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work.
PAR. 20 The Contractor shall maintain all work done hereunder in good order for the period of two(2)
years from and after the date it is accepted by the Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.
Said maintenance shall be made without expense to the City or the abutting property. In the
event of the failure or default of the Contractor to remedy any or all defects appearing in said
work within a period of two (2) years from the date of its acceptance by said Council, and
after having been given ten (10) days' notice so to do by registered letter deposited in the
United States Post Office in said town, addressed to said contractor at the address herein
given, then the City may proceed to remedy such defects. The costs and expenses thereof
to be recovered from the Contractor and the sureties on its maintenance bond by an action
brought in any court of competent jurisdiction.
PAR. 21 The Contractor shall give notice to said City by registered letter directed to the Mayor or City
Clerk/Auditor thereof not more than four (4) and not less than three (3) months prior to the
expiration of the term during which the Contractor is required to maintain said improvements,
in good repair by the terms of its Contract. The liability of the Contractor and of the sureties
on its bond for maintenance of the said improvements shall continue until three (3) months
after such notice has been given to the City, and, in any event, until two (2) years after the
acceptance of the work.
CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA
Mayor
City Clerk
Contractor
BY:
Title:
Approved by the City Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, this day of 2015.
ATTEST: City Clerk
Waterloo, Iowa
FORM OF CONTRACT Page C-3 of 3 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:
That we, of
(the"Principal"), and of
(the"Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Waterloo, Iowa (the"Obligee"), in th, penal sum of_
Dollars ($ ), lawful
money of the United States, for the payment of said sum in connection with a contract (the Contract") dated
on or about for the purpose of
_ The Contras is incorporated
herein by reference as though fully set forth herein.
Whenever the Principal shall be and is declared by the Obligee to be in default under the Contract, with the
Obligee having performed its obligations in the Contract, then the Surety, acknowledging teat time is of the
essence, may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly undertake to:
1. Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions; or
2. Obtain one or more bids for completing the Contract in accordance wi°h its terms and
conditions, and upon determination by the Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or
negotiated proposal, or, if the Obligee elects, upon determination by the Obligee and the
Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, arrange for a contract
between such party and the Obligee. The Surety will make available as work progresses
sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price. The
_ cost of completion includes responsibilities of the Principal for correction of defective work
and completion of the Contract, the Obligee's legal and design professional costs resulting
directly from the Principal's default, and liquidated damages or actual damages if no
liquidated damages are specified in the Contract. The term "balance of the Contract price" -
- means the total amount payable by the Obligee to the Principal under the 0ontract and any
amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by the Obligee to the Principal; or
3. Determine the amount for which it is liable to the Obligee and pay the Obligee that amount
as soon as practicable.
In the event this bond is enforced, Principal and Surety agree to indemnify Obligee and hold Obligee
harmless from and against any and all costs of enforcement, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys'
— fees and expenses.
Every Surety on this bond shall be deemed and held, any contract to the contrary notwithsta iding, to consent
to each and all of the following matters, without notice:
1. To any extension of time to the Contract in which to perform the Contract.
2. To any change in the plans, specifications, or Contract when such change does not involve
an increase of more than twenty percent(20%) of the total Contract price, And shall then be
released only as to such excess increase.
3. That no provision of this bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to less than
one (1) year from the time of the acceptance of the work the right to sue on this bond for
_ defect in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the Obligee at the time such
work was accepted.
If the Principal performs the Contract, then this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it s iall remain in full
force and effect. In no event shall the Surety's total obligation exceed the penal amount of tt is bond.
PERFORMANCE BOND Page PFB-1 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry F in Creek Interceptor
Terms used herein shall include, as appropriate, the singular or plural number, or the masculine, feminine or
neuter gender.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Principal and Surety have executed this Performance Bond as of ._.
PRINCIPAL SURETY
Name Name
By: By: —
Title: Title:
[attach Power of Attorney]
NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract.
If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND.
PERFORMANCE BOND Page PFB-2 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
PAYMENT BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that
(Name of Contractor)
- (Address of Contractor)
a hereinafter ::;ailed Principal,
(Corporation, Partnership or Individual)
and,
(Name of Surety)
(Address of Surety)
hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto
(Name of Owner)
(Address of Owner)
hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of
Dollars,($ ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of whii.h sum well and
truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these
presents.
- THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal enterE-d into a certain
contract with the OWNER, dated the day of , 2015,
a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of:
DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR
WATERLOO, IOWA
NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms,
SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of
the WORK provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including
all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment
and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such WORK, and all insurance
premiums on said WORK, and for all labor, performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or
otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety for value received hereby stipulates anc: agrees that no
change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to t)e WORK to be
PAYMENT BOND Page PB-1 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Fun Creek Interceptor
performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its
obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, '—
alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS.
PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall
abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied.
IN WITNESS HEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one
(number) —
of which shall be deemed an original, this the day of 2015.
ATTEST:
Principal
(Principal)Secretary
(SEAL) By (s)
(Address)
Witness as to Principal
(Address)
Surety
ATTEST: By _
Attorney-in-Fact
Witness as to Surety (Address)
(Address) (Address)
NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract.
If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. _
PAYMENT BOND Page PB-2 of 2 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Change Order Form
2. Soils Reports
CHANGE ORDER NO.
Owner City of Waterloo Date
Project Dry Run Creek Interceptor
Owner's Contract No. Contractor
Date of Contract Start $
You are directed to make the following changes in the Contract Documents. Description:
Reason for Change Order:
CONTRACT PRICE CONTRACT TIMES (Calendar Days)
To substantial To final
completion completion
Original: $ Original Completion Date:
Previous CIO's(ADD/DEDUCT):$ Previous CIO's(ADD/DEDUCT):
This C.O.(ADD/DEDUCT): $ This C.O.(ADD/DEDUCT):
Contract Price with all REVISED:
approved Change Orders: $
Revised Completion Date:
It is agreed by the Contractor that this Change Order includes any and all costs associated with or resulting from the change(s)
_. ordered herein, including all impact, delays, and acceleration costs. Other than the dollar amount and time allowance listed above,
there shall be no further time or dollar compensation as a result of this Change Order.
THIS DOCUMENT SHALL BECOME AN AMENDMENT TO THE CONTRACT AND ALL
STIPULATIONS AND COVENANTS OF THE CONTRACT SHALL APPLY HERETO.
APPROVED:
By:
OWNER(Authorized Signature) Date
ACCEPTED:
By:
-- CONTRACTOR(Authorized Signature) Date
AECOM, Inc.
60330823 /
Project Change
Number Order No.
CHANGE ORDER FORM Page CO-1 City of Waterloo
AECOM 60330823 City Contract No.877 Dry Run Creek Interceptor
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Dry Run Creek Interceptor
Waterloo, Iowa
AUgust 11, 2015
Terracon Project No 13155061.01
Prepared for:
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
Prepared by:
Terracon Consultants, Inc.
Ceda- Falls, Iowa
August 11, 2015
Irerracon
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
500 SW 7th Street, Suite 301
Des Moines, Iowa 50309
Attn: Mr. Ross Hillsman, P.E.
_ P: 515.323.7920
E: ross.hillsman{d}aecom.com
Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report
Dry Run Creek Interceptor
Waterloo, Iowa
-- Terracon Project Number: 13155061.01
Dear Mr. Hillsman:
Terracon Consultants, Inc. (Terracon) has performed the subsurface exploration and laboratory
testing and geotechnicai engineering services for the above referenced project. These services
were performed in general accordance with our proposal number P13150141, dated April 21,
2015. This report presents the findings of the subsurface exploration and provides geotechnical
recommendations concerning lateral earth pressures, excavations, subgrade preparation, and
the design and construction of foundations for the proposed project.
We appreciate the opportunity to be of service to you on this phase of your project, and look
forward to assisting you during the construction phase. If you have any questions concerning
this report, or if we may be of further service, please contact us.
_ Sincerely,
Terracon Consultants, Inc,
Nicholas L. Hussey, P.E. Jason P. Heinz, P.E.
-- Project Geotechnical Engineer Iowa No. 18345
Iowa No. 22844
Copies: PDF —Client
Terracon Consultants, Inc. 6612 Chancellor Drive, Suite 102 Cedar Falls, Iowa 50613
P [3191 277 4016 F [3191 277 4320 terracon.com
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
EXECUTIVESUMMARY.............................................................................................................i
— 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................1
2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION .............................................................................................1
2.1 Project Description...............................................................................................1
2.2 Site Location and Description...............................................................................2
3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS ........................................................................................3
-e 3.1 Subsurface Profile................................................................................................3
3.2 Groundwater Conditions ......................................................................................4
4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION......................................5
-' 4.1 Geotechnical Considerations ......................................................... .....................5
4.2 Excavations and Fill Placement and Compaction.................................................6
_ 4.2.1 Site Preparation........................................................................................6
4.2.2 Rock Excavation.......................................................................................7
4.2.3 Directional Drilling .............................................................. .....................8
4.2.4 Excavation Considerations................................................. .....................8
4.2.5 Fill Materials....................................................................... .....................9
4.2.6 Fill Placement and Compaction.......................................... ...................10
4.3 Foundations.......................................................................................................11
4.3.1 Spread Footing Design Recommendations ........................ ...................11
4.3.2 Foundation Construction Considerations................................................12
4.4 Lateral Earth Pressures .....................................................................................13
5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS...............................................................................................15
APPENDIX A— FIELD EXPLORATION
Exhibit A-1 Site Location Map
Exhibits A-2.1 & A-2.2 Boring Location Diagrams
Exhibit A-3 Field Exploration Description
Exhibits A-4 to A-12 Boring Logs
APPENDIX B — SUPPORTING INFORMATION
Exhibit B-1 Laboratory Testing
Exhibits B-2 to B-3 Laboratory Test Results
_ APPENDIX C — SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
Exhibit C-1 General Notes
Exhibit C-2 Unified Soil Classification System
Exhibit C-3 General Notes — Description of Rock Properties
Responsive m Resourceful z Reliable
Geotechnical Engineering Report 1rerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Geotechnical services have been performed for the lift station and approximately two miles of
interceptor sewer planned to be located south of East San Marnan Drive and C ossroads Mall,
between Kimball Avenue and Hess Road, in Waterloo, Iowa. Terracon's scope of services
included performing nine (9) borings to approximate depths of 3 to 40 feet below existing site
grades. Based on the project information and the results of the subsurface exploration, laboratory
testing, and our evaluations, geotechnical considerations for this project include the presence of:
o Existing fill and partly organic material
o Shallow groundwater and granular soils
o Shallow bedrock
Existing fill with organics and low strength soils were encountered in the 1'"t station area.
Removal of these materials will be required. Fill may be placed below thf! lift station on
suitable soil and the lift station bear within the new fill. Assuming proper subgra Je preparation,
- total and differential settlement should be within the estimated amounts.
Shallow groundwater was encountered in granular soils at the lift station site and other
- locations along the interceptor alignment. Contractors should expect to provide surface water
and groundwater control systems to facilitate construction.
Bedrock was encountered from about Alexandra Drive to Hess Road (Borings 6 to 8)at depths
of about 2 to 7.5 feet. Consideration should be given to performing additional probes or
excavation of test pits if a more accurate estimate of rock excavation quantities is desired.
Other than the partly organic soils encountered at some boring locations, the on-site soils
- generally appear suitable for reuse as fill above the interceptor and near the site surface at
the lift station site. A significant amount of drying of clays and some wetting cf sands should
be expected however, if on-site soil is used for fill and compaction requiremer is apply.
Terracon should be retained during the construction phase of the project to ol.serve and test
foundation subgrades and fill.
This summary should be used in conjunction with the entire report for design purposes. It should
be recognized that details were not included or fully developed in this section, and the report must
be read in its entirety for a comprehensive understanding of the items contained herein. The
section titled GENERAL COMMENTS should be read for an understanding of the report
limitations.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable I
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT
DRY RUN CREEK INTERCEPTOR
WATERLOO, IOWA
Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
August 11, 2015
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This report presents the results of the subsurface exploration and geotechnical engineering
services performed for the proposed lift station and interceptor sewer planned to be located south e
of East San Marnan Drive and Crossroads Mall, between Kimball Avenue and Hess Road in
Waterloo, Iowa. The purpose of these services is to provide information and geotechnical
engineering recommendations relative to:
subsurface soil and rock conditions dewatering considerations
groundwater conditions foundation design and construction
r excavation considerations lateral earth pressures
The geotechnical scope of services for this project included performing nine (9) borings to depths x
of about 3 to 40 feet below existing grades. A Site Location Map (Exhibit A-1), Boring Location
Diagrams (Exhibits A-2.1 and A-2.2), and logs of the borings (Exhibits A-4 to A-12) are included T
in Appendix A of this report. The results of the laboratory testing performed on soil samples
obtained from the site during the field exploration are included on the boring logs and in Appendix
B. Descriptions of the field exploration and laboratory testing are included in their respective -
appendices.
2.0 PROJECT INFORMATION
2.1 Project Description
- WW
Item Description
Site layout See Exhibits A-2.1 and A-2.2: Boring Location Diagram
We understand that a lift station consisting of multiple precast
concrete structures will be constructed adjacent to an existing
Proposed construction structure. An interceptor will be constructed utilizing cut and cover
and directional boring methods from the lift station to the east _
approximately 2.1 miles.
i
r
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 1
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 f Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
Item Description
Replacement manhole
a Rim elevation of 907.60 feet
Bottom elevation approximately 893.5 feet ( ,ssumed)
Wet well
Rim elevation of 907.60 feet
Im Bottom of well elevation of 880.00 feet
Valve vault
Lift station 19 Rim elevation of 907.60 feet
w Bottom of well elevation of 893.00 feet
Metering manhole
e Rim elevation of 906.90 feet
- V Bottom of well elevation of 896.00 feet
Air-release manhole
• Rim elevation of 906.70 feet
• Bottom elevation approximately 896 feet (assumed)
An excavation depth of about 30 feet below the existing grade is
anticipated for the lift station wet well and excavations about 10 to 12
Excavation depths I feet below existing grades are anticipated for the man-ioles and valve
vault. Excavations for the interceptor are anticipates to be about 6
--� to 18 feet below existing grades.
2.2 Site Location and Description
Item Description
The interceptor is planned from the intersection of k;:imball Avenue
Location and East San Marnan Drive, extending east to the sc>utheast side of
Crossroads Mall. Refer to Exhibit A-1.
Existing improvements Streets, underground utilities, traffic control structures, and ditches
Based on preliminary plan and profile drawings provided by ATS,
Existing topography surface elevations range from about 908 to 932 from <imball Avenue
to Hawkeye Road, and generally decrease to abou 845 feet near
_ Hess Road.
r.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 2
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
_
Dry Run Creek Interceptor *Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 %N Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
3.0 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
3.1 Subsurface Profile
Conditions encountered at each boring location are indicated on the individual boring logs.
Stratification boundaries on the boring logs represent the approximate location of changes in
material types; in situ, the transition between materials may be gradual or abrupt horizontally and
vertically. The following depths are approximate and are in reference to the grades existing at the time the borings were performed. Based on the results of the borings, subsurface conditions
can be generalized as follows:
Lift Station—Boring 1
Stratum Approximate Depth to Material Description Consistency/
Bottom of Stratum Relative Density
Existing Fill —Sand,
Surface 11 feet Sandy Lean Clay with varying N/A
amounts of organics, and
Possible Buried Topsoil
1 25.5 feet Sand, with varying amounts of Very Loose to _
clay and clay layers Medium Dense
2 28 feet Gravelly Sand, with clay Very Dense
40 feet Sandy Lean Clay, L
3 Very Stiff
(Bottom of Boring) with sand seams and layers
Interceptor Main—Borings 2 to 9
Approximate Depth to Consistency/
Stratum Bottom of Stratum Material Description Relative Density ..
8 to 16 inches
Surface (Borings 3, 4, 6 and 7) Existing Fill—Topsoil and N/A
5.5 feet Sandy Lean Clay, trace organics
(Boring 9)
1A 10 Sandy Lean Clay Very Soft to
(Boring 4) Medium Stiff
1 B 3.5 to 18 feet Sand Loose
(Borings 4, 5, and 9)
2 5 to 7.5 feet Sandy Lean Clay, Medium Stiff
(Borings 2, 3, and 6) with sand and silt seams and layers to Stiff —
Responsive a Resourceful w Reliable 3
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Dry Run Creek Interceptor >: Waterloo, Iowa Irerracon
August 11, 2015 Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
- ---..-_.__...
Interceptor Main—Borings 2 to 9
Stratum Approximate Depth to Material Description Consistency/
Bottom of Stratum Relative Density
3 i 7 to 20.5 feet Sandy Lean Clay,
(Borings 2 to 5, 8 and 9) with sand seams and layers Stiff to Hard
Sedimentary 3 to 20.5 feet z
Rock (Borings 6 to 8) Limestone, variably weathered N/A
1. Borings 2 through 5 and 9 terminated at planned depths of 20.5 feet below existing grades.
2. Borings 6 to 8 terminated in sedimentary rock. Penetrations of about 3.5 feet and 1 foot were
achieved in Borings 6 and 8, and auger refusal experienced at depths of 11 and 3 feet, respectively.
An auger penetration of about 13.5 feet was achieved in Boring 8, and the boring was terminated at
a planned depth of 20.5 feet.
3.2 Groundwater Conditions
The borings were observed for the presence of groundwater during drilling and sampling. The
boreholes were left open so delayed water level observations could be made. Following the
delayed observations, the borings were backfilled with on-site soils. The following groundwater
depths and elevations should be considered approximate. Groundwater levels of"servations are
summarized in the following table.
While Drilling/Sampling (feet) Delayed -6/25/2015(feet)
Boring No. — --
Depth Elevation Depth Elevation
- 1 10 897 -- --
2 0 915.5 0 915.5
3 11.5 919.5 1.5 929.5
4 3 875 0.5 877.5
5 0 870 0 870
6 0 863 None --
7 None -- None - -
8 0 845 0.5 844.5
9 18 829 18 829
These water level observations provide an approximate indication of the groundwater conditions
existing on the site at the time the observations were made. The absence of water in a borehole
in fine-grained soil does not necessarily mean the boring terminated above the groundwater level.
In lower`permeability' clay soils, a longer time may be required for a groundwater level to develop
and stabilize in a borehole. Longer-term observations using cased holes or piezometers, sealed
Responsive a Resourceful v Reliable 4
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Dry Run Creek Interceptor r Waterloo, Iowa 1rerracon
August 11, 2015 � Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
from the influence of surface water, would be required for a better evaluation of groundwater
conditions on this site.
The United States Department of Agriculture - Natural Resources Conservation Service (USDA
NRCS) Soil Survey of Black Hawk County, Iowa was reviewed for information relating to
anticipated seasonally high groundwater levels. Colo-Ely-Urban land complex (Borings 1 and 2) rn
and the Clyde-Floyd-Urban land complex (Borings 4 to 9) soils are reported to have apparent
seasonal high groundwater levels at the ground surface. The Kenyon-Urban land complex
(Boring 3) is reported to have a seasonal high groundwater level of about 4 feet below grade.
Fluctuations of groundwater levels will occur due to seasonal variations in the amount of rainfall,
runoff, the levels of creeks, and other factors not evident at the time the borings were performed.
Therefore, groundwater levels during construction or at other times during the lives of the lift
station and interceptor may be different than the levels indicated on the boring logs. Also, trapped
or "perched" water could be present within sand or silt seams overlying and/or within lower
`permeability' clay and bedrock. The possibility of groundwater level fluctuations and perched
water should be considered when developing the design and construction plans for the project.
4.0 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
4.1 Geotechnical Considerations
Based on the project information and results of the subsurface exploration, laboratory testing, and
our evaluations, geotechnical considerations for this project include the presence of:
a Existing fill and partly organic materials
s, Shallow groundwater
r Shallow bedrock
Existing fill was encountered in the lift station boring and is present along the majority of the
proposed main alignment. The majority of existing fill contained some amounts of organics.
Reuse of these materials as fill should be evaluated throughout construction. It does not appear
that these materials will be encountered below the bases of the replacement manhole, wet well,
and valve vault. Removal of organic material may be required however, below the bases of the
metering and air release manholes. If existing fill is encountered below foundations, the fill
material should be removed and replaced with properly compacted fill. Consideration should be
given to the potential for overexcavation below the metering and air release manholes to remove
partly organic materials in the shoring and dewatering system designs performed by others.
Coarse-grained/granular soils were encountered in the lift station boring at about 11 feet, and in
Borings 4, 5, and 9 for the interceptor. Groundwater was encountered about 10 feet below the
s63'4 '.,1g`u� r * r a ti rLki ? 5
Geotechnical Engineering Report IrerraconDry Run Creek Interceptor Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
existing grade at the lift station site and near the surface at Borings 4 and 5. Groundwater was
also observed at or near the site surface where clay soils were encountered in Borings 2 to 4, 6,
and 8. Excavation below groundwater in granular soils is anticipated at the lift station site and
should be anticipated in some areas of the interceptor alignment. Pre-draining and dewatering
sites with shallow groundwater will be important for this project. Consideration should be given
to excavation of test pits near the time of construction to evaluate the amount of groundwater
removal required.
Limestone bedrock was encountered in Borings 6, 7, and 8 (project stations 129-50 to 170+00)
at depths of 7.5, 2, and 7 feet, respectively. The limestone encountered in Boring 8 was
considerably more weathered and broken than the limestone encountered initially in Borings 6
and 7. It appears that the invert of the main will be near the bedrock surface at Borings 6 and 8,
and about 4 feet into bedrock at Boring 7. Refer to section 4.2.2 Rock Excavation, for additional
commentary regarding rock excavation.
4.2 Excavations and Fill Placement and Compaction
4.2.1 Site Preparation
Topsoil, vegetation, existing fill, soft/very loose soil, disturbed, and any otheruvise unsuitable
- materials should be removed from the construction areas. Based on the results )f Borings 3, 4,
6, and 7, partly organic thicknesses of about 8 to 16 inches may be anticipated. Partly organic
material was encountered to a depth of about 5.5 feet at Boring 9 and possible bu ied topsoil was
encountered in Boring 1 to a depth of about 11 feet below the existing grade. A Distinct organic
layer was not encountered at the surface of Borings 2, 5, and 8.
After the removal of unsuitable materials, and prior to the placement of fill and foundations, the
subgrade should be evaluated by qualified personnel. Subgrade evaluations Should include
_ probes and strength and density testing, where appropriate. If low strength, ow density, or
disturbed soil/material is present, it should be overexcavated or compacted prior tc the placement
of fill, pipe, or foundations.
Dewatering should be anticipated for lift station and interceptor construction. A series of wells will
be required to control groundwater levels during lift station construction. Sump pits and pumps
should be adequate for dewatering limited excavations in clay soils, but more extensive
dewatering measures, such as well points and sheeting, could be required for excavations
extending into sand.
Sites should be graded to prevent water from ponding on prepared subgrades and in excavations.
Excessive moisture can significantly reduce the support capability of soil and contribute to soft
subgrades and settlement. Water that accumulates on bearing subgrades should be removed as
soon as possible. If a subgrade should become frozen, desiccated, saturated, or disturbed, the
affected material should be removed, or scarified, moisture conditioned, and compacted prior to
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 6
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
_
Dry Run Creek Interceptor s,Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 % Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
further construction. It is important to note that the soil types observed in the borings are easily
eroded by surface water, so appropriate erosion control measures should be provided.
4.2.2 Rock Excavation
Auger refusal occurred after penetrations of about 1 to 13.5 feet in Borings 6 to 8. Auger refusal
generally indicates the presence of harder and/or higher quality rock in the boring. However, it is
our experience that very poor to poor quality rock,which is broken and contains voids, clay, and/or
sand, may be present below the auger refusal depth within the Cedar Valley Group. Harder and
subsequently slower rock excavation can result on the upper surface of discontinuous bedrock
(A), slabs of less weathered rock suspended in the residual soil matrix or"floaters"(B), in widened
joints that may extend well below the surrounding bedrock surface (C), on rock "pinnacles" (D)
rising above the surrounding bedrock surface, or on the upper surface of continuous bedrock(E).
These possible rock conditions are illustrated in the adjacent figure.
Due to these features, estimating the AUGER REFUSAL ILLUSTRATION
exact quantity of rock excavation is
difficult. Linear interpolation of XISTING GROUND
apparent bedrock elevations based A B C D E
upon the boring data is often used but w
can misrepresent actual rock removal
quantities where such anomalies
NATURAL
exist. To minimize the potential for SOIL
rock excavation "extras", we suggest
the contract be bid as "unclassified"
excavation. The contractor should be
provided with the data in this report _
and allowed to perform any additional —
exploration or studies necessary to —`—
develop his/her bid. If the final grading
and utility plan, along with our boring —�—
data, suggests that significant rock _
excavation may be encountered, — ` *RFEDROCK
additional exploration consisting of
rock probes can be performed to
THIS FIGURE IS FOR ILLUSTRATIVE PURPOSES ONLY AND DOES NOT
further delineate the rock surface. NECESSARILY DEPICT THE SPECIFIC BEDROCK CONDITIONS AT THIS SITE
We anticipate that it will be possible to rip the limited upper weathered and broken zones of
bedrock, that were penetrated with our augers, with a large dozer equipped with a suitable rock
ripper. Beneath the practical auger refusal depths, hammering or blasting may be more efficient.
It should be noted that the rippability of rock is more dependent on the type and size of the
equipment used, the fracturing or quality of the bedrock, and the amount of effort expended, than
it is on the type of rock.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 7
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerralcon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor of Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 , Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
4.2.3 Directional Drilling
We understand horizontal directional drilling (HDD) will be used for some of the interceptor
construction. Based on the subsurface conditions encountered and our experiE nce, horizontal
boreholes may encounter variable existing fill, waterbearing sand and silt, glacia clay with sand
seams and layers and cobbles and boulders, and variably weathered bedrock. Fine-grained soils,
fine-grained sand, and competent sedimentary bedrock formations are generally considered
suitable for installation using directional drilling. However, due to the presence of zones of coarse
and harder materials and very poor quality bedrock, somewhat difficult drilling conditions could
be encountered at some HDD sites. Abrupt changes in density and/or hardness of subsurface
materials can cause drilling to advance at a slower rate and the potential for the drill bit to `skip'
and/or `wander' should be considered. Care should be taken to maintain the drill bit at intended
- elevations so that significant sags and crests are not present in the interceptor. Pressures within
the boreholes should be monitored and maintained, and drilling fluid/mud should be monitored to
prevent soil fracture or excessive material removal that could cause settlement and affect existing
improvements.
As mentioned previously, groundwater was encountered in granular soils. Some difficulties
related to waterbearing sand and silt may be encountered. Waterbearing sand and highly
weathered and broken rock can `flow', run, and may `blow-in' during drilling. Partial to complete
- loss of drilling fluid near and within bedrock should also be anticipated. The contractor should be
made aware of these potential conditions. Techniques for ground stabilization (i.e., chemical
grouting or pressure grouting) could be considered along the proposed alignment.o help stabilize
surrounding materials in critical areas and to decrease the risk of excessive settlement. Care
should be taken during casing installation and boring to prevent excessive removal of soil and/or
rock that would result in settlement and/or affect the integrity of overlying and adjacent
improvements. We recommend that the contractor chosen to perform the proposed construction
have experience constructing similar size underground piping in similar subsurface conditions.
The preceding paragraphs provide a discussion of the subsurface conditions, and general
considerations and recommendations for the proposed construction. Specific recommendations
- regarding design and construction of pits for the drilling equipment and personnel, and specific
design or construction procedures for the drilling are not part of our scope of service for this
project. Specific recommendations for design or construction could be provided upon request,
but should be developed in cooperation with the contractor(s).
4.2.4 Excavation Considerations
All excavations should comply with the requirements of OSHA 29CFR, Part 1926, Subpart P,
"Excavations" and its appendices, as well as other applicable codes. This document states that
_ the excavation safety is the responsibility of the contractor. Reference to this OSHA requirement
should be included in the project specifications. Slope heights, slope inclinations and/or
excavation depths should in no case exceed those specified in local, state or federal safety
- regulations, including current OSHA excavation and trench safety standards. Flatter slopes than
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable g
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 a Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
anticipated may be required and would depend on the conditions encountered. Classification of
the soil types presented in this report is based on the materials encountered in these borings.
The subsurface materials and conditions will vary between the borings and/or other unexplored —
locations across the site. The contractor should verify that similar conditions exist throughout
excavation areas. Where an excavation is planned to extend to a depth greater than 20 feet, side _
slopes and/or bracing must be designed by a professional engineer according to OSHA
regulations. Vehicles should be kept at least the distance equal to the depth of the trench from
the crest of excavation slopes to prevent slope failures and ensure safe working conditions. —
A `quick' condition, or `boiling', can result in an excavation extended near or below the
groundwater level. Excavation below the groundwater level can significantly reduce the support
capability of bearing soils and cause settlement of adjacent ground. The contractor should
implement dewatering activities to lower and maintain the groundwater level during construction
at least 2 feet below the lowest excavation level anticipated. Consideration should be given to
the potential for overexcavation in areas where lower strength and/or unsuitable soils are present.
The potential impacts of traffic loads and vibrations on the proposed construction, including the
risk of cave-in or erosion of soils during excavations and drilling operations, should be considered
when determining construction methods. Consideration should be given to performing pre—
construction surveys of existing improvements in the vicinities of construction areas, including
photographic and/or video documentation, prior to excavation and rock ripping or blasting.
Vibration monitoring should also be performed for existing improvements considered critical or
vibration sensitive. Disturbed or blasted material below design grades should be compacted as
recommended in this report, or removed and replaced with properly compacted fill.
4.2.5 Fill Materials
Fill should consist of approved materials that are free of organic matter and debris. Frozen —
material should not be used, and fill should not be placed on a frozen subgrade. The non-organic,
low plasticity soil/materials encountered in the borings are considered suitable for reuse above
the interceptor pipe and above the lift station bases. Low plasticity material would have a liquid —
limit of 45 or less and a plasticity index of 23 or less. Use of fine-grained material for wall backfill
should be approved by the designer. It is preferable to use relatively clean granular fill to backfill
excavations made below pavements and in confined areas where larger compaction equipment
cannot be operated. The use of granular fill in excavations below pavements would reduce the
potential for settlement. The effects of backfill settlement should be given consideration. We do
not anticipate that the soils encountered in the borings will be used for fill below the lift station
structures or the interceptor.
If broken bedock is developed as spoils from utility excavations, this material could potentially be
used as fill, but can be difficult to satisfactorily utilize. Segregation of this type of material during
handling and transport is likely to occur. Rock fragments should be broken down to sizes less —
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 9
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor a Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 P Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
than 6 inches. If effective blending is not performed, pockets of cobble sized fragments can cause
a long term settlement problem due to migration of adjacent fines into the voids c' the rock fill.
Appropriate laboratory tests, including Atterberg Limits forfine-grained soils, orgar is content tests
for dark colored soils, and standard 'Proctor' (ASTM D 698) tests should be p I rformed on fill
materials prior to delivery and use at the site. Further evaluation of on-site and off-:.ite fill materials
should be performed by Terracon and/or ATS prior to delivery and use.
4.2.6 Fill Placement and Compaction
Item Description
■ 9 inches or less when heavy, self-propel ed compaction
Maximum equipment is used
loose, fill lift thickness ■ 4 to 6 inches when hand-guided equipment (i.e. jumping
jack or plate compactor)or a 'head shaker' is used
■ 98 percent
o Beneath wet well, valve vault, and manhole bases
c Within 2 feet of pavements
Minimum m 95 percent
compaction requirements ' 2 o Above the metering and air relaease r anhole bases
c More than 2 feet below pavements
■ 92 percent
c Around and above pipes in non-critical areas
Moisture content range ® Low plasticity, fine-grained: -2 to+3 percent
from optimum ' N Coarse-grained/granular: -3 to+3 percent
1. As determined by the standard `Proctor' test (ASTM D 698).
2. If the granular material is a coarse sand or gravel, or of a uniform size, or has a lour fines content,
compaction comparison to relative density maybe more appropriate. In this case, gra iular materials
should be compacted to at least 70percent relative density(ASTM D 4253 and D 4254).
3. Moisture conditioning of on-site soils/materials should be expected to achiere compaction
requirements of 95 and 98 percent.
- Interlayering of granular and fine-grained materials should be avoided. This could result in
perched groundwater and loss of subgrade support. If coarse-grained material is placed above
fine-grained material, the fine-grained subgrade should be sloped to promote drainage.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 10
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor %Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
4.3 Foundations
4.3.1 Spread Footing Design Recommendations
Description Value
Wet well base elevation: 880 feet
o Minimum of 24 inches of crushed stone, over
• Very stiff, Sandy Lean Clay
Replacement manhole base elevation: 893 feet
Minimum of 24 inches of granular fill, over
Loose Clayey Sand, or _
Anticipated Properly compacted, granular backfill for the wet well
lift station bearing elevations a Valve vault base elevation: 893 feet
and suitable bearing materials Minimum of 24 inches of granular fill, over
Loose Clayey Sand, or
Properly compacted, granular backfill for the wet well
* Metering and Air-release base elevations: 896 feet
o Minimum of 24 inches of granular fill, over
o Loose Clayey Sand, or
o Properly compacted, granular backfill for the wet well
---------- - --
Replacement manhole: 2,000 psf
Wet well: 5,000 psf
Net allowable bearing pressure'
n Valve vault: 2,000 psf —
Metering and air-release manholes: 2,000 psf
Minimum dimensions in 30 inches
a Total: 1'/� inches max.
Estimated settlement s
Differential: 2/3 of total
1. The recommended net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum
surrounding overburden pressure at the foundation base elevation. Assumes any unsuitable soil
will be removed and replaced with properly compacted granular material or suitable cementitious
material.
2. Total settlement was estimated using a maximum footing size of 15 feet by 15 feet. The foundation
settlement will depend on the variations within the subsurface profile, the structural loading
conditions, the rigidity of the foundation, and the quality of construction operations.
Subsurface structures below groundwater levels are subjected to uplift forces. Uplift and _
buoyancy forces may be resisted by the effective dead weight of the structure and by the effective
weight of the material placed above base slab extensions. A backfill unit weight of 120 pcf above
the maximum groundwater level and 55 pcf below the groundwater level may be used for _..
l spo s!}e Rasc,�rcefuk f Reliable 11
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor r�Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
foundation designs. The effective weight of the soil prism defined by a plan.. extending up
vertically from the perimeter of the foundation can be included in uplift resistance
4.3.2 Foundation Construction Considerations
Foundation excavations should be observed by Terracon. If the soil conditions encountered differ
significantly from those presented in this report, supplemental or alternate recommendations
could be required. Loose, clayey sand is anticipated to be present at the base of the deeper lift
station excavations. Partly organic material may be present at the base of the structures planned
to be founded near approximate elevation 896 feet.
Prior to the placement of fill below structures and concrete, sand at the base of the excavation
should be compacted in place. Compaction should not be attempted if ground\A ater is within 2
feet of the excavation bottom. Where very loose, disturbed or unsuitable bearing soils/materials
are encountered in an excavation, the excavation should be extended deeper to suitable soil and
the footing could bear directly on the soil at the lower level or on properly compacted fill extended
down to the suitable soil. The footing could also bear on lean concrete or controlled low strength
material (CLSM) placed in the excavation. Overexcavation for backfill placement below a footing
should extend laterally beyond all edges of the footing at least 8 inches per foot of overexcavation
depth below the `design footing level'. Lateral widening is not required for overexcavations
backfilled with lean concrete. The overexcavation and backfill procedures are illustrated in the
following figures.
Design 2/30 W 2/3D Design �'v
Footing Level ,t.__ Footing Level .`____.._._..
COMPACTED
STRUCTURAL D LEAN
FILL CONCRETE
Recommended Recommended
Excavation Level Excavation Level ?
Overexcavation / Backfill Lean Concrete Backfill
NOTE:Excavations in sketches shown vertical for NOTE.Excavations in sketches shown vertical for
convenience.Excavations should be sloped as convenience.Excavations should be sloped as
_ necessary for safety necessary for safety.
The base of all foundation excavations should be free of water, disturbed materials, and very
loose and soft soils prior to the placement of reinforcing steel and concrete. If groundwater is
encountered at the time of foundation construction, it should be lowered and controlled to a
minimum depth of 2 feet below the excavation elevation. Should the material at the bearing level
become disturbed, the affected material should be compacted or removed prior to concrete
placement. Concrete should be placed as soon as possible after excavation to reduce the
potential for disturbance of bearing soils/materials.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 12
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor 7,Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 %t Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
4.4 Lateral Earth Pressures
Reinforced concrete walls of the lift station structures will be subjected to unbalanced backfill
levels on opposite sides and should be designed for earth pressures at least equal to those
indicated in the following table. Earth pressures will be influenced by structural design of the
walls, conditions of wall restraint, methods of construction and/or compaction, and the strength of
the materials being restrained.
The "at-rest" condition assumes no wall rotation and should be used for walls restrained from
movement. The surcharge components apply where drives, surface parking or other loading will
be applied adjacent to the below grade walls. The recommended design lateral earth pressures
do not include a factor of safety, and do not include hydrostatic pressure on the walls.
S = Surcharge
TS For at-rest pressure
- No Movement Assumed
Horizontal
Finished
Grade ---- ------
H
Horizontal
Finished Grade
-- —
--p2-- /—pi—�) ___-Retaining Wall
At-Rest Earth Pressure Coefficients - Above groundwater level
_____.. .. _..,... ._.--------- - r_...-.-- --------- -_-
Equivalent Surcharge Earth
Earth Coefficient for Fluid Pressure Pressure M
Pressure Backfill Type Pressure Pi P2
Condition yp
(pcf) (pcf) (psf)
Relatively Clean, Crushed stone—0.44 55 (0.44)S (55)H
At-Rest
(Ko) I Clayey Sand /Sandy Lean Clay—0.56 70 (0.56)S (70)H
Lean Clay-0.63 80 (0.63)S (80)H
1.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 13
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor Waterloo, Iowa
- August 11, 2015 Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
- At-Rest Earth Pressure Coefficients - Below groundwater level
Equivalent Surcharge Earth
Earth Coefficient for Fluid Pressure Pressure
Pressure
Condition
Backfill Type Pressure Pi Pz
(pcfl (pcfl (psfl
At-Rest
Relatively clean, Crushed Stone-0.44 90 (0.44)S (90)H
Clayey Sand /Sandy Lean Clay-0.56 i 95 (0.56)S (95)H
(Ko) Lean Clay0.63 100
_ __.._.. (0.63)S (100)H
Passive Earth Pressure Coefficients
Earth Equivalent Surcharge Earth
Coefficient for Fluid Pressure Pressure
Pressure i
Condition i Backfill Type Pressure Pi P2
(pcf) (pcf) (pSf)
TRelatively clean, Crushed Stone-3.54 440
Passive
Clayey Sand /Sandy Lean Clay-2.56 320 - -
(KP) Lean Clay-2.20 275 - -
- Conditions applicable to the preceding values include:
a For passive earth pressure, wall must move horizontally to mobilize resistance
a Uniform surcharge, where S is surcharge pressure
a In-situ, backfill weight a maximum of about 125 pcf
n Horizontal backfill, compacted to at least 95 percent of the ASTM D 698 maxirr um dry density
value
a No loading from heavy compaction equipment included
a No hydrostatic pressure acting on wall above the groundwater level
a No safety factor included
Ignore passive pressure in frost zone
Backfill placed against below-grade structures should consist of granular material or low plasticity,
fine-grained material. Use of fine-grained material for wall backfill should be approved by the
designer. For the granular values to be valid, the granular backfill must extend out and up from
the base of the wall at an angle of at least 45 and 60 degrees from vertical for the at-rest and
passive cases, respectively. To calculate the resistance to sliding, a value of 0.32 can be used
as the ultimate coefficient of friction between a concrete footing and loose, clayey sand. An
ultimate coefficient of friction value of 0.45 may be used if at least 2 feet of crushed stone is
_ provided immediately below the concrete footing.
Construction equipment should not operate within a distance closer than the exposed height of
the walls to prevent lateral pressures greater than those provided.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 14
Geotechnical Engineering Report
Dry Run Creek Interceptor a Waterloo, Iowa Irerracon
August 11, 2015 w Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
5.0 GENERAL COMMENTS
Terracon should be retained to review the final design plans and specifications so comments can
be made regarding interpretation and implementation of our geotechnical recommendations in the
design and specifications. Terracon also should be retained to provide observation and testing —
services during grading, excavation, foundation construction and other earth-related construction
phases of the project.
The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained
from the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this _
report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur between borings, across the site, or
due to the modifying effects of construction or weather. The nature and extent of such variations
may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, we should be ._
immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be
provided.
The scope of services for this project does not include either specifically or by implication any
environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or
prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the
potential for such contamination or pollution, other studies should be undertaken.
This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of our client for specific application to the
project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical
engineering practices. No warranties, either express or implied, are intended or made. Site
safety, excavation support, and dewatering requirements are the responsibility of others. In the
event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are
planned, the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered
valid unless Terracon reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this
report in writing.
I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or
under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed
� .- Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa.
xAA
A WINx
�.o son Patrick Heinz, P.E. D to
My license renewal date is December 31, 2016.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 15
APPENDIX A
FIELD EXPLORATION
w Q
Skyvir,w Rd � tz Fri tilnol
cr
Z
z
V Of
' BEveims Rd M
y ,. BfeSt .
d+ Bishop Ave 0
C1 Q U
O O
fa'� W of
W
dj
LU
Z >
e Hess Pd (n
La
'5
47
4c "aammri-,nd Av lianwnond Ave,
tj
w 9th St ; a
r W m
r
JbA v
' N
f
fz,t U c m
�v W
% O t Blvd
N.P.
c N a_
Lf
o v? Q o
Q r
= N
iE:V f a CD Z O N
yhr sUgsuy 'P er AnSbtWWgfi Ave o ' n
'4 z M E c7
d
a in o
'Ir 2 2 LL= 2
EL a
Z Z
� � a
3 0
Ply Eo
Ilk Dr & tt L Hoff R� d o` ¢
7
L; u?
F 0
Greyhound <o N
00
U w
w p
�Za
w�
Cedas Heights Llf �z a
H. Cedar Heights T7�4`. 0U' ZO
LL
.vnd St M¢z
0 J O
QO
L o
- \ 04
� ®
�
< U
w
p LLJ <
4
o z \
» < Lu §Of
_
O ƒ
U \
.... O 2 —
`
\3 3
Un
\ }
\ _
.&
\ ! �
. y z
\j\
2 \
\ § co -
C4
) ) a_
.a
/ F-3
co \L§
a § NE
( k w'za-
c \ \ 000
3 a /M§
2 < mom
^« q <
mz
)£)
� /§
2 r - _
£ C�
\ �
. LLI k
« �
�
2 0
q
< C)
6 2 �
«
E z /
— o
k b \
O w §
¥ \ ? z4
a E
\ . : 2 �
` § (
�{ ! �
0
�\m:+
ej 2z op
;
\
3 \ \
*Lo
Cl)
) } CL \
)
@§
_ ^ \ co § \ Ul
0-
` k u z-
\ » ;
c o2 $GS
» / $ } /ox
\
\ ;fz
> \ \y \}(
2� 3°
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerralcon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor r Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
Field Exploration Description
Our field exploration consisted of performing nine soil borings at the project sit( . The borings
were extended to depths of about 3 to 40 feet below existing grades. The boring locations were
selected and laid out in the field by ATS. Offset distances from the staked locations, where
required, are noted on the boring logs, and were determined by using a measurinc; wheel or cloth
tape. The approximate boring locations are indicated on the attached Boring Location Diagrams.
The ground surface elevations indicated on the boring logs were provided by AT: were rounded
to the nearest''/2-foot. The locations and elevations of the borings should be consi:Jered accurate
only to the degree implied by the means and methods used to define them.
The borings were drilled with a track-mounted, rotary drilling rig using continuous flight, solid or
hollow-stemmed augers to advance the boreholes. Boring 1 was advanced beyond a depth of
about 19 feet using mud rotary procedures. Samples were obtained using split-barrel sampling
procedures. In the split-barrel sampling procedure, a standard 2-inch O.D. split-barrel sampling
— spoon is driven into the ground with a 140-pound hammer falling a distance of 30 inches. A CME
automatic SPT hammer was used to advance the split-barrel sampler in the borings performed
for this project. The number of blows required to advance the sampling spoon the last 12 inches
of a normal 18-inch penetration is recorded as the standard penetration resistance value. These
values are indicated on the boring logs at the corresponding depths of occurrence The samples
were sealed and transported to our laboratory for testing and classification.
During the subsurface exploration, field logs of the borings were prepared by the drill crew. Each
log included visual classification of the materials recovered from sampling, as well as the drill
crew's interpretation of the subsurface conditions between samples while drilling. The boring logs
included with this report represent an interpretation of the field logs by a geotechnical engineer
and include modifications based on laboratory observation and tests on select samples.
i
s
i
i
t
i
1
i
Responsive m Resourceful a Reliable Exhibit A-3
i
BORING LOG NO. 1 Page 1 of 2
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
U LOCATION About 16'W and 12'N of z w EL c y STRENGTH TEST
SW fence corner j O F-
N a w a
v Latitude:42.45726' Longitude: -92.35638' _ 1~¢ w F = a u>—i= w z Z
a a w� d > _1 OQ wZ`u Z ¢F uJ >-(D
Surface Elev.:907.0(Ft.) o a m Q LL m> W X O m UJ
DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. O � g 0 ~ 00 N m U
-- FILL-SAND,fine to medium,with zones of clay,trace
organics,dark brown
i ..-------..
3-5-7
18 N=12 10
3.5 903.5 X_
FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel and organics,
brown and dark brown
...I 18 N39 13 5
16 -$ 21
9.0 898
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel and organics 2-3-3 1000
o (possible buried topsoil),dark brown,medium stiff ? 15 N=6 (HP) 27
26
11.0 896 —
Z SAND(SPSC),fine to coarse,with zones of clay,trace
U gravel,gray to light gray,loose to very loose 2-3-2
15 N=5 24
Lu
15 14 1-2-324
_m
J
r >W
0 16 0-2-2 22
N=4
0
J
H
.a Q.
2 --
0 2 X18 0-1-1 19
m 20.5 886.5 _
F SAND(SPSC),fine to coarse,with clay,trace gravel,
brown,medium dense to very dense 4-6-8
12 N=14 17
Z
0
2 °° 12 4-6-9 21
0
° N=15
0
25
— w
a Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
a:
a
w
LL Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes:
Hollow stem auger to 19 feet then mud rotary to boring procedures.
termination.
a See Appendix B for description of laboratory
> procedures and additional data(if any).
0 Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
Z Boring back-filled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
0
WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
0 Boring Started:6/17/2015 Boring Completed:6/17/2015
10'while sampling 9
0 Drill Ri :#94e Driller:RF
m 1 rernwascon
L0 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-4
BORING LOG NO. 1 Page 2 of 2
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
0 LOCATION About 16'W and 12'N of w Z uJ F y n STRENGTH TEST a
SW fence corner >O u,U, a w n
U Latitude:42.45726' Longitude: -92.35638' = w¢ w w w a U)� o w Z n
F- WZc v W
W �w o �� m> F- XWa ¢ �Z ow
Surface Elev.:907.0(Ft.) o m Q w LL ¢of w v O
DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. O J ~ 00 U
/25.5 881.5
o GRAVELLY SAND(SPSC),fine to coarse,with clay,
brown,very dense 10 19-30-22 10
N=52
28.0 879
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL1,trace gravel,with occasional
sand seams and layers,gray,very stiff 16 5-6-8 5000 16
N=14 (HP)
30— X
/ 3-6-9 6000
18 16
N=15 (HP)
3-5-8 5500
18 15
m N=13 (HP)
0 35
o
0 0 7-8-13
U N=21
a
X
U
r
16 4-8-13 14
40.0 867 N=21
Boring Terminated at 40 Feet 4
7000 HP J
W
O
z
0
J
Q
U)
fn
W
C7
H
0
O
W
zz
c�
0
0
2
o
LL
O
cStratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
U)W
Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes:
Hollow stem auger to 19 feet then mud rotary to boring procedures.
termination. See Appendix B for description of laboratory
j procedures and additional data(if any).
o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
D
0
WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
Boring Started:6/17/2015 Boring Completed:6/17/2015
10'while sampling Irera
�O m as c(311 Drill Rig:#94e Driller:RF
vn 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
F Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-4
BORING LOG NO. 2 Page 1 of 1
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
C7 LOCATION About 6'W of staked w Z wa F y a STRENGTH TEST o
location >O u)u) 0 a w
O Latitude:42.457230 Longitude: -92.35143° w~¢ F = a r of
a �> >Lu mv=J WZ wZ;� Z ¢H Y=
0_ W� 0_ �W Oa W: u
Surface Elev.:915.5(Ft.) o ~¢m a ¢ W g Ir V 0 0
u) of O O u) u) O
DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. U
_ FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY.,brown
1.0 914.5
SANDY LEAN CLAY ICU,with silt,light gray, medium
stiff to stiff
_ 5.0 910.5 18 2-4-4 18
SANDY LEAN CLAY ICU,trace gravel,gray,very stiff to 5— X 70 N (HP) 12
hard
Q ,
0 7-11-14
o .0 1 18 N=25 9
P 9000+ HP
N
O J j
N
O ,C
� O v
W
r
o
L - 18 6-12-21 10
15 N=33
9000+ HP
J
n � Cl \
0 �/
O r
J ;
i _P\°
oO 18 13-15-19 9
���� 20.5 895 X—L N=34
9000+ HP
Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet
0
0
W
zz
2
E
0
2
0
LL
W
Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
of
a
w
u) Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes:
Power Auger procedures.
a See Appendix B for description of laboratory
> procedures and additional data(if any).
o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
u)
0
WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
z Surface -flefolm m.c)n
Boring Started:6/17/2015 Boring Completed:6/17/2015
0 None after boring Drill Rig:#94e Driller:RF
u, 7 Surface(6125115) 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
�7_ M_ Wet cave-in at 5' 6/25/15 Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-5
BORING LOG NO. 3 Page 1 of 1 _
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
(D LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 w Z LU >.n STRENGTH TEST
}} It� o
U Latitude:42.4571° Longitude: -92.34715° LU
LL o f ; w C a- w _>x e w~ z n
a a- a> CL j O W �z W Z F w =i
z ¢
Of
U Surface Elev.:931.0 Ft. o ¢N Ov w X m> m a rr s a p p w
DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) O Cn ( w 0 ~ C)co (n v
0.7 Fill-Approx.8"Topsoil
930.5
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI,trace gravel,yellow brown,
medium stiff to stiff V
is
JX
3-3-4 6500
5 18 N=7 (HP) 15
3500 HP
,X
i 7.0 924
SANDY LEAN CLAY tCLI,trace gravel,yellow brown,
very stiff to hard
C\
0 0 18 4-9-14 14
N=23
9000+ HP
�J V. _......
LOO r r 12.0 919
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI,trace gravel,brown and gray,
w hard
W
a
N 6-12-17
15 X_18 N=29 11
9000+ HP
J
W
O
z
0
0 .�
J
U)
0 18 8-14-21 9
20.5 910.5 20— X N=35
F-: Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet 9000+ HP
Cr
O
w
o:
z
9
Cr
0
2
O
0
w
Q Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
o:
a
w
LL Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes:
Q Power Auger procedures.
a See Appendix B for description of laboratory
> procedures and additional data(if any).
o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
zBoring backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
0
J
WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
co Boring Started:6/17/2015 Boring Completed:6/17/2015
z 11.5'while drilling
mNone after boring Drill Rig:#94e Driller:RF
N 1.5'(6125115) 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
r Wet cave-in at 5.5' 6125/15 Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-6
BORING LOG NO. 4 Page 1 of 1
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 r w Z wa v F a STRENGTH TEST o U
>O rn rn D_ W
_ v Latitude:42.4568871° Longitude: -92.3375576° �Q X F = W T e w Z Z F
IL F �> > O,� �z wZy z aF y=
W �W d O wW OQ Dawn 3: D_O
O Surface Elev.:878.0(Ft.) 0 ¢m C w LL ¢ w g F v `_ O o
DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. ° J ~ v U
Fill-Approx. 16"Topsoil
1.3 876.5
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CL),trace gravel,with sand
layers, brown and gray,very soft
2�a X 18 1-0-1 50C 14
5 (HP)
-- 500(HP
�8.0 870
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI,trace gravel,with sand
layers, brown,soft to medium stiff
10.0 868 15 N3fi 16
N a SAND(SP),fine to coarse,trace gravel and clay, brown, X 500 HP
loose
Z.
0
13.0 865
W
~ SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI,trace gravel,gray,very stiff to
a hard
3-6-11
nnn 15 14 N=17 12
1 M o-Iv'.
8500 HP
� O
J
r W
0
z
0
Q
� O v
Cn 18 13-18-26 12
° N=44
20.5 857.5 20— X 9000+ HP
_ Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet
O
w
o:
zz
2
X
0
2
0
LL
W
Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
W
w
LL Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of Feld Notes:
Power Auger procedures.
See Appendix B for description of laboratory
> procedures and additional data(if any).
o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
z Boring back-filled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
U)
° WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
0 Boring Started:6/16/2015 Boring Completed:6/16/2015
mz 3'while sampling 1 rerraicon
' 2'after boring Dnll Rig:#94e Duller:RF
w T_ 0.5'(6/25/15) 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
rIM Wet cave-in at 4.5' 6/25/15 Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-7
BORING LOG NO. 5 Page 1 of 1 ...
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Maman Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
(D LOCATION About 30'E and 15'N;2' J Co w y n STRENGTH TEST
CL
lower than staked v j p o a w a n
v Latitude:42.45 1orLongitude: -92.33477` Q X w_J ? a >En F e Li z F
a _
x LU
¢ w wW a 0 �w 0Q ffWo z ¢z �(5
Surface Elev.:870.0 Ft. o a Cn 2 U W X m> N a o_ O o LU
DEPTH ELEVATION(Ft.) Co U) X LL J o w a U) U) U
SAND(SP),fine to coarse,trace gravel,brown and gray
2.0 868
SAND(SP),fine to coarse,trace gravel and cobbles,
brown
3.5 866.5
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI,trace gravel,gray,stiff to
1�' hard —
3-5-6 6500
5 10 N=11 (HP) 14
O v
n �
a I�°
O D
I \
a_
10 5-6-8 3000 17
o Q � 1 N=14 (HP)
X_
N O V"
0
�\O
W J V
O ^v 7-9-11 7000
n. 15 12 N=20 (HP) 16
M3
LU
� O v
o \
z
o O�v
r
0 C 18 8-11-17 8500 15
20.5 Sass 2 N=28 (HP) _
Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet
0
0
w
a '
z
c�
0
0
M
0
LL
W
a Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
a
w
LL Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes:
Power Auger procedures.
❑
See Appendix B for description of laboratory
> procedures and additional data(if any).
o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
_D
0
0 WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
z Surface Boring Started:6l1712015 Boring Completed:6/17/2015
0 0.5'afterboring err Drill Rig:#94e Driller:RF '
in
Surface(6125115) 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
Wet cave-in at 2.5' 6125/15 Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-8
r
.a
BORING LOG NO. 6 Page 1 of 1
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services,Inc.
Des Moines,Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo,Iowa
(7 LOCATION About 4'N of staked J z w }a STRENGTH TEST
JO location , >o }a c~i�m a W = n
U Latitude:42.45771° Longitude: -92.33205° _ Lu Q W w � w Q o w I-
F- F
a a wLU 0_ > ❑U 0z WZy z ¢z >_
w Fw d p Ww Oa o_w a 3z �C7
Surface Elev.:863.0(Ft.) ❑ ¢CO ¢ W LL ¢cr W 2 O ❑
DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. U J ~ v U
0.6 Fill-Approx. 10"Topsoil 862
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CUSC),trace gravel,with sand
layers, brown, medium stiff
1-2-3 2000
--� 5 16X N=5 (HP) 19
7.5
LIMESTONE*, 855.5
weathered,light brown
••• `° 12 25-36-23 10
0 1 N=59
c?
r' 11.0 852
z Boring Terminated at 11 Feet
.,, 0
W
a
m
J
.� j
0
Z
(7
O
J
F
U)
N
0
0
a
W
Z_
�r O
O
M
O
o!
LL
!^ F
¢ Stratification lines are approximate.In situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
X 'Classification of rock materials has been estimated by the drill crew based on disturbed
wsam les. Core sam les and/or etro ra ph analysis mav reveal other rock types.
LL Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes:
Power Auger procedures.
~ a See Appendix B for description of laboratory
> procedures and additional data(if any).
zAbandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
Boring backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
... 0
° WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
c') Boring Started:6/17/2015 Boring Completed:6/17/2015
m12 Surface Irerracon
g
p None(6/25/15) Drill Rig:#94e Duller.RF
..� U) 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
Wet cave-in at 2.5' 6125✓15 Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-9
j
BORING LOG NO. 7 Page 1 of 1 '-
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
(7 LOCATION About 30'N;7.5'lower J Z w } STRENGTH TEST
CJ than staked location j p as F U) Of W
v Latitude:42.45771° Longitude: -92.33025° �C ~ � n a �T e w z z
w ww d O oJw Oa �Z' z a~ }�
Surface Elev.:869.0(Ft.) ❑ ¢m Q w LL Co w a.Xg O oUj
DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. U J F 0 U
0.5 Fill-Approx.6"Topsoil 868.5
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI,with limestone gravel,brown
and gray
2.0 867
LIMESTONE',weathered
3.0 866
Boring Terminated at 3 Feet
0
0
o �
z
0
U
FL
'LL
N
N
f2
J
W
O
z
c�
o
J
H
V)
fn
0
F
X
0
W
C _
z
Z
U`
0
O
2
O
o
LL
W
a Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
'Classification of rock materials has been estimated by the drill crew based on disturbed
a sam les. Core sam les and/or etro ra hic anal sis maV reveal other rock types.
NAdvancement Method: Notes:
LL See Exhibit A-3 for description of field
Power Auger procedures.
a See Appendix B for description of laboratory
procedures and additional data(if any).
0 Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
_E)
0
WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
Boring Started:6/17/2015 Boring Completed:6/17/2015
None while drillingiterralL.Ul I 0 Drill Rig:#94e Driller:RF
m None after boring
w 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
= Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-10
r
BORING LOG NO. 8 Page 1 of 1
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
00 LOCATION About 25'W and 2'N of w Z Lu v r n STRENGTH TESTa.
o
staked location >O }y W rn a W H a
O Latitude:42.4577062' Longitude: -92.3182187' _ Q W of UJIJ a w a a—i W z
o W LU
Ww a. >O Ww O¢ irw i z 3z
Surface Elev.:845.0(Ft.) 0 3 m Q w U. C° w v O
DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. \e Cn W g O ~ U� U
F U
SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI,trace gravel, brown and gray T
1.0 844
a � SANDY LEAN CLAY(CLI,trace gravel,gray,very stiff
O u
o v\'
o D
C rX 18 5-6-9 15
S N=15
o D 7500 HP
one
7.0 838
I , LIMESTONE*,highly weathered and broken,with lean to
fat clay layers and occasional hard limestone layers,
yellow brown,red brown,light brown,and light gray
'1 18 12-20-24 18
4 1 N=44
_
0
N
Z
U
U
W
a.
15
8 12-50/3" 18
J
J
3
0
z
0
U
J
H
Q
'
0 12 555 21
2Q N=10
O 20.5 824.5
�-: Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet
0
W
it
a
z
W
E
0
M
0
LL
O
aStratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
*Classification of rock materials has been estimated by the drill crew based on disturbed
wsample. Core sam les and/or etm ra hic analysis may reveal other rock types.
Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes:
Power Auger procedures.
... ¢ See Appendix B for description of laboratory
> procedures and additional data(if any).
O Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations.
U)
..., 0
WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
c7 Boring Started:6/16/2015 Boring Completed:6/16/2015
z Surface Irerracon
mNone after boring Drill Rig:#94e Driller:RF
m V_ 0.5'(6/25115) 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
Wet cave-in at 4.5' 6125115 Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-11
BORING LOG NO. 9 Page 1 of 1
PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
Des Moines, Iowa
SITE: San Marnan Drive
Waterloo, Iowa
cD LOCATION See Exhibit A-2 Z w }a STRENGTH TEST
O w }a} U)U �a W a F n
U Latitude:42.4585143' Longitude: -92.3163551° _ LU F- W w F- OF= a a w z
Lu
wc� Z aw x
Q w ww i O> LUw OQ �w n ¢ �z �C7
Surface Elev.:847.0(Ft.) o ¢m ¢ w LL ¢ w 2 F- O w
DEPTH ELEVATION Ft. O o7 � J ~ o0 U) (n U
0 ' Approx.48"Topsoil(possible fill)
0 4 4.0 843
FILL-SANDY LEAN CLAY,trace gravel and organics,
brown and dark brown 5 12 Nis 16
5.5 841.5
SAND(SP),fine to medium,brown
8.0 839
SAND(SP),fine to coarse,trace clay and gravel, brown,
loose
13 1-2-2 T
0 1 N=4
< > o
oo >
° eee
eee
eee
N
Z
°
0
w
r
a'
eee
e >
� oo >
0
1-2-1
15 18 N=3 6
W
3
0
z
ID 18.0 829
o �
SANDY LEAN CLAY ICLI,trace gravel,brown,stiff
a
a
U 19.5 827.5
0 SANDY LEAN CLAY I ,trace gravel,gray,very stiff 2 X-L 15 N 5;2 16
' 20.5 826.5 6000 HP
Boring Terminated at 20.5 Feet
0
0
w
z
c�
0
0
2
0
o:
LL
0
W
Stratification lines are approximate.In-situ,the transition may be gradual. Hammer Type: Automatic
X 'Classification of rock materials has been estimated by the drill crew based on disturbed
wsam les. Core sam les and/or etro ra hic anal sis may reveal other rock es.
u) Advancement Method: See Exhibit A-3 for description of field Notes:
Power Auger procedures.
0
See Appendix B for description of laboratory
> procedures and additional data(if any).
o Abandonment Method: See Appendix C for explanation of symbols and
z Boring backfilled with soil cuttings upon completion. abbreviations. �.
U)
c�
° WATER LEVEL OBSERVATIONS
t� Boring Started:6/16/2015 Boring Completed:6/16I2015
z 18'while sampling
Ir
rr con
m 18'after boring Drill Rig:#94e Duller:RF
U 18'(6/25/15) 6612 Chancellor Drive,Suite 102
Wet cave-in at 18.5' 6/25/15 Cedar Falls,Iowa Project No.:13155061 Exhibit: A-12
APPENDIX B
SUPPORTING INFORMATION
Geotechnical Engineering Report Irerracon
Dry Run Creek Interceptor *Waterloo, Iowa
August 11, 2015 >F Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
Laboratory Testing
Soil samples were tested in the laboratory to measure water contents (ASTM D .2216). A hand
penetrometer was used to estimate the unconfined compressive strength of ome cohesive
samples. The hand penetrometer provides a better estimate of soil consister cy than visual
examination alone. The results of these laboratory tests are shown on the boring logs, adjacent
to the soil profiles, at the corresponding sample depths. Grain size distributic ns from sieve
analyses (ASTM D 422)follow in this appendix
As a part of the laboratory testing program, the soil samples were classified in the laboratory
(ASTM D 2488) based on visual observation, texture, plasticity, and the limited laboratory testing
described above. Additional testing could be performed to more accurately classify the samples.
Portions of the recovered samples were placed and sealed in containers, and the samples will be
retained for at least 1 month in case additional testing is requested. The soil descriptions
presented on the boring logs for native soils are in accordance with our enclosed General Notes
and Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) (ASTM D 2487). The estimated group symbol for
the USCS is also shown on the boring logs, and a brief description of the Unified System is
attached to this report.
Classification of rock materials is in accordance with the enclosed General Notes fc r Sedimentary
Rock and has been estimated from disturbed samples. Petrographic analysis mad. indicate other
rock types.
Procedural standards noted above are for reference to methodology in general. n some cases
variations to methods are applied as a result of local practice or professional judgrient.
' i
i
.. Responsive m Resourceful a Reliable Exhibit B-1
i
i
1
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION
ASTM D422
U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS HYDROMETER
6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/2318 3 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100 140 200
100 0
95
90 10
111 85
80 20
75
i
70 30
I
65
" ! 60 40,
fl r m
x
C9 55 m
w z
m 50 500
D
z 45 Cn
m
LL
z 40 60{
U `<
LU
a35
am
30 70
� 25
i
0 20 80
-� P9
N 15
z
0
10 90
w
5
a
� 0 pp
c 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 O.Od1°
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS
m
COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY
w coarse fine coarse I medium fine
N
CO
a BORING ID DEPTH %COBBLES %GRAVEL %SAND %SILT %FINES %CLAY USCS
0 • 1 14-15.5 0.0 0.0 94.9 5.1
0
0
a
w
z SIEVE PERCENT FINER SOIL DESCRIPTION
(size) • •
0
o GRAIN SIZE
LL Dso 0.3
a
a D30 0.201 REMARKS
U) D10 0.154 •
-► LL
J
j C, 0.88
i C 1.95
w
a PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor PROJECT NUMBER: 13155061
SITE: San Marnan Drive CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
o Waterloo Iowa Irerracon
1 � Des Moines, Iowa
0 6612 Chancellor Drive, Suite 102
A Cedar Falls, Iowa EXHIBIT: B-2
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION
ASTM D422
U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER
6 4 3 2 1.5 1 4 1/23/8 3 4 6 810 1416 20 30 40 50 60 100140200
100 0
95
90 10
85
80 20
75
70 30
65
60 40,
255 -
W m
Z
}50 500
m 0
K D
Z 45
m
U.
Z 40 60 j
w
U �
w 35 m
a =
30 70
25
0 20 80
c7
t2
N 15
Z
0
10 90
w
W
1 55
a
0 110p
0 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.0()T0
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS
COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY
w coarse fine coarse medium fine
N
to
Z BORING ID DEPTH %COBBLES %GRAVEL %SAND %SILT %FINES %CLAY USCS
1 21 -22.5 0.0 8.7 79.7 11.5
0
0
a-
wl
`
o:
z SIEVE PERCENT FINER SOIL DESCRIPTION
(size) • •
0 1
o GRAIN SIZE
U- •
w D60 0.612
a D30 0.217 REMARKS t
vwi D10 • 1�
o COEFFICIENTS
Cc 1.25
z Cu9.92 r..
w
a PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor m PROJECT NUMBER: 13155061
w
SITE: San Marnan Drive Irerracon
CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services,Inc.
Ir
o Waterloo, Iowa Des Moines,Iowa
0 6612 Chancellor Drive, Suite 102
m Cedar Falls, Iowa EXHIBIT: B-3
J
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION
ASTM D422
U.S.SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES I U.S.SIEVE NUMBERS I HYDROMETER
4 2 1 112 3 6 10 16 30 50 100 200
6 3 1.5 3/4 3/8 4 8 14 20 40 60 140 0
100
90 10
85
80
20
75
70 30
65
60 40,
m
x �
C9 55 m
w z
>- 50 50 o
m D
Z 45
lL �7
—, Z 40 60
W
U w 35 m
a =
30 70
25
~
0 20 80
ci
vi
N 15
z
0
10 90
w
5
IL
0 p
c 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 O.OI�ip
GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS
co COBBLES GRAVEL SAND SILT OR CLAY
N coarse fine coarse medium fine
co
Z BORING ID DEPTH %COBBLES %GRAVEL %SAND %SILT %FINES %CLAY USCS
a
0 0 1 26-27.5 0.0 33.7 55.8 10.4
0
w
z SIEVE PERCENT FINER SOIL DESCRIPTION
(size) •It
•
2 GRAIN SIZE
0
LL •
D60 3.032
a
i a D30 0•442 REMARKS
a
w •
1 (0 D10
I LL
^ o >< COEFFICIENTS
J
> Cc 0.94
0 C„ 44.05
w
a PROJECT: Dry Run Creek Interceptor PROJECT NUMBER: 13155061
w
SITE: San Marnan Drive Irerracon
CLIENT: AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
o Waterloo, Iowa Des Moines, Iowa
0 6612 Chancellor Drive, Suite 102
m Cedar Falls, Iowa EXHIBIT: B-4
5
I
APPENDIX C
SUPPORTING DOCUMENTS
GENERAL NOTES
LDESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
® Water Initially (HP) Hand Penetrometer
Encountered
L Split Spoon Water Level After a
Auer
9 p p Specified Period of Time (T) Torvane
J V Water Level After (b/f) Standard Penetration
L CD W a Specified Period of Time
N Test(blows per foot)
? Shelby Tube Macro Core W W
-1
0 n J Water levels indicated on the soil boring J (PID) Photo-Ionization Detector
a W logs are the levels measured in the o
W borehole at the times indicated.
L N Q Groundwater level variations will occur (OVA) Organic Vapor Analyzer
Ring Sampler Rock Core over time. In low permeability soils,
accurate determination of groundwater
levels is not possible with short term
L water level observations.
Grab Sample No Recovery
DESCRIPTIVE SOIL CLASSIFICATION
L Soil classification is based on the Unified Soil Classification System. Coarse Grained Soils have more than 50% of their dry
weight retained on a#200 sieve;their principal descriptors are: boulders, cobbles,gravel or sand. Fine Grained Soils have
less than 50% of their dry weight retained on a#200 sieve;they are principally described as clays if they are plastic, and
silts if they are slightly plastic or non-plastic. Major constituents may be added as modifiers and minor constituents may be
added according to the relative proportions based on grain size. In addition to gradation, coarse-grained soils are defined
L on the basis of their in-place relative density and fine-grained soils on the basis of their consistency.
LOCATION AND ELEVATION NOTES
L Unless otherwise noted, Latitude and Longitude are approximately determined using a hand-held GPS device.The accuracy
of such devices is variable. Surface elevation data annotated with +/-indicates that no actual topographical survey was
conducted to confirm the surface elevation. Instead, the surface elevation was approximately determined from topographic
maps of the area.
RELATIVE DENSITY OF COARSE-GRAINED SOILS CONSISTENCY OF FINE-GRAINED SOILS
(More than 50%retained on No.200 sieve.) (50%or more passing the No.200 sieve.)
Density determined by Standard Penetration Resistance Consistency determined by laboratory shear strength testing,field
LIncludes gravels,sands and silts. visual-manual procedures or standard penetration resistance
(0 Descriptive Term Standard Penetration or Ring Sampler Descriptive Term Unconfined Compressive Standard Penetration or Ring Sampler
(Density) N-Value Blows/Ft. (Consistency) Strength,Qu,psf N-Value Blows/Ft.
1 Blows/Ft. Blows/Ft.
W
H Very Loose 0-3 0-6 Very Soft less than 500 0-1 <3
2
~ Loose 4-9 7-18 Soft 500 to 1,000 2-4 3-4
L z
W Medium Dense 10-29 19-58 Medium-Stiff 1,000 to 2,000 4-8 5-9
H
N Dense 30-50 59-98 Stiff 2,000 to 4,000 8-15 10-18
1 Very Dense >50 >99 Very Stiff 4,000 to 8,000 15-30 19-42
Hard >8,000 >30 >42
RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF SAND AND GRAVEL GRAIN SIZE TERMINOLOGY
Descriptive Terms) Percent of Maiior Component Particle Size
of other constituents Dry Weight of Sample
1 Trace < 15 Boulders Over 12 in.(300 mm)
With 15-29 Cobbles 12 in.to 3 in. (300mm to 75mm)
Modifier >30 Gravel 3 in.to#4 sieve(75mm to 4.75 mm)
Sand #4 to#200 sieve(4.75mm to 0.075mm
Silt or Clay Passing#200 sieve(0.075mm)
1 RELATIVE PROPORTIONS OF FINES PLASTICITY DESCRIPTION
Descriptive Term(s) Percent of Term Plasticity Index
of other constituents Dry Weiaht Non-plastic 0
Trace <5 Low 1 -10
With 5-12 Medium 11 -30
Modifier >12 High >30
1
rerrCeniscon Exhibit C-1
UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Soil Classification
Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests a Group Group Name"
Symbol'•
Gravels. Clean Gravels: Cu>_4 and 1 <Cc<_3 E GW Well-graded gravel F
More than 50%of Less than 5%fines° Cu<4 and/or 1>Cc>3 E GP Poorly graded gravel F
coarse fraction retained Gravels with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH GM Silty gravel F G"
Coarse Grained Soils: on No.4 sieve More than 12%finest Fines classify as CL or CH GC Clayey ravelF,G,H
More than 50%retained ! - ty y y 9
on No.200 sieve Sands: Clean Sands: Cu>_6 and 1 <Cc<3 E SW Well-graded sand
50%or more of coarse Less than 5%fines° Cu<6 and/or 1>Cc>3 E SP Poorly graded sand
fraction passes No.4 Sands with Fines: Fines classify as ML or MH SM Silty sand G'"''
sieve More than 12%fines° Fines classify as CL or CH SC Clayey sand G'"'�
PI>7 and plots on or above"A"line'' CL Lean clay K,L,M
Inorganic: KLM
Silts and Clays: PI<4 or plots below"A"line, ML Silt ''
Liquid limit less than 50 Liquid limit-oven dried Organic clayK,L,M,"
Fine-Grained Soils: Organic: <0.75 OL KLMo
50%or more passes the s Liquid limit-not dried Organic Silt
No.200 sieve PI plots on or above"A"line CH Fat clay KL''M
Inorganic: K,L,M
Silts and Clays: PI plots below"A"line MH Elastic Silt
I Liquid limit 50 or more Liquid limit-oven dried Organic clay K,L,M,P
Organic: <0.75 OH KLM Q
Liquid limit-not dried Organic silt '
Highly organic soils: iPrimarily organic matter,dark in color,and organic odor PT Peat
"Based on the material passing the 3-inch(75-mm)sieve "If fines are organic,add"with organic fines"to group name. _
e If field sample contained cobbles or boulders,or both,add"with cobbles ' If soil contains>_15%gravel,add"with gravel"to group name.
or boulders,or both"to group name. j If Atterberg limits plot in shaded area,soil is a CL-ML,silty Gay.
c Gravels with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well-graded K If soil contains 15 to 29%plus No.200,add"with sand"or"with gravel,"
gravel with silt,GW-GC well-graded gravel with clay,GP-GM poorly whichever is predominant.
graded gravel with silt,GP-GC poorly graded gravel with clay. ` If soil contains>_30%plus No.200 predominantly sand,add"sandy"to
°Sands with 5 to 12%fines require dual symbols: SW-SM well-graded group name.
sand with silt,SW-SC well-graded sand with clay,SP-SM poorly graded M If soil contains>_30%plus No.200,predominantly gravel,add
sand with silt,SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay "gravelly"to group name.
D z "PI>4 and plots on or above"A"line.
e Cu =Ds°/D,o Cc= ( so) o PI<4 or plots below"A"line.
D10 x Dso P PI plots on or above"A"line.
F If soil contains>_15%sand,add"with sand"to group name. Q PI plots below"A"line.
G If fines classify as CL-ML,use dual symbol GC-GM,or SC-SM.
60 -- --- — —T- - 11
50 � For classification of fine-grained
soils and fine-grained fraction
---of coarse-grained soils ------------- - •��'� e r
Equation of"A"-line
CL Horizontal at P"— to LL=25.5. •'
�►
X 40 _ then PI=0.73(LL-20)
pEquation of"t1"-line 011
Z Vertical at LL=16 to PI=71 I
>- 30 then PI=0.9(LL-8) F'
c 20
MH or OH
10 '
L - ML
7 ---- E
ML or OL
0 10 16 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
LIQUID LIMIT(LL}
Iren,cacon Exhibit C-2
1
1 GENERAL NOTES
Sedimentary Rock Classification
1 DESCRIPTIVE ROCK CLASSIFICATION:
1 Sedimentary rocks are composed of cemented clay, silt and sand sized particles. The most common
minerals are clay, quartz and calcite. Rock composed primarily of calcite is called limestone; rock of sand
size grains is called sandstone, and rock of clay and silt size grains is called mudstone or claystone,
1 siltstone, or shale. Modifiers such as shaly, sandy, dolomitic, calcareous, carbonaceous, etc. are used to
describe various constituents. Examples: sandy shale; calcareous sandstone.
LIMESTONE Light to dark colored, crystalline to fine-grained texture, composed of CaCO3, reacts
readily with HCI.
DOLOMITE Light to dark colored, crystalline to fine-grained texture, composed of CaMg(CO3)2,
harder than limestone, reacts with HCl when powdered.
CHERT Light to dark colored, very fine-grained texture, composed of micro-crystalline quartz
(Si02), brittle, breaks into angular fragments, will scratch glass.
SHALE Very fine-grained texture, composed of consolidated silt or clay, bedded in thin
layers. The unlaminated equivalent is frequently referred to as siltstone, claystone or
mudstone.
SANDSTONE Usually light colored, coarse to fine texture, composed of cemented sand size grains
of quartz, feldspar, etc. Cement usually is silica but may be such minerals as calcite,
iron-oxide, or some other carbonate.
CONGLOMERATE Rounded rock fragments of variable mineralogy varying in size from near sand to
boulder size but usually pebble to cobble size (1/2 inch to 6 inches). Cemented
together with various cementing agents. Breccia is similar but composed of angular,
fractured rock particles cemented together.
JDEGREE OF WEATHERING:
JSLIGHT Slight decomposition of parent material on joints. May be color change.
MODERATE Some decomposition and color change throughout.
HIGH Rock highly decomposed, may be extremely broken.
Classification of rock materials has been estimated from disturbed samples.
Core samples and petrographic analysis may reveal other rock types.
Terracon
Exhibit C-3
September 3, 2015
_ Irerracon
AECOM Technical Services, Inc.
500 SW 7tn Street, Suite 301
Des Moines, Iowa 50309
Attn: Mr. Ross Hillsman, P.E.
P: 515.323.7920
E: ross.hillsman(cD-aecom.com
Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report Addendum 1
_ Dry Run Creek Interceptor
Waterloo, Iowa
Terracon Project Number: 13155061.02
Dear Mr. Hillsman:
Terracon submitted a geotechnical engineering report (GER) for the proposed Dry Run Creek
interceptor sewer on August 11, 2015 (Terracon Project No. 13155061.01). Since the issuing of
the original GER, we were provided with information regarding a proposed retaining wall in the
vicinity of Boring 1. The retaining wall will extend from the east to the south sides of the lift station
_ and will retain 2 to 3 feet of soil. The top of the retaining wall will range from approximately 906.6
feet to about 907 feet, and the wall foundation is planned to bear at a depth of about 4 feet below
existing grades.
We have been requested to provide a net allowable bearing pressure and active earth pressures
for the cantilevered retaining wall. The purpose of this addendum is to provide these
recommendations, as well as recommendations for foundation subgrade preparation.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION
Geotechnical Considerations
As discussed in the original GER, existing fill was encountered in the lift station boring (Boring 1),
which was in the vicinity of the proposed retaining wall. The majority of existing fill contained some
amounts of organics. We anticipate that uncontrolled, existing fill will be encountered at the
_ planned bearing level of the retaining wall footing. Existing fill should be removed and replaced
with properly compacted fill. If the owner accepts the risks of cracking and possible rotation of
the wall, consideration could be given to overexcavating a portion of the existing fill and replacing
it with a layer of properly compacted granular material. The granular material should be at least
Terracon Consultants, Inc. 6612 Chancellor Drive, Suite 102 Cedar Falls, Iowa 50613
P [319] 277 4016 F [319] 277 4320 terracon.com
GeotechnicalEnvironmental a Facilities a
Geotechnical Engineering Report Addendum 1 Irerracon
_
Dry Run Creek Interceptor w Waterloo, Iowa
September 3, 2015 Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
2 feet in thickness. A crushed stone (such as Class A roadstone) can be used for backfill in the
overexcavation below the footing. This overexcavation and backfill procedure should be
performed under observation by the geotechnical engineer. If unsuitable, material is encountered
below the footing, it could be necessary to overexcavate more than 2 feet below the bearing level
of the footing.
Retaining Wall Spread Footing Design Recommendations
Description Value
a At least 2 feet of compacted crushed stone, over
Suitable bearing materials a Existing fill or native soils (assumes some owner-
accepted risk)
Net allowable bearing pressure 1,200 psf
Minimum wall footing width 36 inches
Minimum embedment depth 4 feet
below finished grade z
Approximate total settlement 1 to 1'/z inches
from foundation loads s
Estimated differential settlement —
About two-thirds (2/3) of total settlement
from foundation loads
1. The recommended net allowable bearing pressure is the pressure in excess of the minimum
surrounding overburden pressure at the footing base elevation. The allowable foundation bearing
pressures apply to dead loads plus design live load conditions. The design bearing pressure may _
be increased by one-third when considering total loads that include seismic conditions.
2. Finished grade is defined as the lowest adjacent grade within 5 feet of the foundation.
3. The above settlement estimates from foundation loads considered a maximum wall/strip footing width �-
of 6 feet.
Lateral Earth Pressures
The retaining wall will be subjected to unbalanced backfill levels on opposite sides and should be
designed for earth pressures at least equal to those indicated in the following table. Active earth
pressure is commonly used for design of free-standing retaining walls and assumes wall
movement. The recommended design lateral earth pressures are for cast-in-place concrete walls
only, do not include a factor of safety, and the values do not include any provision for possible
hydrostatic pressure on the walls.
Responsive a Resourceful a Reliable 2
--
GmotmoHn|oaAEngineering Report Addendum 1 Irerracon
DryRbnCraak |ntercaptor �VVotadoo. |ovma
-- September 3. 2O15aTmrrnoonProject No. 13155OS1.01
-- For active pressure movement
8 = Surcharge
TSFor at-rest pressure
No Movement Assumed
Horizontal
-- Finished
Grade
Horizontal
Finished Grade
_
�---- D2---��--[)1--+1 Retaining Wall
Earth Pressure Coefficients
-- Equivalent Surcharge Earth
Earth ' '----'- Coefficient for BackfillFluid Density Pressure, pi I prmasumm. px
Conditions- Type
(pmf)
— Crushed stone 0.28
�5�
Active Clayey Sand or
(Ka) Sandy Lean Clay 0.39
(4Q)H
(57H
-^ Conditiono applicable to the above values include:
w For active earth pnaoauna, wall must nobyba about baee, with hop |otens| movements
-- 0.002 H to 0.004 H. where H is wall height
a Uniform surcharge, where 8im surcharge pressure
a In-situ soil baokfi|| weight a maximum of about 125pof
-- a, Horizontal final graded backfill, compacted to at least 95 percent of the ASTM D 698
nnaxinnurn dry density
v, Loading from heavy compaction equipment not included
_
a No groundwater acting onwall
n yJo safety factor included
-- a Ignore passive pressure infrost zone
Baoh[i|| placed against below-grade structures should consist of granular material or low plasticity,
-- fine-grained material. Use of fine-grained material for wall backfi|| should be approved by the
designer. For the granular values to be va|id, the gnanu|arbaokƒi|| must extend out and up from
the base of the wo|| at an angle of at least 45 degrees from wartioo| for the active case. To
-- calculate the resistance 1osliding, a value ofO.32 can be used oathe ultimate ooefficientoffriction
~~ Responsive Resourceful aReliable 3
Geotechnical Engineering Report Addendum I
Dry Run Creek Interceptor * Waterloo, Iowa Irerracon
September 3, 2015 a Terracon Project No. 13155061.01
between a concrete footing and loose, clayey sand or sandy lean clay. An ultimate coefficient of
friction value of 0.45 may be used if at least 2 feet of crushed stone is provided immediately below
the concrete footing.
Construction equipment should not operate within a distance closer than the exposed height of
the walls to prevent lateral pressures greater than those provided.
We appreciate the opportunity to be of further service to you on this project. This Addendum
Report should be considered a part of our original Geotechnical Engineering Report (Project No.
13155061.01, dated August 11, 2015) prepared for this project, and is subject to the same
qualifications and conditions outlined in that report. Please contact us if you have any questions
concerning this Addendum Report or the Geotechnical Engineering Report.
Sincerely,
Terracon Consultants, Inc.
Nicholas u sey, P.E. ~ Jason P. Heinz_ E.
Project Geotechnical Engineer Iowa No. 18345
Iowa No. 22844
I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or
under my direct personal supervision and that I am a duly licensed
14
Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa.
son Patrick Heinz, P.E. Date
My license renewal date is December 31,2016,
Copies: PDF—Client
1 -File
Respransive v ResourceU a Reliable 4